Gupta - Gupta Civil Complete Solution

SSC-JE, RRB-JE, State SSSC-JE,
AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
Mechanics
tu
ec
(L
Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

re
ho
at
(01 – 10) ep
R
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Pressure:- SI unit is the pascal. (1 Pa = 1 N/m²)
M
TE
,D
Viscosity:- is defined as the property of a fluid which offers resistance to
r
re
the movement of one layer of fluid over another adjacent layer of the
tu
ec
fluid.
(L

Dynamic viscosity or absolute viscosity:- SI unit is Pascal second
re
ho
1. Kg/m.sec 2. N.s/m² 3. Pa.s 4. Poise = 0.1 pa.s
at
R
Kinematic viscosity:- Ratio of dynamic viscosity to the density of fluid.
ep
SI unit is the (m2/s) and CGS unit is the stokes.
e
ad
1 Stokes = 0.01 cm²/sec = 0.0001 m²/s

Pr
D. Surface tension:- SI unit is Newton/m and CGS unit is dyne/cm .

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer B
re
tu
ec
(L

Ideal fluid:- Which is incompressible and is having no viscosity.
re
ho
Ideal fluid is only an imaginary fluid and do not exists in nature.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Kinematic viscosity:- Ratio of dynamic viscosity to the density of fluid.
tu
ec
(L

SI unit is the (m2/s) and
re
ho
CGS unit is the stokes.
at
R
ep
1 Stokes = 0.01 cm²/sec = 0.0001 m²/s
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Fluids:-
,D
Viscosity of fluid depends on the cohesive force.
r
re
tu
Higher the temperature, lesser is the cohesion so viscosity ↓
ec
(L

re
Gases:-
ho
at
Higher the temperature, more energy possessed by the
R
ep
molecules and thus greater the momentum of colliding gas
e
ad
molecules.
Pr
Thus viscosity increases with increases in temperature for gases.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Newton’s Law of Viscosity:- States that the rate of shear strain in a fluid is
M
TE
directly proportional to applied shear stress.
,Dr
re
Newtonian Fluid:
tu
ec
(L

1. A fluid, whose viscosity does not
re
ho
change with the rate of deformation
at
R
or shear stain, is called Newtonian fluid.
eep
ad
2. A fluid which obeys Newton’s law of

Pr
viscosity is termed as Newtonian fluid.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Surface tension is caused by the effects of intermolecular forces
TE
at the interface.
,Dr
re
tu
Surface tension depends on:-
ec
(L

1. Liquids were molecules have large attractive intermolecular
re
ho
forces will have a large surface tension.
at
R
ep
e
2. In general, surface tension decreases when temperature

ad
Pr
increases because cohesive forces decrease with an increase of

molecular thermal activity.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
(Kilo = 10³, Mega = 106 , Giga= 109 ,
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Tera = 1012 , Peta = 1015, Exa = 1018)
(L

re
ho
at
1 Pascal = 1 N/m²
R
ep
e
ad
Given, 1 Kilo Pascal = ? = 10³ N/m²

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Thank You For Watching
Like, Comment, Share and Subscribe

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
Fluid
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Mechanics
(L

re
ho
at
(11 – 20) ep
R
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Cohesion means inter-molecular attraction between molecules.
Adhesion means attraction between the molecules of a liquid and the
P)
M
molecules of a solid boundary surface in contact with the liquid..
TE
Capillarity is defined as the phenomenon of rise or fall of a liquid surface
,D
in a small tube relative to the adjacent general level of liquid when the
r
re
tu
tube is held vertically in the liquid.
ec
Capillarity rise or fall is due to the combined effect of adhesion and
(L

re
cohesion
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Surface tension the attractive force exerted upon the surface
TE
,D
molecules of a liquid by the molecules beneath that.
r
re
Surface tension is caused by the force of cohesion at the free
tu
ec
surface.
(L

re
ho
at
Capillary action is defined as a phenomenon of rise of all of liquid
R
ep
surface in a small tube.
e
ad
Due to the pressure of cohesion and adhesion which cause the

Pr
liquid to work against gravity.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer D
re
tu
ec
(L

According to Pascal's law, the intensity of pressure at any point in
re
ho
a fluid at rest is the same in all directions.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
Mechanics
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(21 – 30) ep
R
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Bouyancy:- When a body is immersed in a fluid, an upward force is
TE
,D
exerted by the fluid on the body. This upward force is equal to the weight
r
re
of the fluid displaced by the body and is called the force of buoyancy or
tu
ec
simply buoyancy.
(L

re
ho
Centre of bouyancy:- It is defined as the point, through which the force of
at
R
buoyancy is supposed to act.
ep
As the force of buoyancy is a vertical force and is equal to the weight of
e
ad
the fluid displaced by the body, the centre of buoyancy will be the centre
Pr
of gravity of the fluid displaced.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
Meta-centre:- it is defined as the point about which a body starts
re
tu
oscillating when the body is tilted by a small angle
ec
(L

re
ho
Meta-centric height:- The distance between the meta-centre of a
at
R
floating body and the centre of gravity of the body is called
eep
metacentric height.
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Stability of a floating body is determined from the position of
TE
metacentre. In case of floating body, the weight of the body is
,Dr
equal to the weight of liquid displaced.
re
tu
ec
(L

1. Stable equilibrium:- Point M is above G
re
ho
at
R
2. Unstable equilibrium:- Point M is below G
eep
ad
Pr
3. Neutral equilibrium:- Point M is at the centre of gravity (G) of

the body.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The increase is meta-centric height reduces the time period of

re
oscillating of the body which is quite uncomfortable for
ho
at
passengers.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
Mechanics
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(31 – 40) ep
R
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
The centre of the
ec
(L
bottom will be

re
exposed and
ho
at
pressure will be
zero. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Laminar flow is defined as that type of
,D
flow in which the fluid particles move
r
re
along well-defined paths stream line
tu
ec
and all the stream-lines are straight
(L

and parallel.
re
ho
Turbulent flow is that type of flow in
at
R
which the fluid particles move in zig-
ep
zag way. Due to the movement of fluid
e
ad
particles in a zig-zag way, the eddies

Pr
formation takes place which are

responsible for high energy loss.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Steady flow :- is defined as that type of flow in which the fluid
(L

characteristics like velocity, pressure, density etc., at a point do not
re
ho
change with time.
at
R
Uniform flow:- is defined as that type of flow in which the velocity at any
ep
given time does not change with respect to space i.e. Length of direction
e
ad
of the flow.
Pr
Since the cross-section of pipe is not constant therefore the velocity

changes with change in position.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Compressible flow is that type of flow in which the density of the fluid change
P)
from point to point or in other words density is not constant for the fluid.
M
Incompressible flow is that type of flow in which the density is constant for the
TE
,D
fluid flow.
r
Two dimensional flow:- is that type of flow in which the velocity is a function of
re
tu
time and two rectangular space coordinates say x and y.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(41 – 50) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
बवंडर

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,D
Fluid
r
re
tu
ec
Mechanics
(L

re
ho
at
(51 – 60) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
The Hot Wire Anemometer is a device used for measuring the
TE
,D
velocity and direction of the fluid. This can be done by measuring
r
re
the heat loss of the wire which is placed in the fluid stream. The
tu
ec
wire is heated by electrical current.
(L

re
ho
at
The hot wire when placed in the stream of the fluid, in that case,
R
ep
the heat is transferred from wire to fluid, and hence the
e
ad
temperature of wire reduces.

Pr
The resistance of wire measures the flow rate of the fluid.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
Coefficient of contraction (Cc)
re
tu
= area of jet at vena-contracta / area of orifice
ec
(L

re
ho
The value of Cc varies from 0.61 to 0.69
at
R
ep
e
For a sharp-edged, or "ideal" circular orifice, Cc = 0.611

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer B
re
tu
ec
(L

Venturimeter and orifice meter:-
re
ho
Used for measuring the rate of a flow of a fluid flowing through a pipe.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(61 – 70) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(71 – 80) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(81 – 90) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(91 – 100) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Prandtl’s mixing length theory is a 2-Dimensional model
r
re
attempting to describe the momentum transfer within a
tu
ec
turbulent fluid flow.
(L

re
ho
at
Defined as the average distance that a small mass of fluid will
R
ep
travel before it exchanges its momentum with another mass of
e
ad
fluid.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(101 – 110) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

In pipe flow,
re
ho
Where boundary layer thickness is equal to radius of pipe.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(111 – 120) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(121 – 130) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(131 – 140) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(141 – 150) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(151 – 160) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
M2 and H2 :- Water depth decrease in the flow direction.
(L

re
ho
at
M3 and H3:- Water depth will increase in the flow direction.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Speed or celerity of an elementary wave in still water at depth y
,D
is
r
re
tu
√gy
ec
(L

re
ho
Therefore the velocity of the wave relative to flowing fluid is
at
R
√gy ± v
eep
ad
- wave travel upstream

Pr
+ wave travel downstream

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(161 – 170) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(171 – 180) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

viscous force the relative motion between the adjacent
re
ho
layers of a fluid in motion.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(181 – 190) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(191 – 200) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Two geometrically similar units having same velocity
(L

re
vector diagram as homologous.
ho
at
They will also have geometrically similar streamlines.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Priming of a centrifugal pump:- is defined as the operation in
tu
ec
which the suction pipe, casing of the pump and a portion of the
(L

re
delivery pipe up to the delivery valve is completely filled up from
ho
at
outside source with the liquid to be raised by the pump before
R
ep
starting the pump.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Specific speed of a centrifugal pump:- is defined as the
r
re
speed of a geometrically similar pump which would deliver
tu
ec
one cubic metre of liquid per second against a head of one
(L

re
metre.
ho
at
1. Centrifugal pump < 2000
R
ep
2. Mixed flow pump 4000-10000
e
ad
Pr
3. Axial flow pump 9000-15000

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Option A is true for Pump.
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Isentropic process:- is both adiabatic and reversible.
TE
,D
The work transfers of the system are frictionless, and there is no
r
re
transfer of heat.
tu
ec
(L

re
Adiabatic process:- If the change in density occurs with no heat
ho
at
exchange to and the gas, the process is called adiabatic.
R
ep
e
ad
Isothermal Process:- If the change in density occurs at constant

Pr
temperature, then the process is called isothermal.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
1. Rayleigh flow a diabatic (i.e. heat is exchanged with the
M
TE
neighborhood) flow through a constant area channel.
,D
Momentum and continuity equation is used to develop
r
re
tu
Rayleigh lines.
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Fanno flow is a viscous adiabatic flow (i.e. no heat is
at
R
exchanged with the neighborhood) through a constant
eep
ad
area channel.
Pr
Energy and continuity equation is used to develop Fanno

lines.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(201 – 210) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Mach Number (M) :- defined as the square root of the ratio of the
inertia force of flowing fluid to the elastic force.
P)
M
TE
M = √(Inertia force/Elastic force) = √(ρAV²/KA) = √(V²/(K/ρ)
,Dr
= V/C ( Where, √K/ρ = C )
re
tu
= Velocity of flow (V) / Velocity of sound wave (C)
ec
(L

re
ho
1. Sub-sonic flow (M < 1):- Velocity of flow is less than the
at
velocity of sound wave. R
eep
2. Sonic-flow (M = 1):- Velocity of flow is equal to the velocity of
ad
Pr
sound wave.
3. Super-soni flow (M > 1):- Velocity of flow is greater than the
velocity of sound wave.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
A flow in which density does not remain constant during
P)
flow, is called compressible flow.
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Mach Number:-
,D
defined as the square root of the ratio of
r
re
tu
the inertia force of flowing fluid to the elastic force.
ec
(L

re
ho
M = √(Inertia force/Elastic force)
at
= √(ρAV²/KA) R
eep
ad
= √(V²/(K/ρ)
Pr
= V/C ( Where, √K/ρ = C )

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Fluid is a substance that continually deforms (flows) under an
TE
applied shear stress, or external force.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Viscosity is the fluid property that determines the amount of
(L

resistance of the fluid to shear stress.
re
ho
It is the property of the fluid due to which the fluid offers
at
R
resistance to flow of one layer of the fluid over another adjacent
ep
e
layer.
ad
Pr
In a liquid, viscosity decreases with increase in temperature. In a

gas, viscosity increases with increase in temperature.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(211 – 220) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Ans stream-lined body is defined as that body whose
P)
surface coincides with the stream-lines, when the body is
M
TE
placed in a flow. In that case the separation of flow will
,D
take place only at the trailing edge or rearmost part of the
r
re
tu
body.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Dynamic viscosity:- is the measurement of the fluid's
P)
internal resistance to flow.
M
TE
Kinematic viscosity:- Ratio of dynamic viscosity to density.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(221 – 230) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Method of selecting repeating variables:-
M
TE
1. As far as possible, the dependent variable should not be selected as
,D
repeating variable.
r
re
2. The repeating variables should be choosen in a such way that one
tu
ec
variable contains geometric property (example:- Length, height etc.),
(L

other variable contains flow property (velocity, acceleration etc) and
re
ho
third variable contains fluid property (viscosity etc).
at
R
3. The repeating variables selected should not form a dimensionless
ep
group.
e
ad
4. The repeating variables together must have the same number of

Pr
fundamental dimensions.
5. No two repeating variables should have the same dimensions.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Specific speed of a turbine is defined as the speed of a
(L

re
geometrically similar turbine which produce a unit power
ho
at
when working under a unit head.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Hardy Cross Method:-
tu
ec
The algebraic sum of head losses round each loop must be
(L

re
zero. This means that in each loop, the loss of head due to
ho
at
flow in clockwise direction must be equal to the loss of
ep
R
head due to flow in anticlockwise direction.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(231 – 240) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Vortex flow:- is defined as the flow of a fluid along a curved path
,D
or the flow of a rotating mass of fluid.
r
re
1. Forced vortex flow:- is defined as that types of vortex flow, in
tu
ec
which some external torque is required to rotate the fluid mass.
(L

re
The fluid mass in this type of flow, rotates at constant angular
ho
at
velocity.
R
ep
2. Free vortex flow:- when no external torque is required to rotate
e
ad
the fluid mass. Thus the liquid in case of free vortex is rotating
Pr
due to the rotation which is imparted to the fluid previously.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
In a Sutro weir, the rate of flow for all flows above the
(L

re
rectangular base of width W and depth 'a' is proportional
ho
at
to the head above a datum a/3 above the crest.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(241 – 250) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Hydraulic Gradient Line:- The line which gives the sum of
TE
,D
pressure head (p/w) and datum head (z) of a flowing fluid
r
re
in a pipe with respect to some reference line.
tu
ec
(L

re
Total Energy Line:- The line which gives the sum of
ho
at
pressure head, datum head and kinetic head of a flowing
R
ep
fluid in a pipe with respect to some reference line.
e
ad
Pr
Both lines always falls in the direction of flow.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

AnswerB
P)
Gradually Varied Flow (G.V.F.):- If the depth of flow in a channel
M
changes gradually over a long length of the channel.
TE
,D
1. When dy/dx = 0, y is constant or depth of the above the
r
re
bottom of channel is constant. It means that free surface of
tu
ec
water is parallel to the bed of the channel.
(L

re
2. When dy/dx > 0 or dy/dx is +ve, it means the depth of water
ho
at
increases in the direction of flow. The profile of the water so
R
ep
obtained is called back water curve.
e
ad
3. When dy/dx < 0 or dy/dx is –ve, it means that the depth of

Pr
water decreases in the direction of flow. The profile of the water

so obtained is called drop down curve.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer D

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
A surge in an open channel is a sudden change of flow
ec
(L
depth i.e. abrupt increase or decrease in depth.

re
ho
An abrupt increase in flow depth is called a +ve surge
at
R
while a sudden decrease in depth is termed a –ve surge.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Streamlines are space curves drwan tangential to the
,D
velocity vector at all points in the flow field at any instant
r
re
tu
of time. Geometrically, they represent Eulerian approach
ec
(L

for flow velocity description. They cannot intersect each
re
ho
other.
at
R
Streak line is the locus of the temporary location of all
eep
ad
particles that have passed through a fixed point in the flow

Pr
field.
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(251 – 260) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Vortex flow:- is defined as the flow of a fluid along a curved path or the
P)
M
flow of a rotating mass of fluid.
TE
1. Forced vortex:- type of vortex flow, in which some external torque is
,D
required to rotate the fluid mass. The fluid mass in this type of flow,
r
re
tu
rotate at constant angular velocity.
ec
(L
Examples of forced vortex are:-

re
a. Flow of liquid inside the impeller of a centrifugal pump.
ho
at
b. Flow of water through the runner of a turbine.
R
2. Free vortex:- when no external torque is required to rotate the fluid
ep
e
mass.
ad
Pr
Examples of free vortex are:-

a. Flow of liquid through a hole provided at the bottom of a container.
b. Flow of liquid around a circular bend in pipe.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A & C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(261 – 270) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer D

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(271 – 280) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Pump:- hydraulic machines which convert the mechanical energy
M
TE
into hydraulic energy which is mainly in the form of pressure
,D
energy.
r
re
Centrifugal pump:- If the mechanical energy is converted into
tu
ec
hydraulic energy by means of centrifugal force acting on the
(L

re
liquid.
ho
at
Reciprocating pump:- If mechanical energy is converted into
R
ep
hydraulic energy by sucking the liquid into a cylinder in which a
e
ad
piston is reciprocating (moving backwards and forwards), which

Pr
exerts the thrust one the liquid and increases it’s hydraulic
energy.
In a reciprocating pump, at the beginning of suction stroke
P)
the pressure head will be (Hs+Has)+hfs below the
M
TE
atmospheric pressure.
,Dr
re
tu
However the head loss due to friction (hfs) is very small
ec
(L

compared to sum of suction head and head due to
re
ho
acceleration (Ha+Has).
at
R
ep
e
ad
Effect of acceleration pressure one reciprocating pump is

Pr
linear with maximum effect at the start of suction or

delivery stoke.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
Surge Tank
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Boundary layer thickness:- It is defined as the distance from the
,D
boundary of the solid body measured in the y-direction to the
r
re
tu
point, where the velocity of the fluid is approximately equal to
ec
(L
0.99 times the free stream velocity of the fluid.

re
ho
at
Displacement thickness:- It is defined as the distance, measured
R
ep
perpendicular to the boundary of the solid body, by which the
e
ad
boundary should be displaced to compensate for the reduction in

Pr
flow rate one account of boundary layer formation.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(281 – 290) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
The specific speed value for a turbine is the speed of a
P)
geometrically similar turbine which would produce unit
M
TE
power (one kilowatt) under unit head (one meter).
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
The constant temperature hot-wire anemometer may be
ec
(L

conveniently used for velocity measurement even when
re
ho
the velocity fluctuations are large. Thus they can measure
at
turbulence also. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
Fluid
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Mechanics
ec
(L

re
ho
at
(291 – 300) R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, AE(PSC), RRB etc.
P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(01 to 15)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
Q. 1) Which of the following methods of applying water
M
TE
may be used on rolling land
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Boarder flooding
(L

re
B. Check flooding
ho
at
C. Furrow flooding
R
ep
D. Free flooding
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
Boarder flooding: - The land is divided into a number of strips,
ec
(L
separated by low levees called boardes.

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 2) If the electrical conductivity of water is in between
250 to 750 micro mhos/cm at 25 °C, then it is classified as
P)
M
TE
A. Low salinity water
,Dr
B. Medium salinity water
re
tu
ec
C. High salinity water
(L

re
D. Very high salinity water
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 4) The value of sodium absorption ratio for high sodium
M
TE
water lies between
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0 to 10
(L

re
B. 10 to 18
ho
at
C. 18 to 26
R
ep
D. 26 to 34
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 5) Optimum depth of kor watering for rice is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 135 mm
ec
(L
B. 165 mm

re
ho
C. 190 mm
at
D. 215 mm R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
tu
The first watering is known as kor watering and the depth
ec
(L
applied is known as kor depth.

re
ho
at
R
The kor depth for rice is 190 mm.
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 6) Irrigation water having the concentration of Na++,
P)
M
Ca++ and Mg++ as 20, 3 and 1 milli equivalent per litre
TE
,D
respectively will be classified as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Low sodium water

re
ho
B. Medium sodium water
at
C. High sodium water R
eep
D. Very high sodium water

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 7) The relation between duty D in hectares/cumec,
P)
M
depth of water Δ in metres and base period B in days is
TE
,D
given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Δ = 1.98B/D

re
ho
B. Δ = 8.64B/D
at
C. Δ = 5.68B/D R
eep
D. Δ = 8.64D/B
ad
Pr
Answer B
Duty (D) : - duty is defined as the area of land expressed in
P)
M
hectares that can be irrigated with unit discharge, that is, 1
TE
,D
cumec flowing throughout the base period, expressed in days.
r
re
tu
ec
Delta (Δ) : - Delta is the total depth of water required by a crop
(L

re
during entire period the crop is in the field.
ho
at
R
Base Period (B) : - when irrigation water is first issued for
eep
ad
preparation of the ground for planting the crop to, its last
Pr
watering before harvesting.

If we take a field of area D hectares, water supplied to the field
corresponding to the water depth Δ metres will be
P)
M
= Δ × D hectare-metres
TE
,D
= D × Δ × 10⁴ m³.............. (1)
r
re
Again for the same field of D hectares, one cumec of water is
tu
ec
required to flow during the entire base period. Hence water
(L

re
supplied to this field
ho
= 1 × ( B × × 24 × 60 × 60) m³.............. (2)
at
R
eep
ad
equating equations (1) and (2), we get

Pr
D Δ = 8.64 B
P)
M
Q. 8) The duty is largest
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. At the head of water course
ec
(L
B. On the field

re
ho
C. At the head of main canal
at
D. Same at all places R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 9) The “outlet discharge factor” is the duty at the head
M
TE
of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Main canal
(L

re
B. Branch canal
ho
at
C. Watercourse
R
ep
D. Distributory
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 10) The kor depth for rice is 190 mm and kor periods is
M
TE
14 days. The outlet factor for this will be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 637 hectares/m³/sec
(L

re
B. 837 hectares/m³/sec
ho
at
C. 972 hectares/m³/sec
R
ep
D. 1172 hectares/m³/sec
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 11) For supplying water to Rabi crop, kharif crop and
P)
M
sugarcane, the channel is designed for a capacity equal to
TE
,D
the greater of water requirement of
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Rabi or kharif

re
ho
B. Rabi and kharif or sugarcane
at
R
C. Rabi and sugarcane or kharif and sugarcane
eep
D. Rabi or kharif or sugarcane

ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 12) The ratio of the quantity of water stored in the root
P)
M
zone of the crops to the quantity of water actually
TE
,D
delivered in the field is known as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Water conveyance efficiency

re
ho
B. Water application efficiency
at
C. Water use efficiency R
eep
D. None of the above

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
In general, efficiency is the ratio of the water output to input.
TE
,Dr
1. Water conveyance efficiency: - Ratio of Water delivered to
re
tu
farm or irrigation plot to water supplied from river or reservoir.
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Water application efficiency: - Ratio of water stored in root
at
R
zone to water delivered to the farm.
eep
ad
Pr
3. Water use efficiency: - Ratio of water used consumptively to

water delivered.
P)
Q. 13) The water utilizable by plants is available in soils
M
TE
mainly in the form of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Gravity water
(L

re
B. Capillary water
ho
at
C. Hydroscopic water
R
ep
D. Chemical water
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Water present in the soil may classified
P)
M
1. Hygroscopic water: - When an oven dried sample is kept
TE
,D
open in the atmosphere, it absorbs some amount of water
r
re
tu
from the atmosphere. This is known as hygroscopic water
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Capillary water: - Excess of hygroscopic water which
at
R
exists in the pore space of soil by molecular attraction.
eep
ad
Pr
3. Gravity water: - Excess of hygroscopic and capillary

water which will move out of soil.
Q. 14) The amount of irrigation water required to meet the
P)
M
evapotranspiration needs of the crop during its full growth
TE
,D
is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Effective rainfall

re
ho
B. Consumptive use
at
R
C. Consumptive to irrigation requirement
eep
D. Net irrigation requirement

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Evapotranspiration rate is the amount of water that is lost to the
r
re
atmosphere through the leaves of the plant, as well as the soil
tu
ec
surface.
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 15) With the increase in the quantity of water supplied,
P)
M
the yield of most crops
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Increases continuously
ec
(L
B. Decreases continuously

re
ho
C. Increases upto a certain limit and then becomes
at
constant R
eep
D. Increases upto a certain limit and then decreases

ad
Pr
Answer D
The plant growth may be retarded if the soil moisture is either
P)
deficient or excessive.
M
TE
,D
1. If the soil moisture is only slightly more than the wilting
r
re
coefficient, the plant must extend extra energy to obtain it, and
tu
ec
the plant will not grow healthy
(L

re
# Wilting coefficient- That water content at which plants no
ho
at
longer extract sufficient water from the soil for its growth.
R
ep
e
ad
2. Similarly, excessive flooding fills the soil pores with water, thus
Pr
driving out air. Since air is essential to satisfactory plant growth,

excessive water supply retard plant growth.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Objective Questions
P)
M
TE
(16 to 30)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Irrigation
re
ho
at
R
&
ep
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 16) Hydrograph is the graphical representation of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Runoff and time
ec
(L
B. Surface runoff and time

re
ho
C. Ground waterflow and time
at
D. Rainfall and time R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Runoff is that portion of precipitation that is not evaporated. Which
P)
M
ultimately runs to the ocean through surface or sub surface streams.
TE
,D
1. Surface runoff:- Water flows to land and is first to reach streams and
r
re
tu
rivers, which ultimately discharge the water to the sea.
ec
(L

re
2. Interflow or sub surface runoff: - A portion of precipitation infiltrates
ho
at
into surface soil and depending upon the geology of the basin runs as sub
R
surface runoff and reaches the streams and rivers.
ep
e
ad
Pr
3. Ground water flow or base flow: - It is that portion of precipitation,

which after infiltration, percolates down and join the ground water
Reservoir which is ultimately connected to the ocean.
P)
M
Q. 17) Infiltration rate is always
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. More than the infiltration capacity
ec
(L
B. Less than the infiltration capacity

re
ho
C. Equal to or less than the infiltration capacity
at
R
D. Equal to or more than the infiltration capacity
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Infiltration: - Water moving through a soil surface.
,Dr
re
tu
Infiltration rate: - That rate at which infiltration occurs, measured
ec
(L
in mm/hour or a similar unit

re
ho
at
Infiltration capacity: -Maximum rate at which infiltration will
ep
R
occur.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 18) The depth of water required to bring the soil
P)
M
moisture content of given soil upto it’s field capacity is
TE
,D
called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Hydroscopic water

re
ho
B. Equivalent moisture
at
R
C. Soil moisture deficiency
eep
D. Pellicular water
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Soil moisture deficiency:-
,Dr
re
The difference between the
tu
ec
amount of water actually in the soil and the amount of
(L

re
water that the soil can hold.
ho
at
R
ep
The amount of water the soil can hold is generally called
e
ad
field capacity.
Pr
P)
M
Q. 19) infiltration capacity
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Is a constant factor
ec
(L
B. Changes with time

re
ho
C. Changes with location
at
R
D. Changes with both time and location
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 20) Infiltration is the
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Movement of water through the soil
ec
(L
B. Absorption of water by soil surface

re
ho
C. Both A and B
at
D. None of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer A
M
TE
,Dr
Permeability
re
tu
ec
The ability of the ground surface to absorb water.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 21) If the intensity of rainfall is more than the
M
TE
infiltration capacity of soil, then the infiltration rate will be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to rate of rainfall
(L

re
B. Equal to infiltration capacity
ho
at
C. More than rate of rainfall
R
ep
D. More than infiltration capacity
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 22) Cyclonic precipitation is caused by lifting of an air
M
TE
mass due to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Pressure difference
(L

re
B. Temperature difference
ho
at
C. Natural topographical barriers
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Precipitation is general term for all forms of moisture emanating from the
P)
clouds and falling to the ground.
M
TE
,D
Types of precipitation
r
re
tu
ec
1. Cyclonic precipitation: - lifting of air masses converging into low
(L

Pressure area or cyclone.
re
ho
at
R
2. Convective precipitation: - Temperature difference may result from
ep
unequal heating at the surface, unequal cooling at the top of the air layer.
e
ad
Pr
3. Orographic precipitation: - Due to natural topographical barriers such

as mountains.
P)
M
Q. 23) Which of the following is a non-recording raingauge
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Tipping bucket type raingauge
ec
(L
B. Simon’s raingauge

re
ho
C. Steven’s weighing type raingauge
at
R
D. Floating type raingauge
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Raingauge:- A device for collecting and measuring the amount of
TE
rain which falls.
,Dr
re
tu
1. Non recording raingauge: -
ec
(L

a) Simon’s raingauge
re
ho
at
2. Recording raingauge: - R
eep
a) Weighing bucket raingauge

ad
Pr
b) Tipping bucket raingauge

c) Float type raingauge
P)
M
Q. 24) A raingauge should be preferably be fixed
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Near the building
ec
(L
B. Under the tree

re
ho
C. In an open space
at
D. In a closed space R
e ep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Selection the site for a raingauge station.
P)
M
TE
1. The site where a raingauge is setup should be an open place.
,Dr
re
2. Distance between the raingauge and nearest object should be at least
tu
ec
twice the height of the object.
(L

re
ho
3. The raingauge should never be situated on the side or top of a hill if the
at
R
suitable site on the level ground can be found.
ep
e
ad
4. In The Hills situated where wind does not cause eddies.

Pr
5. Protect the gauge from cattle etc.

Q. 25) If allowable percentage error in the estimate of
P)
M
basic rainfall is E and coefficient of variation of rainfall is C,
TE
,D
then the optimum number of raingauge is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Cv/E

re
ho
B. √(Cv/E)
at
C. (Cv/E)² R
eep
D. (Cv/E)^(3/2)
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 26) Which of the following types of raingauge is used
M
TE
for measuring rain in remote hilly inaccessible areas
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Tipping bucket type
(L

re
B. Weighing type
ho
at
C. Floating type
R
ep
D. Simon’s raingauge
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 27) Rate of evaporation from a water surface increases if
i) difference of vapour pressure between water and air is
P)
M
increased
TE
,D
ii) velocity of wind is decreased
r
re
iii) concentration of soluble solids in water is decreased
tu
ec
(L

re
The correct answer is
ho
A. (i) and (ii)
at
B. (i) and (iii) R
eep
ad
C. (ii) and (iii)

Pr
D. (i), (ii) and (iii)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Factors affecting the evaporation are
r
re
tu
ec
(L
1. Temperature: - ↑

re
ho
2. Surface area: - ↑
at
3. Density: - ↓ R
eep
4. Wind velocity: - ↑
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 28) A 70% index of wetness means
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Rain excess of 30%
ec
(L
B. Rain deficiency of 30%

re
ho
C. Rain deficiency of 70%
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 29) Under the same conditions, which of the following
P)
M
shapes of water surface will give the highest rate of
TE
,D
evaporation
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Flat water surface

re
ho
B. Convex water surface
at
C. Concave water surface R
ep
e
D. Independent of shape of water surface

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 30) Assertion A: To estimate the rainfall over a catchment, the
number of raingauge required per unit area is large for hilly areas
P)
M
TE
,D
Reason R: Rainfall gradient system
r
re
tu
ec
Select your correct answer according to the coding system given
(L

re
below
ho
A. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
at
R
B. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A
ep
e
ad
C. A is true but R is false

Pr
D. A is false but R is true

Answer A
P)
M
TE
The broad guide lines set up for the required network of
,Dr
rain-gauge stations as per World Meteorological
re
tu
ec
Organisation (WMO) is as follows:
(L

re
ho
at
For plain areas of the basin 1 rain-gauge for every 500 km2.
R
ep
For hilly areas of the basin: 1 rain-gauge for every 150 km2.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(166 to 180)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 166) To estimate the magnitude of flood with a return
period of T years, Gumbel’s distribution method requires the
P)
following data pertaining to annual flood series
M
TE
i) Mean value
,D
ii) Standard deviation
r
re
tu
iii) Length of record
ec
(L
iv) Coefficient of skew

re
ho
at
R
ep
A. (i) and (ii)
e
ad
B. (i), (ii) and (iii)

Pr
C. (i), (ii) and (iv)

D. (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 167) For an annual flood series arranged in descending
M
TE
order of magnitude, the return for a magnitude listed at
,Dr
position period m in a total data N is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. N/(m+1)
ho
at
B. m/(N+1)
R
ep
C. m/N
e
ad
D. (N+1)/m
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
The values of the annual maximum flood from a given catchment
TE
,D
area for large number of successive years constitute a
r
re
hydrological data series called the annual series.
tu
ec
The data are then arranged in decreasing order of magnitude and
(L

re
the probability (P) of each being equal to or exceeded is
ho
calculated by the plotting position formula
at
R
P = m/(N+1)
ep
e
ad
Where,
Pr
m = Order number of event

N = Total number of events in the data
P)
Q. 168) If the risk of a flood occurring in the next 10 years
M
TE
is accepted to 10%, then the return period for design
,Dr
should be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1 + (0.9)0.10
ho
at
B. 1 – (0.9)0.10
R
ep
C. 1/(1 – 0.90.10)
e
ad
D. 1/(1 + 0.90.10)
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 169) Partial duration series is mostly used for
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Rainfall analysis
(L

re
B. Flood analysis
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Because conditions of independency of events are easy to

re
ho
establish in rainfall analysis.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 170) If storage, inflow rate and outflow rate are
denoted by S, I and Q respectively, then the values of S in
P)
M
Muskingham method of flood routing is given by the
TE
,D
expression
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. K(XI – XQ + Q)

re
ho
B. K(XI + XQ – Q)
at
C. K(-XI + XQ + I) R
eep
D. KX(I – XQ – Q)
ad
Pr
Where K and X are coefficients.

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 171) Which of the following are Saint Venant’s equations for
unsteady open-channel flow?
P)
M
i) Continuity equation
TE
,D
ii) Momentum equation
r
re
iii) Energy equation
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
ad
B. (i) and (ii)

Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
1. Continuity equation, outflow + change in storage = inflow
ec
(L

re
ho
2. The momentum equation is derived from Newton’s second
at
R
law, Rate of change of momentum = net force
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 172) In case of channel routing, the storage is a function
,Dr
re
of
tu
ec
A. Inflow discharge only
(L

re
B. Outflow discharge only
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In reservoir routing, storage is a function of outflow discharge

re
ho
only.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 173) Muskingham method of flood routing is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Reservoir routing method
(L

re
B. Channel routing method
ho
at
C. Hydraulic method of flood routing
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 174) Which of the following equations are used in
hydrological flood routing method
P)
M
TE
,D
ii) Equation of motion
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
B. (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In hydraulic method of flood routing, both the equation of

re
ho
motion and continuity equation are used.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 175) In linear reservoir, storage varies linearly with
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Time
(L

re
B. Inflow rate
ho
at
C. Outflow rate
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 176) The dimensions of storage coefficient is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. M0 L¹ T-1
(L

re
B. M0 L² T-1
ho
at
C. M0 L3 T -2
R
ep
D. Dimensionless
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Storage coefficient (storativity):- The volume of water given up
ec
(L

per unit horizontal area of an aquifer and per unit drop of the
re
ho
water-table. It is a dimensionless ratio and always greater than 0
at
and less than unity. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 177) The porosity of a sand sample is 50%. The specific
TE
,D
yield of an aquifer for containing this sand will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Equal to 50%

re
ho
B. Less than 50%
at
C. More than 50% R
eep

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Specific yield is defined as the volume of water released from
ec
(L

groundwater storage per unit surface area of aquifer per unit
re
ho
decline of the water table.
at
R
Thus, specific yield, which is sometimes called effective porosity,
ep
is less than the total porosity.

e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 178) Discharge per unit drawdown at a well is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Specific storage
(L

re
B. Specific yield
ho
at
C. Specific capacity
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
A. Specific storage:- The specific storage is the amount of water that a portion of
TE
an aquifer releases from storage
,Dr
re
tu
B. Specific Yield of Wells:- rate of water percolation in the well or yield of a well in
ec
m3/hr under a head of one metre is called the specific yield of the well.
(L

re
ho
C. Specific capacity:- is a quantity that which a water well can produce per unit of
at
drawdown. R
ep
A well specific capacity equals the discharge rate (in gpm) divided by the water
e
ad
level drawdown (in feet).

Pr
For example a well with a pumping rate of 200gpm (Gallons per minute) with a
10 foot drawdown has aspecific capacity of 20gpm/ft of drawdown.
P)
Q. 179) Permeability of a soil sample a temperature of
M
TE
20°C is 0.5 mm/sec. If the temperature is decreased to
,Dr
15°C , the permeability of the same soil sample is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.5 mm/sec
ho
at
B. Less than 0.5 mm/sec
R
ep
C. More than 0.5 mm/sec
e
ad

Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
The property of the soil that permits the flow of water through
r
re
its voids with ease is known as permeability.
tu
ec
(L

re
An decrease in temperature of the permeant (pore fluid)
ho
at
decreases the density marginally and increase the viscosity
R
ep
significantly and vice versa.
e
ad
Thus, decrease in temperature of the pore fluid

Pr
decreases the permeability of the soil.

P)
Q. 180) Due to decrease in pressure, the water level in a
M
TE
well penetrating a confined aquifer will
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Decrease
(L

re
B. Increase
ho
at
C. Note change
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Aquifer:- is an saturated geological formation, underground layer of
,D
water-bearing permeable and porous or unconsolidated materials
r
re
tu
(gravel, sand, or silt) from which groundwater can be extracted using a
ec
water well.
(L

re
ho
at
In un-confined aquifer cone of depression represent the drawdown water
R
table but in confined aquifer it represent the pressure drop (change in
ep
e
piezometric head) around the well.

ad
Pr
Drop in water table from previous static water table is termed as

drawdown depth or simply drawdown.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(46 to 60)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
Q. 46) The relation between Probability (P) and recurrence
M
TE
interval (T) is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. PT = 1
(L

re
B. PT² = 1
ho
at
C. P/T = 1
R
ep
D. P/T² = 1
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Return period/recurrence interval/repeat interval:-
M
TE
is an average time or an estimated average time between events
,D
such as earthquakes, floods, landslides, or a river discharge flows
r
re
tu
to occur.
ec
(L

re
ho
100-year flood" to mean a "flood with a 1% probability of
at
R
occurring in any given year."
ep
e
ad
The probability (P) of an event with recurrence interval T is

Pr
P = 1/T
P)
M
Q. 47) Dimension of coefficient of transmissibility are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. M°L°T°
ec
(L
B. M°L¹T-1

re
ho
C. M0L²T-1
at
D. M°L³T-1 R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
The coefficient of transmissibility (T) equals to the field
r
re
tu
coefficient of permeability (k) multiplied by the aquifer
ec
(L
thickness (B)

re
ho
T = B.k
at
T = m.m/SecR
ep
T = M0L²T-1
e
ad
Pr
Q. 48) If d is the depth of the aquifer through which water
P)
M
is flowing, then the relationship between permeability k
TE
,D
and transmissibility T is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. T = kd

re
ho
B. T = k/d
at
C. T = √kd R
eep
D. k = √Td
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 49) An artesian aquifer is the one where
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Water surface under the ground is at atmospheric
r
re
tu
pressure
ec
(L
B. Water is under pressure between two impervious strata

re
ho
C. Water table serves surface as upper surface of zone of
at
saturation R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Aquifer:- is an underground layer of permeable rock ( sand, gravel etc)
M
TE
which can contain or transmit groundwater.
,Dr
re
1. Unconfined aquifer (water table/free/phreatic/non-artesian aquifer):-
tu
ec
Are those into which water seeps from the ground surface directly above
(L

the aquifer.
re
ho
at
R
2. Confined aquifers or artesian aquifer: -
ep
Are those in which an impermeable layer exists that prevents water from
e
ad
seeping into the aquifer from the ground surface located directly above.
Pr
Instead, water seeps into confined aquifers from farther away where the
impermeable layer doesn't exist.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 50) A deep well
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Is always deeper than a shallow well
ec
(L
B. Has more discharge than a shallow well

re
ho
C. Is weaker structurally than a shallow well
at
D. Both A and B R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 51) A multipurpose Reservoir is the one which is
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Designed for one purpose but serves more than one
tu
ec
purpose
(L

re
B. Planned and constructed to serve various purposes
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
The term multipurpose reservoir includes all reservoirs actually designed
P)
and operated to serve more than one function.
M
TE
,D
There can be several purposes for which a reservoir may be made .If
r
re
some of these purpose are combined there will be more effective
tu
ec
utilization of water and economical construction of a reservoir.
(L

re
Preferable combinations for a multipurpose reservoir are:
ho
1. Reservoir for Irrigation and Power
at
R
2. Reservoir for Irrigation, Power and Navigation.
ep
e
3. Reservoir for Irrigation, Power and Water supply.

ad
Pr
4. Reservoir for Recreation, Fisheries and Wild life.

5. Reservoir for Flood control and water supply.
6. Reservoir for Power and Water supply.
P)
Q. 52) The useful storage is the volume of water stored in
M
TE
the reservoir between
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Minimum pool level and maximum pool level
(L

re
B. Minimum pool level and normal pool level
ho
at
C. Normal pool level and maximum pool level
R
ep
D. River bed and minimum pool level
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 53) The water stored in the reservoir below the
M
TE
minimum pool level is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Useful storage
(L

re
B. Dead storage
ho
at
C. Valley storage
R
ep
D. Surcharge storage
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Dead or inactive storage refers to water in a reservoir that cannot
(L

re
be drained by gravity through a dam's outlet. It can only be
ho
at
pumped out.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 54) For a flood control reservoir, the effective storage is
M
TE
equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Useful storage – Valley storage
(L

re
B. Useful storage + surcharge storage
ho
at
C. Useful storage + surcharge storage + Valley storage
R
ep
D. Useful storage + surcharge storage – Valley storage
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Valley storage:- The volume of water held by the natural river
(L

re
channel in its valley up to the top of its banks before the
ho
at
construction of a reservoir is called the valley storage.
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 55) Trap efficiency of reservoir is a function of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Capacity/inflow ratio
ec
(L
B. Capacity/outflow ratio

re
ho
C. Outflow/inflow ratio
at
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Trap efficiency:- Measure of reservoir sedimentation.
tu
ec
(L

re
Trap efficiency is a function of the ratio of reservoir capacity to
ho
at
total inflow.
R
ep
Efficiency = f(capacity/inflow)
e
ad
Pr
Q. 56) The total capacity of reservoir is 25 million cubic
metres and dead storage is 5 million cubic metre. If the
P)
M
average volume of sediment deposition is 0.10 million
TE
,D
cubic metre per year, then the usefulness of the reservoir
r
re
tu
will start reducing after
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 50 year
at
B. 150 year R
eep
C. 200 year
ad
Pr
D. 250 year
Answer A
P)
M
usefulness of the reservoir will start reducing after dead storage
TE
,D
completely fill with sediment.
r
re
tu
ec
Given,
(L

re
Dead storage = 5 million cubic metre
ho
at
Average volume of sediment deposition = 0.10 million cubic
R
ep
metre per year
e
ad
Pr
→ 5/0.10 = 50 year
Q. 57) The forces, which are considered for the analysis of an
elementary profile of gravity dam under empty reservoir
condition, are
P)
M
i) Water pressure
TE
,D
ii) Self weight
r
re
iii) Uplift
tu
ec
iv) Pressure due to earthquake
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (ii) R
eep
ad

Pr

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Where,
ec
P = water pressure
(L

re
W = weight of the dam
ho
U = uplift pressure
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 58) When the upstream face of gravity dam is vertical,
then the intensity of water pressure at the water surface
P)
and at the base respectively will be
M
TE
,Dr
A. 0 and wH²/2
re
tu
ec
B. wH²/2 and wH²/3
(L

re
C. wH and 0
ho
at
D. 0 and wH
R
e ep
ad
Where w is unit weight of water and H is the depth of

Pr
water
Answer D
P)
Water pressure:-
M
TE
This is the major
,D
external force acting on a dam.
r
re
tu
When the upstream face of the dam
ec
(L

is vertical, the water pressure acts
re
ho
horizontally. The intensity of pressure
at
R
varies is triangularly with a zero
ep
intensity at the water surface, to a
e
ad
Pr
value wh at any depth h below water

surface.
Q. 59) The uplift pressure on a dam can be controlled by
i) Constructing cutoff under upstream face
P)
M
ii) Constructing drainage channels between the dam and its
TE
,D
Foundation
r
re
iii) By pressure grouting in foundation
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Only (i)
at
B. Both (i) and (ii) R
eep
ad
C. Both (i) and (iii)

Pr

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
The uplift pressure is defined as the upward pressure of water as
r
re
it flows or seeps through the body of the dam or it’s foundation.
tu
ec
(L

re
Uplift pressure is generally reduced by
ho
1. constructing drainage pipes between dam and its foundation
at
R
2. constructing cut off walls under the upstream face
eep
ad
3. pressure grouting the dam foundation.

Pr
Q. 60) The uplift pressure on the face of a drainage gallery
P)
M
in a dam is taken as
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Hydrostatic pressure at toe
ec
(L
B. Average of hydrostatic pressure toe and heel

re
ho
C. Two third of hydrostatic pressure at toe plus one third of
at
R
hydrostatic pressure at heel
ep
e

ad
Pr
Answer C
The uplift pressure is defined as the upward pressure of water as it flows
P)
M
or seeps through the body of the dam or it’s foundation.
TE
The uplift pressure intensities equal to hydrostatic pressure of water at
,D
toe and heel joined by straight line in between. (Elementary profile)
r
re
tu
ec
Sometimes drainage galleries are also provided in the body of the dam
(L

re
which releases the uplift pressure built up under it.
ho
The magnitude of the uplift pressure at the face of gallery is equal to the
at
R
hydrostatic pressure at the toe plus 1/3rd the difference of the hydrostatic
eep
pressure at the heel and toe.

ad
Pr
Uplift pressure at heel = wH

Uplift pressure at toe = wH’
Uplift pressure at gallery = wH’ + ⅓w(H-H’)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(61 to 75)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 61) Horizontal acceleration due to earthquake results in
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Hydrodynamic pressure
ec
(L
B. Inertia force into the body of the dam

re
ho
C. Both A and B
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Earthquake wave may travel in any direction. The general
P)
M
direction of acceleration is horizontal and vertical.
TE
,Dr
re
1. Effect of horizontal acceleration:- causes two forces.
tu
ec
(L

re
(i) Inertia force in the body of the dam:-
ho
The inertia force acts in a direction opposite to the acceleration
at
R
imparted by earthquake forces and is equal to the product of the
eep
ad
mass of the dam and the acceleration.

Pr
Inertia force = mass × acceleration

(ii) Hydrodynamic pressure of water:-
P)
The horizontal acceleration of the dam and foundation towards the
M
TE
reservoir causes a momentary increase in the water pressure since the
,D
water resists the movement owing to its inertia.
r
re
If the hydrodynamic pressure variation is assumed to be parabolic, the
tu
ec
increase in water pressure is given by,
(L

re
p= 0.555 αwH²
ho
and act at a height of (4H/3π) above the base.
at
R
ep
2. Effect of vertical acceleration:-
e
ad
Due to vertical acceleration, a vertical inertia force is exerted on the dam,

Pr
in the direction opposite to that of the acceleration.

Q. 62) Hydrodynamic pressure due to earthquake acts at a
P)
height of
M
TE
,Dr
A. 3H/4π above the base
re
tu
ec
B. 3H/4π below the water surface
(L

re
C. 4H/3π above the base
ho
at
D. 4H/3π below the water surface
R
eep
ad
Where H is the depth of water

Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 63) The major resisting force in a gravity dam is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Water pressure
ec
(L
B. Wave pressure

re
ho
C. Self-weight of dam
at
D. Uplift pressure R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 64) Total force due to wave action on gravity dam acts
M
TE
at a height of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. hw/2 above the reservoir surface
(L

re
B. 5hw/4 above the reservoir surface
ho
at
C. 3hw/8 above the reservoir surface
R
ep
D. 2hw/3 above the reservoir surface
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 65) When the reservoir is full, the maximum
M
TE
compressive force in a gravity dam is produced
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. At the toe
(L

re
B. At the heel
ho
at
C. Within the middle third of base
R
ep
D. At centre of base
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 66) The maximum permissible eccentricity for no
M
TE
tension at the base of a gravity dam is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. B/2
(L

re
B. B/3
ho
at
C. B/4
R
ep
D. B/6
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 67) Presence of tail water in a gravity dam
P)
i) Increases the principal stress
M
TE
ii) Decreases the principal stress
,D
iii) Increases the shear stress
r
re
tu
iv) Decreases the shear stress
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (iii) ep
R
B. (i) and (iv)
e
ad
C. (ii) and (iii)

Pr
D. (ii) and (iv)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 68) Neglecting the effect due to earthquake forces and tail
P)
water pressure, the principal stress in a gravity dam is given by
M
TE
,D
A. Pv
r
re
tu
B. Pv sec²θ
ec
(L
C. Pv tan²θ

re
ho
D. Pv tanθ
at
R
ep
where Pv is vertical direct stress and θ is angle of downstream
e
ad
face of dam with the vertical.

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 69) The elementary profile of a dam is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. A rectangle
ec
(L
B. A trapezoidal

re
ho
C. An equilateral triangle
at
D. R
A right angled triangle
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
The elementary profile of
,Dr
a dam, subjected only to the
re
tu
external water pressure on
ec
(L
the upstream side, will be

re
right angled triangle, having
ho
at
zero width at the water level
R
ep
and a base width (B) at
e
ad
bottom, i.e.. the point where

Pr
the maximum hydrostatic

water pressure acts.
Q. 70) In the empty condition of reservoir and with the
P)
elementary profile of a dam, the vertical stress at heel and toe
M
TE
respectively are given by
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0 and W/2B
ec
(L
B. W/2B and 0

re
ho
C. 2W/B and 0
at
D. 0 and 2W/B ep
R
e
ad
Where B is base width and W is self weight of unit length of dam

Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 71) Neglecting uplift pressure, the base width of an
P)
elementary profile of a gravity dam shall be taken as
M
TE
,D
A. H/√G
r
re
tu
B. H/μG
ec
(L
C. Lesser of H/√G and H/μG

re
ho
D. Greater of H/√G and H/μG
at
R
ep
Where H is depth of water, G is specific gravity of material and μ
e
ad
is coefficient of friction.
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 72) The maximum possible height of a safe dam having an
elementary profile is
P)
M
TE
,D
A. f / w √(G+1)
r
re
B. f / w √G
tu
ec
C. f / w (G+1)
(L

re
D. f / w √(G-1)
ho
at
R
Where f = allowable stress of dam material
eep
ad
G = specific gravity of dam material

Pr
w = unit weight of water

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 73) The focus of base parabola for a dam having a
horizontal drainage filter is at a distance of
P)
M
TE
,D
A. B/2 from toe
r
re
tu
B. (B-b) from toe
ec
(L
C. b from toe

re
ho
D. b/2 from toe
at
R
eep
Where B is base width of dam and b is width of horizontal

ad
Pr
drainage filter.
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 74) By providing a top width for roadway and freeboard
P)
M
in the elementary profile of a gravity dam, the resultant
TE
,D
force for full reservoir condition will
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Shift towards the heel

re
ho
B. Shift towards the toe
at
C. Not shift at all R
eep

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Elementary profile of a given dam is only theoretical profile. Certain
M
TE
changes have to be made in this profile in order to cater practical needs.
,D
These needs are:
r
re
(i) Providing a top width for roadway construction.
tu
ec
(ii) Providing a free board over top water surface.
(L

re
ho
These additions of two provisions will cause the resultant force to shift
at
towards heel. R
eep
ad
Pr
In order to avoid tension, some masonry or concrete will have to be

added on upstream side.
Q. 75) For wave action in dams, the maximum height of
P)
freeboard is generally taken to be equal to
M
TE
,Dr
A. 0.5hw
re
tu
ec
B. 0.75hw
(L

re
C. 1.25hw
ho
at
D. 1.50hw
R
ep
e
ad
Where hw is height of wave.

Pr
P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Freeboard is the margin provided between the top of dam and
tu
ec
HFL in the reservoir to prevent the splashing of the waves over
(L

re
the non-overflow section.
ho
at
R
ep
The freeboard usually provided is 1.50hw and not less than 0.9m
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(76 to 90)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 76) As compared to gravity dams, earthen dams
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Are costlier
ec
(L
B. Are less susceptible to failure

re
ho
C. Require sound rock foundations
at
R
D. Require less skilled labour
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Gravity dams:
TE
It is made up of masonry or solid concrete
,D
It can be constructed to any height
r
re
tu
Less maintenance
ec
Require skilled labour
(L

re
ho
at
Earthen dams:
R
It is made up of soil and gravel
ep
e
It can be constructed to moderate height

ad
Pr
It is cheaper
Require less skilled labour
P)
Q. 77) The most suitable material for the central
M
TE
impervious core of a zoned embankment type dam is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Clay
(L

re
B. Coarse sand
ho
at
C. Silty clay
R
ep
D. Clay mixed with fine sand
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
1. Homogenous embankment type:-
TE
-Homogenous type earth dam is composed of a single kind of material.
,Dr
re
2. Non-Homogeneous (Zoned) embankment type:-
tu
ec
-Dam made up of more than one material.
(L

-The outer shells are made of pervious, freely drainage material. The shells give
re
ho
stability to the central impervious fill (clay and fine sand), and at the same time
at
distribute the load over a larger area in the foundation.
R
eep
3. Diaphragm type embankment:-
ad
Pr
The bulk of the embankment is constructed of previous material and a thin

diaphragm of impermeable material is provided to check the seepage.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 78) Seepage through embankments in an earthen dam
M
TE
is controlled by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Drainage filters
(L

re
B. Relief wells
ho
at
C. Drain trenches
R
ep
D. Provision of downstream berms
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 79) Seepage through foundation in an earthen dam is
M
TE
controlled by providing
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Rock toe
(L

re
B. Horizontal blanket
ho
at
C. Impervious cut off
R
ep
D. Chimney drain
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 80) The flow of water after spilling over the weir crest in
M
TE
chute spillway and side channel spillway respectively are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. At right angle and parallel to weir crest
(L

re
B. Parallel and at right angle to weir crest
ho
at
C. Parallel to weir crest in both
R
ep
D. At right angle to weir crest in both
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
-A spillway is a hydraulic structure built at a dam site for diverting the surplus
water from a reservoir after it has been filled to its maximum capacity.
P)
M
TE
-The weir is a solid obstruction put across the river to raise its water level and
,D
divert the water into the canal.
r
re
tu
ec
-Chute or through spillway:-
(L

Which passes the surplus discharge through a steep slopes open channel.
re
ho
Its crest is kept normal to its center line.
at
This type of spillway is provided on earth or rockfill dam
R
ep
e
ad
-Side channel spillway:-

Pr
In which the flow, after passing over a weir crest, is carried away by a channel
running essentially parallel to the crest.
This type of spillway is suitable for earth or rock fill dam.
Q. 81) The discharge passing over an ogee spillway is given
P)
M
by
TE
A. CLH3/2
,Dr
re
B. CHL3/2
tu
ec
C. CLH5/2
(L

re
D. CLH1/2
ho
at
R
ep
Where, L is effective length of spillway crest and H is the
e
ad
total head over the spillway crest including velocity head

Pr
Answer A
P)
The discharge over an ogee shaped spillway is given by
M
Q = CLH3/2
TE
,D
where
r
re
Q = discharge
tu
ec
C = a variable coefficient of discharge which influenced by several factors
(L

such as
re
ho
1. Depth of approach
at
2. Relation of actual crest shape to the ideal nappe shape
ep
R
3. Upstream face slope
e
ad
4. Upstream apron interference and

Pr
5. Downstream submergence
Its value varies from 2.1 to 2.5
P)
Q. 82) Coefficient of discharge of an ogee spillway
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Depends on depth of approach and upstream slope
tu
ec
B. Depends on downstream apron interference and
(L

re
downstream submergence
ho
at
C. Remains constant
R
ep
D. Both A and B
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 83) Which of the following spillways is least suitable for
M
TE
an earthen dam?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Ogee spillway
(L

re
B. Chute spillway
ho
at
C. Side channel spillway
R
ep
D. Shaft spillway
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
A spillway is a hydraulic structure built at
P)
a dam site for diverting the surplus water
M
from a reservoir after it has been filled to
TE
,D
its maximum capacity.
r
re
A. Ogee spillways are most commonly
tu
used in case of gravity dams
ec
(L

B. Chute spillway is a type of spillway in
re
ho
which surplus water from upstream is
at
disposed to the downstream through a
R
ep
steeply sloped open channel.
e
ad
The slope of chute spillway is designed in

Pr
such a way that the flow should be

always in super critical condition.
C. Side channel spillway is similar to chute
spillway but the only difference is the crest
of side channel spillway is located on one of
P)
its sides whereas crest of chute spillway is
M
TE
located between the side walls.
,Dr
re
D. A Shaft spillway is consists of a vertical
tu
ec
shaft followed by a horizontal conduit. The
(L

surplus water enters into the vertical shaft
re
ho
and then to the horizontal conduit and
at
R
finally reaches the downstream of the
ep
channel.
e
ad
Shaft spillway is recommended when there

Pr
is no space to provide for other types of

spillways
P)
Q. 84) In case of non-availability of space due to
M
TE
topography, the most suitable spillway is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Straight drop spillway
(L

re
B. Shaft spillway
ho
at
C. Chute spillway
R
ep
D. Ogee spillway
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Straight Drop Spillway:-
P)
A Straight drop spillway
M
TE
consists of low height weir wall
,D
having its downstream face
r
re
roughly or perfectly vertical.
tu
ec
When the water level in the
(L

re
reservoir rises above the
ho
normal pool level, the surplus
at
water falls freely from the R
eep
crest of the weir and hence it

ad
Pr
is known as Straight drop

spillway or free overfall
spillway
P)
M
Q. 85) In a chute spillway, the flow is usually
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Uniform
ec
(L
B. Subcritical

re
ho
C. Critical
at
D. Super critical R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
The slope of chute spillway is designed in such a way that the
re
tu
flow should be always in super critical condition.
ec
(L

re
ho
When the actual depth is less than critical depth it is classified as
at
R
supercritical. Supercritical flow has a Froude number greater
eep
than one.
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 86) For the upstream face of an earthen dam, the most
M
TE
adverse condition for stability of slope is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sudden drawdown
(L

re
B. Steady seepage
ho
at
C. During construction
R
ep
D. Sloughing of slope
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Upstream slope slide during sudden drawdown:-
For the upstream Slope the critical condition is when the reservoir is
P)
suddenly emptied without allowing any appreciable change in the water
M
TE
level within the saturated soil mass. The stage is known as sudden
,D
drawdown. With complete drawdown, the hydrostatic force acting along
r
re
the upstream slope at the time of full reservoir is removed without the
tu
ec
hydrostatic pressure on the slope of counteract it.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 87) If there are two canals taking off from each flank of
M
TE
a river, then there will be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. One divide wall and one undersluice
(L

re
B. One divide wall and two undersluices
ho
at
C. Two divide walls and one undersluice
R
ep
D. Two divide walls and two undersluices
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 88) Generally the weird is aligned at right angles to the
M
TE
direction of the main river current because
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. It ensures less length of the weir
(L

re
B. It gives better discharging capacity
ho
at
C. It is economical
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
As far as possible, the weir should be aligned at right angle to the
M
TE
direction of the main river current.
,D
1. This ensures lesser length of the weir,
r
re
tu
2. Better discharging capacity and
ec
(L
3. Lesser cost.

re
ho
at
R
Sometimes, the weir may be aligned at an oblique angle to the
ep
direction of the river current.
e
ad
In such a case, the weir will be of greater length, will have less
Pr
discharging power and will be costlier.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 89) The main function of a divide wall is to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Control the silt entry in the canal
ec
(L
B. Prevent river floods from entering the canal

re
ho
C. Separate the undersluices from weir proper
at
R
D. Provide smooth flow at sufficiently low velocity
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
A, B are correct for canal head regulator and D is correct for fish ladder.
P)
M
The divide wall is a masonry or concrete wall constructed at right angle to
TE
,D
the axis of the weir.
r
re
tu
It separates the ‘under-sluices’ with lower crest level from the ‘weir
ec
(L

proper’ with higher crest level.
re
ho
at
Weir Proper: It is a barrier constructed across the river. It aims to raise the
R
ep
water level in order to feed the canal.
e
ad
Pr
Under-sluices: The under sluices are the openings provided at the base of
the weir. They are located on the same side as the off-taking canal.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 90) A divide wall is provided
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. At right angle to the axis of weir
ec
(L
B. Parallel to the axis of weir and upstream of it

re
ho
C. Parallel to the axis of weir and downsream of it
at
R
D. At an inclination to the axis of weir
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(91 to 105)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 91) As compared to crest of the normal portion of the
P)
M
weir, the crest of the undersluice portion of the weir is
TE
,D
kept at
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Lower level

re
ho
B. Higher level
at
C. Same level R
eep
D. Any of the above depending on the design

ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Weir Proper: It is a barrier constructed across the river. It aims to raise the
r
re
water level in order to feed the canal.
tu
ec
(L

Under-sluices: The under sluices are the openings provided at the base of
re
ho
the weir. They are located on the same side as the off-taking canal.
at
R
ep
The divide wall separates the ‘under-sluices’ with lower crest level from
e
ad
the ‘weir proper’ with higher crest level.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 92) Silt excluders are constructed on the
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. River bed upstream of head regulator
ec
(L
B. River bed downstream of head regulator

re
ho
C. Canal bed upstream of head regulator
at
R
D. Canal bed downstream of head regulator
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Head regulator:- is a structure constructed at the head of a canal.
P)
Function:- 1. To make the regulation of supply in the canal easy.
M
TE
2. To control the silt entry into the canal.
,D
3. To shut out river floods.
r
re
tu
ec
There are two types of special works constructed to control the silt
(L

re
entering into the canal
ho
1. Silt Excluder:-Is a device by which silt is excluded from water entering
at
R
the canal. It is constructed in the river bed upstream of head regulator.
ep
e
2. Silt Extractor or silt Ejector:-Is a device by which the silt after it has
ad
Pr
entered the canal is extracted. While a silt excluder is a preventive

measure, the silt extractor is a curative measure and is constructed in the
canal bed downstream of head regulator.
Q. 93) If h is the ordinate of hydraulic gradient line above
P)
the top of the floor and G is specific gravity of floor
M
TE
material, then the thickness of floor is given by the
,Dr
formula
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. h/(G+1)
ho
at
B. (h-1)/(G-1)
R
ep
C. h/(G-1)
e
ad
D. (h-1)/G
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
tu
If h is the ordinate of hydraulic gradient line above the top of the
ec
(L

floor and G is specific gravity of floor material, then the thickness
re
ho
of floor is given by the formula h/(G-1).
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 94) According to Khosla’s theory, the exit gradient in the
M
TE
absence of downstream cutoff is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. Unity
ho
at
C. Infinity
R
ep
D. Very large
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
According to Khosla's theory, the exit gradient in the absence of a
(L

re
downstream cutoff is infinity.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 95) The minimum size of a stone that will remain at rest
P)
M
in a channel of longitudinal slope S and hydraulic mean
TE
,D
depth R is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 4RS

re
ho
B. 11RS
at
C. 7RS R
eep
D. 15RS
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 96) The ratio of average values of shear stress produced
M
TE
on the bed and banks of a channel due to flowing water is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than 1
(L

re
B. Equal to 1
ho
at
C. Greater than 1
R
ep
D. Equal to zero
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Average shear stress on bed of a channel, τ1= γRs
M
TE
Average shear stress on bank of a channel, τ2 = 0.75γRs
,Dr
re
This ratio is, τ1/τ2 = yRS/0.75yRS = 4/3 > 1
tu
ec
(L

re
where, τ is the fluid shear stress
ho
γ is the specific gravity of water
at
R
R is the hydraulic radius (approximately mean depth)
ep
e
s is the slope of the channel

ad
Pr
Q. 97) If the critical shear stress of a channel is τc, then the
P)
M
average value of shear stress required to move the grain
TE
,D
on the bank is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.5τc

re
ho
B. 0.75τc
at
C. τc R
ep
e
D. 1.33τc
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Average value of shear stress required to move the grain on the
tu
ec
bank is = 0.75τc
(L

re
ho
at
Critical shear stress is same as shear stress required to move a
R
ep
grain on bed.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 98) A water shed canal
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Irrigates only on one side
ec
(L
B. Is most suitable in hilly areas

re
ho
C. Avoids the cross drainage works
at
R
D. Is generally aligned parallel to the contours of the area
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Clasification of canal based on its alignment
1. Contour canal:-
P)
Is aligned nearly parallel to the contours.
M
TE
It can irrigate only one side.
,D
Is most suitable in hilly areas.
r
re
When it crosses a valley line, extra cost on cross drainage works is
tu
ec
required.
(L

re
2. Ridge canal or watershed canal:-
ho
It can irrigate on both sides.
at
R
No drainage can intersect a watershed and hence avoid cross drainage
ep
e
work.
ad
Pr
3. Side slope canal:-

Is aligned roughly at right angles to the contours of the country.
Cross drainage works are required.
P)
Q. 99) A canal which is aligned at right angles to the
M
TE
contour is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Contour canal
(L

re
B. Watershed canal
ho
at
C. Branch canal
R
ep
D. Side slope canal
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 100) Garret’s diagrams are based on
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Kennedy’s theory
ec
(L
B. Lacey’s theory

re
ho
C. Khosla’s theory
at
D. Bligh’s theory R
e ep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Since two or three trials are required in designing the canal by Kennedy’s
TE
,D
theory, the numerical work and hence the solution takes a very long time.
r
re
tu
ec
Garret simplified the numerical work by providing diagrams with the help
(L

of which design can be done more quickly.
re
ho
at
R
Garret’s diagrams have been drawn for a semi-circular channel.
eep
ad
In these diagram, the bed slope of the canal is indicated on the vertical
Pr
axis while the discharge is plotted on the horizontal axis.

P)
M
Q. 101) Garret’s diagrams have been drawn for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. A semi-circular channel
ec
(L
B. A trapezoidal channel with side slope ½H:1V

re
ho
C. A trapezoidal channel with side slope 1H:½V
at
R
D. Semi-elliptical channel
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Lacey’s equations
M
TE
,D
1. Silt factor, f = 1.76 √mr
r
re
Where mr is mean particle diameter of silt in mm
tu
ec
(L

2. Perimeter Discharge relation, P = 4.75 √Q
re
ho
at
3. Velocity Discharge relation, V = (Qf²/140)1/6
R
ep
e
ad
4. Regime slope equation, S = f5/3/3340Q1/6

Pr
5. Regime scour depth relation, R = 1.35 (q²/f)1/3

P)
Q. 103) According to Lacey’s theory, the silt supporting
M
TE
eddies are generated from
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Bottom of channel only
(L

re
B. Sides of channel only
ho
at
C. Bottom as well as sides of channel
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
According to Lacey’s theory, the silt supporting eddies are
(L

re
generated from perimeter of channel.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 105) As per Lacey’s theory, the silt factor is
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Directly proportional to average particle size
tu
ec
B. Inversely proportional to average particle size
(L

re
C. Directly proportional to square root of average particle
ho
at
size
R
ep
D. Not related to average particle size
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(106 to 120)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Lacey’s equations
M
TE
,D
1. Silt factor, f = 1.76 √mr
r
re
Where mr is mean particle diameter of silt in mm
tu
ec
(L

2. Perimeter Discharge relation, P = 4.75 √Q
re
ho
at
3. Flow Velocity Discharge relation, V = (Qf²/140)1/6
R
ep
e
ad
4. Regime slope equation, S = f5/3/3340Q1/6

Pr
5. Regime scour depth relation, R = 1.35 (q²/f)1/3

P)
Q. 107) Wetted perimeter of a regime channel for a
M
TE
discharge of 64 cumec as per Lacey’s theory will be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 19 m
(L

re
B. 38 m
ho
at
C. 57 m
R
ep
D. 76 m
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
As per Lacey’s theory, wetted perimeter,
r
re
tu
ec
P = 4.75 √Q
(L

re
ho
at
P = 4.75 √64
R
ep
e
ad
P = 38 m
Pr
Q. 108) Which of the following Canal structures is used to
P)
M
remove surplus water from an irrigation channel into a
TE
,D
natural drain
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Canal fall

re
ho
B. Canlal outlet
at
C. Canal escape R
ep
e
D. Canal regulator
ad
Pr
Answer C
A. Canal fall is a solid masonry structure which is constructed on the canal if the
P)
natural ground slope is steeper than the designed channel bed slope.
M
TE
,D
B. Canal outlet or a module is a small structure built at the head of the water course
r
so as to connect it with a minor or a distributary channel.
re
tu
ec
C. Canal Escape It is the structure required to dispose of surplus or excess water
(L

re
from canal from time to time. Thus, a canal escape serves as safety valve for
ho
canal system.
at
R
ep
D. Canal Regulators Constructed at the off taking point are called head regulators.
e
ad
When it is constructed at the head of main canal it is known as canal head regulator.
Pr
And when it is constructed at the head of distributary, it is called distributary

head regulator.
To control the entry of silt into off taking or main canal.
P)
M
Q. 109) For a proportional outlet, the flexibility is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Zero
ec
(L
B. Between zero and 1

re
ho
C. 1
at
D. Greater than 1 R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Flexibility (F) :-
M
It is the ratio of rate of change of discharge of an outlet to the rate of change of
TE
,D
discharge of the distributing channel.
r
re
tu
F = (dq/q) /(dQ/Q)
ec
(L

re
Where, q = discharge through the outlet
ho
Q = discharge of the distributing channel
at
R
ep
1. Proportional outlet:- the rate of change of its discharge is equal to the rate of
e
ad
change of the discharge of the distributing channel. F =1

Pr
2. Hyper-proportional outlet:- (dq/q) > (dQ/Q), F > 1

3. Sub-proportional outlet:- (dq/q) < (dQ/Q), F < 1
P)
M
Q. 110) The sensitivity of a rigid module is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Zero
ec
(L
B. Between zero and 1

re
ho
C. 1
at
D. Infinity R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Sensitivity (S):- it is defined as the ratio of the rate of change of discharge
TE
of an outlet to the rate of change in the level of the distributing surface,
,Dr
referred on the normal depth of the channel.
re
tu
ec
(L
S = (dq/q) / (dG/D) (sensitivity of a rigid module is zero)

re
ho
at
Where, q = discharge through the outlet
R
ep
dq = change in the discharge of the outlet
e
ad
G = gauge reading
Pr
D = depth of water in the distributing channel

P)
M
Q. 111) Which of the following is a flexible outlet
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Submerged pipe outlet
ec
(L
B. Kennedy’s gauge outlet

re
ho
C. Gibb’s outlet
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
A canal outlet or a module is a small structure built at the head of the water course
P)
M
so as to connect it with a minor or a distributary channel.
TE
Types of outlets
,D
1. Non-modulur outlet:- in which the discharge depends upon the difference in
r
re
level between the water levels in the distributing channel and the water course.
tu
ec
Exmp: submerged pipe outlet, masonry sluice and orifices, and wooden shoots.
(L

2. Semi-module or flexible outlet:- in which the discharge is affected by the
re
ho
fluctuations in the water level of the distributing channel while the fluctuations
at
in the water levels of the field channel do not have any effect on its discharge.
R
ep
Exmp: pipe outlet, Kennedy’s gauge outlet, crump’s open flume outlet and pipe-
e
ad
cum-open flume outlet.

Pr
3. Rigid module:- in which maintain constant discharge, within limits, irrespective

of the fluctuations in the water levels in the distributing channel and field
channel. Exmp: Gibb’s rigid module
P)
Q. 112) A straight glacis type fall with a baffle platform
M
TE
and baffle wall is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Vertical dropfall
(L

re
B. Glacis fall
ho
at
C. Montague type fall
R
ep
D. Inglis fall
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Canal fall is a solid masonry structure which is constructed on the canal if
M
the natural ground slope is steeper than the designed channel bed slope.
TE
,D
If the difference in slope is smaller, a single fall can be constructed. If it is
r
re
of higher then falls are constructed at regular suitable intervals.
tu
ec
(L

The important types of falls is
re
ho
1. Ogee falls 2. Rapids
at
3. Stepped falls R
4. Trapezoidal notch falls
ep
5. Well type falls 6. Simple vertical drop falls
e
ad
7. Straight glacis falls 8. Montague type falls

Pr
9. Inglis falls or baffle falls

1. Simple Vertical Drop Falls (Sarda Type fall)
Consists, single vertical drop which allows the
P)
upstream water to fall with sudden impact on
M
downstream. The downstream acts like cushion
TE
for the upstream water and dissipate extra
,D
energy. This type of fall is tried in Sarda Canal UP
r
re
tu
(India) and therefore, it is also called Sarda Fall.
ec
(L

2. Straight Glacis Canal Falls
re
ho
This is the modern type of construction, in which
at
a raised crest is constructed across the canal and
R
ep
a gentle straight inclined surface is provided from
e
ad
raised crest to the downstream. The water

Pr
coming from upstream crosses the raised crest

and falls on inclined surface with sufficient energy
dissipation.
3. Montague Type Canal Falls
P)
Montage fall is similar to straight glacis fall but in
M
this case the glacis is not straight. It is provided
TE
in parabolic shape to introduce the vertical
,D
component of velocity which improves the
r
re
tu
energy dissipation to more extent.
ec
(L

4. Inglis or Baffle Canal Falls
re
ho
In this case, straight glacis fall is extended as
at
baffle platform with baffle wall. This is suitable
R
ep
for any discharge. The baffle wall is constructed
e
ad
near the toe of the straight glacis at required

Pr
distance in designed height. The main purpose

of the baffle wall is to create hydraulic jump
from straight glacis to baffle platform.
P)
Q. 113) Which of the following types of falls use parabolic
M
TE
glacis for energy dissipation
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Vertical dropfall
(L

re
B. Glacis fall
ho
at
C. Montague type fall
R
ep
D. Inglis fall
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 114) In a Sarda type fall, rectangular crest is used for
M
TE
discharge upto
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6 cumecs
(L

re
B. 10 cumecs
ho
at
C. 14 cumecs
R
ep
D. 20 cumecs
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
The rectangular crest is used for discharge up to 14 cumecs
(L

re
ho
The Trepezoidal crest is used for discharge over 14 cumecs
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 115) Which of the following can be used as a meter fall
M
TE
,Dr
A. Vertical drop fall
re
tu
ec
B. Flumed glacis fall
(L

re
C. Unflumed glacis fall
ho
at
D. All of the above
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
Vertical drop fall can be used as a meter fall.
P)

P)
M
Q. 116) Vertical drop fall is satisfactory for a height upto
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.5 m
ec
(L
B. 1.5 m

re
ho
C. 3.5 m
at
D. 5.0 m R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer B
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Vertical drop fall is satisfactory for a height upto 1.5 m
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 117) Which of the following canal outlets maintains a
M
TE
constant discharge
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Non modular outlet
(L

re
B. Flexible outlet
ho
at
C. Rigid outlet
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Outlet:- is a small structure which admits water from the distributing channel to a
P)
M
water course or field channel.
TE
Types of outlets
,D
1. Non-modulur outlet:- in which the discharge depends upon the difference in
r
re
level between the water levels in the distributing channel and the water course.
tu
ec
Exmp: submerged pipe outlet, masonry sluice and orifices, and wooden shoots.
(L

2. Semi-module or flexible outlet:- in which the discharge is affected by the
re
ho
fluctuations in the water level of the distributing channel while the fluctuations
at
in the water levels of the field channel do not have any effect on its discharge.
R
ep
Exmp: pipe outlet, Kennedy’s gauge outlet, crump’s open flume outlet and pipe-
e
ad
cum-open flume outlet.

Pr
3. Rigid module:- in which maintain constant discharge, within limits, irrespective

of the fluctuations in the water levels in the distributing channel and field
channel. Exmp: Gibb’s rigid module
Q. 118) The ratio of the of change of the discharge of an
P)
M
outlet to the rate of change of the discharge of distributing
TE
,D
channel is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Proportionality

re
ho
B. Flexibility
at
C. Setting R
ep
e
D. Sensitivity
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Setting:- is the ratio of the depth of the crest level of the module
ec
(L
below the full supply of the distributing channel to the full supply

re
ho
depth of the distributing channel.
at
R
Setting = H/D
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 119) The drainage water intercepting the canal can be
M
TE
disposed of by passing the canal below the drainage is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Aqueduct and syphon aqueduct
(L

re
B. Aqueduct and super passage
ho
at
C. Super passage and canal syphon
R
ep
D. Level crossing
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
A cross drainage work is a structure carrying the discharge of a natural stream
across a canal intercepting the stream.
P)
Types of cross-drainage works
M
A. CD work carrying canal over the drainage:-
TE
,D
1. Aqueduct:- The HFL (high flood level) of drain is much below the bottom of the
r
canal, and water flows freely under gravity.
re
tu
2. Syphon aqueduct:- The HFL of the drain is much higher above the canal bed, and
ec
the water runs under syphonic action through the aqueduct barrels.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
B. CD work carrying drainage over the canal
1. Super-passage:- is similar to an aqueduct except that in this case the drain is over
P)
the canal. The FSL (full supply level) of the canal is lower than the underside of the
M
TE
trough carrying drainage water. Thus, the canal water runs under gravity.
,Dr
re
2. Canal syphon:-The FSL of the canal is much above the bed level of the drainage
tu
trough, so that canal is runs under syphonic action under the throug.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 120) If the RL’s of canal bed level and high flood level of
P)
M
discharge are 212.0 m and 210.0 m respectively, then cross
TE
,D
drainage work will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Aqueduct

re
ho
B. Superpassage
at
C. Syphon R
eep
D. Syphon aqueduct
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(121 to 135)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 121) The aqueduct or superpassage type of works are
P)
M
generally used when
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. High flood drainage discharge is small
ec
(L
B. High flood drainage discharges is large and short lived

re
ho
C. High flood drainage discharge is large and continuous
at
for a long time R
ep
e

ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
1. Super-passage:- is similar to an aqueduct except that in this case the
drain is over the canal. The FSL (full supply level) of the canal is lower
P)
than the underside of the trough carrying drainage water. Thus, the canal
M
TE
water runs under gravity.
,D
2. Canal syphon:-The FSL of the canal is much above the bed level of the
r
re
drainage trough, so that canal is runs under syphonic action under the
tu
ec
throug.
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 122) An aggrading river is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Silting river
ec
(L
B. Scouring river

re
ho
C. Both silting and scouring river
at
R
D. Neither silting nor scouring river
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Agrading river (silting river):- The river builds up its bed by silting
tu
ec
or dropping its bed load.
(L

re
ho
Degrading river (Scouring river):- Scouring is the removal of
at
sediment from its bed. R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 123) Tortuosity of a meandering river is the ratio of
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Meander belt to meander length
r
re
tu
B. Meander length to meander belt
ec
(L
C. Curved length along the channel to the direct axial

re
ho
length of the river reach
at
R
D. Direct axial length of the river reach to curved length
eep
along the channel

ad
Pr
Answer C
Tortuosity of a meandering river is the ratio of curved length
P)
M
along the channel to the direct axial length of the river reach.
TE
,Dr
re
Tortuosity of meandering river is always > 1
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 124) The meander pattern of river is developed by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Average discharge
ec
(L
B. Dominant discharge

re
ho
C. Maximum discharge
at
D. Critical discharge R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Dominant discharge varies from 1/2 to 1/3 of Qmax

P)
Q. 125) The main cause of meandering is
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Presence of an excessive bed slope in the river
tu
ec
B. Degradation
(L

re
C. The extra turbulence generated by the excess of river
ho
at
sediment during floods
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
Meandering results from the local bank erosion and consequent
re
tu
overloading and deposition of the river of the heavier sediments
ec
(L

moving along the bed.
re
ho
According to Inglis, the primary cause of the meanderig is the
at
R
excess of total charge during floods when excess of turbulence a
ep
developed.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 126) Tortuosity of a meandering river is always
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Equal to 1
ec
(L
B. Less than 1

re
ho
C. Greater than 1
at
D. R
Less than or equal to 1
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 127) Select the correct statement
P)
M
TE
,D
A. A meander increases the river length but a cutoff
r
re
tu
reduces the river length
ec
(L
B. A cutoff increases the river length but a meander

re
ho
reduces the river length
at
R
C. Both meander and cutoff increase the river length
eep
D. Both meander and cutoff decreases the river length

ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
During high floods, a cutoff may be developed by straightening
M
TE
out the loop of the meander. After the formation of cutoff, the
,D
river flows straight.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 128) River training for depth is achieved by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Groynes
ec
(L
B. Construction of dykes or leavees

re
ho
C. Both A and B
at
D. Groynes and bandalling R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
A. Groynes or spurs are the structures that are constructed transverse to
P)
flow and extend from bank to the river channel.
M
TE
,D
B. (तटबंध) levee, dike, dyke, embankment, floodbank or stopbank is an
r
re
elongated naturally occurring ridge or artificially constructed fill or wall,
tu
ec
which regulates water levels. It is usually earthen and often parallel to
(L

re
river flow.
ho
at
R
C. Bandalling is a locally bamboo made structure used for the river
ep
course stabilization by river bank erosion protection.
e
ad
Pr
Using spurs and Bandalling to contract the river channel and, thus,
increase its depth.
Q. 129) Main purpose of mean water training for rivers is
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Flood control
r
re
tu
B. To provide sufficient depth of water in navigable
ec
(L
channels, during low water periods

re
ho
C. To preserve the channel in good shape by efficient
at
R
disposal of suspended and bed load
eep
D. All of the above

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Types of river training works
M
TE
,D
1. High water training:- is also known as training for discharge. The cross-section
r
of the river is so developed near the works (i.e. Near weir, barrages or bridges)
re
tu
that the maximum flood is passed over efficiently.
ec
(L

re
2. Low water training:- is also known as training for depth. This type of training is
ho
adopted for navigation purpose where a certain minimum depth of flow is
at
R
maintained by contracting the width of the river channel.
e ep
ad
3. Mean water training:- is also known as the training for sediment. The river is
Pr
trained to correct the configuration of river bed for the efficient transport of
sediment load, without either silting or scouring.
P)
Q. 130) If D is the depth of scour below original bed, then
M
TE
the width of launching apron is generally taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1.2 D
(L

re
B. 1.5 D
ho
at
C. 2.0 D
R
ep
D. 2.5 D
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
To protect the face of the guide bank at the river bed level a thick stone
r
re
cover is laid on the bed. It is called an apron.
tu
ec
When the scour undermines the river bed the apron comes down
(L

or launches to cover the face of the scour. Hence it is called Launching
re
ho
apron also.
at
R
ep
width of launching apron is generally taken as = 1.5 depth of scour below
e
ad
original bed
Pr
Q. 131) Study the following statements
i) Levees are constructed parallel to river flow
P)
M
ii) Spurs are constructed parallel to river flow
TE
,D
iii) levees are constructed transverse to river flow
r
re
tu
iv) Spurs are constructed transverse to river flow
ec
(L

re
ho
A. (i) and (ii)
at
B. (i) and (iv) R
eep
C. (ii) and (iii)

ad
Pr
D. (iii) and (iv)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Groynes or spurs are the structure that are constructed
,D
transverse to river flow and extend from bank to the river
r
re
tu
channel.
ec
(L

re
(तटबंध) levee, dike, dyke, embankment, floodbank or stopbank is
ho
at
R
an elongated naturally occurring ridge or artificially constructed
ep
fill or wall, which regulates water levels. It is usually earthen and
e
ad
often parallel to river flow.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 132) A repelling ground is aligned
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Pointing upstream
ec
(L
B. Pointing downstream

re
ho
C. Perpendicular to bank
at
D. Parallel to bank R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 133) A river training work is generally required when
M
TE
the river is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Aggrading type
(L

re
B. Degrading type
ho
at
C. Meandering types
R
ep
D. Both A and B
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
River training' refers to the structural measures which are taken to improve
,D
a river and its banks. They are used to lower the river gradient in order to reduce
r
re
the water velocity and protect the river bed and banks from erosion.
tu
ec
(L
A. Agrading river (silting river):- The river builds up its bed by silting or dropping its

re
bed load.
ho
at
R
B. Degrading river (Scouring river):- Scouring is the removal of sediment from its bed.
ep
e
ad
C. Meandering rivers:- Meandering rivers erode sediment from the outer curve of
Pr
each meander bend and deposit it on an inner curve further down stream.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 134) Length and width of meander are proportional to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Discharge
ec
(L
B. (Discharge)½

re
ho
C. (Discharge)⅔
at
D. (Discharge)² R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 135) A river bend in alluvial soil is characterized by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Scouring on concave side
ec
(L
B. Silting on convex side

re
ho
C. Scouring on convex side and silting on cancave side
at
R
D. Scouring on concave side and silting on convex side
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(136 to 150)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 136) Select the incorrect statement
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Intensive irrigation should be avoided in areas
r
re
tu
susceptible to water logging
ec
(L
B. Extensive irrigation should be adopted in areas

re
ho
susceptible to water logging
at
R
C. Lift irrigation increases water logging
eep
D. All of the above

ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Lift irrigation:-
tu
ec
This is a curative measure. When the process of
(L

re
waterlogging is starts, lift irrigation should be introduced along
ho
at
with the canal irrigation. When water is pumped out from top
R
ep
aquifer it depresses the water table and decrease water logging.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 137) A land is known as waterlogged
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. When the permanent wilting point is reached
ec
(L
B. When gravity drainage has ceased

re
ho
C. Capillary fringe reaches the root zone of plants
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
→The dryer the soil the more difficult it is for the plant roots to extract.
P)
The soil water content at the stage where the plant dies, is called
M
TE
permanent wilting point. The soil still contains some water, but it is too
,D
difficult for the roots to suck it from the soil.
r
re
tu
ec
→Waterlogged soil:- The soil pores within the root zones of crops become
(L

re
fully saturated, and thus air circulation is completely cut-off.
ho
Water logging is caused by the rise of sub-soil water level upto the
at
R
ground level, or sometimes upto the root zone of the crops.
ep
e
The depth of water table at which it tends to make the soil water-logged
ad
Pr
and harmful to the growth of plant life depends upon the height of
capillary fringe, which is the height to which water will rise due to
capillary action.
P)
M
Q. 138) Lining of irrigation channels
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Increases the water logging area
ec
(L
B. Decreases the water logging area

re
ho
C. Does not change the water logging area
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Canal lining is the process of reducing seepage loss of irrigation water by adding
M
an impermeable layer to the sides and bed of the canal.
TE
,D
r
Advantages of lining:-
re
tu
1. Due to reduction in percolation and seepage, decreases the water logging
ec
(L
area.

re
2. Increase in velocity of flow. 3. Increase in stability of banks.
ho
4. Prevention of erosion 5. Increase in canal water power
at
6. Economical distribution R
7. Improvement in water quality
ep
e
ad
Disadvantages:-
Pr
1. High initial cost

2. Difficulty in shifting the position of outlets.
P)
M
Q. 139) A runoff river plant is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. A low head scheme
ec
(L
B. A medium head scheme

re
ho
C. A high head scheme
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
A water power development scheme is known as hydro-electric scheme Or hydel
scheme.
P)
M
The hydel plants can be classified according to their function
TE
1. Runoff river plants:- Which utilize the river flow having no pondage at its
,D
upstream. A wier or a barrage is constructed across the river, simply to raise the
r
re
water level slightly. Such a scheme is essentially a low head (which uses head less
tu
ec
than 15 metres) scheme, and is adopted in the case of a perennial river.
(L

re
ho
2. Storage plants:- Such a plant has a storage reservoir at its upstream. A dam is
at
constructed across the river and water is stored during the periods of excess
R
ep
supply.
e
ad
Pr
3. Pumped storage plants:- A pumped storage plant stores power in the form of
potential energy of water. The scheme is used to generate power only during the
peak hours.
Depending upon the available head, the hydel schemes may be
P)
M
classified as under
TE
,D
1. Low head scheme:- which uses head of less than about 15
r
re
metres. It is essentially a run off river scheme.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. Medium head scheme:- uses head between 15 to 60 metres.
ho
Such a scheme is essentially a storage scheme.
at
R
eep
ad
3. High head scheme:- uses a head of more than 60 metres.

Pr
P)
Q. 140) The net speed under which the turbine reaches its
M
TE
peak efficiency is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Design speed
(L

re
B. Rated speed
ho
at
C. Gross speed
R
ep
D. Operating speed
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Hydraulic Efficiency:-
(L

re
It is the ratio of the power developed by the runner
ho
at
of a turbine to the power supplied at the inlet of a turbine.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 141) A runoff river plant
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Is a medium head scheme
ec
(L
B. Generates power during peak hours only

re
ho
C. Is suitable only on a perennial river
at
D. Has no pondage at all R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 142) The net head under which the turbine reaches its
M
TE
peak efficiency in synchronous speed is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Design speed
(L

re
B. Rated speed
ho
at
C. Gross speed
R
ep
D. Operating speed
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 143) The ratio of the average load to the installed
P)
M
capacity of the plant whose reserve capacity is zero will be
TE
,D
equal to
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Load factor

re
ho
B. Plant factor
at
C. Utilisation factor R
eep
D. Both A and B
ad
Pr
Answer D
1.Load factor:- is defined as the ratio of the average load over a certain
P)
period to the peak load occurring during the same time.
M
TE
If period chosen is one day, the load factor is known as the daily load
,D
factor and similarly annual load factor.
r
re
2. Capacity factor or plant factor:- is the ratio of the average output of the
tu
ec
plant to the plant capacity. i.e.
(L

re
Plant capacity factor = average load output/installed capacity
ho
= average load output/1.1 (peak load)
at
R
if we take the reserve capacity as 10% of the peak load.
ep
If the reserve capacity is zero, load factor on a particular day = capacity
e
ad
factor for that day.

Pr
3. Utilization factor:- is the ratio of water actually utilized for power to

that available in the river.
P)
Q. 144) A hydroelectric scheme operating under a head of
M
TE
80 m will be classified as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Low head scheme
(L

re
B. Medium head scheme
ho
at
C. High head scheme
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Depending upon the available head, the hydel schemes may be classified
,D
as under
r
re
tu
1. Low head scheme:- which uses head of less than about 15 metres. It is
ec
essentially a run off river scheme.
(L

re
ho
2. Medium head scheme:- uses head between 15 to 60 metres. Such a
at
R
scheme is essentially a storage scheme.
eep
ad
Pr
3. High head scheme:- uses a head of more than 60 metres.

P)
M
Q. 145) A hyetograph is a graphical representation of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Rainfall intensity and time
ec
(L
B. Rainfall depth and time

re
ho
C. Discharge and time
at
R
D. Cumulative rainfall and time
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
A. Hyetograph is a graphical representation of rainfall intensity and time.
TE
,Dr
re
B. Rainfall intensity is a measure of the amount of rain that falls over
tu
time. It is expressed in depth units per unit time, usually as mm per hour
ec
(L

(mm/h).
re
ho
at
C. Hydrograph is a graphical representation of the rate of flow versus
R
ep
time.
e
ad
Pr
D. Mass Curve is plot of accumulated rainfall against time

Q. 146) Variability of rainfall is
i) Largest in regions of high rainfall
P)
M
ii) largest in coastal areas
TE
,D
iii) largest in regions of scanty rainfall
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Only (i)
at
B. (i) and (ii) R
ep
e
C. Only (iii)
ad
Pr
D. (ii) and (iii)

Answer C
P)
Regions of high rainfall: More than 200 cm average annual rainfall.
M
Regions of scanty rainfall: Less than 50 cm average annual rainfall.
TE
→Variability is high in the regions of scanty rainfall.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Rainfall variability:- The degree to which rainfall amounts vary across an
(L

area or through time.
re
ho
There are two types of rainfall variability, areal and temporal.
at
R
1. Areal variability:- The variation of rainfall amounts at various locations
ep
across a region for a specific time interval. (Time does not vary.)
e
ad
Example: Annual average precipitation.

Pr
2. Temporal variability:- The variation of rainfall amounts at a given

location across a time interval. (Area does not vary.)
P)
Q. 147) In India, which is the following is adopted as a
M
TE
standard recording raingauge
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Symon’s raingauge
(L

re
B. Tipping bucket type
ho
at
C. Natural syphon type
R
ep
D. Weighing bucket type
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Types of Raingauges:-
TE
,Dr
re
1. Non-Recording Type Raingauge
tu
ec
a) Symon’s Raingauge
(L

re
ho
2. Recording Type Raingauges
at
a) Weighing bucket type R
ep
b) Tipping bucket type
e
ad
c) Floating or natural syphon type raingauge

Pr
Q. 148) The maximum average depth due to one day
storm over an area of 100 km² is 100 mm. Depth area
P)
M
duration (DAD) curves indicate that for the same area of
TE
,D
100 km² the maximum average depth of for 3 hours storm
r
re
tu
will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 100 mm
at
B. More than 100 mm R
ep
e
C. Less than 100 mm

ad
Pr

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 149) The maximum rainfall depth of 300 mm in 24
P)
hours has a return period of 100 years. The probability of
M
TE
24 hours rainfall equal to or greater than 300 mm
,Dr
occurring at least once in 10 years is given by
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. (0.99)¹°
ho
at
B. 1 – (0.99)¹°
R
ep
C. (0.9)¹°°
e
ad
D. 1 – (0.9)¹°°
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 150) The most suitable chemical which can be applied
M
TE
to the water surface for reducing evaporation is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Methyl alcohol
(L

re
B. Ethyl alcohol
ho
at
C. Cetyl alcohol
R
ep
D. Butyl alcohol
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
The important factors affecting the natural evaporation such as
TE
Temperature, Relative Humidity, Wind Velocity, Sunshine Hours, etc.
,Dr
re
tu
Cetyl and Stearyl Alcohols were selected to reduce the evaporation.
ec
(L

re
Different concentrations of Cetyl and Stearyl alcohols were used in
ho
different pans.
at
R
ep
e
The Cetyl alcohol individually gives the average reduction is 27% and the
ad
Pr
Stearyl alcohol gives 27% and Both Cetyl and Stearyl Alcohol combine
gives the average reduction is 30%.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(151 to 165)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 151) Interception losses are due to
i) Evaporation
P)
M
ii) transportation
TE
,D
iii) stream flow
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
B. (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Interception loss is that part of the precipitation that falls on
(L

re
plants and doesn’t reach the ground and returned to the
ho
at
atmosphere by evaporation, this is termed as interception loss.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 152) A 6 hours storm had 4 cm of rainfall and the
P)
resulting runoff was 2 cm. If Φ index remains at the same
M
TE
value, the runoff due to 10 cm of rainfall in 12 hours in the
,Dr
catchment is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 4.5 cm
ho
at
B. 6.0 cm
R
ep
C. 7.5 cm
e
ad
D. 9.0 cm
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 153) Which of the following methods is used to
P)
M
estimate flood discharge based on high water marks left
TE
,D
over in the past?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Slope-area method

re
ho
B. Area-velocity method
at
C. Moving boat method R
ep
e
D. Ultra-sonic method
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Slope-area method is frequently used to estimate peak
(L

re
discharges following a flood event, observation of high-water
ho
at
marks after the passage of a flood is important.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 154) In the moving boat method of stream flow
measurements, the following measurements are required
P)
M
i) Velocity and direction of current metre
TE
,D
ii) Speed of the boat
r
re
tu
iii) Depths and time interval between depth readings
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (iii) R
eep
B. (ii) and (iii)

ad
Pr
C. Only (ii)
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 155) To determine the discharge at a section in a stream
from its rating curve, the required data are
are
P)
M
i) Slope of water surface at a section
TE
,D
ii) Stage at the section
r
re
tu
iii) Current metre readings at the section
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) R
eep
B. (ii) and (iii)

ad
Pr
C. Only (ii)
D. Only (iii)
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
re
Rating curve is a graph of discharge versus stage for a given point
tu
ec
on a stream, usually at gauging stations, where the stream
(L

discharge is measured across the stream channel with a flow
re
ho
meter.
at
R
The rating curve is usually plotted as discharge on x-axis versus stage
ep
(surface elevation) on y-axis.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 156) The stage of river carrying a discharge of Q m³/sec
P)
M
at a point is 10 m and slope of water surface is 1/4000.
TE
,D
The discharge of a flood at the same point and same stage
r
re
tu
of 10 m with a water surface slope of 1/1000 will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. √2Q m³/sec
at
B. 0.5Q m³/sec R
eep
C. 2Q m³/sec
ad
Pr
D. 4Q m³/sec
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 157) The stream which does not have any base flow
M
TE
contribution is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Perennial stream
(L

re
B. Intermittent stream
ho
at
C. Ephimeral stream
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Base flow:- is the delayed subsurface flow at shallow depth (above GWT),
TE
,D
joining a nearby stream.
r
re
tu
ec
Ground water flow:- is the deep subsurface flow of ground water (below
(L

GWT), joining a nearby stream or spring.
re
ho
at
Perennial streams are different to intermittent streams; which normally
R
ep
stop flowing for weeks or months each year.
e
ad
They are also different to ephemeral streams that flow only for hours or
Pr
days after rainfall.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 158) The flow mass-curve is graphical representation of
P)
M
TE
A. Cumulative discharge and time
,Dr
B. Discharge and percentage probability of flow being
re
tu
ec
equalled or exceeded
(L

re
C. Cumulative discharge, volume and time in chronological
ho
at
order
R
ep
D. Discharge and time in chronological order
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 159) If the demand line drawn from a ridge in a flow
P)
M
mass curve does not intersect the curve again, it indicates
TE
,D
that
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Demand cannot be met by inflow

re
ho
B. Reservoir was not full at the beginning
at
C. Both (A) and (B) R
ep
e

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Answer A
tu
ec
(L

re
The demand cannot be met by the inflow as the reservoir will not refill.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 160) The shape of recession limb of hydrograph
M
TE
depends upon
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Basin characteristics only
(L

re
B. Storm characteristics only
ho
at
C. Both (A) and (B)
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
A hydrograph of a catchment produced by a storm is a graphical representation
P)
M
of discharge rate of a stream with respect to the time from the start of storm. It
TE
is an inverted U shaped diagram.
,Dr
re
Hydrograph generally contains the following three parts.
tu
ec
1. Rising Limb
(L

2. Peak (or Crest) Segment
re
ho
3. Falling (or Recession) Limb
at
R
ep
1. Rising Limb:- It is the ascending curved portion of the hydrograph. The rising
e
ad
limb rises slowly in the early stage of the flood but more rapidly toward the end
Pr
portion. The shape of rising limb depends on duration and intensity distribution
of rainfall. This is because in early stages the losses is more and water reaches to
the stream faster.
2. Peak Segment (or Crest Segment) : Peak segment is shown by inverted
U in the hydrograph. This is the part which is taken as matter of interest
P)
by hydrologists. Peak of hydrograph occurs when all parts of basins
M
TE
contribute at the outlet simultaneously at the maximum rate. Depending
,D
upon the rainfall-basin characterstics, the peak may be sharp, flat or may
r
re
have several well defined peaks.
tu
ec
(L

3. Falling Limb (or Recession Limb) : Recession Limb represents the
re
ho
withdrawal of water from the storage built up during the early phase of
at
R
hydrograph. It extends from the point of inflection at the end of the crest
ep
to the beginning of the natural groundwater flow.
e
ad
The shape of recession limb depends upon basin characteristics only and
Pr
independent of the storm.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 161) Instantaneous unit hydrograph is a hydrograph of
i) Unit duration
P)
M
ii) Unit rainfall excess
TE
,D
iii) Infinitely small duration
r
re
tu
iv) Infinitely small rainfall excess
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) R
eep
B. (i) and (iv)

ad
Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (iii) and (iv)
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
The instantaneous unit hydrograph is defined as a unit
ec
(L

hydrograph produced by an effective rainfall of 1 mm and having
re
ho
an infinitesimal reference duration (in other words the duration
at
tends towards zero). R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 162) For a catchment area of 120 km², the equilibrium
P)
discharge in m³/hour of an S-curve obtained by the
M
TE
summation of 6 hour unit hydrograph is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.2 × 106
(L

B. 0.6 × 106
re
ho
C. 2.4 × 106
at
R
ep
D. 7.2 × 106
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 163) A unit hydrograph has one unit of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Rainfall duration
ec
(L
B. Rainfall excess

re
ho
C. Time base of direct runoff
at
D. Discharge R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
The Unit Hydrograph of the catchment is defined as hydrograph of direct
r
re
runoff (DRH) results from 1cm depth of effective rainfall occurring
tu
ec
uniformly over the catchment at a uniform rate during a specified period
(L

of time (D-hr).
re
ho
at
Thus we can have 6-Hr Unit Hydrograph, 12-Hr Unit Hydrograph, etc.
R
ep
e
ad
6-Hr unit hydrograph will have an effective rainfall intensity of 1/6 cm/hr.
Pr
Q. 164) The peak of a 4 hour flood hydrograph is 240
P)
m³/sec. If the rainfall excess is 80 mm and base flow which
M
TE
is constant is 40 m³/sec, then the peak of 4 hours unit
,Dr
hydrograph will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 20 m³/sec
ho
at
B. 25 m³/sec
R
ep
C. 30 m³/sec
e
ad
D. 35 m³/sec
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Storm/flood hydrograph = Direct runoff + ground water runoff/Base flow
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 165) A 4-hour direct runoff hydrograph of catchment is
P)
triangular in shape with a time base of 100 hours and peak
M
TE
flow of 50 m³/sec. The catchment area is 360 km². The
,Dr
peak flow of this catchment area for a 4-hour unit
re
tu
ec
hydrograph is
(L

re
ho
at
A. 10 m³/sec
R
ep
B. 20 m³/sec
e
ad
C. 25 m³/sec
Pr
D. 50 m³/sec
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(166 to 180)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
Q. 166) To estimate the magnitude of flood with a return
period of T years, Gumbel’s distribution method requires the
P)
following data pertaining to annual flood series
M
TE
i) Mean value
,D
ii) Standard deviation
r
re
tu
iii) Length of record
ec
(L
iv) Coefficient of skew

re
ho
at
R
ep
A. (i) and (ii)
e
ad

Pr

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 167) For an annual flood series arranged in descending
M
TE
order of magnitude, the return for a magnitude listed at
,Dr
position period m in a total data N is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. N/(m+1)
ho
at
B. m/(N+1)
R
ep
C. m/N
e
ad
D. (N+1)/m
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
The values of the annual maximum flood from a given catchment
TE
,D
area for large number of successive years constitute a
r
re
hydrological data series called the annual series.
tu
ec
The data are then arranged in decreasing order of magnitude and
(L

re
the probability (P) of each being equal to or exceeded is
ho
calculated by the plotting position formula
at
R
P = m/(N+1)
ep
e
ad
Where,
Pr
m = Order number of event

N = Total number of events in the data
P)
Q. 168) If the risk of a flood occurring in the next 10 years
M
TE
is accepted to 10%, then the return period for design
,Dr
should be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1 + (0.9)0.10
ho
at
B. 1 – (0.9)0.10
R
ep
C. 1/(1 – 0.90.10)
e
ad
D. 1/(1 + 0.90.10)
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 169) Partial duration series is mostly used for
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Rainfall analysis
(L

re
B. Flood analysis
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Because conditions of independency of events are easy to

re
ho
establish in rainfall analysis.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 170) If storage, inflow rate and outflow rate are
denoted by S, I and Q respectively, then the values of S in
P)
M
Muskingham method of flood routing is given by the
TE
,D
expression
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. K(XI – XQ + Q)

re
ho
B. K(XI + XQ – Q)
at
C. K(-XI + XQ + I) R
eep
D. KX(I – XQ – Q)
ad
Pr
Where K and X are coefficients.

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 171) Which of the following are Saint Venant’s equations for
unsteady open-channel flow?
P)
M
TE
,D
ii) Momentum equation
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
ad
B. (i) and (ii)

Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
1. Continuity equation, outflow + change in storage = inflow
ec
(L

re
ho
2. The momentum equation is derived from Newton’s second
at
R
law, Rate of change of momentum = net force
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 172) In case of channel routing, the storage is a function
,Dr
re
of
tu
ec
A. Inflow discharge only
(L

re
B. Outflow discharge only
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In reservoir routing, storage is a function of outflow discharge

re
ho
only.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 173) Muskingham method of flood routing is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Reservoir routing method
(L

re
B. Channel routing method
ho
at
C. Hydraulic method of flood routing
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 174) Which of the following equations are used in
hydrological flood routing method
P)
M
TE
,D
ii) Equation of motion
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
B. (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In hydraulic method of flood routing, both the equation of

re
ho
motion and continuity equation are used.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 175) In linear reservoir, storage varies linearly with
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Time
(L

re
B. Inflow rate
ho
at
C. Outflow rate
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 176) The dimensions of storage coefficient is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. M0 L¹ T-1
(L

re
B. M0 L² T-1
ho
at
C. M0 L3 T -2
R
ep
D. Dimensionless
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Storage coefficient (storativity):- The volume of water given up
ec
(L

per unit horizontal area of an aquifer and per unit drop of the
re
ho
water-table. It is a dimensionless ratio and always greater than 0
at
and less than unity. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 177) The porosity of a sand sample is 50%. The specific
TE
,D
yield of an aquifer for containing this sand will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Equal to 50%

re
ho
B. Less than 50%
at
C. More than 50% R
eep

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Specific yield is defined as the volume of water released from
ec
(L

groundwater storage per unit surface area of aquifer per unit
re
ho
decline of the water table.
at
R
Thus, specific yield, which is sometimes called effective porosity,
ep
is less than the total porosity.

e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 178) Discharge per unit drawdown at a well is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Specific storage
(L

re
B. Specific yield
ho
at
C. Specific capacity
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
A. Specific storage:- The specific storage is the amount of water that a portion of
TE
an aquifer releases from storage
,Dr
re
tu
B. Specific Yield of Wells:- rate of water percolation in the well or yield of a well in
ec
m3/hr under a head of one metre is called the specific yield of the well.
(L

re
ho
C. Specific capacity:- is a quantity that which a water well can produce per unit of
at
drawdown. R
ep
A well specific capacity equals the discharge rate (in gpm) divided by the water
e
ad
level drawdown (in feet).

Pr
For example a well with a pumping rate of 200gpm (Gallons per minute) with a
10 foot drawdown has aspecific capacity of 20gpm/ft of drawdown.
P)
Q. 179) Permeability of a soil sample a temperature of
M
TE
20°C is 0.5 mm/sec. If the temperature is decreased to
,Dr
15°C , the permeability of the same soil sample is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.5 mm/sec
ho
at
B. Less than 0.5 mm/sec
R
ep
C. More than 0.5 mm/sec
e
ad

Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
The property of the soil that permits the flow of water through
r
re
its voids with ease is known as permeability.
tu
ec
(L

re
An decrease in temperature of the permeant (pore fluid)
ho
at
decreases the density marginally and increase the viscosity
R
ep
significantly and vice versa.
e
ad
Thus, decrease in temperature of the pore fluid

Pr
decreases the permeability of the soil.

P)
Q. 180) Due to decrease in pressure, the water level in a
M
TE
well penetrating a confined aquifer will
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Decrease
(L

re
B. Increase
ho
at
C. Note change
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Aquifer:- is an saturated geological formation, underground layer of
,D
water-bearing permeable and porous or unconsolidated materials
r
re
tu
(gravel, sand, or silt) from which groundwater can be extracted using a
ec
water well.
(L

re
ho
at
In un-confined aquifer cone of depression represent the drawdown water
R
table but in confined aquifer it represent the pressure drop (change in
ep
e
piezometric head) around the well.

ad
Pr
Drop in water table from previous static water table is termed as

drawdown depth or simply drawdown.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(181 to 195)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
Q. 181) According to Indian standards, the number of
M
TE
raingauge station for an area of 5200 km² in plains should
,Dr
be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 10
ho
at
B. 15
R
ep
C. 20
e
ad
D. 40
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
According to Indian standards:
,Dr
re
tu
1. In Plains – 1 station for every 520 sq.km.
ec
(L
2. In region with average elevation 1000 m – 1 station per 260-

re
ho
390 sq.km.
at
R
3. In hilly areas with heavy rainfall – 1 station for every 130 sq.km
ep
4. In arid polar zone – 1 station for every 1500 – 10000 sq.km.
e
ad
Pr
10% of the raingauges should be self recording raingauge.

Q. 182) For a storm of given duration, if the intensity of
P)
M
storm corresponding to a return period of T is I, then the
TE
,D
intensity of storm for the same duration but corresponding
r
re
tu
the return period of T1 ( where T1 > T) will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Less than I
at
B. Equal to I R
ep
e
C. Greater than I
ad
Pr

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Intensity of storm ↑ with ↓ Storm duration.
re
ho
Intensity of storm ↑ with ↑ Return period.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 183) What is the probability of flood equal to or greater
TE
,D
than 25 years flood occurring twice in the next three years
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 24/625

re
ho
B. 72/3125
at
C. 72/15625 R
ep
e
D. 24/15625
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 184) The rainfall in four successive 12 hours period on a
P)
M
catchment are 40, 80, 90 and 30 mm. If the infiltration
TE
,D
index ∅ for the storm is 5 mm/hour, then the total surface
r
re
tu
runoff will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 0
at
B. 50 mm R
ep
e
C. 120 mm
ad
Pr
D. 180 mm
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 185) The 6-hour unit hydrograph of a catchment of area
M
TE
180 km² is triangular in shape. If the peak ordinate of this
,Dr
hydrograph is 10 m³/sec, then the time base is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 50 hours
ho
at
B. 75 hours
R
ep
C. 100 hours
e
ad
D. 120 hours
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 186) Percentage of raingauge stations which should be
M
TE
equipped with self recording gauges for knowing the
,Dr
intensity of rainfall should be about
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 5%
ho
at
B. 10%
R
ep
C. 15%
e
ad
D. 20%
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
World Meteorological Organization (WHO) recommendation:
TE
,Dr
re
1. In Plains – 1 station for every 520 sq.km.
tu
ec
2. In region with average elevation 1000 m – 1 station per 260 to
(L

re
390 sq.km.
ho
3. In hilly areas with heavy rainfall – 1 station for every 130 sq.km
at
R
4. In arid polar zone – 1 station for every 1500 to 10000 sq.km.
eep
ad
Pr
10% of the raingauges should be self recording raingauge.

Q. 187) If the same catchment area is situated in three
zones X, Y, Z where X, Y and Z represent flat regions of
P)
M
tropical zone, mountaneous region of tropical zone and
TE
,D
arid zone respectively, then the relation between the
r
re
tu
desirable number of raingauge stations in these three
ec
(L
zones Nx, Ny and Nz respectively

re
ho
at
A. Nx > Ny > Nz R
eep
B. Ny > Nz > Nx
ad
Pr
C. Ny > Nx > Nz
D. Nz > Ny > Nx
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 188) If the coefficient of variation of rainfall values at 4
P)
M
raingauge stations is 30% and permissible error in the
TE
,D
estimation of mean rainfall is 10%, then the additional
r
re
tu
number of raingauge stations required in the catchment is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 3
at
B. 4 R
ep
e
C. 5
ad
Pr
D. 9
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
=5
re
r,D
=9–4
TE
M
P)
= (30/10)² - 4

Q. 189) Assertion A: Under identical conditions, the evaporation
P)
from sea water is less than that from fresh water.
M
TE
Reason R: Vapour pressure of sea water is less than that of pure
,D
water
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Select your answer based on the coding system given below

re
ho
at
ep
R
e
ad

Pr

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 190) In a siphon aqueduct the most severe condition of
M
TE
uplift on the floor occurs when
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Canal runs full, drain is dry but the water table is at
(L

re
stream bed
ho
at
B. Canal is dry and drain is at high flood level
R
ep
C. Canal runs dry and the drain also runs dry
e
ad
D. Both the canal and the drain run full

Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
1. Super-passage:- is similar to an aqueduct except that in this case the drain is over
P)
the canal. The FSL (full supply level) of the canal is lower than the underside of the
M
TE
trough carrying drainage water. Thus, the canal water runs under gravity.
,Dr
re
2. Canal syphon:-The FSL of the canal is much above the bed level of the drainage
tu
trough, so that canal is runs under syphonic action under the throug.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 191) The double mass analysis is adopted to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Estimate the missing rainfall data
ec
(L
B. Open intensities of rainfall at various duration

re
ho
C. Check the consistency of data
at
R
D. Obtain the amount of storage needed to maintain a
ep
e
demand pattern
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
A. The most common method used to estimate missing rainfall
r
re
data is Normal Ratio method. This method is based only on past
tu
ec
observations of that rain gauge and surrounding gauges.
(L

re
ho
at
C. Double-mass curve can be used to detect changes in the
R
ep
consistency of precipitation records and to determine the
e
ad
amount of adjustment to be applied to make them consistent.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 192) Retrogression of downstream levels, generally
TE
,D
considered in the design of weirs or barrages, is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Higher at high foold stage then it low water levels

re
ho
B. Same at high flood stage and at low water levels
at
R
C. Higher at low water levels stage than at high flood stage
ep
e
D. Independent of the stage of flow

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Retrogression:- It is a temporary phenomenon which occurs after
M
the construction of weirs or barrages in the river flowing through
TE
,D
alluvial soil. As a result of back water effect and increase in the
r
re
depth, the velocity of water decreases resulting in deposition of
tu
ec
sedimentation load. The water flowing through the weirs or
(L

re
barrages have less silt, so water picks up silt from downstream
ho
at
bed. This results in lowering d/s river bed to a few miles. This is
R
ep
known as retrogression.
e
ad
Pr
Retrogression value is minimum for flood discharge and

maximum for low discharge. The values vary (2 - 8.5) ft.
P)
Q. 193) Cross-regulators in main canals are provided to
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Regulate water supply in the off-taking channel
tu
ec
B. Regulate water supply in the main channel
(L

re
C. Regulate excessive flood water
ho
at
D. Head up water for adequate supply into the off-taking
R
ep
channel
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Cross Regulator:- It is a hydraulic structure constructed across the canal to
regulate the irrigation water supplies. It may be constructed across any
P)
type of canal main, branch or a distributary.
M
TE
Functions:-
,D
(i) When due to inadequate supply the water level is lowered the off-
r
re
taking channels do not get their proper share. A cross regulator is
tu
ec
provided to raise the water level.
(L

re
(ii) Sometimes it becomes necessary to carry out some necessary to carry
ho
out some repair works on a canal. The cross regulator if existing above
at
R
that reach of the canal, it can be closed and repairs can be done
ep
e
efficiently.
ad
Pr
(iii) Sometimes it is necessary to close the canal below a particular point.

Say when there is no demand for irrigation water during a particular
period
(iv) When the costly headwork’s are not constructed in the initial stages, the
cross-regulator helps in regulating the canal supplies.
(v) Cross regulators divide long canal reach into smaller ones and make it possible
to maintain the reach successfully and efficiently. For efficient functioning they
P)
M
should be spaced 10 to 13 km apart on the main canal and 7 to 10 km on the
TE
branches.
,Dr
re
2. Head Regulators:- It is a structure constructed at the entrance (head) of the
tu
ec
canal where it takes off from the river.
(L

Functions:-
re
ho
i. It regulates the flow of irrigation water entering into the canal.
at
R
ii. To shut out river flood. ep
iii. It regulates and prevents excessive silt entry into the canal.
e
ad
Pr
3. Distributary Head Regulator:- It is a hydraulic structure constructed at the head

of a distributary. This regulator performs the same functions as that of a head
regulator.
P)
M
TE
Q. 194) For a barrage, the exit gradient is independent of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. The applied head of water
(L

re
B. The horizontal length of floor
ho
at
C. The depth of upstream cutoff
R
ep
D. The depth of downstream cutoff
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 195) For the upstream slope of in earth dam, the most
P)
M
critical condition is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Sudden draw down condition
ec
(L
B. Steady seepage condition

re
ho
C. Neither sudden draw down nor steady seepage
at
condition R
eep
D. During construction when the reservoir is allowed to be

ad
Pr
filled
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
The most critical stage for the
tu
ec
(L

re
1. Upstream slope:- Sudden drawdown condition
ho
at
R
2. Downstream slope:- Steady seepage when the resevoir is full
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(196 to 210)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 196) Bligh’s creep theory of seepage assumes
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Equal weightage to horizontal and vertical creeps
ec
(L
B. More weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep

re
ho
C. Less weightage to horizontal creep than vertical creep
at
R
D. Loss of head follows sine curve
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Concept of Bligh’s theory:-
TE
Bligh assumed that the water which percolates into the foundation creeps
,D
through the joint between the profile of the base of weir and the subsoil.
r
re
tu
Of course water also percolates into the subsoil. The seeping water finally
ec
comes out at the downstream end.
(L

re
According to Bligh water travels along vertical, horizontal or inclined path
ho
without making any distinction.
at
R
The total length covered by the percolating water till it emerges out at the
eep
downstream end is called a creep length.

ad
Pr
Bligh’s creep theory of seepage assumes equal weightage to horizontal

and vertical creeps.
Q. 197) The sequent peak algorithm is a method used in
P)
M
the estimation of the
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Maximum possible precipitation in a basin
ec
(L
B. Maximum possible flood peak in a catchment

re
ho
C. Minimum Evapotranspiration from a catchment
at
R
D. Minimum reservoir capacity needed to meet a given
eep
demand
ad
Pr
Answer D
Probable maximum precipitation (PMP):-
-PMP is used in the design of major hydraulic structures such as spillways
P)
in large dams.
M
TE
-There appears to be a physical upper limit to the amount of precipitation
,D
that can occur over a given area in a given time.
r
re
tu
ec
Probable maximum flood:-
(L

re
-An extremely large but physically possible flood in the region.
ho
-Used in situation where failure of structure cause life and severe damage
at
R
ep
e
Evapotranspiration:- Evapotranspiration (ET) is an important component

ad
Pr
of the water cycle and is composed of two subprocesses evaporation

from soil and vegetation surfaces and transpiration that consists of the
exchange of moisture between the plant and atmosphere.
P)
Q. 198) The probable maximum flood is
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. The standard project flood of an extremely large river
tu
ec
B. A flood adopted in the design of all kinds of spillways
(L

re
C. A flood adopted in all hydraulic structures
ho
at
D. An extremely large but physically possible flood in the
R
ep
region
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Spillway design flood:-
P)
-Design flood specific for designing spillway of storage structure.
M
TE
-Maximum discharge that can be passed in hydraulic structure without
,D
causing change or threat to the stability of the structure.
r
re
tu
ec
Probable maximum flood:-
(L

re
-An extremely large but physically possible flood in the region
ho
-Used in situation where failure of structure cause life and severe
at
damage. R
eep
ad
Pr
Standard project flood:-

-Used in situation where failure would cause less damage.
-40% to 60% of PMF for same basin.
Q. 199) The probable maximum precipitation at a station is
P)
M
TE
A. The greatest rainfall for a given duration that is
,Dr
physically possible
re
tu
ec
B. The rainfall of a given duration with maximum
(L

re
probability of occurance
ho
at
C. The rainfall for a given duration that is impossible to
R
ep
occur
e
ad

Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Probable maximum precipitation (PMP):-
(L

re
-PMP is used in the design of major hydraulic structures such as
ho
at
spillways in large dams.
R
ep
-There appears to be a physical upper limit to the amount
e
ad
of precipitation that can occur over a given area in a given time.

Pr
Q. 200) The flow duration curve is a plot of
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Accumulated flow against time
r
re
tu
B. Discharge against time in chronological order
ec
(L
C. The base flow against the percentage of time the flow is

re
ho
equalled or exceeded
at
R
D. The stream discharge against the percentage of the
ep
e
time the flow is equalled or exceeded

ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
B. A plot of the discharge in a stream plotted chronologically
r
re
against time is called a Hydrograph
tu
ec
(L

re
D. A flow duration curve is a plot of discharge vs. percent of time
ho
that a particular discharge was equalled or exceeded. The area
at
R
under the flow duration curve (with arithmetic scales) gives the
ep
e
ad
average daily flow, and the median daily flow is the 50% value.
Pr
Q. 201) The DAD (Depth Area Duration) analysis for a
catchment would indicate that
P)
M
TE
,D
A. For a given storm, the maximum depth increses with
r
re
tu
area
ec
(L
B. For a given area, the maximum average depth of rainfall

re
ho
increases with strom duration
at
R
C. For a given area, the maximum average depth of rainfall
eep
decreases with storm duration

ad
Pr

Answer B
P)
M
The purpose of a DAD analysis was to determine the maximum
TE
,D
precipitation amounts over various area sizes during the passage of
r
re
storms of say 6-, 12, or 24-hour durations to help in the computation of
tu
probable maximum precipitation (PMP) estimates.
ec
(L

re
ho
The x-axis of a DAD plot indicates the maximum average depth of
at
precipitation. The y-axis is the area size.
R
ep
e
ad
For a given area, the maximum average depth of rainfall increases with
Pr
strom duration
P)
M
TE
Q. 202) Permanent wilting point is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. A characteristics of the plant
(L

re
B. A soil characteristics
ho
at
C. A soil characteristics modified by the crop
R
ep
D. Dependent on soil water plant fertilizer interaction
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Field Capacity:- The maximum quantity of water which a soil can retain
TE
against the force of gravity is known as field capacity.
,D
The quantity of water greater than the field capacity simply passes away.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Permanent wilting Point:- is the moisture content at which the moisture is

re
no longer available in sufficient quantity so that the plants can sustain.
ho
at
Even though the soil contains some moisture but it was so held by the
R
soil that roots of plants cannot uptake it and results in wilting of plant.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Available water:- The difference between two moisture contents ( field

capacity and permanent wilting point ) is known as available water.
It is the moisture content which is available for plants.
P)
Q. 203) Conjunctive use of water in a basin means
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Combined use of water for irrigation and for
tu
ec
hydropower generation
(L

re
B. Combined use of surface and ground water resources
ho
at
C. Use of irrigation water for both rabi and kharif season
R
ep
D. Use of irrigation water by cooperative of farmers
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Conjunctive use of water relates to the combined use of ground
re
ho
and surface water.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 204) The tractive force method of designing stable channels is
P)
applicable to channels
M
TE
i) In coarse non-cohesive material
,D
ii) In cohesive material
r
re
tu
iii) Carrying clear water
ec
(L
iv) Carrying water containing suspended load

re
ho
Of these statements
at
A. (i) and (iii) are correct
ep
R
B. (ii) and (iii) are correct
e
ad
C. (i) and (iv) are correct

Pr
D. (ii) and (iv) are correct

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The force exerted by flowing water on bottom and sides of the

re
ho
channel is called tractive force.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 205) As per Shield’s criteria for the initiation of bed
TE
,D
motion, the entertainment function is a unique function of
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Reynolds number

re
ho
B. Shear Reynolds number
at
C. Froude number R
eep
D. Both B and C
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Sediment transport is the movement of solid particles (sediment),
M
TE
typically due to a combination of gravity acting on the sediment, and/or
,D
the movement of the fluid in which the sediment is entrained.
r
re
tu
ec
For a fluid to begin transporting sediment that is currently at rest on a
(L

re
surface, the boundary (or bed) shear stress exerted by the fluid must
ho
exceed the critical shear stress for the initiation of motion of grains at the
at
bed. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
As per Shield’s criteria for the initiation of bed motion, the entertainment
function is a unique function of Shear Reynolds number.
P)
Q. 207) In which of the following section a breast wall is
M
TE
usually provided
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Main canal
(L

re
B. Under-sluice
ho
at
C. Head regulator
R
ep
D. Weir
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Canal Head Regulator:- Structure at the head of canal taking off
ec
(L
from a reservoir may consist of number of spans separated by

re
ho
piers and operated by gates.
at
R
Regulators are normally aligned at 90° to the weir.
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 208) The most ideal condition for energy dissipation for
M
TE
the design of spillways is when the tail water curve
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Lies above jump height curve at all discharge
(L

re
B. Coincides with jump height curve at all discharges
ho
at
C. Lies below the jump height curve at all discharges
R
ep
D. Lies above or below the jump height curve, depending
e
ad
upon the discharge

Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The water flowing over the spillways acquires a lot of kinetic energy by
TE
,D
the time it reaches near the toe of spillway. The dissipate this huge
r
re
energy of water and reduce the large scale of the scouring the structural
tu
ec
arrangement is made is called as energy dissipiators.
(L

re
ho
Hydraulic jump:- is the jump of water that takes place when a super-
at
critical flow changes into a sub-critical flow.
R
ep
e
ad
Tail water level:- Water located immediately downstream from a hydraulic

Pr
structure, such as dam.

Depending upon the relative position of TWC and jump height curve
energy dissipation arrangement can be provided below the spillway as
follow
P)
A. Tail water curve coincides with jump height curve at all discharges
M
TE
- This is most critical condition for jump formation.
,D
- The hydraulic jump will form at the toe of jump formation.
r
re
tu
ec
B. Tail water curve lies above jump height curve at all discharge
(L

- In this case jump height curve is always below tail water.
re
ho
- Little energy will dissipated.
at
R
ep
C. Tail water curve lies below the jump height curve at all discharges
e
ad
- If the tail water is very low

Pr
D. Tail water curve lies above or below the jump height curve, depending
upon the discharge.
P)
Q. 209) The ordinate of the Instantaneous Unit
M
TE
Hydrograph (IUH) of a catchment at any time t, is
,Dr
re
tu
A. The slope of the 1-hour unit hydrograph at that time
ec
(L

B. The slope of the direct runoff unit hydrograph at that time
re
ho
C. Difference in the slope of the S-curve and 1-hour unit
at
hydrograph R
eep
D. The slope of the S-curve with effective rainfall intensity of

ad
Pr
1cm/hour
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
The limiting case of a unit hydrograph of zero duration is known
ec
(L

as instantaneous unit hydrograph (IUH).
re
ho
The ordinate of IUH of a catchment at any time ‘t’ is the slope of
at
R
S-curve of with effective rainfall intensity 1 cm/hr.
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 210) The leaching requirement of a soil is 10%. If the
M
TE
consumptive use requirement of the crop is 90 mm, then
,Dr
the depth of water required to be applied to the field is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 80 mm
ho
at
B. 90 mm
R
ep
C. 100 mm
e
ad
D. 110 mm
Pr
Answer C
Leaching requirement
The total amount of water required to bring the soil salinity from
P)
M
an initially high value down to an acceptable value in accordance
TE
with the salt tolerance of the crops to be grown.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(206 & 211 to 225)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 206) Rigid boundary canals, whose bed and banks are
TE
,D
made with non-erodibe materials, are in
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. True regime

re
ho
B. Permanent regime
at
C. Final regime R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer B
A channel is said to in regime, if there is neither silting nor scouring.
P)
According to Lacey’s there may be three regime conditions
M
TE
A. True regime:- A channel shall be in true regime if the following
,D
conditions are satisfied
r
re
1. Discharge is constant, 2. Flow is uniform,
tu
ec
3. Silt charge is constant i.e. the amount of the silt is constant
(L

re
4. Silt grade is constant i.e. the type and size of silt is always the same
ho
5. Channel is flowing through a material which can be scoured as easily as
at
R
it can be deposited and is of the same grade as is transported.
eep
ad
Pr
But in practice, all these conditions can never be satisfied. And therefore
artificial channels can never be in “true regime” They can either be in
“initial regime” or “final regime”
P)
B. Initial regime:-
M
TE
1. Bed slope of a channel varies,
,D
2. Cross-section or wetted perimeter remains unaffected.
r
re
tu
ec
C. Final regime:- All the variables such as perimeter, depth, slope etc. are
(L

equally free to vary and achieve permanent stability, called final regime.
re
ho
at
R
Permanent regime:- Rigid boundary canals, whose bed and banks are
ep
made with non-erodibe materials.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Siphon aqueduct:- The hydraulic structure in which irrigation canal is
,Dr
passing over the drainage, but the drainage water cannot pass clearly
re
tu
below the canal is known as siphon aqueduct.
ec
(L
In siphon aqueduct the H.F.L. of the drain is above the bed of the canal.

re
ho
at
Canal siphon:- If two canals cross other and one of the canals is siphoned
R
ep
under the other, then the hydraulic structure at crossing is called canal
e
ad
siphon.
Pr
In canal siphon the F.S.L. of the canal is much above the bed level to the
drain.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 213) A 4-hour rainfall in a catchment of 250 km²
P)
produces rainfall depths of 6.2 cm and 5.0 cm in successive
M
TE
2-hour unit periods. Assuming the ∅ index of the soil to be
,Dr
1.2 cm/hour, the run-off volume in ha-m will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 16
ho
at
B. 22
R
ep
C. 1600
e
ad
D. 2200
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 214) A 3-hour unit hydrograph (UH) differs from a 6-
P)
hour UH, for any catchment, in that
M
TE
,Dr
A. Both the time of rise and the peak ordinate for the former are
re
tu
less than that for the latter
ec
(L

B. Both the time of rise and the peak ordinate for the former are
re
ho
greater than that of the letter
at
R
C. The time of rise is less but the peak ordinate is greater for the
eep
former as compared to that of the latter

ad
Pr
D. The time of rise is greater but the peak ordinate is less for the
former as compared to that of the latter
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 215) As per the recommendations of the ISI (NBS), the
M
TE
shape of a lined canal is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Trapezoidal
(L

re
B. Semicircular
ho
at
C. Parabolic
R
ep
D. Elliptic
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
1. It is easier to build. As trapezoidal cross section does not need
r
re
vertical walls made of concrete and the lining can be easily done.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. The trapezoidal section offers least frictional resistance.
ho
at
R
ep
3. It is easy to maintain.
e
ad
Etc.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
B. Drip irrigation is used for Sandy soil.
TE
,Dr
C. Consumptive water use is water removed from available
re
tu
supplies without return to a water resource system (e.g., water
ec
(L

used in manufacturing, agriculture, and food preparation that is
re
ho
not returned to a stream, river, or water treatment plant).
at
R
ep
D. The Parshall flume is an economical and accurate way of

e
ad
Pr
measuring the flow of water in open channels and non-full

pipes.
P)
M
Q. 218) A tropical cyclone in the northern hemisphere is a
TE
,D
zone of
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Low pressure with clockwise wind

re
ho
B. Low pressure with anticlockwise wind
at
R
C. High pressure with clockwise wind
eep
D. High pressure with anticlockwise wind

ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
A cyclone's center (often known in a mature tropical cyclone as
tu
ec
the eye), is the area of lowest atmospheric pressure in the region
(L

re
because of the Coriolis effect, the wind flow around a large
ho
at
cyclone is anticlockwise in the Northern Hemisphere and
R
ep
clockwise in the Southern Hemisphere.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 219) If one wants to be 90% sure that the design flood
P)
M
in a dam project will not occur during the design life
TE
,D
period of 100 years, the recurrence interval for such a
r
re
tu
flood would be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. About 90 years
at
B. Equal to 100 years R
eep
C. About 110 years

ad
Pr
D. Roughly 1000 years

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 220) A channel designed by Lacey’s theory has a mean
M
TE
velocity of one m/s. The silt factor is unity. The hydraulic
,Dr
mean radius will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 2.5 m
ho
at
B. 2 m
R
ep
C. 1 m
e
ad
D. 0.5 m
Pr
Answer A
Lacey’s channel design procedure:-
P)
1. Calculate the velocity from equation, V = (Qf²/140)1/6
M
TE
Where, Q in cumecs, V in m/sec, f is silt factor, f = 1.76 √mr
,D
where mr is mean particle diameter of silt in mm
r
re
tu
ec
2. Workout the hydraulic mean depth, R = 5/2(V²/f) = 5/2(1×1/1) = 2.5 m
(L

Where, V in m/sec and R in metre
re
ho
at
3. Computer area of channel section, A= Q/V
R
ep
e
4. Compute wetted perimeter, P = 4.75 √Q

ad
Pr
5. Knowing these value, the channel section is known and finally the bed slop S is
determined by the equation, S = f5/3/3340Q1/6
P)
Q. 221) Which one of the following constitutes the basic
M
TE
assumption of unit-hydrograph theory?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Non-linear response and time invariance
(L

re
B. Non-linear time invariance and linear response
ho
at
C. Linear response and linear time invariance
R
ep
D. Time invariance and linear response
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Time Invariance and linear response are the two basic
ec
(L

assumptions of UH-theory.
re
ho
Other assumptions are:-
at
R
1. Rainfall excess occurs uniformly over the basin.
ep
e
2. The distribution of storm over the basin is uniform.

ad
Pr
Q. 222) The following parameters relate to the design of weirs on
permeable foundations:
P)
M
1. Scour depth
TE
,D
2. Exit gradient
r
re
3. Uplift pressure
tu
ec
4. Unbalanced head
(L

re
Design of the downstream end pile of the weir depends upon
ho
at
A. 1 and 2 R
eep
ad
B. 1 and 4
Pr
C. 2 and 3
D. 3 and 4
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Design principles for weirs on permeable foundation:-
,Dr
re
tu
(i) To counteract uplift pressure it is necessary to provide suitable
ec
(L
thickness of the floor at different points.

re
ho
at
R
(ii) The exit gradient can be kept within permissible limit by
ep
providing suitable depth of the sheet pile at downstream end of
e
ad
the floor.
Pr
P)
Q. 223) Given that the base period is 100 days and the
M
TE
duty of the canal is 1000 hectares per cumec, the depth of
,Dr
water will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.864 cm
ho
at
B. 8.64 cm
R
ep
C. 86.4 cm
e
ad
D. 864 cm
Pr
Answer C
P)
Duty is the area of land that can be irrigated with a unit volume of water
M
TE
supplied across the base period.
,D
Delta is the total depth of water required to raise a crop over a unit area.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 224) A pumped storage plant is a
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. High head plant
ec
(L
B. Run-off river plant

re
ho
C. Peak load plant
at
D. Base load plant R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
The hydel plants can be classified according to their function as follows:
P)
M
1. Runoff river plants (Low head scheme, head < 15 m):-
TE
Which utilize the river flow having no pondage at its upstream. A weir or barrage
,D
is constructed across the river.
r
re
tu
ec
2. Storage plants (Medium head scheme, head between 15 to 60 m) :-
(L

Such a plant has a storage reservoir at its upstream. A dam is constructed across
re
ho
the river and water is stored during the periods of excess supply.
at
R
ep
3. Pumped storage plants:-
e
The scheme of a storage reservoir at a higher level, and a turbine-cum-pump

ad
Pr
installation. The scheme is used to generate power only during the peak hours of
demand. During the peak demand, water flows from the reservoir to the turbine
and power is generated.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
If basin or catchment area contains more than one raingauges station,
P)
M
the computation of average precipitation or rainfall may be done by the
TE
following methods
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(226 to 240)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Irrigation
ho
at
R
ep
&
e
ad
Pr
Hydrology
P)
M
Q. 226) Depth-Area-Duration curves of precipitation are
TE
,D
drwan as
r
re
tu
ec
A. Minimising envelopes through the appropriate data points
(L

re
B. Maximizing envelopes through the appropriate data points
ho
at
C. Best fit mean curves through the appropriate data points
R
ep
D. Best fit mean straight lines through the appropriate data
e
ad
points
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The maximum depth area curve for a
TE
given duration D is prepared by assuming
,D
the area distribution of rainfall for smaller
r
re
duration to be similar to the total storm.
tu
ec
The procedure is then repeated for
(L

different storms and the envelope curve
re
ho
of maximum depth area for duration D is
at
obtained. A similar procedure for various
R
ep
values of D results in a family of envelope
e
curves of maximum depth vs area,

ad
Pr
duration as the third parameter. These

curves are called DAD curves.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 228) The following four hydrological features have to be estimated or
taken as inputs before one can compute the flood hydrograph at any
P)
catchment outlet:
M
TE
1. Unit hydrograph
,D
2. Rainfall hydrograph
r
re
3. Infiltration index
tu
ec
4. Base flow
(L

The correct order in which they have to be employed in the computation
re
ho
is
at
R
ep
A. 1,2,3,4
e
ad
B. 2,1,4,3
Pr
C. 2,3,1,4
D. 4,1,3,2
Answer C
P)
M
First determine the rainfall hydrograph
TE
,D
and then infiltration index. The
r
re
effective rainfall can be determined
tu
ec
from the rainfall hydrograph and
(L

infiltration index. Now multiply the
re
ho
ordinates of unit hydrograph by
at
R
effective rainfall. This will give direct
ep
runoff hydrograph (DRH). Finally add
e
ad
base flow to the DRH and flood

Pr
hydrograph can be obtained.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 230) The Standard Project Flood is
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Derived from the probable maximum precipitation in
r
re
tu
the region
ec
(L
B. Derived from the severemost metrological conditions

re
ho
anywhere in the country
at
R
C. The flood with return period of 1000 years
eep
D. The same as the probable maximum flood

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B*
,Dr
re
tu
The flood that would result from a severe combination of
ec
(L
meteorological and hydrological factors that are reasonably

re
ho
applicable to the region. Extremely rare combinations of factors
at
are excluded. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
A. Canal fall or drop is an irrigation
P)
M
structure constructed across a
TE
canal to lower down its bed level
,D
to maintain the designed slope.
r
re
tu
ec
B. Canal Escape:- It is a side channel constructed to remove surplus water from
(L

an irrigation channel (main canal, branch canal, or distributary etc.)
re
ho
at
C. A cross regulator is a structure constructed across a canal to regulate the
R
ep
water level in the canal upstream of itself.
e
ad
Pr
D. A canal outlet or a module is a small structure built at the head of the water
course so as to connect it with a minor or a distributary channel. It acts as a
connecting link between the system manager and the farmers.
P)
M
Q. 232) For medium silt whose average grain size is 0.16
TE
,D
mm, Lacey’s silt factor is likely to be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.30

re
ho
B. 0.45
at
C. 0.70 R
eep
D. 1.32
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 234) Mean precipitation over an area is best obtained
TE
,D
from gauged amounts by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Arithmetic mean method

re
ho
B. Thiessen method
at
R
C. Linearly interpolated ishoyetal method
eep
D. Orographically weighted ishoyetal method.

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Isohyets are contours of equal rainfall.
ec
(L

The orographically weighted isohyets are prepared by tracing
re
ho
paper for mountainous areas and therefore they are more
at
R
accurate than linearly interpolated isohyets.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 235) The following steps are involved in arriving at a unit hydrograph:
P)
1. Estimating the surface runoff in depth
M
TE
2. Estimating the surface runoff in volume
,D
3. Separation of base flow
r
re
4. Dividing surface runoff ordinates by depth of runoff.
tu
ec
(L

The correct sequence of these steps is:
re
ho
at
A. 3,2,1,4 R
ep
B. 2,3,4,1
e
ad
C. 3,1,2,4
Pr
D. 4,3,2,1
Answer A
P)
M
1. Separate the baseflow from the observed streamflow hydrograph in
TE
order to obtain the Direct Runoff Hydrograph (DRH).
,Dr
re
tu
2. Compute the volume of Direct Runoff (VDRH).
ec
(L

re
3. Surface runoff in depth = VDRH/Abasin
ho
at
R
4. Obtain a Unit Hydrograph by normalizing the DRH.
ep
e
ad
Pr
5. Normalizing implies dividing the ordinates of the DRH by the Surface

runoff in depth.
P)
Q. 236) Probability of a 10-year flood to occur at least
M
TE
once in the next 4 years is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 25%
(L

re
B. 35%
ho
at
C. 50%
R
ep
D. 65%
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 237) The following data were recorded from an irrigated field:
1. Field capacity:20%
P)
M
2. Permanent wilting point:10%
TE
3. Permissible depletion of available soil moisture:50%
,Dr
4. Dry unit weight of soil:1500kgf/m³
re
tu
5. Effective rainfall:25mm
ec
(L
Based on these data, the net irrigation requirement per metre depth of

re
soil will be
ho
at
R
ep
A. 75 mm
e
ad
B. 125 mm
Pr
C. 50 mm
D. 25 mm
Answer C
P)
Field Capacity:- The maximum quantity of water which a soil can retain
M
against the force of gravity is known as field capacity.
TE
,D
The quantity of water greater than the field capacity simply passes away.
r
re
tu
Permanent wilting Point:- is the moisture content at which the moisture is
ec
(L

no longer available in sufficient quantity so that the plants can sustain.
re
ho
Even though the soil contains some moisture but it was so held by the
at
soil that roots of plants cannot uptake it and results in wilting of plant.
R
ep
e
ad
Available water:- The difference between two moisture contents ( field

Pr
capacity and permanent wilting point ) is known as available water.

It is the moisture content which is available for plants.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 238) Depth-area-duration curves would seem to resemble
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Arcs of a circle concave upwards with duration increasing
r
re
outward
tu
ec
B. First quadrant limbs of hyperbolae with duration increasing
(L

re
outward
ho
C. Third quadrant limbs of hyperbolae with duration decreasing
at
outward R
ep
e
ad
D. First quadrant limbs of hyperbolae with duration decreasing

Pr
outward
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 239) The spacing of tile drains to relieve waterlogged
TE
,D
land is directly proportional to the
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Depth of drain below the ground surface

re
ho
B. Depth of impervious strata from the drain
at
R
C. Depth of drain below the water level
ep
e
D. Coefficient of permeability of the soil to be drained

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Tile drainage is a type of drainage system that removes excess
ec
(L

water from soil below its surface.
re
ho
The spacing of tile drains to relieve waterlogged land is directly
at
R
proportional to the coefficient of permeability of the soil.
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 240) The maximum permissible suction lift for
TE
,D
centrifugal pump in practice (at sea level and at 30°C) is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 12 m

re
ho
B. 10 m
at
C. 6 m R
ep
e
D. 3 m
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

(241 to 248 END)
P)
M
TE
LAST PART
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Irrigation

re
ho
at
& R
eep
ad
Hydrology
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 242) In a flow mass curve study, the demand line drawn
P)
M
from a ridge does not intersect the mass curve again. This
TE
,D
implies that
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. The reservoir is not full at the beginning

re
ho
B. The storage is not adequate
at
R
C. The demand cannot be met by the inflow as the
eep
reservoir will not refill

ad
Pr
D. The reservoir is wasting water by spill

Answer C
P)
M
Mass Curve:- It is a plot of cumulative volume of water that can be stored
TE
,D
from a stream flow versus time in days, weeks or months.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 244) Consider the following statements:
1. A 100-year flood discharge is greater than a 50-year flood
P)
M
discharge.
TE
,D
2. 90% dependable flow is greater than 50% dependable flow.
r
re
3. Evaporation from salt-water surface is less than that from
tu
ec
fresh-water surface.
(L

re
Which of these statements are correct?
ho
at
A. 1 and 2 R
ep
e
ad
B. 2 and 3
Pr
C. 1 and 3
D. 1,2 and 3
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Evaporation from salt-water surface is less than that from fresh-
(L

re
water surface because vapour pressure of salt-water is less than
ho
at
that of fresh-water.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 245) If a 4-hour unit hydrograph of a certain basin has a
P)
M
peak ordinate of 80m³/sec, the peak ordinate of a 2-hour
TE
,D
unit hydrograph for the same basin will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Equal to 80m³/sec

re
ho
B. Greater than 80m³/sec
at
C. Less than 80m³/sec R
ep
e
D. Between 40m³/sec to 80m³/sec

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
With the reduction of unit hydrograph duration, 1 cm excess
ec
(L

rainfall will occur in reduced period. So peak ordinate of UH will
re
ho
increase and time base will decrease. Thus the peak ordinate of
at
R
2 hr UH will be greater than 80 m³/s
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q 247) A culvert is design for a peak flow Qp on the basis
P)
M
of rational formula. If a storm of the same intensity as
TE
,D
used in the design and twice the duration occurs, then the
r
re
tu
resulting peak discharge will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Qp
at
B. Qp/2 R
eep
C. √2Qp
ad
Pr
D. 2Qp
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
THE END
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
🙏☺
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(01 to 15)
at
ho
re
Strength
(L
Materials
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 1) Modulus of rigidity is defined as the ratio of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain
ec
(L
B. Shear stress to shear strain

re
ho
C. Stress to strain
at
R
D. Stress to volumetric strain
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
B. Within the elastic limit, the shear stress is proportional to the
P)
shear strain. Shear stress ∝ Shear strain
M
TE
τ ∝ ф
,D
τ/ф = G
r
re
tu
Where, G or C or N = modulus of rigidity or shear modulus
ec
(L
Elastic limit:- deformation entirely disappears on the removal of force.

re
ho
at
C. Material is loaded, within its elastic limit, the stress is
ep
R
proportional to strain.
e
ad
σ∝ε
Pr
σ =Eε
Where, E = modulus of elasticity or Young’s modulus
D. When a body is subjected to three mutually perpendicular
stresses, of equal intensity, the ratio of direct stress to the
P)
M
corresponding volumetric strain is known as bulk modulus.
TE
,Dr
re
K = Direct stress / Volumetric strain
tu
ec
(L

re
K = σ/(δV/V)
ho
at
Where, K = Bulk modulus R
ep
e
ad
δV = Change in volume
Pr
V = Original volume
Q. 2) If the Young’s modulus of elasticity of material is
P)
twice it’s modulus of rigidity, then the poisson’s ratio of
M
TE
the material is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. -1
(L

re
B. -0.5
ho
at
C. 0.5
R
ep
D. Zero
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
If body is stressed within its elastic limit, the ratio of lateral strain
P)
to the linear or longitudinal strain is called Poisson’s ratio.
M
TE
Denoted by u or 1/m (-1 to 0.5)
,Dr
re
tu
Relationship between E, G, K and u
ec
(L
E = 2G (1+u) and E = 3K (1-u)

re
ho
at
Given, Young‘s modulus (E) = 2 × modulus of rigidity (G)
ep
R
e
ad
2G = 2G (1+u)
Pr
1=1+u
u=0
P)
M
Q. 3) limit of Proportionality depends upon
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Area of Cross section
ec
(L
B. Type of loading

re
ho
C. Type of material
at
D. All of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
The limit of proportionality is the is the point beyond which
tu
ec
Hooke's law is no longer true when stretching a material.
(L

re
The elastic limit is the point beyond which the material you are
ho
at
stretching becomes permanently stretched so that the material
R
ep
does not return to its original length when the force is removed.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 4) For an isotropic, homogenous and elastic material
P)
M
obeying Hooke’s law, number of independent elastic
TE
,D
constants is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 2

re
ho
B. 3
at
C. 9 R
eep
D. 1
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Number of independent elastic constants
(L

re
Isotropic, homogenous and elastic material = 2 (E and G)
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 5) In a thin cylindrical shell, the ratio of longitudinal
M
TE
stress to hoop stress is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.5
(L

re
B. 1
ho
at
C. 2
R
ep
D. 4
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 6) If all the dimensions of a prismatic bar are doubled,
P)
M
then the maximum stress produced in it under its own
TE
,D
weight will
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Decrease

re
ho
B. Remain unchanged
at
C. Increase to two times R
ep
e
D. Increase to four times

ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 7) The relationship between Young’s modulus of
P)
M
elasticity E, bulk modulus K and poisson’s ratio u is given
TE
,D
by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. E = 2K (1-2u)

re
ho
B. E = 3K (1+u)
at
C. E = 3K (1-2u) R
eep
D. E = 2K (1+u)
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Relationship between E, G, K and u
(L

re
ho
at
E = 2G (1+u) and E = 3K (1-u)
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 8) Limiting values of Poisson’s ratio are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. -1 and 0.5
ec
(L
B. -1 and -0.5

re
ho
C. 1 and -0.5
at
D. 0 and 0.5 R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 9) The elongation of a conical bar under its own weight
M
TE
is equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. That of a Prismatic bar of same length
(L

re
B. One-half that of a Prismatic bar of same length
ho
at
C. One third that of a Prismatic bar of same length
R
ep
D. One fourth that of a Prismatic bar of same length
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 10) If a material has identical properties in all directions,
M
TE
it is said to be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Homogenous
(L

re
B. Isotropic
ho
at
C. Elastic
R
ep
D. Orthotropic
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
A material is called homogenous when it have same elastic
M
properties (E, G, K, u) at any point in a given direction.
TE
,Dr
re
A material is called isotropic when it have same elastic properties
tu
ec
in any direction at a given point.
(L

re
ho
at
A material is called anisotropic when it have different elastic
R
ep
properties in a different direction at a given point.
e
ad
Pr
A material is called orthotropic when it have different elastic

properties at any point in perpendicular direction.
Q. 11) Two bars of different materials are of the same size
P)
and are subjected to same tensile forces. If the bars have
M
TE
unit elongations in the ratio of 4 : 7, then the ratio of
,Dr
moduli of elasticity of the two materials is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 7:4
ho
at
B. 4:7
R
ep
C. 4 : 17
e
ad
D. 16 : 49
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 12) A prismatic bar of volume V is subjected to a tensile
P)
force in longitudinal directions. If poisson’s ratio of the
M
TE
material is u and longitudinal strain is e, then the final
,Dr
volume of the bar becomes
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. (1+e) (1-u)² V
ho
at
B. (1-e)² (1+ue) V
R
ep
C. (1+e) (1-ue)² V
e
ad
D. (1-ue)³ V
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 13) If a composite bar of Steel and copper is heated,
M
TE
then the copper bar will be under
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Tension
(L

re
B. Compression
ho
at
C. Shear
R
ep
D. Torsion
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Increase or decrease in length due to temperature, δl = l α t
M
TE
Where, l = original length of body
,D
α = coefficient of thermal expansion
r
re
tu
t = rise or fall of temperature
ec
(L

re
ho
If the ends of the body are fixed to rigid supports, so that it’s
at
R
expansion is prevented, then compressive strain induced in the
ep
body is
e
ad
Pr
Strain = δl/l = l α t/l = α t

And Thermal stress = strain × E = α t E
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 14) Effective length of a weld is equal to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Overall length-weld size
ec
(L
B. Overall length-throat thickness

re
ho
C. Overall length-2×weld size
at
R
D. Overall length-2×throat thickness
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
For design purpose, the effective length of a weld is taken as the
TE
,D
actual length of the weld minus twice the size of the weld.
r
re
tu
ec
Size of weld: - The minimum length of the leg of a weld.
(L

re
ho
at
Legs of the weld: - The sides
R
ep
containing the right angle.
e
ad
In fig. 30.4, the sides AB and BC

Pr
are called the legs of the weld.

P)
M
Q. 15) Size of a right angled fillet weld is given by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.707×throat thickness
ec
(L
B. 0.414×throat thickness

re
ho
C. 2.0×throat thickness
at
D. Throat thickness R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(16 to 30)
at
ho
re
Strength
(L
Materials
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 16) The effective length of a fillet weld designed to
M
TE
transmit axial load shall not be less than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2 × size of weld
(L

re
B. 4 × size of weld
ho
at
C. 6 × size of weld
R
ep
D. 10 × size of weld
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Fillet weld with an effective length less than 4s or less than 40
mm should not be used to carry load.
P)
M
Where, s = size of weld
TE
,Dr
re
Size of fillet weld:- The minimum length of the leg of a weld.
tu
ec
Legs of the weld:- The sides containing the right angle. In fig.
(L

30.4, the sides AB and BC are called the legs of the weld.
re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 17) Size of fillet weld with unequal legs is equal to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Smaller leg length
ec
(L
B. Longer leg length

re
ho
C. Throat thickness
at
R
D. Average of smaller and longer leg lengths
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 18) Weakest section in a fillet weld is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Throat of the fillet
ec
(L
B. Smaller side

re
ho
C. Side parallel to force
at
R
D. Side perpendicular to force
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 19) Effective throat thickness of a fillet weld is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.707×size of weld
ec
(L
B. 1.414×size of weld

re
ho
C. A function of the angle between fusion faces
at
R
D. Equal to the side of the fillet
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 22) According to Unwin’s formula, the diameter of rivet
M
TE
in mm to suit the t mm thickness of plate is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6t
(L

re
B. 6√t
ho
at
C. 1.9t
R
ep
D. 1.5t+4
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Diameter of rivets. using Unwin's empirical formula
tu
ec
(L

re
d=6√t
ho
at
R
ep
when t is greater than 8 mm
e
ad
Pr
23) A flat carrying a pull of 690 KN is connected to a
gusset plate using rivets. If the pulls required to shear the
P)
M
rivet, the crush the rivet and to tear the plate per pitch
TE
,D
length are 68.5 KN, 46 KN and and 69 KN respectively,
r
re
tu
then the number of rivets required is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 10
at
B. 12 R
eep
C. 15
ad
Pr
D. 20
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 24) If the rivet value is 16.8 KN and force in the number
P)
M
is 16.3 KN, then the number of rivets required for the
TE
,D
connection of the member to a gusset plate is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1

re
ho
B. 2
at
C. 3 R
ep
e
D. 4
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 26) When a member is subjected to axial tensile load,
M
TE
the greatest normal stress is equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Half the maximum shear stress
(L

re
B. Maximum shear stress
ho
at
C. Twice the maximum shear stress
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 27) At a point in a strained body carrying two unequal
P)
unlike principal stresses P1 and P2 (P1 > P2), then
M
TE
maximum shear stress is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. P1/2
(L

re
B. P2/2
ho
at
C. (P1-P2)/2
R
ep
D. (P1+P2)/2
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(31 to 45)
at
ho
re
Strength
(L
Materials
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 32) If a prismatic member with area of cross section A is
P)
subjected to a tensile load P, then the maximum shear
M
TE
stress and its inclination with the direction of load
,Dr
respectively are
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. P/2 and 45°
ho
at
B. P/2A and 45°
R
ep
C. P/2A and 60°
e
ad
D. P/A and 30°

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 33) The sum of normal stresses is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Constant
ec
(L
B. Variable

re
ho
C. Dependent on the planes
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 34) The radius of Mohr’s circle for two equal unlike
M
TE
principal stresses of magnitude P is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. P
(L

re
B. P/2
ho
at
C. Zero
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 35) Shear stress on principal planes is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Zero
ec
(L
B. Maximum

re
ho
C. Minimum
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
At any point in strained material, there are three planes, mutually
tu
ec
perpendicular to each other, which carry direct stresses only, and
(L

re
no shear stress.
ho
These particular planes, which have no shear stress, are known
at
as principal planes. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 36) The state of pure shear stress is produced by
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Tension in one direction and equal compression in
tu
ec
perpendicular direction
(L

re
B. Equal tension in two directions at right angles
ho
at
C. Equal compression in two directions at right angles
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 38) According to Rankine’s hypothesis, the criterion of
M
TE
failure of a brittle material is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Maximum principal stress
(L

re
B. Maximum shear stress
ho
at
C. Maximum strain energy
R
ep
D. Maximum shear strain energy
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Maximum Normal Stress Criterion:-
M
The maximum stress criterion, also known as the normal stress,
TE
,D
Coulomb, or Rankine criterion, is often used to predict the failure
r
re
of brittle materials.
tu
ec
The maximum stress criterion states that failure occurs when the
(L

re
maximum (normal) principal stress reaches either
ho
at
the uniaxial tension strength st, or the uniaxial compression
R
ep
strength sc,
e
ad
-sc < {s1, s2} < st

Pr
where, s1 and s2 are the principal stresses for 2D stress.

P)
M
Q. 39) Maximum bending moment in a beam occurs where
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Deflection is zero
ec
(L
B. Shear force is maximum

re
ho
C. Shear force is minimum
at
R
D. Shear force changes sign
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 41) Rate of change of bending moment is equal to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Shear force
ec
(L
B. Deflection

re
ho
C. Slope
at
D. Rate of loading R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Rate of change of Bending Moment is equal to Shear Force (SF).
(L

re
ho
at
Rate of change of Shear Force is equal to Constant.
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 42) The diagram showing the variation of axial load
M
TE
along the span is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Shear force diagram
(L

re
B. Bending moment diagram
ho
at
C. Thrust diagram
R
ep
D. Influence line diagram
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The graphical representation of variation of axial load

re
ho
along the span is called as axial thrust diagram.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 43) The difference in ordinate of the shear curve
P)
M
between any two sections is equal to the area under
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Load curve between these two sections
ec
(L
B. Shear curve between these two sections

re
ho
C. Bending moment curve between these two sections
at
R
D. Load curve between these two sections plus
eep
concentrated loads applied between the sections

ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 44) The variation of the bending moment in the portion
M
TE
of a beam carrying linearly varying load is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Linear
(L

re
B. Parabolic
ho
at
C. Cubic
R
ep
D. Constant
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 45) The maximum bending moment due to a moving
M
TE
load on a fixed ended beam occurs
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. At a support
(L

re
B. Always at the midspan
ho
at
C. Under the load only
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(46 to 60)
at
ho
re
Strength
(L
Materials
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 46) A cantilever beam AB of length L carries a
P)
concentrated load W at its midspan C. If the free end B is
M
TE
supported on rigid prop, then there is a point of
,Dr
contraflexure
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Between A and C
ho
at
B. Between C and B
R
ep
C. One between A and C and other between C and B
e
ad
D. Nowhere in the beam

Pr
Answer A
Point of contraflexure:- where the bending moment changes its
P)
sign from negative to positive or vice versa.
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 47) A prismatic beam fixed at both ends carries a
P)
M
uniformly distributed load. The ratio of bending moment
TE
,D
at the supports to the bending moment at midspan is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.5

re
ho
B. 1.0
at
C. 1.5 R
ep
e
D. 2.0
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 48) The relationship between the radius of curvature R,
M
TE
bending moment M and flexural rigidity EI is give by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. R = M/EI
(L

re
B. M = EI/R
ho
at
C. EI = R/M
R
ep
D. E = MI/R
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 49) A beam of overall length L with equal overhangs on
both sides carries a uniformly distributed load over the
P)
M
entire length. To have numerically equal bending moments
TE
,D
at centre of the beam and it supports, the distance
r
re
tu
between the supports should be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 0.277 L
at
B. 0.403 L R
ep
e
C. 0.586 L
ad
Pr
D. 0.707 L
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 50) A prismatic beam of length L and fixed at both ends
P)
M
carries a uniformly distributed load. The distance of points
TE
,D
of contraflexure from either end is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.207 L

re
ho
B. 0.211 L
at
C. 0.277 L R
ep
e
D. 0.25 L
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 51) A simply supported beam of length L carries a load
P)
varying uniformly from zero at left end to maximum at
M
TE
right end. The maximum bending moment occurs at a
,Dr
distance of
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1/√3 from left end
ho
at
B. 1/3 from left end
R
ep
C. 1/√3 form right end
e
ad
D. 1/3 from right end

Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 52) If a cantilever beam carries a uniformly distributed
P)
M
load over its entire length, then shapes of shear-force
TE
,D
diagram and bending-moment diagram respectively are
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Quadratic parabola and cubic parabola

re
ho
B. Triangle and quadratic parabola
at
C. Rectangle and triangle R
ep
e
D. Quadratic parabola and triangle

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 53) A portion of a beam between two sections is said to
M
TE
be in pure bending when there is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Constant bending moment and zero shear force
(L

re
B. Constant shear force and zero bending moment
ho
at
C. Constant bending moment and constant shear force
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 54) The ratio of width to depth of a strongest beam that
M
TE
can be cut out of a cylindrical log of wood is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1/2
(L

re
B. 1/√2
ho
at
C. 1/3
R
ep
D. 2/3
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Where a single beam
M
TE
is cut from a log or
,D
bolt, maximum
r
re
tu
breaking load is shown
ec
(L
to be achieved where

re
ho
beam depth is a
at
constant multiple of R
ep
beam width
e
ad
Pr
d = √2 w
P)
Q. 55) Of the several prismatic beams of equal lengths, the
M
TE
strongest in flexure is the one having maximum
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Moment of inertia
(L

re
B. Section modulus
ho
at
C. Tensile strength
R
ep
D. Area of cross-section
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 56) Of the two prismatic beams of same material,
P)
length and flexural strength, one is circular and other is
M
TE
square in cross section. The ratio of weights of circular and
,Dr
a square beams is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1.118
ho
at
B. 1.342
R
ep
C. 1.000
e
ad
D. 0.793
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 57) A flitched beam consists of a wooden joist 150 mm
wide and 300 mm deep strengthened by steel plates 10
P)
M
mm thick and 300 mm deep one on either side of the joist.
TE
,D
If modulus of elasticity of steel is 20 times that of wood,
r
re
tu
then the width of equivalent wooden section will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 150 mm
at
B. 350 mm R
eep
C. 500 mm
ad
Pr
D. 550 mm
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 59) A beam of rectangular cross-section is 100 mm wide
P)
and 200 mm deep. If the section is subjected to a shear
M
TE
force of 20 KN, then the maximum shear stress in the
,Dr
section is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1 N/mm²
ho
at
B. 1.125 N/mm²
R
ep
C. 1.33 N/mm²
e
ad
D. 1.5 N/mm²
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(61 to 70)
at
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
SSC-JE, AE(PSC), RRB-JE etc.
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 61) A beam of square cross section with side 100 mm is
P)
M
placed with one diagonal vertical. If the shear force acting
TE
,D
on the section is 10 kN, the maximum shear stress is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1 N/mm²

re
ho
B. 1.125 N/mm²
at
C. 2 N/mm² R
ep
e
D. 2.25 N/mm²
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 62) A prismatic bar when subjected to pure bending
M
TE
assumes the shape of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Catenary
(L

re
B. Cubic parabola
ho
at
C. Quadratic parabola
R
ep
D. Arc of circle
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Pure bending is a condition of stress where a bending moment is applied
TE
to a beam without the simultaneous presence of axial, shear, or torsional
,D
forces.
r
re
tu
ec
Pure bending occurs only under a constant bending moment (M)
(L

re
ho
In reality, a state of pure bending does not practically exist, because such
at
R
a state needs an absolutely weightless member. The state of pure
ep
e
bending is an approximation made to derive formulas.

ad
Pr
A prismatic bar when subjected to pure bending assumes the shape of

Arc of circle.
Q. 63) A beam of triangular cross section is placed with its
P)
M
base horizontal. The maximum shear intensity in the
TE
,D
section will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. At the neutral axis

re
ho
B. At the base
at
C. Above the neutral axis R
ep
e
D. Below the neutral axis

ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 64) A beam of I-section 600 mm deep and 200 mm
P)
wide has flanges 25 mm thick and web 20 mm thick. If the
M
TE
shear stress in the web at the junction of flange and web is
,Dr
q, then the shear stress in the flange at the junction is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 10 q
ho
at
B. q
R
ep
C. 0.5 q
e
ad
D. 0.1 q
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 65) A beam of uniform strength has at every cross
M
TE
section same
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Bending moment
(L

re
B. Bending stress
ho
at
C. Deflection
R
ep
D. Stiffness
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
In general, beams have uniform cross section throughout their
,D
length.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

When a beam is suitably designed such that the extreme fibres
re
ho
are loaded to the maximum permissble stress p max by varying the
at
R
cross section it will be known as a beam of uniform strength.
ep
e
ad
Pr
A beam of uniform strength has at every cross section, same

Bending stress
c. C
a. A
b. B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
d. None of the above

at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Shear Center is a point through which if the external load passes,
TE
,D
then there will not be any twisting of the section.
r
re
In other words, section will only be subjected to bending. It won't
tu
ec
be subjected to Torsion.
(L

re
In general, Shear center lies on the axis of symmetry.
ho
at
R
ep
The given channel is un-symmetrical about loading (vertical) axis.
e
ad
If the transverse load is applied through centroid (A) torsion also

Pr
develops. To avoid torsion transverse load must be applied

through shear centre ‘B’.
P)
M
Q. 67) For no torsion, the plane of bending should
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Be parallel to one of the principal axis
ec
(L
B. Pass through shear centre of section

re
ho
C. Pass through neutral axis of the section
at
R
D. Pass through centre of gravity of the section
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 68) Two beams, one of circular cross section and other
P)
M
of square cross section, have equal areas of cross section.
TE
,D
If subjected to bending
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Circular section is more economical

re
ho
B. Square section is more economical
at
R
C. Both sections are equally strong
eep
D. Both sections are equally stiff

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
From the flexure formula fb = My / I f b = My / I
TE
It can be seen that the bending stress at the neutral axis, where y=0, is zero and
,D
increases linearly outwards.
r
re
tu
ec
This means that for a rectangular or circular section a large portion of the cross
(L

section near the middle section is understressed.
re
ho
at
For steel beams or composite beams,
R
ep
instead of adopting the rectangular
e
shape, the area may be arranged so as

ad
Pr
to give more area on the outer fiber

and maintaining the same overall depth,
and saving a lot of weight.
Q. 69) The portion, which should be removed from top
P)
M
and bottom of a circular cross section of diameter d in
TE
,D
order to obtain maximum section modulus, is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.01 d

re
ho
B. 0.1 d
at
C. 0.011 d R
eep
D. 0.11 d
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
The section modulus of the cross-sectional shape is of significant
,Dr
importance in designing beams. It is a direct measure of
re
tu
the strength of the beam. A beam that has a larger section
ec
(L

modulus than another, will be stronger and capable of supporting
re
ho
greater loads.
at
R
ep
0.011d portion should be removed from top and bottom of a

e
ad
Pr
circular cross section of diameter d in order to obtain maximum

section modulus.
Q. 70) A beam of overall length l rests on two simple
supports with equal overhangs on both sides. Two equal
P)
M
loads act at the free ends. If the deflection at the centre of
TE
,D
the beam is the same as it either end, then the length of
r
re
tu
either overhang is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 0.152 l
at
B. 0.207 l R
eep
C. 0.252 l
ad
Pr
D. 0.277 l
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(71 to 80)
at
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
SSC-JE, AE(PSC), RRB-JE etc
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 71) A beam ABC rests on simple supports at A and B with BC as an
overhang. D is centre of span AB. If in the first case a concentrated load P
P)
M
acts at C while in the second case load P acts at D, then the
TE
,Dr
A. Deflection at D in the first case will be equal to the deflection at C in
re
tu
the second case
ec
(L
B. Deflection at C in the first case is equal to the deflection at D in the

re
second case
ho
at
C. Deflection at D in the first case will always be smaller than the
R
ep
deflection at C in the second test
e
ad
D. Deflection at D in the first case will always be greater than the

Pr
deflection at C in the second

Answer A
P)
Clerk-Maxwell's reciprocal theorem state that in a linearly elastic
M
TE
structure, the deflection at any point A due to a load applied at
,D
some other point B will be equal to the deflection at B when the
r
re
tu
same load is applied at A.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 72) Slope at the end of a simply supported beam of
P)
M
span l with uniformly distributed load w/unit length over
TE
,D
the entire span is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Wl²/16EI

re
ho
B. Wl³/16EI
at
C. Wl³/24EI R
eep
D. Wl²/24EI
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 73) If the deflection at the free end of a uniformly
P)
loaded cantilever beam is 15 mm and the slope of the
M
TE
deflection curve at the free end is 0.02 radian, then the
,Dr
length of the beam is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.8 m
ho
at
B. 1 m
R
ep
C. 1.2 m
e
ad
D. 1.5 m
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 74) A simply supported beam ABC of length l carries a
P)
concentrated load P at an intermediate point B. If the
M
TE
slope at A is 0.75 times the slope at C, then the length of
,Dr
portion AB is equal to
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 3l/4
ho
at
B. 4l/7
R
ep
C. 5l/7
e
ad
D. 2l/7
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 75) If the deflection at the free end of a uniformly
P)
M
loaded cantilever beam of length 1 m is equal to 7.5 mm,
TE
,D
then the slope at the free end is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.01 radian

re
ho
B. 0.015 radian
at
C. 0.02 radian R
ep
e

ad
Pr
Answer C*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 76) A simply supported beam of circular cross-section
P)
with diameter d and length l carries a concentrated load W
M
TE
at the centre of the beam. The strength of the beam is
,Dr
proportional to
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. d²/l
ho
at
B. d³/l
R
ep
C. l/d²
e
ad
D. l/d³
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The modulus of section may be defined as the ratio of moment of inertia
TE
to the distance to the extreme fiber. It denoted by Z.
,D
The strength of beam depends on the material, size and shape of cross section.
r
re
The beam is stronger when section modulus is more.
tu
ec
(L

Z=I/y
re
ho
at
R
Z = ( πD⁴ / 64 ) / (D/2)
ep
e
ad
Z = πD³/32
Pr
Z ∝ D³
Q. 77) A cantilever beam carries a uniformly distributed
load from fixed end to the centre of the beam in the first
P)
M
case and uniformly distributed load same intensity from
TE
,D
centre of the beam to the free end in the second case. The
r
re
tu
ratio of deflections in the two cases is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 1/2
at
B. 2/11 R
ep
e
C. 5/24
ad
Pr
D. 7/41
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 78) If the length of a simply supported beam carrying a
P)
M
concentrated load at the centre is doubled, the deflection
TE
,D
at the centre will become
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Two times

re
ho
B. Four times
at
C. Eight times R
eep
D. Sixteen times
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 79) A simply supported beam with rectangular cross-
P)
section is subjected to a central concentrated load. If the
M
TE
width and depth of the beam are doubled, then the
,Dr
deflection at the centre of the beam will be reduced to
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 50%
ho
at
B. 25%
R
ep
C. 12.5%
e
ad
D. 6.25%
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 80) A laminated spring is given an initial curvature
M
TE
because
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. It is more economical
(L

re
B. It gives uniform strength
ho
at
C. Spring becomes flat when it is subjected to design load
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Leaf spring (laminated spring) are made up of uniform strength and are
M
normally used in automobiles to absorb the shock and vibration
TE
,D
produced by road undulations, thereby providing comfort to passengers.
r
re
A laminated spring is given an initial curvature because Spring becomes
tu
ec
flat when it is subjected to design load
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(81 to 90)
at
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 81) A laminated spring is supported at
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Ends and loaded at centre
ec
(L
B. Centre and loaded at ends

re
ho
C. Ends and loaded anywhere
at
R
D. Centre and loaded anywhere
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
laminated spring, in its simplest form,
P)
consists of a number of parallel strips of a
M
TE
metal having different lengths but same
,D
width and placed one over the other in
r
re
laminations as shown in figure.
tu
ec
(L

re
When the spring is loaded to the designed
ho
load, all the plates become flat and the
at
central deflection disappears. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
The purpose of this type of arrangement

of plates is to make the spring of uniform
strength throughout.
P)
M
Q. 82) Laminated spring are subjected to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Direct stress
ec
(L
B. Bending stress

re
ho
C. Shear stress
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Laminated spring are subjected to Bending stress.

P)
M
Q. 83) Deflection in a leaf spring is more if its
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Strength is more
ec
(L
B. Strength is less

re
ho
C. Stiffness is less
at
D. Stiffness is more R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The load required to produce a unit deflection in a spring is

re
ho
called spring stiffness or stiffness of a spring.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 85) Buckling load for a given column depends upon
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Length of column only
ec
(L
B. Least lateral dimension only

re
ho
C. Both length and least lateral dimension
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
The load at which the column just buckles is called buckling load / critical load /
crippling load.
P)
Value of buckling load is low for long columns and relatively for short column.
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 86) When both ends of a column are fixed, the crippling
P)
M
load is P. If one end of the column is made free, the value
TE
,D
of crippling load will be changed to
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. P/16

re
ho
B. P/4
at
C. P/2 R
eep
D. 4P
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 87) Euler’s formula for a mild steel long column hinged
M
TE
at both ends is not valid for slenderness ratio
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Greater than 80
(L

re
B. Less than 80
ho
at
C. Greater than 180
R
ep
D. Greater than 120
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Euler‘s formula for crippling load, PE = π²EI/Le²
,Dr
re
Now substituting I = Ak² (A area and k is least radius of gyration of the section)
tu
ec
(L

PE = π²EI/Le² = PE = π²E(Ak²)/Le² = PE = π²EA/(Le/k)²
re
ho
at
Slenderness ratio (Le/k):- is defined as ratio of equivalent (or unsupported) length
R
ep
of column to the least radius of gyration (k) of the section.
e
ad
Pr
If the slenderness ratio is less than 80 the Euler’s formula for a mild steel column
is not valid.
P)
M
Q. 88) A long column has maximum crippling load when its
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Both ends are hinged
ec
(L
B. Both ends are fixed

re
ho
C. One end is fixed and other end is hinged
at
R
D. One end is fixed and other end is free
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 89) Effective length of a chimney of 20 m height is taken
M
TE
as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10 m
(L

re
B. 20 m
ho
at
C. 28.28 m
R
ep
D. 40 m
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 90) Rankine’s formula for column is valid when
M
TE
slenderness ratio
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Lies between 0 and 140
(L

re
B. Lies between 0 and 100
ho
at
C. Is less than 80
R
ep
D. Has any value
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
Rankine‘s formula for columns:-
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(91 to 100)
at
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 91) Slenderness ratio of a 5 m long column hinged at
P)
M
both ends and having a circular cross-section with
TE
,D
diameter 160 mm is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 31.25

re
ho
B. 62.5
at
C. 100 R
eep
D. 125
ad
Pr
Answer D
Let the least radius of gyration , k = √(I/A)
P)
M
TE
The Area of the column be “ A” = πD²/4
,D
And, Moment of Inertia be “I” = πD⁴/64
r
re
tu
ec
Therefore, K = √ (I/A) Or K = √ [{πD⁴/64} / {πD²/4}]
(L

re
K = √ [{D²/64} / {1/4}]
ho
K = √ [(160*160)/16]
at
K = √ [1600] R
ep
e
K = 40 mm = 0.04 m
ad
Pr
Now, Slenderness Ratio = (Effective length) / (least radius of gyration)

Slenderness Ratio = L / K = 5 / 0.04 = 125
Q. 92) Effective length of a column fixed at one end and
P)
hinged at the other end is
M
TE
,Dr
A. L / 2
re
tu
ec
B. L / √2
(L

re
C. 2 L
ho
at
D. √2 L
R
eep
ad
Where L is the actual length of the column

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 93) The effect of arching a beam is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. To reduce bending moment throughout
ec
(L
B. To increase bending moment throughout

re
ho
C. To increase shear stress
at
R
D. To decrease shear stress
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 94) Internal forces at every cross-section in a arch are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Normal thrust and shear force
ec
(L
B. Shear force and bending moment

re
ho
C. Normal thrust and bending moment
at
R
D. Normal thrust, shear force and bending moment
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Normal thrust and radial shear in an arch:-
TE
Total force acting along the normal is called normal thrust and
,Dr
re
total force acting along the radial direction is called radial shear.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 95) According to Eddy’s theorem, the vertical intercept
P)
M
between the linear arch and the centre line of the actual
TE
,D
arch at any point represents to some scale
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Bending moment

re
ho
B. Shear force
at
C. Normal thrust R
eep
D. Deflection
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Eddy’s theorem states that “ The bending moment at any section
r
re
of an arch is proportional to the vertical intercept between the
tu
ec
linear arch (or theoretical arch) and the centre line of the actual
(L

re
arch.”
ho
at
R
ep
In a three hinged arch, the linear and the actual arch meet
e
ad
atleast three points.

Pr
P)
Q. 96) Due to rise in temperature in three hinged arch,
M
TE
induced stress is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Direct compressive
(L

re
B. Direct tensile
ho
at
C. Shear
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Rise in temperature increases the length of the arc. Since the
r
re
tu
ends do not move and since the crown hinge is not connected to
ec
(L
any permanent object, the crown hinge will rise.

re
ho
at
R
Due to temperature change, stresses are not produced in the
ep
arch, but the horizontal thrust changes.

e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 97) In a three hinged arch, the linear and the actual
M
TE
arch meet at
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. At least three points
(L

re
B. At least two points
ho
at
C. All points irrespective of loading
R
ep
D. Nowhere
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 98) If a three hinged parabolic arch carries a uniformly
P)
M
distributed load over the entire span, then any section of
TE
,D
the arch is subjected to
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Normal thrust only

re
ho
B. Normal thrust and shear force
at
R
ep
e
D. Normal thrust, shear force and bending moment

ad
Pr
Answer A
Eddy’s theorem states that “ The bending moment at any section of an
P)
M
arch is proportional to the vertical intercept between the linear arch (or
TE
theoretical arch) and the centre line of the actual arch.”
,Dr
re
tu
- Parabolic arches are preferably to carry distributed loads. Because,
ec
both, the shape of the arch and the shape of the bending moment
(L

re
diagram are parabolic. Hence the intercept between the theoretical arch
ho
at
and actual arch is zero everywhere. Hence, the bending moment at every
R
section of the arch will be zero.
eep
The arch will be under pure compression which will be economical.

ad
Pr
- If a three hinged parabolic arch carries a uniformly distributed load over

the entire span, then any section of the arch is subjected to Normal
thrust only.
P)
M
Q. 99) Three hinged arch is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Statically indeterminate by one degree
ec
(L
B. Statically indeterminate by two degree

re
ho
C. Statically determinate
at
D. Unstable structure R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 100) If the central rise of a symmetrical parabolic arch is
M
TE
h, then the rise of arch at quarter points is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. h / 4
(L

re
B. h / 3
ho
at
C. 2h / 3
R
ep
D. 3h / 4
e
ad
Pr
Pr Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(101 to 110)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 101) A linear arch has
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Normal thrust only
ec
(L
B. Shear force only

re
ho
C. Bending moment only
at
R
D. Normal thrust and shear force
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
A linear arch has Normal thrust only.
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 102) A three hinged arch is carrying uniformly
P)
M
distributed load over the entire span. The arch is free from
TE
,D
shear force and bending moment if it’s shape is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Circular

re
ho
B. Parabolic
at
C. Elliptical R
ep
e

ad
Pr
Answer B
Eddy’s theorem states that “ The bending moment at any section of an
P)
M
arch is proportional to the vertical intercept between the linear arch (or
TE
theoretical arch) and the centre line of the actual arch.”
,Dr
re
tu
- Parabolic arches are preferably to carry distributed loads. Because,
ec
both, the shape of the arch and the shape of the bending moment
(L

re
diagram are parabolic. Hence the intercept between the theoretical arch
ho
at
and actual arch is zero everywhere. Hence, the bending moment at every
R
section of the arch will be zero.
eep
The arch will be under pure compression which will be economical.

ad
Pr
- If a three hinged parabolic arch carries a uniformly distributed load over

the entire span, then any section of the arch is subjected to Normal
thrust only.
Q. 103) For a determinate pin-jointed plane frame, the
P)
M
relation between the number of joints j and members m is
TE
,D
given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. m = 2 j – 3

re
ho
B. m = 3 j – 6
at
C. m > 2 j – 3 R
eep
D. m > 3 j - 6
ad
Pr
Answer A
Total degree of static indeterminacy is the sum of internal and external
P)
M
static indeterminacy. Ds = Dse + Dsi
TE
Ds = 0 (determinate), Ds > 0 (indeterminate), Ds < 0 (unstable)
,Dr
re
tu
(i) Pin jointed plane frame, Ds = m + r – 2j
ec
(ii) Pin jointed space frame, Ds = m + r – 3j
(L

re
(iii) Rigid jointed plane frame,Ds = (r - 3) + (3C – r’) OR 3m + r – 3j
ho
at
(iv) Rigid jointed space frame,Ds = (r – 6) + (6C – r‘) OR 6m + r - 6j
Where, R
ep
e
m = number of members
ad
Pr
j = number of joints
r’ = number of additional equations due to hybrid joints
r = number of external reactions
Q. 104) In the pin-jointed plane
P)
frame shown in fig. 10.5,the
M
TE
force in the member BD is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Zero force members in a truss are members which do not have any force in them.
M
TE
There are two rules that may be used to find zero-force members in a truss.
,D
Case 1 At a TWO member joint:
r
re
If those members are NOT parallel AND there are no other external loads (or
tu
ec
reactions) at the joint THEN both of those members are zero force members.
(L

re
ho
Case 2 In a THREE member joint:
at
If TWO of those members are
R
ep
parallel and there are no other
e
external loads (or reactions) at the

ad
Pr
joint then the member that is not

parallel is a zero force member.
P)
M
Q. 105) The basic perfect frame is a
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Triangle
ec
(L
B. Rectangle

re
ho
C. Square
at
D. Hexagon R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
The simplest frame is a triangle, consists of three members pin-
M
jointed to each other. This can be easily analyzed by the condition
TE
,D
of equilibrium. This frame is called the basic perfect frame. It has
r
re
three members AB, BC and CA and three joints A, B and C.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 106) Method of joints is applicable only when the
P)
M
number of unknown forces at the joint under
TE
,D
consideration is not more than
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. One

re
ho
B. Two
at
C. Three R
eep
D. Four
ad
Pr
Answer B
In the joints method, a virtual cut is made around a joint and the
P)
M
cut portion is isolated as a Free Body Diagram (FBD).
TE
,D
Using the equilibrium equations of ∑ Fx = 0 and ∑ Fy = 0, the
r
re
unknown member forces can be solved.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
When the joints of beam are having
,Dr
lateral displacement the given frame is
re
tu
sway frame.
ec
(L

re
Conditions of non-sway frames:-
ho
at
1. Columns of the frame should be
R
ep
symmetrical
e
ad
2. The loading should be symmetrical

Pr
3. Support of column should be

symmetrical
P)
Q. 109) A hollow shaft will transmit................... power than
M
TE
a solid shaft of same weight and material
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less
(L

re
B. Same
ho
at
C. More
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
In the hollow shaft, the material at the center is removed and spread at
P)
large radius.
M
TE
Therefore, hollow shafts are stronger than solid shaft having the same
,D
weight.
r
re
tu
ec
Hollow shafts are having a more polar moment of inertia, thus they can
(L

re
transmit more torque compared to solid shafts.
ho
at
R
Hollow shafts do not transfer more power but the power to weight ratio
ep
e
of hollow shafts is more as compared to a solid shaft.

ad
Pr
Solid shafts, when subjected to bending, are stronger than that of a

hollow shaft.
P)
M
Q. 110) The stiffness of a helical spring is expressed as
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Load per unit length
ec
(L
B. Load per unit deflection

re
ho
C. Load per unit diameter
at
R
D. Deflection per unit load
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The Stiffness (k), of a body is a measure of the resistance offered
TE
,D
by an elastic body to deformation.
r
re
tu
ec
Every object in this universe has some stiffness.
(L

re
ho
at
Generally for spring the spring stiffness is the force or load
R
ep
required to cause unit deflection.
e
ad
Pr
Stiffness = Applied load / Deflection

K= F/X
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
(111 to 120)
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 113) In a rectangular shaft subjected to torsion, the
M
TE
maximum shear stress occurs at
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Centre
(L

re
B. Corners
ho
at
C. Middle of smaller side
R
ep
D. Middle of longer side
e
ad
Pr
Pr Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 114) A solid circular shaft of 6 m length is built in at its
P)
ends and his subjected to an externally applied load 60 kN-
M
TE
m at a distance of 2 m from left end. The reactive torques
,Dr
at the left end and the right end re respectively
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 20 kN.m and 40 kN.m
ho
at
B. 40 kN.m and 20 kN.m
R
ep
C. 15 kN.m and 45 kN.m
e
ad
D. 30 kN.m and 30 kN.m

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 119) The radius of gyration of a circle of radius R is
M
TE
equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. R/4
(L

re
B. R/2
ho
at
C. R / √2
R
ep
D. R
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(121 to 130)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 121) A short column of external diameter of 250 mm
P)
and internal diameter of 150 mm carries an eccentric load
M
TE
of 1000 kN. The greatest eccentricity which the load can
,Dr
have without producing tension anywhere is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 20 mm
ho
at
B. 31.25 mm
R
ep
C. 37.5 mm
e
ad
D. 42.5 mm
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Core of Rectangular Section is the part of the column section in
M
which the load can be applied without causing tensile stress
TE
,D
anywhere in the section.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 124) The ratio of intensity of stress in case of suddenly
M
TE
applied load to that in case of the gradually applied load is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1/2
(L

re
B. 1
ho
at
C. 2
R
ep
D. More than 2
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 125) Proof resilience is the maximum energy stored at
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Limit of proportionality
ec
(L
B. Elastic limit

re
ho
C. Plastic limit
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Resilience:- When a body subjected to external load within the elastic
P)
M
limit, the body gets deformed. On the removal of the external load, the
TE
body will get its original shape(Under load within elastic limit). Why
,D
because the body can store some internal energy. This Energy stored by
r
re
tu
the body to regain its original shape is called strain energy.
ec
The strain energy stored in a body due to the external loading is known
(L

re
as the Resilience.
ho
at
R
Proof Resilience:- The maximum amount of the strain energy can be
ep
e
stored in the body up to the elastic limit is defined as the Proof resilience.
ad
Pr
Modulus of Resilience:- can be defined as the ratio of The proof resilience

to the volume of the body.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 126) Strain energy stored in a member is given by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.5 × stress × volume
ec
(L
B. 0.5 × strain × volume

re
ho
C. 0.5 × stress × strain × volume
at
D. 0.5 × stress × strain R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 127) A rectangular block of size 200 mm × 100 mm ×
P)
50 mm is subjected to a shear stress of 100 N/mm². If
M
TE
modulus of rigidity of material is 1 × 105 N/mm², strain
,Dr
energy stored will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 10 N.m
ho
at
B. 25 N.m
R
ep
C. 50 N.m
e
ad
D. 100 N.m
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 128) A steel rod of cross sectional area equal to 1000
P)
M
mm² is 5 m long. If a pull of 100 kN is suddenly applied to
TE
,D
it, then the maximum stress intensity will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 50 N/mm²

re
ho
B. 100 N/mm²
at
C. 200 N/mm² R
ep
e
D. 400 N/mm²
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 130) Two identical bars, one simply supported and
P)
other fixed at ends, are acted upon by equal loads applied
M
TE
at the midpoints. The ratio of strain energy stored in the
,Dr
simply supported beam and the fixed ended beam
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1
ho
at
B. 2
R
ep
C. 3
e
ad
D. 4
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(131 to 140)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 131) If the depth of a beam of rectangular section is
M
TE
reduced to half, strain energy stored in the beam becomes
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1/4 times
(L

re
B. 1/8 times
ho
at
C. 4 times
R
ep
D. 8 times
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Strain energy stored in the beam, U = ∫ M/2EI
TE
,Dr
re
U ∝1/I
tu
ec
Given, depth of a beam of rectangular section is reduced to half
(L

re
d’ = d/2
ho
at
R
Moment of inertia, I = bd’³/12 = b (d/2)³ / 12 = 8 × bd³ / 12
eep
ad
Pr
Strain energy will increase by 8 times.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 133) The specimen in a Charpy impact test is supported
M
TE
as a
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Cantilever beam
(L

re
B. Simply supported beam
ho
at
C. Fixed beam
R
ep
D. Continuous beam
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The Charpy Test:- most commonly used on metals, it is also used
TE
on polymers, ceramics and composites.
,D
The Charpy test is most commonly used to evaluate the relative
r
re
tu
toughness or impact toughness of materials and as such is often used
ec
(L
in quality control applications where it is a fast and economical test.

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 134) Impact test enables one to estimate the property
M
TE
of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Hardness
(L

re
B. Toughness
ho
at
C. Strength
R
ep
D. Creep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Los Angeles abrasion test– hardness
r
re
tu
ec
B. Impact test – toughness
(L

re
ho
at
C. Crushing test – crushing strength
R
ep
e
ad
D. Soundness test- accelerated durability test - Durability

Pr
P)
Q. 135) The phenomenon of decreased resistance of a
M
TE
material to reverse of stress is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Creep
(L

re
B. Fatigue
ho
at
C. Resilience
R
ep
D. Plasticity
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Resilience:- The strain Energy stored in a body due to the external loading
P)
M
TE
Concrete creep is defined as deformation of structure under sustained
,D
load. Basically, long term pressure or stress on concrete can make it
r
re
change shape. This deformation usually occurs in the direction the force
tu
ec
is being applied.
(L

re
ho
The phenomenon of decreased resistance of material due to reversal of
at
stress is called Fatigue. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Plasticity is the property of a solid body whereby it undergoes a

permanent change in shape or size when subjected to a stress exceeding
a particular value (the yield value).
Q. 136) The property of metal which allows it to deform
P)
M
continuously at slow rate without any further increase in
TE
,D
stress is known as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Fatigue

re
ho
B. Creep
at
C. Plasticity R
eep
D. Resilience
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 137) The stress below which material has a high
P)
M
probability of not failing under reversal of stress is known
TE
,D
as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Tolerance limit

re
ho
B. Elastic limit
at
C. Proportional limit R
e ep
D. Endurance limit
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Endurance limit:The maximum value of completely reversed
(L

re
bending stress that a material can withstand without any failure
ho
for 'infinite number of cycles'.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 138) A three hinged parabolic arch is acted upon by a single
P)
load at the left quarter point. If the central rise is increased and
M
TE
the shape of arch altered to segmental without changing the
,D
other details, The horizontal thrust will
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Increased definitely

re
ho
B. Decrease definitely
at
C. Be difficult to predict
ep
R
D. Increase or decrease depending upon the radius of the
e
ad
segmental arch
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 139) For ductile materials, the most appropriate failure
M
TE
theory is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Maximum shear stress theory
(L

re
B. Maximum principal stress theory
ho
at
C. Maximum principal strain theory
R
ep
D. Shear Strain energy theory
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
1. Criteria used to predict the failure of ductile materials are
r
re
usually called yield criteria. Commonly used failure criteria
tu
ec
for ductile materials are the maximum shear stress criterion.
(L

re
ho
2. The maximum principal stress criterion, also known as the
at
R
normal stress, Coulomb, or Rankine criterion, is often used to
eep
ad
predict the failure of brittle materials.

Pr
Q. 140) At a point in steel member, the major principal stress is
P)
2000 kg/cm² and the minor principal stress is compressive. If the
M
TE
uniaxial tensile yield stress is 2500 kg/cm², then the magnitude of
,D
the minor principal stress at which yielding will commence
r
re
tu
according to maximum shearing stress theory, is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 1000 kg/cm²
at
B. 2000 kg/cm² ep
R
C. 2500 kg/cm²
e
ad
D. 500 kg/cm²
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
According to maximum shear stress theory
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
σ1 is maximum principal stress, σ3 is minor principal stress and Syt is
R
ep
tensile yield stress
e
ad
Pr
2000 – (-σ3) ≥ 2500

σ3 ≥ 500
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(141 to 150)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 141) For the design of a cast iron member, the most
M
TE
appropriate theory of failure is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Mohr’s theory
(L

re
B. Rankine‘s theory
ho
at
C. Maximum strain theory
R
ep
D. Maximum shear energy theory
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
1. Mohr's theory is used in predicting the failure of brittle materials, and is applied
P)
M
to cases of 2D stress.
TE
,D
2. Maximum Principal Stress theory also known as RANKINE’S THEORY
r
re
- Suitable for the safe design of machine components made of brittle materials
tu
ec
under all loading conditions (tri-axial, biaxial etc.) because brittle materials
(L

are weak in tension.
re
ho
at
3. Maximum Principal Strain theory also known as St. VENANT’S THEORY
R
- Suitable for ductile materials and gives oversafe design i.e. safe and uneconomic
ep
e
design.
ad
Pr
4. Maximum Distortion Energy theory or VONMISES AND HENCKY’S THEORY

- Best theory of failure for ductile material. It gives safe and economic design.
In a uni-dimensional stress system, the principal plane is defined as one
P)
on which the
M
TE
1. Shear stress is zero
,D
2. Normal stress is zero
r
re
3. Shear stress is maximum
tu
ec
4. Normal stress is maximum
(L

re
ho
Of these statements
at
R
ep
A. 1 and 2 are correct
e
ad
B. 2 and 3 are correct

Pr
C. 1 and 4 are correct

D. 3 and 4 are correct
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Principal plane may be defined as. The plane on which normal
r
re
tu
stress attains its maximum and minimum value. So these planes
ec
(L
are also called as major principal plane and minor principal plane.

re
ho
at
R
These particular planes, which have no shear stress, are known
ep
as principal planes.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 144) A steel cable of 2 cm diameter is used to lift load
P)
of 500 π kg. Given that, E = 2 × 106 kg/cm² and the length
M
TE
of the cable is 10 m, the elongation of the cable due to the
,Dr
load will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.5 cm
ho
at
B. 0.25 cm
R
ep
C. 1 cm
e
ad
D. 1/π cm
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 146) A steel bar of 2 m length is fixed at both ends at
20°C. The coefficient of thermal expansion is 11 × 10 -6 /°C
P)
M
and the modulus of elasticity is 2 × 106 kg/cm². If the
TE
,D
temperature is changed to 18°C, then the bar will
r
re
tu
experience a stress of
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 22 kg/cm² ( tensile)
at
R
B. 22 kg/cm² ( compressive)
ep
e
C. 44 kg/cm² ( compressive)
ad
Pr
D. 44 kg/cm² ( tensile)
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 147) A cast iron block of 5 sq. cm. cross section carries
P)
M
an axial tensile load of 10 t. Then maximum shear stress in
TE
,D
the block is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 2000 kg/cm²

re
ho
B. 1000 kg/cm²
at
C. 500 kg/cm² R
ep
e
D. 200 kg/cm²
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
To minimise the peak value of bending moment, the overhang
(L

re
shall be such, that
ho
at
BM in overhang portion (M1) = BM at center (M2)
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
The rate of change of the shearing force with respect to x is equal
tu
ec
to the load or the slope of the shear force diagram at a given
(L

re
point equals the load at that point.
ho
at
R
ep
dV/dx = w
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(151 to 160)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
In a bending beam, a point is known as a point of contraflexure if
tu
ec
it is a location where bending moment is zero (changes its sign
(L

re
i.e. Positive to negative or vice versa).
ho
In a bending moment diagram, it is the point at which the
at
R
bending moment curve intersects with the zero line.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
From the flexure formula fb = M y / I
,Dr
re
tu
it can be seen that the bending stress at the neutral axis, where y=0, is
ec
zero and increases linearly outwards.
(L

re
This means that for a rectangular or circular section a large portion of the
ho
at
cross section near the middle section is understressed.
R
eep
For steel beams or composite beams, instead of adopting the rectangular

ad
Pr
shape, the area may be arranged so as to give more area on the outer
fiber and maintaining the same overall depth, and saving a lot of weight.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The vertical deflection upwards at the centre of the beam is
(L

re
ho
= P a (L – 2a)² / 8 EI
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(161 to 170)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
As it is a linear arch (3 hinges), there will be zero bending

re
ho
moment through out the span.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(171 to 180)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Creep:- Time dependent deformation of a material while under
M
TE
an applied load that is below its yield strength.
,Dr
re
tu
Creep is more severe in materials that are subjected to heat for
ec
(L
long periods and generally increases as they near their melting

re
ho
point.
at
R
ep
The rate of deformation is a function of the material's properties,
e
ad
exposure time, exposure temperature and the applied structural

Pr
load.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Whenever there is some increase or decrease in the temperature
TE
,D
of a bar, consisting of two or more different materials, it causes
r
re
the bar to expand or contract.
tu
ec
On account of different coefficients of linear expansions the two
(L

re
materials do not expand or contract by the same amount, but
ho
at
expand or contract by different amounts.
R
ep
e
ad
Materil A subjected to compressive stress (because the

Pr
coefficient of linear expansion of the material A is more than B)

and B subjected to tensile stress.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Riveted joints & welded joints are two totally different ways to join pieces of metal.
P)
Rivets are bolt-like devices used to secure two pieces of metal together,
M
TE
whereas welds use high heat to melt the pieces of metal together to form a joint.
,Dr
1.Weld joint does not require holes on the components to be joined. Rivet joint
re
tu
requires a series of holes on the component prior to riveting for the passage of
ec
(L
rivets.

re
2. Strength of weld joint is very high. Welded structures have strength equal to that
ho
of parent components.
at
R
Riveted structures have lower strength compared to parent structures due to
ep
reduced cross-sectional area.
e
ad
3. Weld joints are susceptible under vibration.

Pr
Rivet joints perform excellent under vibration.

4. Welded structures are lighter in weight.
Riveted structures are heavier due to usage of additional straps.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Total elongation increase in same ratio i.e. m:1

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(181 to 190)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Maximum shearing stress theory or Tresca Criterion.
M
TE
It states that when the maximum shear stress within an element
,D
is equal to or greater than a critical value, yielding will begin.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Yield strength or yield stress is the material property defined as
re
ho
the stress at which a material begins to deform plastically
at
R
whereas yield point is the point where nonlinear (elastic +
ep
plastic) deformation begins.
e
ad
Pr
According to Tresca, yield locus is an Hexagon.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Maximum shear stress theory:-
tu
ec
When the maximum shear strength in actual case exceeds
(L

re
maximum allowable shear stress in simple tension test the
ho
at
material case.
R
ep
Good for ductile materials.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
According to Rankine’s theory for brittle materials
r
re
tu
ec
(L
1. Equivalent bending moment is

re
ho
Meq = {M+√(M²+T²) / 2}
at
R
ep
2. Equivalent torsion = √(M²+T²)
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(191 to 200)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Since the footing is rectangular and the load is eccentric about x and y
,D
axis respectively, the stresses at A and D are not equal.
r
re
tu
ec
The stress developed at point C is the combination of compressive stress
(L

re
due to load P, tensile stress due to eccentricity about x and y axis
ho
respectively. So the final stress is compressive or not will depend upon
at
R
the magnitude of tensile stress.
eep
ad
In exact terms we cannot say that the final stress at C is compressive

Pr
however, option (C) is the most close among all of the options.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(201 to 210)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
For brittle material of low tensile strength and much larger
r
re
tu
strength in compression and shear the twisting will cause
ec
(L
fracture along a spiral line at 45° to the axis of the cylinder.

re
ho
at
R
For ductile material like mild steel, the plane of failure will be
ep
normal to the axis.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
The fibres above the neutral axis will be subjected to
TE
,D
compression and fibres below the neutral axis will be subjected
r
re
to tension due to bending. These bending stresses are axial in
tu
ec
direction.
(L

re
ho
at
The transverse strain will also be there at all fibres cross-section
R
ep
due to Poison’s effect. Thus top fibres will laterally expand and
e
ad
bottom fibres will get compressed. Thus the deformed section

Pr
will be as shown in figure (C)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Shear center is defined as the point on the beam section where load is
TE
,D
applied and no twisting is produced.
r
re
tu
In unsymmetrical sections, if the external applied forces act through the
ec
(L

centroid of the section, then in addition to bending, twisting is also
re
ho
produced.
at
To avoid twisting, and cause only bending, it is necessary for the forces to
R
ep
act through the particular point, which may not coincide with the
e
ad
centroid.
Pr
The position of the this point is a function only of the geometry of the
beam section. It is termed as shear center.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The shear centre is the point about which the moment of the
ec
(L
shear flows in all segments should be zero.

re
ho
at
R
So shear centre will lie at the intersection point of two axes.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(211 to 220)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
A. Shear centre:- The load at this point does not cause twisting.
,Dr
re
tu
B. Principal plane:- There is no shear stress on this plane.
ec
(L

re
ho
C. Fixed beam:- It has zero slope
at
R
ep
D. Middle third rule:- can be used to apply load such that there is
e
ad
Pr
no tension on a rectangular cross-section.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(221 to 230)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
The graphical representation of variation of axial load on y axis
P)
M
and position of cross section along x axis is called as axial thrust
TE
,D
diagram.
r
re
tu
ec
Section Thrust
(L

re
AC 3.222
ho
CD 3.222 – 3.464 = - 0.242
at
DE R
- 0.242 + 4.242 = 4.0
ep
e
ad
EB 4–4=0
Pr
So correct thrust diagram is given in figure (A)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(231 to 240)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Eddy’s theorem is related to arches. It says that the BM at any
(L

re
section of an arch is proportional to the ordinate between the
ho
given arch and the linear arch.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(241 to 250)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(251 to 260)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

252
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(261 to 270)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Visco-elastic material exhibit a mixture of creep and elastic after
,D
effects at room temperature. Thus their behaviour is time
r
re
tu
dependent. They do not have small plastic zone.
ec
(L

re
ho
Materials with different properties in different directions are
at
called anisotropic. R
eep
ad
Pr
Orthotropic material is a special case of an anisotropic material in

three mutually perpendicular directions.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(271 to 280)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Beam is subjected to pure bending and the bending moment is

re
ho
hogging in nature.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(281 to 290)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
static indeterminacy.
M
TE
Ds = Dse + Dsi
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
Where, R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(291 to 300)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(301 to 310)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In case the strong plates are away from neutral axis, so their

re
ho
contribution is more.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(311 to 320)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(321 to 330)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(331 to 340)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(341 to 350)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Assumptions made in the theory of simple bending:-
M
1. The material of the beam that is subjected to bending is homogenous
TE
,D
(same composition throughout) and isotropic (same elastic properties in
r
re
all directions).
tu
2. Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material of the beam will be same
ec
(L

in tension and compression.
re
ho
3. Beam will be straight before loading and will remain straight once load
at
will be removed.
R
ep
4. The sections of the beam which were plane before bending, must
e
ad
remain plain after bending too.

Pr
5.Beam material must be stressed within its elastic limit and therefore
beam material must follow the principle of Hooke’s law.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Strength
Materials (L
ec
(27 & 351 to 360)
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 27) At a point in a strained body carrying two unequal
P)
M
unlike principal stresses P1 and P2 (P1 > P2), then
TE
,D
maximum shear stress is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. P1/2

re
ho
B. P2/2
at
C. (P1-P2)/2 R
eep
D. (P1+P2)/2
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Of
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(361 to 370)
Strength
Materials (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
During experiment in laboratory, strain is measured that is
ec
(L
called fundamental quantity.

re
ho
at
R
While stress is derived from strain.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,Dr
re
The moment of inertia of a section is more if the area lies
tu
ec
away from neutral axis.
(L

re
I-section has higher section modulus than that of
ho
at
rectangular section, therefore it is preferred to rectangular
R
ep
section.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, AE(PSC), RRB-JE etc (371 to 376End)
Last Part
P)
M
TE
,D
Gupta and Gupta
r
re
tu
ec
Strength
(L

re
ho
Of at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Materials
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Macaulay's method:
M
1. Based on the double integration concept.
TE
,D
2. Bending moment at any section is expressed in the systematic order.
r
re
3. The section x is to be taken in the last portion of the beam.
tu
4. In this method, bending moment due to each force or UDL is separated
ec
(L

by compartment lines.
re
ho
5. Slope is obtained by integrating bending moment and then deflection
at
is obtained by integrating of slope equation.
R
ep
e
ad
Moment Area Method / Mohr theorem:

Pr
Moment area method is used to determine the slope and deflection at a

particular point in determinate and indeterminate structure.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

The End
P)
M
TE
,D
All The Best
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
🙏☺
eep
ad

Pr
P)
M
TE
Objective Questions
,Dr
re
tu
(01 to 15)
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
Reinforced Cement
eep
ad
Concrete (RCC)
Pr
P)
Q. 1) To determine the modulus of rupture, the size of test
M
TE
specimen used is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 150 × 150 × 500 mm
(L

re
b. 100 × 100 ×700 mm
ho
at
c. 150 × 150 × 700 mm
R
ep
d. 100 × 100 × 500 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
Specimen size is 150 × 150 × 700 mm
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 2 The property of fresh concrete, in which the water in
P)
M
the mix tends to rise to the surface while placing and
TE
,D
compacting, is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Segregation

re
ho
b. Bleeding
at
c. Bulking R
eep
d. Creep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Fresh concrete is that stage of concrete in which concrete can be moulded and it is in
plastic stage.
P)
Segregation is the separation of ingredients to each other in concrete.
M
Three types:-
TE
1.Separation of Coarse aggregate from the concrete mixture,
,D
2.Separation of Cement pastes from the concrete during its plastic stage.
r
re
tu
3.Separation of water from the concrete mix (Bleeding in concrete)
ec
(L

Factors causing segregation in concrete:-
re
ho
Transporting concrete mixes for long distances.
at
Poorly proportioned mix
R
ep
Dropping concrete from more than 1m.
e
ad
Vibrating concrete for a long time.

Pr
Concrete creep is defined as: deformation of structure under sustained load (long
term).
Pr
ad
e ep
R
Bleeding of concrete
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 3) Select the incorrect Sataement
M
TE
,D
a. Lean mixes bleed more as compared to rich ones
r
re
tu
b. Bleeding can be minimised by adding pozzuolana finer
ec
(L

aggregate
re
ho
c. Bleeding can be increased by addition of calcium
at
chloride R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Lean concrete - cement content used in concrete is less than about 10% of the total
M
contents.
TE
,D
Normal concrete - cement content is more than 10 and less than 15%
r
Rich concrete - cement content in concrete is more than about 15%
re
tu
ec
Bleeding can be controlled by: -
(L

re
-Increasing cement content
ho
-Increasing sand content
at
-Using finer sand
R
ep
-Using less water
e
ad
-Using admixtures, Ex. Calcium chloride

Pr
-Using a rounded natural sand rather than an angular

P)
Q. 4) The property of the ingredients to separate from
M
TE
each other while placing the concrete is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Segregation
(L

re
b. Compaction
ho
at
c. Shrinkage
R
ep
d. Bulking
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
b. Compaction is the process that expels entrapped air from freshly placed concrete
P)
and packs the aggregate particles together so as to increase the density of the
M
concrete.
TE
,D
c. Shrinkage is an inherent property of concrete. The shrinkage in concrete can be
r
re
defined as the volume changes observed in concrete due to the loss of moisture at
tu
ec
different stages due to different reasons.
(L

re
ho
d. The volume increase of fine aggregate due to presence of moisture content is
at
known as bulking. Fine sand bulks more as compared to coarse sand.
R
ep
What causes bulking of aggregate: -
e
The moisture present in aggregate forms a film around each particle. These films of
ad
Pr
moisture exert a force, known as surface tension, on each particle. Due to this
surface tension each particles gets away from each other. Because of this no direct
contact is possible among individual particles and this causes bulking of the volume.
P)
M
Q. 5) Workability of concrete is directly proportional to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Aggregate cement ratio
ec
(L
b. Time to transit

re
ho
c. Grading of the aggregate
at
d. All of above R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
The property of fresh concrete which is indicated by the amount of useful internal work required
to fully compact the concrete without bleeding or segregation in the finished product.
P)
M
Factors affecting workability of concrete:
TE
1. Water content or w/c ratio – Increase workability.
,D
2. Mix Proportions - Rich concrete mix is more workable because due to sufficient cement
r
re
aggregates will have proper lubrication for easy movement which means more workability.
tu
ec
3. Size of Aggregates - Finer particles require more water for a larger surface,
(L
hence aggregate with finer particles need more water to make it workable.

re
4.The Shape of Aggregates - Irregular shape and rougher texture of angular aggregate demand
ho
more water than the round shaped aggregate.
at
R
5.Grading of Aggregates - Well-graded aggregates tend to fill up voids and easily get workability.
ep
6. Time - Fresh concrete stiffens with time and loss workability
e
7.Aggregate Cement ratio - More ratio, less workability. Since less cement mean less water, so the
ad
paste is stiff.
Pr
8.Admixtures – The use of fine pozzolanic materials also have better lubricating effect and more
workability. Use of air entraining agent produces air bubbles which acts as a sort of ball bearing
between particles and increases mobility, workability
P)
M
Q. 6) Workability of concrete is inversely proportional to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Time of transit
ec
(L
b. Water-cement ratio

re
ho
c. The air in the mix
at
d. Size of aggregate R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 7) Approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete, is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a 0.003
ec
(L
b 0.0003

re
ho
c 0.00003
at
d 0.03 R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
Shrinkage is an inherent property of concrete. The shrinkage in concrete
tu
ec
can be defined as the volume changes observed in concrete due to the
(L

loss of moisture at different stages due to different reasons.
re
ho
at
R
The approximate value of the shrinkage strain for design is taken 0.0003
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 8) Air entrainment in the concrete increases
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Workability
ec
(L
b. Strength

re
ho
c. The effects of temperature variations
at
d. The unit weight R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Entrained air are microscopic voids, intentionally introduced to improve the properties of the
P)
concrete but entrapped air are voids of bigger sizes as a result of improper compaction
M
TE
Effects of entrained air On Fresh Concrete:
,D
Increases workability: By entraining air which can behave has fines it allow the movement of
r
re
aggregates by lubricating the concrete paste thus increasing workability.
tu
ec
Reduces segregation and bleeding: Entraining air will improve the mutual adhesion between
(L
cement and aggregate thus reducing segregation.

re
ho
Effects Of entrained air On Hardened Concrete:
at
R
Reduces scaling: The scaling in concrete occurs due to freezing and thawing cycles, in conventional
ep
concrete when temperature falls below freezing point, the water in concrete freezes in the
e
entrapped air voids, since ice has an increased volume it causes plastic shrinkage cracks and
ad
scaling on the surface of concrete. But in air entrained concrete since the air voids are microscopic
Pr
in size the increase in volume of the water freezed will not cause any cracks or scaling.
Effect on strength – entraining air will reduce the strength of concrete.
Q. 9) The relation between modulus of rupture fcr,
P)
M
splitting strength fcs, and direct tensile strength fct is given
TE
,D
by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. fcr = fcs = fct

re
ho
b. fcr > fcs > fct
at
c. fcr < fcs < fct R
eep
d. fcs > fcr > fct

ad
Pr
Answer B
fct = 0.50fcr
fcs = 0.66fcr
Pr
Approximate relations are
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 10) Approximate value of the ratio between direct
M
TE
tensile strength and flexural strength is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a 0.33
(L

re
b 0.5
ho
at
c 0.75
R
ep
d 1.0
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 11) strength of concrete increases with
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Increase in water-cement ratio
ec
(L
b. Increase in fineness of cement

re
ho
c. Decrease in curing time
at
R
d. Decrease in size of aggregate
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
a. The ratio of the weight of water to the weight of cement is called Water/Cement
P)
ratio. Generally, the water/cement ratio of 0.45 to 0.60 is used.
M
TE
,D
b. Increasing the fineness of cement
r
re
1. Reduces the amount of bleeding in concrete.
tu
2. The workability of concrete is increased.
ec
(L
3.The strength of concrete increases.

re
ho
at
c. Curing provides sufficient water to concrete for completing the hydration process
R
ep
d. Greater the size of coarse aggregate, greater strength of concrete with two
e
ad
conditions: -
Pr
1. Coarse aggregate properly graded

2. Maximum size of aggregate should not be greater than 1/5th of least size.
P)
Q. 12) The relation between modulus of rupture fcr and
M
TE
characteristic strength of concrete fck is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. fcr = 0.35√fck
(L

re
b. fcr = 0.5√fck
ho
at
c. fcr = 0.7√fck
R
ep
d. fcr = 1.2√fck
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 13) The compressive strength of 100 mm cube as
M
TE
compared to 150 mm cube is always
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Less
(L

re
b. More
ho
at
c. Equal
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 14) According to IS: 456-1978, the modulus of
P)
elasticity of concrete Ec (in N/mm²) can be taken as
M
TE
,Dr
a. Ec = 5700√fck
re
tu
ec
b. Ec = 570√fck
(L

re
c. Ec = 5700fck
ho
at
d. Ec= 700√fck
R
eep
ad
Where fck is the characteristic strength in N/mm²

Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Ec = 5700√fck as per IS 456 : 1978
(L

re
ho
at
Ec = 5000√fck as per IS 456 : 2000
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 15) Increase in the moisture content in concrete
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Reduces the strength
ec
(L
b. Increases the strength

re
ho
c. Does not change the strength
at
d. All of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Excess water creates greater spaces between aggregate materials.
ec
(L

re
Voids fill with air after the moisture evaporates.
ho
at
Decrease strength of concrete. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r
🙏☺
,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Objective Questions
,Dr
re
(16 to 30)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
Reinforced Cement R
eep
ad
Concrete (RCC)
Pr
P)
Q. 16) As compared to ordinary Portland cement, use of
M
TE
pozzolanic cement
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Reduces workability
(L

re
b. Increases bleeding
ho
at
c. Decreases shrinkage
R
ep
d. Increases strength
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pozzolana materials namely fly ash, volcanic ash, are added to the OPC so
that it becomes PPC.
P)
M
TE
Workability:- Defined as the relative ease with which concrete can be
,D
mixed ,transported, moulded and compacted.
r
re
tu
ec
Bleeding:- Bleeding in fresh concrete refers to the process where free
(L

water in the mix is pushed upward to the surface due to the settlement
re
ho
of heavier solid particles such as cement and water.
at
R
ep
Shrinkage:- The volumetric changes of concrete structure due to the loss
e
ad
of moisture by evaporation is known as concrete shrinkage. It is time

Pr
dependent deformation which reduces the volume of concrete without

the impact of external forces.
P)
Q. 17) Admixtures which cause early setting and hardening
M
TE
of concrete are called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Workability admixtures
(L

re
b. Accelerators
ho
at
c. Retarders
R
ep
D. Air entraining agents
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Accelerating admixtures
TE
,D
Is use for reduce setting time.
r
re
Use in cold weather.
tu
ec
eg calcium chloride.
(L

re
ho
at
Retarding admixtures
R
ep
Is use for increase setting time.
e
ad
Use in hot weather and transport for long distance

Pr
eg Gypsum, sugar etc.

P)
Q. 18) The most commonly used admixture which
M
TE
prolongs the setting and hardening time is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Gypsum
(L

re
b. Calcium chloride
ho
at
c. Sodium silicate
R
ep
d. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 19) The percentage of voids in cement is approximately
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. 25%
ec
(L
b. 40%

re
ho
c. 60%
at
d. 80% R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 20) The strength of concrete after one year as
M
TE
compared to 28 days strength is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 10 to 15% more
(L

re
b. 15 to 20% more
ho
at
c. 20 to 25% more
R
ep
d. 25 to 50% more
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Age Strength per cent
M
TE
,D
1 day 16%
r
re
tu
3 days 40%
ec
(L

re
7 days 65%
ho
at
14 days
R 90%
e ep
ad
28 days 99%
Pr
P)
Q. 21) As compared to ordinary Portland cement, high
M
TE
Alumina cement has
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Higher initial setting time but lower final setting time
(L

re
b. Lower initial setting time but higher final setting time
ho
at
c. Higher initial and final setting times
R
ep
d. Lower initial and final setting times
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
OPC
r
re
initial setting time 30 minutes
tu
ec
Final setting time 10 hours
(L

re
ho
at
High alumina cement
R
ep
Initial setting time 3.5 hours
e
ad
Final setting time 5 hours

Pr
P)
M
Q. 22) Modulus of rupture for concrete is a measure of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Flexural tensile strength
ec
(L
b. Direct tensile strength

re
ho
c. Compressive strength
at
d. Split tensile strength R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 23) In order to obtain the best workability of concrete,
M
TE
the preferred shape of aggregate is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Rounded
(L

re
b. Elongated
ho
at
c. Angular
R
ep
d. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Factors affecting workability of concrete:
TE
1. Water content or w/c ratio– Increase workability.
,D
2. Mix Proportions - Rich concrete mix is more workable because due to sufficient cement
r
aggregates will have proper lubrication for easy movement which means more workability.
re
tu
3. Size of Aggregates - Finer particles require more water for a larger surface,
ec
hence aggregate with finer particles need more water to make it workable.
(L

4.The Shape of Aggregates - Irregular shape and rougher texture of angular aggregate demand
re
more water than the round shaped aggregate.
ho
at
5.Grading of Aggregates - Well-graded aggregates tend to fill up voids and easily get workability.
R
6. Time - Fresh concrete stiffens with time and loss workability
ep
7.Aggregate Cement ratio - More ratio, less workability. Since less cement mean less water, so the
e
ad
paste is stiff.
Pr
8.Admixtures – The use of fine pozzolanic materials also have better lubricating effect and more
workability. Use of air entraining agent produces air bubbles which acts as a sort of ball bearing
between particles and increases mobility, workability
Q. 24) The effect of adding calcium carbide in concrete is
(I) To increase shrinkage
P)
M
(II) To decrease shrinkage
TE
,D
(III) To increase setting time
r
re
(IV) To decrease setting time
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
a. (I) and (III)
at
b. (I) and (IV) R
eep
ad
c. (II) and (III)

Pr
d. (II) and (IV)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 25) Bulking of sand is maximum if moisture
M
TE
content is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a 2%
(L

re
b 4%
ho
at
c 6% ep
R
d 10%
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Presence of moisture content forms a thin layer around sand
r
re
particles. This layer generates the force which makes particles to
tu
ec
move aside to each other. This results in the increase of the
(L

re
volume of sand, is called bulking of sand.
ho
at
R
ep
As per IS2386-3 Bulking in Sand, Presence of 4% of moisture
e
ad
content in sand increases 25% of its volume.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 26) Finer grinding of cement
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Affects only the early development of strength
ec
(L
b. Affects only the ultimate strength

re
ho
c. Both (a) and (b)
at
R
d. Does not affect the strength
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Cement is in the form of powder, which obtained by grinding the various
M
raw materials.
TE
,D
The degree to which the cement is ground to smaller to smaller particles
r
re
is called fineness cement.
tu
ec
A chemical reaction take places between water and cement is called
(L

hydration.
re
ho
The strength of cement concrete or motor develops with hydration. More
at
the rate of hydration faster development of strength.
ep
R
Finer cement higher the rate of hydration and so faster the development
e
ad
of strength.
Pr
This is because finer cement offer great surface area of particle of

hydration
P)
M
Q. 27) Poisson’s ratio for concrete
TE
,Dr
re
a. Remains constant
tu
ec
(L
b. Increases with richer mixes

re
ho
c. Decreases with richer mixes
at
d. None of the above R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Poisson's ratio is the ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain in
ec
(L

a material subjected to loading.
re
ho
Poisson's ratio varies between 0.1 and 0.2
at
R
It is normally taken as 0.15 for strength design.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 28) 1% of voids in a concrete mix would reduces
M
TE
it’s strength by about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a 5%
(L

re
b 10%
ho
at
c 15% ep
R
d 20%
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Smallair bubbles are intentionally introduced into the mix using
M
admixtures is entrained air.
TE
,D
Larger bubbles are during mixing is entrapped air
r
re
tu
Any air voids reduce the strength of concrete.
ec
(L

re
ho
About a 5% reduction in strength for each 1% increase in the volume of
at
air voids.
R
ep
e
ad
Air voids improve the workability of concrete. Therefore, air-entrained

Pr
concrete at a lower w/c can be prepared to provide similar workability to

non-airentrained concrete.
P)
Q. 29) The fineness modulus of fine aggregate is in
M
TE
the range is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 2.0 to 3.5
(L

re
b. 3.5 to 5.0
ho
at
c. 5.0 to 7.0 ep
R
d. 6.0 to 8.5
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Fineness modulus is an index number which represents the mean
M
size of the particles. It is calculated by performing sieve analysis
TE
,D
with standard sieves. The cumulative percentage retained on
r
re
each sieve is added and divided by 100 gives the value
tu
ec
of fineness modulus.
(L

re
ho
at
Fine aggregates FM 2.0 to 3.5
R
ep
e
ad
Mixed aggregate FM 5.0 to 7.0

Pr
Coarse aggregates (< 38.1 mm) FM 6.0 to 8.5

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 30) The factor of safety for
TE
,Dr
re
a. Steel and concrete are same
tu
ec
(L
b. Steel is lower than that for concrete

re
ho
c. Steel is higher than that for concrete
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
In Limit satate disign (LSM)
M
Partial Safety factor for steel (1.15) is comparatively lower than
TE
,D
that of concrete (1.5) because the steel for reinforcement is
r
re
produced in steel plants and commercially available in specific
tu
ec
diameters with expected better quality control than that of
(L

re
concrete.
ho
at
R
ep
In working stress method (WSM)
e
ad
factor of safety
Pr
Concrete 3 in bending and 4 in direct compression

Yield strength of steel, the value is 1.8.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Objective Questions
,Dr
re
(31 to 45)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
Reinforced Cement R
eep
ad
Concrete (RCC)
Pr
Q. 31) Examine the following statements
(I) Factor of safety for steel should be based on its yield stress.
P)
M
(II) Factor of safety for steel should be based on its ultimate stress.
TE
(III) Factor of safety for concrete should be based on its yield stress
,Dr
(IV) Factor of safety for concrete should be based on its ultimate stress.
re
tu
ec
(L
The correct statement are

re
ho
at
a. (I) and (III)
R
ep
b. (I) and (IV)
e
ad
c. (II) and (III)

Pr
d. (II) and (IV)

Answer B
A beam collapses when stress in steel is equal to its yield strength and
P)
M
stress in concrete reaches its ultimate strength.
TE
,D
In Limit satate disign (LSM)
r
re
tu
Partial Safety factor for steel (1.15) is comparatively lower than that of
ec
concrete (1.5) because the steel for reinforcement is produced in steel
(L

re
plants and commercially available in specific diameters with expected
ho
at
better quality control than that of concrete.
R
ep
e
In working stress method (WSM)

ad
Pr
The factor of safety used with respect to cube strength of the concrete is
3 for bending and 4 for direct compression and with respect to the yield
strength of steel, the value is 1.8.
Q. 32) For a reinforced concrete section, the shape of
P)
shear stress diagram is
M
TE
,Dr
a. Wholly parabolic
re
tu
ec
b. Wholly rectangular
(L

re
c. Parabolic above neutral axis and rectangular below
ho
at
neutral axis
R
ep
d. Rectangular above neutral axis and parabolic below
e
ad
neutral axis.
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 33) Diagonal tension in a beam
P)
M
TE
,D
a. Is maximum at neutral axis
r
re
tu
b. Decreases below the neutral axis and increases above
ec
(L
the neutral axis

re
ho
c. Increases below the neutral axis and decreases above
at
the neutral axis R
ep
e
d. Remains same
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
The tension which is caused in the tensile zone of the beam due
M
TE
to shear, at or near the supports is called as diagonal tension.
,D
Which is caused by shear, cannot be resisted by concrete alone.
r
re
tu
So shear reinforcement is provided in the R.C.C. beams to take
ec
(L

up diagonal tension and prevent cracking of beam.
re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 34) If a beam fails in bond, then its bond strength can
M
TE
be increased most economically by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Increasing the depth of beam
(L

re
b. Using thinner bars but more in number
ho
at
c. Using thicker bars but less on number
R
ep
d. Providing vertical stirrups
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Bond strength: - is the measure of the effectiveness of the grip between
M
concrete and steeel.
TE
,Dr
re
σbu = Pb / (π x d x l)
tu
ec
where,
(L

σbu = ultimate bond stress
re
ho
Pb = Bond failure load
at
d = diameter of bar ep
R
l = length of bar
e
ad
Pr
bond strength increases as compressive strength of concrete

increases and the diameter of bar decreases.
Q. 35) If nominal shear stress τv exceeds the design
P)
shear strength of concrete τc, the nominal shear
M
TE
reinforcement as per IS: 456-1978 shall be provided
,D
for carrying a shear stress equal to
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
a. τv
ho
at
b. τc ep
R
c. τv – τc
e
ad
Pr
d. τv + τc
Answer C
Nominal shear (τv) : It is simply the shear force generated in
structure due to imposed force(vertical/horizontal) on a given
P)
M
cross sectional area.
TE
,Dr
re
Design shear (τc) is the actual shear strength of the structure
tu
ec
which it can resist
(L

re
ho
Case 1
at
R
If τc > τv then only minimum shear reinforcement will be
eep
ad
provided by
Pr
Case 2
If τc < τv then shear reinforcement will be provided for If τv - τc
Q. 36) If the depth of actual neutral axis in a beam is
P)
M
more than the depth of critical neutral axis, then the
TE
,D
beam is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Balanced beam

re
ho
b. Under-reinforced beam
at
c. Over-reinforced beam R
eep
ad

Pr
Answers C
1. Balanced Sections
P)
M
A balanced sections is that in which stress in concrete and steel
TE
,D
reach their permissible value at the same time.
r
re
The percentage of steel corresponding to this section is called as
tu
ec
balanced steel and the neutral axis is called as critical neutral axis
(L

re
2. Under Reinforced Section
ho
The percentage of steel provided is less than that provided in
at
balanced section. R
ep
e
ad
So the actual neutral axis will shift upwards i.e., Nc > Na

Pr
The stress in steel first reaches it permissible value, while the

concrete is under stressed.
P)
M
3. Over Reinforced Section
TE
,D
The percentage of steel provided is greater than the balanced
r
re
section.
tu
ec
So the actual neutral axis shift downward i.e., Na > Nc
(L

re
Stress in concrete reaches its permissible value while steel is not
ho
fully stressed.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 37) If the depth of neutral axis for a singly reinforced rectangular
P)
M
section is represented by Kd in working stress design, then the value of k
TE
for balanced section
,Dr
re
tu
a. Depends on σst only
ec
b. Depends on σcbc only
(L

re
c. Depends on both σst and σcbc
ho
d. Is independent of both σst and σcbc
at
R
ep
e
Where d is the effective depth, σst is permissible stress in Steel in tension and σcbc
ad
is permissible stress in concrete in bending compression

Pr
Answer A
Critical Depth of Neutral Axis n
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
d = Efffective depth
ad
Pr
σcbc = permissible stress in concrete

σst = permissible stress in steel
Q. 38) If the permissible stress in steel in tension is
P)
M
140 N/mm², then the depth of neutral axis for a
TE
,D
singly reinforced rectangular balanced section will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 0.35d

re
ho
b. 0.40d
at
c. 0.45d R
eep
ad
d. Dependent on Grade of Concrete also

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 39) Modulus of elasticity of Steel as per IS : 456 -1978
M
TE
shall be taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 20 KN/cm²
(L

re
b. 200 KN/cm²
ho
at
c. 200 KN/mm²
R
ep
d. 2 × 10^6 N/cm²
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
The ratio of stress to strain of
,D
an elastic substance is
r
re
tu
the modulus of elasticity or
ec
(L
young’s modulus.

re
ho
at
Steel 200Gpa or 200KN/mm² R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Concrete 30 Gpa 30KN/mm³

P)
Q. 40) Minimum grade of concrete to be used in reinforced
M
TE
concrete as per IS : 456 1978 is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. M15
(L

re
b. M20
ho
at
c. M10
R
ep
d. M25
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Minimum grade of concrete to be used in reinforced
r
re
concrete as per IS : 456 1978 is M15
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Minimum grade of concrete to be used in reinforced
at
R
concrete as per IS : 456 2000 is M20
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 41) For concreting of heavily reinforced section without
P)
M
vibration, the workability of concrete expressed as
TE
,D
compacting factor should be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a 0.75 – 0.80

re
ho
b 0.80 – 0.85
at
c 0.85 – 0.92 R
eep
d above 0.92
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 42) Maximum quantity of water needed per 50kg of
M
TE
cement for M15 grade of concrete is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a 28 litres
(L

re
b 30 litres
ho
at
c 32 litres
R
ep
d 34 litres
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 43) In case of hand mixing of concrete, the extra
M
TE
cement to be added is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a 5%
(L

re
b 10%
ho
at
c 15%
R
ep
d 20%
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Hand Mixing
P)
For hand mixing, the materials are stacked on a water-tight platform,
M
TE
which may be either of wood, brick or steel.
,D
Materials mixed at least three times in dry condition.
r
re
Mix should be consumed in 30 minutes after adding water.
tu
ec
The mixing by hand is allowed in case of small works of unimportant
(L

re
works where small quantity of concrete is required.
ho
For important works, if hand mixing is to be adopted, it is advisable to
at
R
use 10 percent more cement than specified.
eep
ad
Machine mixing
Pr
For machine mixing, all the materials of concrete, including water, are
collected in a revolving drum and then the drum is rotated
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 44) For walls, columns and vertical faces of all
P)
M
structural members, the form work is generally
TE
,D
removed after
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a 24 to 48 hours

re
ho
b 3 days
at
c 7 days R
eep
ad
d 14 days
Pr
Answer A
Forms should not be removed until the concrete has sufficiently
P)
hardened in order that it can carry safely its own weight and any other
M
TE
live loads it is subjected to.
,Dr
re
1. Walls, columns and vertical sides of beams → 24 to 48 hours
tu
ec
2. Slabs (props left under) 3 days
(L

3. Beam (props left under) 7 days
re
ho
Removal of props of slabs
at
R
3. Slabs spanning up to 4.5 m → 7 days
ep
4. Slabs spanning Over 4.5 m → 14 days
e
ad
Removal of props of slabs and arches

Pr
5. Removal of beams and arches (Spanning upto 6 m) → 14 days

6. Removal of beams and arches (Spanning over 6 m) → 21 days
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 45) The individual variation between test strength of
M
TE
sample should not be more than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a ± 5% of average
(L

re
b ± 10% of average
ho
at
c ± 15% of average
R
ep
d ± 20% of average
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Even under strict quality control there may be non uniformity in
P)
M
the strength of a batch due to non homogenous nature of
TE
,D
concrete as well as human error is obtaining the sample, casting,
r
re
curing, testing and strength calculations.
tu
ec
(L

re
Batching of concrete means measuring different ingredients of
ho
concrete i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregate and water before
at
mixing of concrete R
ep
e
ad
Pr
IS 456 requires that individual strength must lie within ± 15% of

the average of three specimens.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Objective Questions
,Dr
re
(46 to 60)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
Reinforced Cement R
eep
ad
Concrete (RCC)
Pr
Q. 46) One of the criteria for the effective width of flange of T-
beam is
P)
M
TE
,D
bf = lo/6 + be + 6 Df
r
re
tu
ec
In above formula, lo signifies
(L

re
ho
a. Effective span of T-beam
at
R
b. Distance between point of zero moments in the beam
eep
ad
c. Distance between points of maximum moments in the beam

Pr
d. Clear is one of the T-beam

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 47) For a cantilever of effective depth of 0.5 metre, the
M
TE
maximum span of satisfy vertical deflection limit is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 3.5 m
(L

re
b. 4m
ho
at
c. 4.5 m
R
ep
d. 5m
e
ad
Pr
le / d =7
Answer A
le = 3.5 m
le / 0.5 =7
For cantilever
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 48) For a simply supported beam of span 15m, the
P)
M
minimum effective depth to satisfy the vertical deflection
TE
,D
limits should be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 600 mm

re
ho
b. 750 mm
at
c. 900 mm R
ep
e
d. More than 1 m
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 49) For continuous slab of 3 m × 3.5 m size, the
P)
M
minimum overall depth of slab to satisfy vertical deflection
TE
,D
limits is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 50 mm

re
ho
b. 75 mm
at
c. 100 mm R
eep
d. 120 mm
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 50) According to IS : 456 - 1978, the flexural strength of
TE
concrete is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Directly proportional to compressive strength
(L

re
b. Inversely proportional to compressive strength
ho
at
c. Directly proportional to square root of compressive strength
R
ep
d. Inversely proportional to square root compressive strength
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Flexural tensile strength of concrete (fcr)
M
TE
,D
fcr = 0.7√fck
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Where fck is compressive or characteristic strength of concrete
re
ho
at
R
Characteristic strength is found by applying compressive strength
ep
on concrete cube after 28 days of curing.
e
ad
Pr
Example M20 grade concrete as characteristic strength of 20 mpa

or 20 N/mm²
P)
Q. 51) According to ISI : 456 – 1978, the column or the
M
TE
strut is the member whose effective length is greater than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. The least lateral dimension
(L

re
b. 2 times the least lateral dimension
ho
at
c. 3 times the least lateral dimension
R
ep
d. 4 times the least lateral dimension
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 52) according to IS : 456- 1978, minimum slenderness
M
TE
ratio for a short column is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Less than 12
(L

re
b. Less than 18
ho
at
c. Between 18 and 24
R
ep
d. More than 24
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 53) Lap length is compression shall not be less than
P)
M
TE
,D
a. 15ф
r
re
tu
b. 20ф
ec
(L
c. 24ф

re
ho
d. 30ф
at
R
eep
Where ф is the diameter of bar

ad
Pr
Answer C
Lap length is the minimum length that must be provided if two bars are
P)
M
joined together such that forces can transfer safely.
TE
,D
Lap length in tension
r
re
tu
1. For Flexural tension Ld or 30d Whichever is greater
ec
(L
2. For direct tension 2Ld or 30d Whichever is greater

re
The straight length of lapping shall not be
ho
at
less than 15d or 20 cm
R
ep
e
Lap length in compression

ad
Pr
Equivalent to the development length in compression computed but not

less than 24d
Where d is the diameter of bar.
Q. 54) The minimum cover in a slab should neither be less
P)
M
than the diameter of bar nor less than
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. 10 mm
ec
(L
b. 15 mm

re
ho
c. 25 mm
at
d. 13 mm R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Clear cover is the distance from outer surface of concrete member to the
M
TE
outer surface of steel.
,Dr
re
Effective cover is distance from outer surface of concrete member to the
tu
ec
center of main reinforcement.
(L

re
ho
The recommended value of nominal or clear cover as per IS 456 : 2000
at
1. Slab = 15 mm R
ep
e
2. Beams = 25 mm
ad
Pr
3. Column = 40 mm
4. Footing = 75 mm
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 55) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column, the
P)
M
minimum cover shall neither be less than the diameter of
TE
,D
bar nor less than
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 15 mm

re
ho
b. 25 mm
at
c. 30 mm R
ep
e
d. 40 mm
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 56) The ratio of the diameter of reinforcing bars and the
M
TE
slab thickness is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1/4
(L

re
b. 1/5
ho
at
c. 1/6
R
ep
d. 1/8
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Maximum dia of bar = thickness of slab / 8

P)
Q. 57) According to IS: 456-1978, the maximum
M
TE
reinforcement in a column is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 2%
(L

re
b. 4%
ho
at
c. 6%
R
ep
d. 8%
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
1. The main reinforcement column is longitudinal, parallel to the
direction of the load and consists of bars are arranged in square,
P)
rectangular or circular shape.
M
TE
,D
2. Longitudinal reinforcement
r
re
Minimum = 0.8% of cross section
tu
ec
Maximum = 6% of cross section
(L

re
ho
3. Minimum 6 bars in rectangular or square column and minimum 6 bars
at
in circular shape column R
eep
ad
Pr
4. Minimum diameter of main bar = 12 mm
5. Maximum Spacing between main reinforcement = 300 mm

P)
Q. 58) The percentage of reinforcement in case of slabs,
M
TE
when high strength deformed bar are used is not less than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 0.15
(L

re
b. 0.12
ho
at
c. 0.30
R
ep
d. 1.00
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
1. Minimum Reinforcement in slabs
r
re
tu
= 0.15 % for mild steel
ec
(L
= 0.12 % for HYSD (High yield strength deformed) bar

re
ho
at
R
2. Maximum dia of bar = thickness of slab / 8
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 59) Which of the following statements is incorrect
P)
M
TE
a. Minimum cross sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in
,D
column is 0.8%
r
re
tu
b. Spacing of longitudinal bars measured along the Periphery of
ec
(L
column should not exceed 300 mm

re
ho
c. Reinforcing bars in a column should not be less than 12 mm in
at
diameter ep
R
d. The number of longitudinal bars provided in circular column
e
ad
should not be less than four

Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 60) Which of the following statements is incorrect
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Higher Vee-Bee time shows lower workability
ec
(L
b. Higher slump shows higher workability

re
ho
c. Higher compacting factor shows higher workability
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
A. Relative effort led by concrete to change from one definite
TE
shape to another definite shape by conducting vibration (Conical
,Dr
to cylindrical). This effort is known as Remoulding effort and it is
re
tu
ec
measured in ‘t’ secs. (time) or called as Vee bee Secs.
(L

re
ho
B. Slump value is measured as the difference in height between
at
R
the height of the mould and the average value of the subsidence.
eep
ad
Pr
C. The compaction factor is defined as the ratio of the weight of partially

compacted concrete to the weight of fully compacted concrete.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Objective Questions
,Dr
re
(61 to 75)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
Reinforced Cement R
eep
ad
Concrete (RCC)
Pr
Q. 61) Minimum pitch of transverse reinforcement in a
P)
column is
M
TE
,Dr
A. The least lateral dimension of the member
re
tu
ec
B. Sixteen times the smallest diameter of the longitudinal
(L

re
reinforcement bar to be tied
ho
at
C. Forty eight times the diameter of transverse
R
ep
reinforcement
e
ad
D. Lesser of the above three values

Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Transverse reinforcement in a
r
re
tu
reinforced concrete column
ec
(L
helps in the transfer of shear

re
ho
stress and tensile stress, as
at
well as prevent buckling of
ep
R
longitudinal bars.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 62) Maximum distance between Expansion joints in
M
TE
structures as per IS: 456 – 1978
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 20 m
(L

re
B. 30 m
ho
at
C. 45 m
R
ep
D. 60 m
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
An expansion joint is a gap in the building structure
P)
M
provided to allow for the movement of the building due to
TE
,D
temperature changes.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Expansion joint shall be provided at length not exceeding:

re
ho
at
i) RCC Structures --- 45m R
ep
e
ii) Load bearing brick structure ---- 30m

ad
Pr
iii) Boundary wall ---- 10m

iv) Overhanging members--- 6m
Q. 63) A continuous beam is deemed to be deep beam is
P)
M
the ratio of effective span to overall depth (l/D) is less
TE
,D
than
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1.5

re
ho
B. 2.0
at
C. 2.5 R
eep
D. 3.0
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 64) Critical section for shear in case of flat slabs is at a
P)
M
distance of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Effective depth of slab from Periphery of
ec
(L
column / drop panel

re
ho
B. d/2 from Periphery of column/capital/drop panel
at
R
C. At the Drop panel of slab
eep
D. At the Periphery of column

ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
In common practice, support the slabs by beams and support the
tu
ec
beams by columns. This may be called as beam-slab construction.
(L

re
ho
at
Sometimes beams are avoided and slabs directly supported by
R
ep
columns. These slabs are called flat-slabs.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 65) Minimum thickness of load bearing RCC wall should
M
TE
be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 50 mm
(L

re
B. 100 mm
ho
at
C. 150 mm
R
ep
D. 200 mm
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
As per IS:456-2000

re
ho
The minimum thickness of wall shall be 100 mm
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 66) If the storey height is equal to length of RCC wall,
M
TE
the percentage increase in strength is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 10
ho
at
C. 20
R
ep
D. 30
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 67) In reinforced concrete footing on soil, the minimum
M
TE
thickness at edge should not be less than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 100 mm
(L

re
B. 150 mm
ho
at
C. 200 mm
R
ep
D. 250 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 68) Slab is designed is one way if the ratio of long span
M
TE
to short span is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than 1
(L

re
B. Between 1 and 1.5
ho
at
C. Between 1.5 and 2
R
ep
D. Greater than 2
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 69) Ratio of permissible stress in direct compression
M
TE
and bending compression is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than 1
(L

re
B. Between 1 and 1.5
ho
at
C. Between 1.5 and 2
R
ep
D. Greater than 2
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 70) A higher modular ratio shows
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Higher compressive strength of concrete
ec
(L
B. Lower compressive strength of concrete

re
ho
C. Higher tensile strength of Steel
at
R
D. Lower tensile strength of Steel
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 71) The average permissible stress in Bond for plain bars
M
TE
in tension is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increased by 10% for bars in compression
(L

re
B. Increased by 25% for bars in compression
ho
at
C. Decreased by 10% of bars in compression
R
ep
D. Decreased by 25% for bars in compression
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 72) The modular ratio m in terms of permissible
P)
M
compressive stress due to Bending in concrete σcbc (in
TE
,D
N/mm²) is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 280/σcbc

re
ho
B. 2800/σcbc
at
C. 280/3σcbc R
eep
D. 2800/3σcbc
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 73) The expression for modular ratio m= 280/3σcbc, where
P)
M
σcbc is the permissible compressive stress due to bending in
TE
,D
concrete in N/mm²
r
re
tu
ec
A. Fully it takes into account the long term effect such as creep
(L

re
B. Partially takes into account the long-term effects such as creep
ho
C. Does not take into account the long-term effects such as creep
at
R
D. Is the same as the modular ratio based on the value of
ep
e
ad
modulus of elasticity of structural concrete Ec

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 74) In working stress design, permissible Bond stress in
P)
M
the case of deformed bars is the more then that in plain
TE
,D
bars by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 10%

re
ho
B. 20%
at
C. 30% R
eep
D. 40%
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 75) The main reason for providing number of reinforcing
P)
M
bars at a support in a simply supported beam is to resist in
TE
,D
that zone
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Compressive stress

re
ho
B. Shear stress
at
C. Bond stress R
eep
D. Tensile stress
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

SSC JE, AE(PSC), RRB JE etc.
(76 to 90)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

P)
Q. 76) Half of the main steel in a simply supported slab is
M
TE
bent up near the support at a distance of x from the centre
,D
of slab bearing where x is equal to
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 1/3
re
ho
B. 1/5
at
C. 1/7 R
eep
ad
D. 1/10
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 77) When shear stress exceeds the permissible limit in a
TE
slab, then it is reduced by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increasing the depth
(L

re
B. Providing shear reinforcement
ho
at
C. Using high strength Steel
R
ep
D. Using thinner bars but more in number
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
A high shear demand in a shallow slab/beam will tend to a very
M
TE
high shear reinforcement. If you provided very closely spaced ties
,D
then it will be difficult to construct such a beam and the
r
re
workability of concrete will reduce.
tu
ec
(L

re
In case if we made the beam/slab deeper:-
ho
at
1. The cross section is bigger, concrete will carry more shear
R
ep
thereby reducing the shear demand on steel.
e
ad
2. The depth of shear stirrups has increased so the spacing of

Pr
shear reinforcement will increase. So workability of concrete will

increase.
P)
Q. 78) If the size of panel in a flat slab is 6 m × 6 m, then
M
TE
as per Indian Standard code, the widths of column strip
,D
and middle strip are
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 3.0 m and 1.5 m
re
ho
B. 1.5 m and 3.0 m
at
C. 3.0 m and 3.0 m R
ep
e
ad
D. 1.5 m and 1.5 m

Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The effective width of a column strip of a flat slab, is half
re
ho
the width of the panel i.e. 6/2 = 3 m
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 79) For a slab supported on its four edges with corners
P)
M
held down and loaded uniformly, the Marcus correction
TE
factor to the moments obtained by Grashof Rankine’s
,Dr
re
theory
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Is always less than 1
ho
at
B. Is always greater than 1
R
ep
C. Can be more than 1
e
ad
D. Can be less than 1

Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Dr. Marcus has presented an approximate method for computing
tu
ec
bending moments in slabs supported on four edges with corners
(L

re
prevented from lifting.
ho
at
He has modified Grashof and Rankine’s method by adopting
R
ep
multiplication factor ‘C’ which is less than unity.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 80) The permissible diagonal tensile stress in reinforced
TE
brick work is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. About 0.1 N/mm²
(L

re
B. Zero
ho
at
C. 0.3 N/mm² to 0.7 N/mm²
R
ep
D. About 1.0 N/mm²
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The permissible diagonal tensile stress in reinforced brick
re
ho
work is about 0.1 N/mm²
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 81) The limits of percentage p of the longitudinal
TE
reinforcement in a column is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.15% to 2%
(L

re
B. 0.8% to 4%
ho
at
C. 0.8% to 6%
R
ep
D. 0.8% to 8%
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
As per IS : 456 – 2000
M
The cross sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement in columns,
TE
,D
shall not be less than 0.8% nor more than 6% of the gross cross sectional
r
re
area of the column.
tu
ec
(L

Minimum number of bars
re
ho
1. For rectangular c/s = 4
at
R
2. For circular c/s = 6 ep
e
ad
Minimum diameter of bar = 12mm

Pr
Maximum spacing between main reinforcement = 300 mm

P)
M
Q. 82) The minimum diameter of longitudinal bars in a
TE
column is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6 mm
(L

re
B. 8 mm
ho
at
C. 12 mm
R
ep
D. 16 mm
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 83) The minimum cover to the ties or spirals should not
TE
be less than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 15 mm
(L

re
B. 20 mm
ho
at
C. 25 mm
R
ep
D. 50 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Concrete cover for reinforcement is required to protect the bar against
TE
,D
corrosion and to provide resistance against fire. The thickness of cover
r
re
depends on environmental conditions and type of structural member.
tu
ec
(L

a) At each end of reinforcing bar, Whichever is more, 25 mm or 2∅
re
ho
b) Column – Whichever is more, 40 mm or ∅
at
R
c) Beam – Whichever is more, 30 mm or ∅
ep
d) Slab – Whichever is more, 15 mm or ∅
e
ad
e) Footings - 75 mm.
Pr
f) For any other reinforcement not less than 15 mm and ∅

P)
M
Q. 84) The load carrying capacity of helically reinforced
TE
column as compared to that of a tied column is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 5% less
(L

re
B. 10% less
ho
at
C. 5% more
R
ep
D. 10% more
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 86) The diameter of ties in a column should be
P)
M
TE
A. More than or equal to one fourth of diameter of main
,Dr
re
bar
tu
ec
B. More than or equal to 5 mm
(L

re
C. More than 5 mm but less than one fourth of diameter of
ho
at
main bar
R
ep
D. More than 5 mm and also more than one fourth of
e
ad
diameter of main bar

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Pitch and Diameter of Lateral Ties:-
M
1. Pitch:- The pitch of transverse reinforcement shall be not more
TE
,D
than the least of the following distances-
r
re
A. The least lateral dimension of the compression member
tu
ec
B. 16 times the smallest diameter of the longitudinal
(L

re
reinforcement bar to be tied
ho
at
C. 48 times the diameter of the transverse reinforcement.
R
eep
ad
2. Diameter:- The diameter of the lateral ties shall be not less

Pr
than ¼ of the diameter of largest bar and in no case less than 5

mm.
Q. 87) Due to circumferential action of the spiral in a
P)
M
spirally reinforced column
TE
,Dr
re
A. Capacity of column is decreased
tu
ec
B. Ductility of column reduces
(L

re
C. Capacity of column is decreased but ductility of column
ho
at
increases
R
ep
D. Both the capacity of column and ductility of column
e
ad
increase
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 88) Maximum percentage reinforcement in case of slabs
TE
is limited to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2
(L

re
B. 4
ho
at
C. 6
R
ep
D. 8
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 89) Which of the following R.C. retaining walls is
TE
suitable for heights beyond 6 m
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. L-shaped wall
(L

re
B. T-shaped wall
ho
at
C. Counterfort type
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 90) For the design of retaining walls, the minimum
TE
factor of safety against overturning is taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1.5
(L

re
B. 2.0
ho
at
C. 2.5
R
ep
D. 3.0
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
1. The wall should be stable against sliding.
tu
ec
The factor of safety against sliding shall be a minimum of 1.5
(L

re
ho
2. The wall should be stable against overturning.
at
R
For granular backfill, the The factor of safety against overturning shall be
ep
a minimum of 2
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

(91 to 110)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Q. 91) In counterfort type retaining walls
P)
i) The vertical slab is designed as a continuous slab
M
TE
ii) The heel slab is designed as a continuous slab
,D
iii) The vertical slab is designed as a cantilever
r
re
tu
iv) The heel slab is designed as a cantilever
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) R
eep
ad
B. (i) and (iv)

Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (iii) and (iv)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
When the height of retaining wall is more (> 6m) and the design
,Dr
of stem, toe and heel becomes uneconomical, then counterforts
re
tu
ec
are provided to economise the design of various components of
(L

the retaining wall. In such a case, it is known as counterfort
re
ho
retaining wall.
at
R
ep
e
The counterforts act as supports to stem and heels slab.

ad
Pr
Therefore stem and heel slabs are designed as continuous slabs

supported over counterforts.
P)
M
TE
Q. 92) A T-shaped retaining wall mainly consists of
,Dr
re
tu
A. One cantilever
ec
(L

B. Two cantilevers
re
ho
C. Three cantilevers
at
D. Four cantilevers R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 93) In T-shaped RC retaining walls, the main
TE
reinforcement in the stem is provided on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. The front face in one direction
(L

re
B. The front face in both directions
ho
at
C. The inner face in one direction
R
ep
D. The inner face in both directions
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
The stem of T shaped cantilever retaining wall will be bend as
r
re
cantilever, so that tensile force will be towards the backfill.
tu
ec
The critical section will be at B, where cracks may occur at the
(L

re
inner face if it is not properly reinforced.
ho
at
R
ep
The heel slab will have net pressure acting downwards, and will
e
ad
bend as cantilever, having tensile force upwards.

Pr
Q. 94) The main reinforcement in the toe of T-shaped RC
retaining wall is provided on
P)
M
i) Top face parallel to the wall
TE
ii) Top face perpendicular to the wall
,Dr
re
iii) bottom face parallel to the wall
tu
ec
iv) bottom face perpendicular to the wall
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (ii) is correct
R
ep
B. (i) and (ii) are correct
e
ad
Pr
C. (iii) and (iv) are correct

D. Only (iv) is correct
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
The toe acts as a cantilever. It is subjected to upward pressure
,D
from the soil and the self weight acting downwards.
r
re
tu
ec
Maximum bending moment and shear force occurs at the face of
(L

re
stem for which adequate thickness and steel are provided.
ho
at
Maximum bending moment is due to upward pressure of soil.
R
ep
e
ad
Steel is placed near the lower/bottom face perpendicular to the

Pr
wall.
P)
Q. 95) The temperature reinforcement in the vertical
M
TE
slab of T-shaped RC retaining wall is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Not needed
(L

re
B. Provided equally on inner and front faces
ho
at
R
C. Provided more on inner face than on front face
eep
D. Provided more on front face than on inner face

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Temperature reinforcement at the rate of 0.15 % of gross cross-
ec
(L

sectional area is provided on the face of stem (more on front face
re
ho
than inner) and is distributed equally in vertical and horizontal
at
directions. R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 96) The main reinforcement in the heel of a T-shaped
TE
RC retaining wall is provided on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Top face perpendicular to wall
(L

re
B. Bottom face perpendicular to wall
ho
at
C. Both top and bottom faces perpendicular to wall
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
The heel acts as a cantilever. It is subjected to upward pressure
TE
from the soil and the downward loads due to self weight and
,Dr
earth about the heel.
re
tu
ec
(L

Bending moment due to downward loads is more than that due
re
ho
to the upward loads. Maximum bending moment and shear force
at
R
occurs at the junction of heel with stem for which adequate
ep
e
thickness and steel are provided.

ad
Pr
Steel is placed near the upper/top face perpendicular to wall.

Q. 97) In a counterfort retaining wall, the main reinforcement is
provided on the
P)
M
i) Bottom face in front counterfort
TE
ii) inclined face in front counterfort
,Dr
iii) bottom face in back counterfort
re
tu
iv) inclined face back counterfort
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) R
eep
B. (ii) and (iii)
ad
Pr
C. (i) and (iv)

D. (iii) and (iv)
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 98) In counterfort retaining walls, the main
TE
reinforcement in the stem at support is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Not provided
(L

re
B. Provided only on inner face
ho
at
C. Provided only on front face
R
ep
D. Provided both on inner and front faces
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 99) In the design of front counterfort in a counterfort
retaining wall, the main reinforcement is provided on
P)
i) Bottom face near counterfort
M
TE
ii) Top face near counterfort
,D
iii) Bottom face near centre of span
r
re
tu
iv) Top face near centre of span
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
ad
B. Only (ii)
Pr
C. Both (i) and (iv)

D. Both (ii) and (iii)
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 100) In counterfort retaining wall, the main
TE
reinforcement in the stem at mid span is provided on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Front face only
(L

re
B. Inner face only
ho
at
C. Both front face and inner face
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

(101 to 110)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Q. 101) The depth of footing for an isolated column is
P)
governed by
M
TE
i) Maximum bending moment
,D
ii) Shear force
r
re
tu
iii) Punching shear
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
ad
B. (i) and (ii)

Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Individual footing provided to distribute the load of a column to
,Dr
re
the soil, is called isolated footing.
tu
ec
(L

The following points should be considered for the design of
re
ho
footing depth.
at
R
1. Maximum bending moment about the column face.
eep
2. Shear force
ad
Pr
3. Punching shear about the column perimeter.

Q. 102) If the foundations of all the columns of a
P)
structure are design on the total live and dead load basis,
M
TE
then
,Dr
re
tu
A. There will be no settlement of columns
ec
(L

B. There will be no differential settlement
re
ho
C. The settlement of exterior columns will be more than
at
interior columns R
ep
e
ad
D. The settlement of interior columns will be more than

Pr
exterior columns
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The settlement of exterior columns will be more than
re
ho
interior columns.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 103) To minimise the effect of differential settlement,
TE
the area of a footing should be designed for
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Dead load only
(L

re
B. Dead load + live load
ho
at
C. Dead load + fraction of live load
R
ep
D. Live load + fraction of dead load
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer C
re
tu
ec
(L

To minimise the effect of differential settlement, the area of a
re
ho
footing should be designed for → Dead load + fraction of live
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 104) The critical section of finding maximum bending
M
TE
moment for footing under masonry wall is located
,Dr
re
tu
A. At the middle of the wall
ec
(L

B. At the edge of the wall
re
ho
C. Halfway between the middle and edge of the wall
at
R
D. At a distance equal to effective depth of footing from
ep
e
ad
the edge of the wall

Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 105) In a pile of length L the points of suspension from
TE
ends for lifting it are located at
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.207 L
(L

re
B. 0.25 L
ho
at
C. 0.293 L
R
ep
D. 0.333 L
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 106) During erection, the pile of length L is supported
P)
M
by a crane at a distance of
TE
,Dr
re
A. 0.207 L
tu
ec
B. 0.293 L
(L

re
C. 0.707 L
ho
at
D. 0.793 L
R
ep
e
ad
From the driving end of pile which rests on the ground

Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 107) While designing the pile as a column, the end
TE
conditions are nearly
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Both ends hinged
(L

re
B. Both and fixed
ho
at
C. One end fixed and other end hinged
R
ep
D. One end fixed and other end free
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

While designing the pile as a column, the end conditions are
re
ho
nearly → One end fixed and other end hinged.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 108) The recommended value of modular ratio for
TE
reinforced brick work is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 18
(L

re
B. 30
ho
at
C. 40
R
ep
D. 58
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
Modular ratio is the ratio of Modulus of Elasticity of Steel (Es) to
re
tu
Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete (Ec).
ec
(L

re
ho
m = Es / Ec
at
R
eep
The recommended value of ‘m’ for reinforced brick work is 40

ad
Pr
P)
Q. 109) According to IS recommendations, the maximum
M
TE
depth of stress block for balanced section of a beam of
,D
effective depth d is
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 0.53 d
re
ho
B. 0.55 d
at
C. 0.68 d R
eep
ad
D. 0.85 d
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 110) Assertion A: The load factor for live load is greater than
P)
that for dead load.
M
Reason R: The live loads are more uncertain than dead loads.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
B. Both A and R are true but Re is not the correct explanation of
R
ep
A
e
ad

Pr

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
Load factor is a ratio of the theoretical design strength to the
ec
(L

maximum load expected in service.
re
ho
at
R
The load factor for live load is 2.2 and for dead load 1.5
eep
ad
Pr
(111 to 120)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Q. 111) The centroid of compressive force, from the
extreme compression fibre, in limit state design lies at a
P)
M
distance of
TE
,Dr
re
A. 0.367Xu
tu
ec
B. 0.416Xu
(L

re
C. 0.446Xu
ho
at
D. 0.573Xu
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Where Xu is depth of neutral axis at the limit state of

collapse
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 112) The design yield stress of steel according to IS:456
P)
M
- 1978 is
TE
,Dr
re
A. 0.37fy
tu
ec
B. 0.57fy
(L

re
C. 0.67fy
ho
at
D. 0.87fy
R
eep
ad
Where fy is the characteristic yield strength of steel

Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 113) According to Whitney’s theory, ultimate strain of
TE
concrete is assumed to be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.03%
(L

re
B. 0.1%
ho
at
C. 0.3%
R
ep
D. 3%
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 114) According to Whitney’s theory, depth of stress
P)
block for a balanced section of a concrete beam is limited
M
TE
to
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.43d
ec
(L

B. 0.537d
re
ho
C. 0.68d
at
D. 0.85d R
eep
ad
Pr
Where d is effective depth of beam

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 115) The load factors for live load and dead load are
TE
taken respectively as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1.5 and 2.2
(L

re
B. 2.2 and 1.5
ho
at
C. 1.5 and 1.5
R
ep
D. 2.2 and 2.2
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Load factor is a ratio of the theoretical design strength to the
ec
(L

maximum load expected in service.
re
ho
at
R
The load factor for live load is 2.2 and for dead load 1.5
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 117) The maximum shear stress for M15 concrete as
TE
per IS:456 - 1978 in limit state design is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2.5 N/mm²
(L

re
B. 2.8 N/mm²
ho
at
C. 3.1 N/mm²
R
ep
D. 3.5 N/mm²
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 118) According to IS:456-1978, the maximum
M
TE
compressive stress in concrete for design purpose is taken
,D
as
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 0.370Fck
re
ho
B. 0.416Fck
at
C. 0.446Fck R
eep
ad
D. 0.670Fck
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 119) The maximum compressive stress in concrete for
TE
design purpose is based on a partial safety factor of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1.15
(L

re
B. 1.50
ho
at
C. 1.85
R
ep
D. 2.20
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 120) The partial safety factor for steel as per IS:456 -
TE
1978 is taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1.15
(L

re
B. 1.35
ho
at
C. 1.50
R
ep
D. 1.65
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

(121 to 130)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

P)
Q. 121) According to IS: 456-1978, the maximum strain in
M
TE
concrete at the outermost compression fibre in the limit
,D
state design of flexural member is
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 0.0020
re
ho
B. 0.0035
at
C. 0.0050 R
ep
e
ad
D. 0.0065
Pr
Answer B
P)
Assumptions of LSM:-
M
TE
,D
1. Plane sections normal to the axis remain plane after bending.
r
re
tu
ec
2. The maximum strain in concrete at the outermost compression
(L

re
fibre is taken as 0.0035 in bending.
ho
at
R
ep
3. The tensile strength of concrete is ignored.
e
ad
Pr
4. For design purposes, the partial safety factor for concrete is

1.5 and for steel is 1.15
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 123) For the deflection of simply supported beam to be
M
TE
within permissible limits, the ratio of its span to effective
,D
depth as per IS: 456-1978 should not exceed
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 7
re
ho
B. 20
at
C. 26 R
eep
ad
D. 35
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 125) For bars in tension, a standard hook has an
P)
M
anchorage value equivalent to a straight length of
TE
,Dr
re
A. 8d
tu
ec
B. 12d
(L

re
C. 16d
ho
at
D. 24d
R
eep
ad
Where d is diameter of hook

Pr
As deformed bars are rods of steels provided with lugs, ribs or
deformationon the surface of bar, these bars minimize slippage in
P)
concrete and increases the bond between the two materials.
M
TE
Deformed bars have more tensile stresses than that of mild steel
,D
plain bars. These bars can be used without end hooks.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 126) The creep strains are
,Dr
re
tu
A. Caused due to dead loads only
ec
(L

B. Caused due to live loads only
re
ho
C. Caused due to both dead loads and live loads
at
D. Independent of loads R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Creep can be defined as the elastic and long-term
tu
ec
deformation of concrete under a dead load.
(L

re
Generally, a long term pressure changes the shape of
ho
at
concrete structure and the deformation occurs along the
R
ep
direction of the load.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 127) The effect of creep on modular ratio is
,Dr
re
tu
A. To decrease it
ec
(L

B. To increase it
re
ho
C. Either to decrease or to increase it
at
D. To keep it unchanged R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Reinforced section is made up of both steel and concrete while
r
re
tu
steel is made to resist tension load and compression load takes
ec
(L
by concrete.

re
ho
at
Modular ratio is the ratio of modulus of elasticity of the two
R
ep
different materials.
e
ad
m = Es / Ec
Pr
Q. 128) Shrinkage of concrete depends upon
P)
i) Humidity of atmosphere
M
TE
ii) Passage of time
,D
iii) Stress
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. (i) and (ii)
at
B. (ii) and (iii) R
e ep
ad
C. Only (iii)
Pr
D. All (i), (ii) and (iii)

Answer A
P)
Shrinkage of concrete:- The volumetric changes of concrete structures
M
TE
due to the loss of moisture by evaporation is known as concrete
,D
shrinkage or shrinkage of concrete.
r
re
It is a time dependent deformation which reduces the volume of
tu
ec
concrete without the impact of external forces.
(L

re
ho
Factors affecting shrinkage
at
R
1. If the concrete is placed in dry air, it shrinks, but if it is placed in water
ep
or air with 100% humidity it swells.
e
ad
shrinkage is much less in coastal areas where relative humidity remains

Pr
high throughout the year.

2. The rate of shrinkage rapidly decreases with time.
P)
M
Q. 129) Due to shrinkage stresses, simply supported beam
TE
having reinforcement only at bottom tends to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Deflect downward
(L

re
B. Deflect upward
ho
at
C. Deflect downward or upward
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 130) In symmetrically reinforced sections, shrinkage
TE
stresses in concrete and steel are respectively
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Compressive and tensile
(L

re
B. Tensile and compressive
ho
at
C. Both compressive
R
ep
D. Both tensile
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

In symmetrically reinforced sections, shrinkage
re
ho
stresses tensile in concrete and compressive in steel.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, RRB-JE, State SSSC-JE
AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(131 to 140)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

P)
M
Q. 131) A beam curved in plan is designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Bending moment and shear
ec
(L

B. Bending moment and torsion
re
ho
C. Shear and torsion
at
R
ep
D. Bending moment, shear and torsion
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 132) In a spherical dome subjected to
P)
M
concentrated load at crown or uniformly
TE
,D
distributed load, the meridional force is always
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. Zero
re
ho
B. Tensile
at
R
ep
C. Compressive
e
ad
Pr
D. Tensile or compressive
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 133) Sinking of an intermediate support of a continuous
beam
P)
M
TE
A. Reduces the negative moment at support
,D
B. Increases the negative moment at support
r
re
tu
C. Reduces the positive moment at centre of span
ec
(L

D. Increases the positive moment at centre of span
re
ho
at
A. (i) and (iii) R
ep
e
ad
B. (i) and (iv)

Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (ii) and (iv)
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 134) The maximum value up hoop compression in a
dome is given by
P)
M
TE
A. wR/4d
,Dr
re
B. wR/2d
tu
ec
C. wR/d
(L

re
D. 2wR/d
ho
at
R
ep
Where, w = load per unit area of surface of dome
e
ad
Pr
R = radius of curvature
d = thickness of dome
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 135) In a spherical dome the hoop stress due to a
M
TE
concentrated load at crown is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Compressive everywhere
(L

re
B. Tensile everywhere
ho
at
R
C. Partly compressive and partly tensile
ep
e
D. Zero
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 136) In a ring beam subjected to uniformly distributed
load
P)
i) Shear force at mid span is zero
M
TE
ii) Shear force at mid span is maximum
,D
iii) Torsion at mid span is zero
r
re
tu
iv) Torsion at mid span is maximum
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (iii) R
eep
ad
B. (i) and (iv)

Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (ii) and (iv)
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 137) In prestressed concrete
P)
M
A. Forces of tension and compression change but
TE
,D
Lever arm remains unchanged
r
re
tu
B. Forces of tension and compression remain
ec
(L

unchanged but lever arm changes with the moment
re
ho
C. Both forces of tension and compression as well as
at
R
ep
Lever arm changes
e
ad
D. Both forces of tension and compression as well as

Pr
Lever arm remain unchanged

Answer B
P)
Pre-stressed concrete is a form of concrete where initial
M
compression is given in the concrete before applying the external
TE
,D
load so that stress from external loads are counteracted in the
r
re
desired way during the service period.
tu
ec
This initial compression is introduced by high strength steel wire
(L

re
or alloys (called ‘tendon’) located in lower part of the concrete
ho
at
section.
R
eep
ad
Lever arm is the perpendicular distance between the line of

Pr
action of the couple forming compressive and tensile force in a

section.
P)
Q. 138) The purpose of reinforcement in prestressed
M
TE
concrete is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. To provide adequate Bond stress
(L

re
B. To resist tensile stresses
ho
at
R
C. To impart initial compressive stress in concrete
eep
D. All of the above

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 139) Normally prestressing wires are arranged
P)
M
TE
in the
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Upper part of the beam
(L

re
B. Lower part of the beam
ho
at
C. Center R
eep
ad
D. Anywhere
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 140) Most common method of prestressing used for
TE
factory production is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Long line method
(L

re
B. Freyssinet system
ho
at
C. Magnel-Blaton system
R
ep
D. Lee-Macall system
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(141 to 150)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

P)
M
A. The loss of prestress is more in pre tensioning
TE
,D
system than in post tensioning system
r
re
tu
B. Pretensioning system has greater certainty about
ec
(L

its durability
re
ho
C. For heavy loads and large spans in buildings or
at
R
ep
bridges, post-tensioning system is cheaper than
e
ad
pretensioning system
Pr

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 142) Which of the following losses of
P)
M
prestress occurs only in pretensioning and not in
TE
,D
post-tensioning
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. Elastic shortening of concrete
re
ho
B. Shrinkage of concrete
at
R
ep
C. Creep of Concrete
e
ad
Pr
D. Loss due to friction

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 143) Prestress loss due to friction occurs
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Only in post-tensioned beams
ec
(L

B. Only in pretensioned beams
re
ho
C. In both post-tensioned and pretensioned beams
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Q. 145) Which of the following has high tensile strength
,Dr
re
tu
A. Plain hot rolled wires
ec
(L

B. Cold drawn wires
re
ho
C. Heat treated rolled wires
at
R
D. All have same tensile strength
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Hot rolling involves rolling steel at a temperature above the steel’s
TE
,D
recrystallization temperature, which takes place over 1700 degrees
r
re
Fahrenheit.
tu
ec
(L

Cold rolled steel is manufactured at temperatures below its
re
ho
recrystallization temperature, typically at around room temperature.
at
R
ep
Mechanical Properties:-
e
ad
The yield strength and tensile strength

Pr
Cold rolled > cold drwan > hot rolled.

P)
M
TE
Q. 146) High carbon content in steel causes
,Dr
re
tu
A. Decrease in tensile strength but increase in ductility
ec
(L

B. Increase in tensile strength but decrease in ductility
re
ho
C. Decrease in both tensile strength and ductility
at
R
D. Increase in both tensile strength and ductility
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Increasing carbon content in steel
TE
,D
Ductility ↓
r
re
Toughness ↓
tu
ec
Weldability ↓
(L

re
ho
at
Tensile strength ↑
R
ep
Hardness ↑
e
ad
Pr
-Hence optimum amount of carbon is required.

Q. 147) Stress strain curve of high tensile Steel
P)
M
TE
A. Has a definite yield point
,Dr
re
B. Does not show definite yield point but yield point is
tu
ec
defined by 0.1 % proof stress
(L

re
C. Does not show definite yield point but yield point is
ho
at
defined by 0.2% proof stress
R
ep
D. Does not show definite yield point but yield point is
e
ad
defined by 2% proof stress

Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Proof stress is the point at which a particular degree of
r
re
permanent deformation occurs in a test sample.
tu
ec
(L

re
Proof stress is also called offset yield stress.
ho
at
R
ep
The stress needed to produce 0.2 percent of plastic
e
ad
Pr
deformation is considered proof stress.

P)
M
TE
A. Elastic modulus of high tensile steel is nearly the same
,Dr
re
as that of mild steel
tu
ec
B. Elastic modulus of high tensile steel is more than that of
(L

re
mild steel
ho
at
C. Carbon percentage in high carbon steel is less than that
R
ep
in mild steel
e
ad
D. High tensile steel is cheaper than mild steel

Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 149) Cube strength of controlled concrete to be used
M
TE
for pretensioned and post-tensioned work respectively
,D
should not be less than
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. 35 Mpa and 42 Mpa
re
ho
B. 42 Mpa and 35 Mpa
at
C. 42 Mpa and 53 Mpa R
ep
e
ad
D. 53 Mpa and 42 MPa

Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The minimum 28 day compressive strength of concrete
ec
(L

cubes of 15 cm size, prescribed in the Indian standard
re
ho
code IS: 1343-1980, is 40 N/mm2 for pre-tensioned
at
R
concrete and 30 N/mm2 for post-tensioned concrete.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 150) Ultimate strength of cold drawn high
P)
M
TE
Steel wires
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increases with increase in diameter of bar
(L

re
B. Decreases with increase in diameter of bar
ho
at
R
C. Does not depend on diameter of bar
eep
ad

Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(151 to 160)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
The effects of coarse aggregate sizes on the flexural strength of
M
concrete beam were explored in this research.
TE
,D
The following are the conclusions;
r
re
i. Coarse aggregate size is directly proportional to the slump
tu
ec
(workability) of a fresh concrete with constant water cement
(L

re
ratio.
ho
at
ii. Flexural strength of concrete beam is inversely affected by the
R
ep
increase in coarse aggregate size.
e
ad
iii. The concrete mixture made of 9.00mm aggregate has the

Pr
highest flexural strength than that with 14mm, and so does the
strength reduces as the aggregate sizes increase.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
The ratio of tensile strength to compressive strength depends
M
upon the strength of concrete.
TE
,Dr
re
Thus higher the compressive strength, higher the tensile
tu
ec
strength, but the rate of increase of tensile strength is of
(L

re
decreasing order.
ho
at
R
ep
The compressive strength in cement increases during the
e
ad
hydration reaction. The hydration reaction is a never ending

Pr
process. So the compressive strength goes on increasing rapidly

in the early stage and very slow in later days.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
According to size the fine aggregate may be described as
TE
coarse sand, medium sand and fine sand.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
IS specifications classify the fine aggregate into four types
(L

re
according to its grading as fine aggregate of grading Zone-
ho
at
1 to grading Zone-4.
R
eep
ad
Pr
The four grading zones become progressively finer from

grading Zone-1 to grading Zone-4.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Lightweight Concrete provides the same compressive
TE
,D
strength as normal weight aggregates with
r
re
tu
approximately the same cement content.
ec
(L

re
ho
Shrinkage and creep of lightweight aggregate (LWA)
at
R
ep
concrete are considered higher than those of normal
e
ad
gravel concrete because most LWAs are porous and

Pr
have a lower elastic modulus.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
The endurance limit for a material can be defined as the
TE
,D
stress below which failure does not occur.
r
re
tu
ec
Most steels have an endurance or fatigue limit about half
(L

re
the Ultimate Tensile Strength.
ho
at
R
ep
Hence, for Fe250 grade MS with ultimate tensile strength
e
ad
Pr
equal to 410 MPa, the Fatigue Strength will be around 205

MPa.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
These specimens are tested by compression testing
,D
machine after 7 days curing or 28 days curing.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Load should be applied gradually at the rate of 140 kg/cm²
re
ho
per minute till the Specimens fails.
at
R
eep
ad
Load at the failure divided by area of specimen gives the

Pr
compressive strength of concrete.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
The water–cement ratio is the ratio of the weight of water
TE
to the weight of cement used in a concrete mix.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Concrete Shrinkage Or Shrinkage Of Concrete:
(L

re
The volumetric changes of concrete structures due to the
ho
at
loss of moisture by evaporation is known as concrete
R
ep
shrinkage or shrinkage of concrete.
e
ad
Pr
It is a time-dependent deformation which reduces the

volume of concrete without the impact of external forces.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Rich mixture contains a high proportion of cement.
TE
,D
Lean mixture is a mixture of concrete or mortar with a
r
re
relatively low cement content.
tu
ec
(L

re
Air entrainment is the intentional creation of air bubbles in
ho
at
concrete.
R
ep
Air entrainment affects compressive strength of concrete
e
ad
Pr
and its workability. It increases the workability of concrete

without much increase in water-cement ratio.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Bond strength is the measure of the effectiveness of the
r
re
tu
grip.
ec
(L

re
ho
Adhesion between the concrete and steel interfaces.
at
R
eep
ad
Friction between the bar surface and the concrete.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(161 to 170)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Bond strength is the measure of the effectiveness of the
r
re
tu
grip.
ec
(L

re
ho
Adhesion between the concrete and steel interfaces.
at
R
eep
ad
Friction between the bar surface and the concrete.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Impact strength:- resistance to sudden load.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Chemical composition of Portland Cement:
a) Tricalcium Silicate (50%), b) Dicalcium Silicate (25%)
P)
M
c) Tricalcium Aluminate (10%), d) Tetracalcium Aluminoferrite (10%)
TE
e) Gypsum (5%)
,D
Functions of Tricalcium Silicate
r
re
tu
1. Hardens rapidly and largely responsible for initial set & early strength
ec
(L
2. The increase in percentage of this compound will cause the early

re
strength of Portland Cement to be higher.
ho
at
3. A higher percentage of this compound will produces higher heat of
R
hydration and accounts for faster gain in strength.
ep
e
Functions of Dicalcium Silicate

ad
Pr
1. Hardens slowly
2. It effects on strength increases occurs at ages beyond one week .
3. Responsible for long term strength.
Functions of Tricalcium Aluminate
1. Contributes to strength development in the first few days
P)
M
because it is the first compound to hydrate .
TE
2. It turns out higher heat of hydration and contributes to faster
,Dr
gain in strength.
re
tu
3. But it results in poor sulphate resistance and increases the
ec
(L

volumetric shrinkage upon drying.
re
ho
at
R
Function of Tetracalcium Aluminoferrite
ep
e
1. Act as a filler contributes very little strength of concrete

ad
Pr
eventhough it hydrates very rapidly.

2. Also responsible for grey colour of Ordinary Portland Cement.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
When the cement mixed with water to form a paste the chemical
M
reaction starts which is known as hydration, due to hydration the
TE
,D
mixture starts changing from fluid state to solid state this is
r
re
known as initial setting time of cement.
tu
ec
(L

re
and continuous reaction of cement with water will increase the
ho
at
temperature of the paste because of heat of hydration, when the
R
ep
paste reached to the maximum peak of temperature, this is
e
ad
known as final setting time of cement.

Pr
Final setting time (minutes) = 90 + 1.2 (initial setting time)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Functions of Tricalcium Aluminate
M
1. Contributes to strength development in the first few days because it is
TE
,D
the first compound to hydrate .
r
re
2. It turns out higher heat of hydration and contributes to faster gain in
tu
ec
strength.
(L

3. But it results in poor sulphate resistance and increases the volumetric
re
ho
shrinkage upon drying.
at
R
4. Cements with low Tricalcium Aluminate contents usually generate less
ep
heat, develop higher strengths and show greater resistance to sulfate
e
ad
attacks.
Pr
5.It has high heat generation and reactive with soils and water containing
moderate to high sulfate concentrations so it’s least desirable.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
During the cement manufacturing process, upon the
,D
cooling of clinker, a small amount of gypsum is introduced
r
re
tu
during the final grinding process.
ec
(L

Gypsum is added to control the “setting of cement”.
re
ho
If not added, the cement will set immediately after mixing
at
R
of water leaving no time for concrete placing.
eep
ad
Amount of gypsum depends upon tricalcium aluminate

Pr
and alkali.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Vicat's Apparatus:- is used to find out the consistency, initial setting time
and final setting time of the cement.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Method of controlling heat evolution is to reduce the
(L

re
percentage of compounds with high heat of hydration,
ho
at
such as C3A and C3S.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Importance of Cement Fineness:-
P)
1. The fineness of cement affects hydration rate and strength.
M
Increasing fineness causes an increased rate of hydration, high
TE
,D
strength.
r
re
tu
ec
2. Bleeding can be reduced by increasing fineness. However,
(L

re
increased fineness can also lead to the requirement of more
ho
at
water for workability, resulting in a higher possibility of dry
R
ep
shrinkage.
e
ad
Pr
3. The increased surface area-to-volume ratio will ensure a more

available area for water-cement interaction per unit volume.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(171 to 180)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Rapid hardening cement is a special type of cement that achieves
P)
high strength in less time.
M
TE
,D
Normally the strength achieved by conventional cements in 7
r
re
days is same as the strength achieved in 3 days.
tu
ec
(L

re
This type of cement is also called as High-Early Strength
ho
at
Portland Cement.
R
ep
e
ad
Rapid hardening cement gives out much greater heat of

Pr
hydration. Therefore rapid hardening cement should not be

used in mass concrete construction.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Workability of concrete is measured in terms of ease with
TE
which it can be mixed, transported to construction site,
,Dr
re
placed in forms and compacted.
tu
ec
(L

re
The shape of aggregates affects the workability of
ho
at
concrete.
R
ep
Rounded aggregates will be easy to mix than elongated,
e
ad
Pr
angular and flaky aggregates due to less frictional

resistance.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Cumulative % passing represented on the normal scale.
P)
Sieve size on logarithmic scale.
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The Fineness modulus (FM) is an empirical figure obtained by
M
TE
adding the total percentage of the sample of an aggregate
,D
retained on each of a specified series of sieves, and dividing the
r
re
sum by 100.
tu
ec
(L

re
Fineness modulus is generally used to get an idea of how coarse
ho
at
or fine the aggregate is.
R
ep
e
ad
More fineness modulus value indicates that the aggregate is

Pr
coarser and small value of fineness modulus indicates that

the aggregate is finer.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Soundness of cement indicates quality to expand on the setting.
M
Unsound cement expands too much on setting and develops
TE
,D
cracks in the structure.
r
re
Unsoundness of cement is due to presence of excessive amount
tu
ec
of hard-burned free lime or magnesia.
(L

re
ho
at
Unsoundness due to free lime can be determined by Le-
R
ep
Chatelier’s apparatus.
e
ad
Pr
Unsoundness due to magnesia can be determined by Autoclave

test.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Pozzolana is a volcanic powder.
TE
,Dr
re
The pozzolanic materials commonly used are:
tu
ec
1. Volcanic ash, 2. Calcined clay
(L

re
3. Fly ash, 4. Silica fumes
ho
at
R
ep
Pozzolana Portland cement is manufactured by grinding
e
ad
Pr
Portland cement clinker and pozzolana (Usually pozzolana

content 10 to 25 %)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(181 to 190)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
10 gm of cement is taken on platinum crucible and heated
M
TE
up to a temperature of 900 to 1000°C for 15 minutes
,Dr
re
tu
The loss due to moisture and carbon dioxide causes weight
ec
(L

loss which should not be more than 5% for OPC and 4% for
re
ho
high strength portland cement.
at
R
eep
ad
A high loss on ignition can indicate prehydration and

Pr
carbonation, which may be caused by improper and

prolonged storage.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Water–cement ratio is the ratio of the weight of water to
,D
the weight of cement used in a concrete mix.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Aggregate cement ratio is the ratio of weights of aggregate
re
ho
to the weight of cement. If this ratio is more, that implies
at
R
aggregates are more and cement is less and if this ratio is
ep
e
ad
less, that implies weight of aggregate is less and weight

Pr
of cement is more.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Workability of a fresh concrete decreases with time
(L

re
due to loss of water by evaporation, absorption and
ho
at
by chemical reactions
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Water/Cement Ratio or Water Content of Concrete
TE
Generally, a water cement ratio of 0.45 to 0.6 is used for good
,Dr
workable concrete without the use of any admixture.
re
tu
ec
Higher the water/cement ratio, higher will be the water content
(L

per volume of concrete and concrete will be more workable.
re
ho
at
Shape of Aggregates R
ep
e
The shape of aggregates affects the workability of concrete.

ad
Pr
Rounded aggregates will be easy to mix than elongated, angular

and flaky aggregates due to less frictional resistance.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Vee-Bee test
M
TE
Vee-Bee test is a good laboratory test suitable for stiff concrete
,D
mixes having low and very low workability.
r
re
tu
ec
1. In this test, Slump test is performed by placing the slump cone
(L

re
inside the sheet metal cylindrical pot.
ho
at
2. Then the vibration is started and the time on a stop watch is
R
ep
noted.
e
ad
3. The time taken by the concrete to take cylindrical shape after

Pr
the conical shape disappears is noted. This time recorded is

known as Vee-Bee Degree or Vee-Bee seconds.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Reduces segregation and bleeding:
TE
Segregation is the process of separation of aggregates from
,Dr
mortar and Bleeding is the process of emergence of water on the
re
tu
surface of fresh concrete due to sedimentation of heavier
ec
(L

material.
re
ho
at
R
Entraining air will improve the mutual adhesion between cement
ep
e
and aggregate thus reducing segregation,

ad
Pr
Further the air voids does not allow the heavier particles to settle
down thus reducing bleeding.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Concrete with high alumina cement tends to reach its
(L

re
potential strength much more quickly than concrete
ho
at
with ordinary portland cement.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
If the water cement ratio is constant and aggregate
(L

re
cement ratio increase, the strength of the concrete will
ho
at
increase. ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(191 to 200)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
When you mix cement with water a chemical reaction will
r
re
tu
happen, that is called as hydration of cement.
ec
(L

re
ho
W/C ratio depends on the exposure condition of concrete
at
R
but minimum water cement ratio is 0.38 for full hydration
eep
ad
of concrete.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Entrapped air:- is air that is naturally entrapped in all concrete.
P)
Entrained air:- is purposely put into the concrete by the addition
M
TE
of an air entraining agent.
,Dr
re
Air entrainment affects compressive strength of concrete and its
tu
ec
workability.
(L

re
It increases the workability of concrete without much increase in
ho
at
water-cement ratio.
R
ep
Compressive strength of concrete is inversely proportional to
e
ad
workability of concrete.
Pr
When workability of concrete increases, its compressive strength

decreases.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Accelerating Admixture:- an admixture that causes an
r
re
tu
increase in the rate of hydration of the hydraulic cement
ec
(L

and thus reduce the time of setting, increases the rate of
re
ho
strength development, or both.
at
R
eep
ad
Calcium chloride used in both PLAIN as well as RCC work.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Calcium chloride is not used with High Alumina Cement.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Admixtures are materials other than cement, aggregate and
M
TE
water that are added to concrete either before or during its
,D
mixing to alter its properties such as workability, curing
r
re
temperature range, set time or colour.
tu
ec
(L

re
Plasticizers are the admixtures which are primarily used to
ho
at
increase workability of concrete along with decreasing water
R
ep
to cement ratio thus increasing strength of the concrete.
e
ad
Pr
Reduction in the quantity of water by using admixtures and

plasticizers iis 5 to 15%
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Retarders for concrete are used to delay the initial setting
tu
ec
time of the concrete.
(L

re
They are generally used in the hot weather condition to
ho
at
counter the rapid hardening due to high temperature, thus
R
ep
allowing the time for mixing, transporting and placing.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
The sugar content of 0.06% by weight to concrete, can
,D
improve compressive strength by 3.26% in 28 days and
r
re
tu
delays initial setting time by 94 min.
ec
(L

re
ho
The addition of OPC(ordinary Portland cement) would give
at
R
retardation of 4hrs. (0.04% by weight of cement)
eep
ad
Pr
Sugars like glucose, lactose, raffinose act as good retarders.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
The process of measuring ingredients or materials to prepare concrete
P)
mix is known as batching of concrete.
M
Volume batching:- materials are measured on the basis of volume. It is
TE
,D
less precise method of batching
r
re
Weight batching:- materials are measured on the basis of weight. It is
tu
ec
accurate method of batching.
(L

re
ho
The volume increase in dry sand is known as the bulking of sand.
at
R
Bulking of sand depends on the quantity of moisture in the sand and also
ep
the size of the particles.
e
ad
Finer Sand possesses more bulking than the medium and coarse sand.
Pr
5 to 8% of the increase in moisture in the sand can increase the volume

of sand up to 20 to 40%.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
A concrete mixer mixes cement, aggregates and water and
M
TE
produce concrete mechanically.
,Dr
re
There are two broad types of concrete mixers:
tu
ec
1. Batch mixers
(L

re
A. Drum Types Mixer
ho
at
(i) Tilting drum mixers
R
ep
(ii) Non-tilting drum mixer
e
ad
(iii) Reversing drum mixer

Pr
B. Pan Type Mixer

2. Continuous mixers
1. Batch mixers:- Concrete mix obtained by this mixer is collected
batch by batch and time by time.
P)
M
(i) Tilting drum mixer means the drum will discharge concrete by
TE
tilting downwards. It is rapid discharge process and used for
,Dr
larger projects.
re
tu
ec
(L

B. Pan type concrete mixers:- Pan type mixers consists a circular
re
ho
pan in which concrete is mixed. The mixing is done by blades
at
R
which are arranged in star shape inside the pan.
eep
There are two types of pan mixers are available.
ad
Pr
In one case, the circular pan is constant and only star blades
rotate about vertical axis of pan. In the other case, circular pan
rotates while the blades are at static position.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(201 to 210)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Steam curing can be used where early strength gain in
TE
,D
concrete is important or where additional heat is required
r
re
to accomplish hydration, as in cold-weather concreting.
tu
ec
It can be used in cold weather conditions for Rapid
(L

re
hardening of concrete.
ho
at
R
ep
Steam curing should not use with high alumina cement.
e
ad
Pr
Temperature over 20 to 25°C cause gradually decrease in

strength of this cement.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Moist Curing:- Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept
M
TE
constantly wet for atleast 7 days from the date of placing
,D
concrete in case of ordinary Portland Cement and at least 10 days
r
re
where mineral admixtures are used.
tu
ec
(L

re
The period of curing shall not be less than 10 days for concrete
ho
at
exposed to dry and hot weather conditions.
R
eep
ad
In the case of concrete where mineral admixtures are used, it is

Pr
recommended that above minimum periods may be extended to

14 days.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
1. Concrete Work:
,D
-Rapid Hardening Cement - 7 days.
r
re
tu
-High Alumina Cement - 24 hours.
ec
(L

-Ordinary Portland Cement - 14 days.
re
ho
at
2. Brick Masonry 10 days R
eep
ad
Pr
3. Plaster 7 days
Answer C
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Chloride content is 0.06% for Pestressed concrete.
tu
ec
(L

re
Since IS : 456-1978 deals with only plain and reinforced
ho
at
concrete. ep
R
Chloride content is 0.16% as per above IS code.
e
ad
Pr
Answer D and B
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Permeability of concrete is the ease with which water
TE
,D
flows through concrete.
r
re
tu
ec
Water is added to the concrete to achieve hydration
(L

re
of cement paste and to obtain workable concrete.
ho
at
Higher w/c ratio makes concrete more workable but
R
ep
reduce the strength on the other hand.
e
ad
Pr
An increase in w/c beyond 0.6 causes the increase

in permeability very rapidly.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

(211 to 220)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Reinforced
re
tu
ec
(L

Cement
re
ho
at
Concrete (RCC) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Curing affect permeability:-
TE
,D
Continued hydration of the cement paste results in the
r
re
reduction in the size of the voids which decreases the
tu
ec
permeability.
(L

re
Proper curing of concrete decreases the permeability of
ho
at
concrete. ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Permeability of steam cured concrete is generally higher

than that of moist cured concrete.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Using long specimen such as cylinder, cube and prism
(L

re
eliminates the confining effects due to friction with testing
ho
at
machine heads. Hence, its results always smaller.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Balanced Sections:- A balanced sections is that in which stress in
M
TE
concrete and steel reach their permissible value at the same time.
,D
Under Reinforced Section:- In an under reinforced section, the
r
re
percentage of steel provided is less than that provided in
tu
ec
balanced section. In under reinforced section, the stress in steel
(L

re
first reaches it permissible value, while the concrete is under
ho
at
stressed.
R
ep
Over Reinforced Section:- In an over reinforced section the
e
ad
percentage of steel provided is greater than the balanced

Pr
section. In this section, stress in concrete reaches its permissible

value while steel is not fully stressed.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(221 to 230)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Balanced Sections:- A balanced sections is that in which stress in
P)
concrete and steel reach their permissible value at the same
M
TE
time.
,D
Under Reinforced Section:- In an under reinforced section, the
r
re
percentage of steel provided is less than that provided in
tu
ec
balanced section.
(L

re
In under reinforced section, the stress in steel first reaches it
ho
at
permissible value, while the concrete is under stressed.
R
ep
In under reinforced section, the failure is ductile because steel
e
ad
fails first and sufficient warning is given before collapse.

Pr
Due to ductile failure and economy, the under-reinforced

sections are preferred by designers.
Over Reinforced Section:-
P)
In an over reinforced section the percentage of steel
M
TE
provided is greater than the balanced section.
,Dr
re
tu
In this section, stress in concrete reaches its permissible
ec
(L

value while steel is not fully stressed.
re
ho
at
R
Concrete is brittle and it fails by crushing suddenly.
ep
e
ad
As steel is not fully utilised, the over reinforced section is

Pr
uneconomical (steel is much costlier than concrete).

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
The maximum depth of neutral axis is limited to ensure that
tensile steel will reach its yield stress before concrete fails in
P)
M
compression, thus a brittle failure is avoided.
TE
,D
The limiting values of the depth of neutral axis Xm for different
r
re
grades of steel from strain diagram.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Pedestal is a member that transfers vertical load from a
r
re
tu
column to the foundation.
ec
(L

These are generally short and no longer than three times
re
ho
the least lateral dimension.
at
R
Pedestal are provided at times even for RCC columns when
eep
ad
resting on footings, to facilitate proper load transfer.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Generally, two types of failure occur in the beam, mainly caused by shear
and flexure.
P)
M
Shear failure happening in reinforcement concrete structure is also
TE
termed as diagonal tension failure.
,D
In the beams, diagonal tension failure occurs when the shear span is
r
re
tu
higher than three times the value of effective depth.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
As shown in the above figure, the diagonal tension failure happens at an

angle of 45° with normal plane.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(231 to 240)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Bunkers and silos are structure
,Dr
re
that are used as storage tanks.
tu
ec
(L

Maximum Negative Bending
re
ho
Moment at Supports = Pl²/12
at
R
eep
Positive Bending Moment at

ad
Pr
the Center = Pl²/24

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
Janssen theory (Jan- ssen 1895) is most widely used by silo
r
re
tu
designers.
ec
(L

In his theory, Janssen made two assumptions:
re
ho
1. Stresses are independent of the horizontal coordinates
at
R
2. The ratio of lateral to vertical pressures, K, is a constant
eep
ad
relative to depth of fill.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(241 to 250)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
The following are the main reasons using ties in the column.
,D
1. Longitudinal bars are confined by transverse steel tie bars in
r
re
order to maintain their positions.
tu
ec
2. At the time of concreting it prevents movement of main
(L

re
reinforcement.
ho
at
3. In order to prevent buckling of column.
R
ep
4. It improves the ductility of the column.
e
ad
5. The lateral ties also confined the concrete, thereby enhancing

Pr
its compression load-bearing capacity.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The reason is that steel bar may buckle between
re
ho
shear stirrups under compressive stresses.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
The various features of under reinforced section are as
TE
,D
follows :
r
re
1. Steel is fully stressed while concrete not.
tu
ec
2. The actual neutral axis lies above the critical neutral axis
(L

re
3. The percentage of steel is less than the balanced section
ho
at
hence the section is economical.
R
ep
4. Ductile failure.
e
ad
Pr
5.The moment of resistance is less than balanced section.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
The polar moment of inertia, also known as second polar
tu
ec
moment of area, is a quantity used to describe resistance
(L

re
to torsional deformation or deflection.
ho
at
The larger the material's shear modulus and polar moment
R
ep
of area, the greater resistance to torsional deflection.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Creep Of Concrete:- Creep can be defined as the elastic and long-
,D
term deformation of concrete under a continuous load.
r
re
tu
ec
Shrinkage:- in concrete can be defined as the volume changes
(L

re
observed in concrete due to the loss of moisture at different
ho
at
stages due to different reasons.
R
ep
e
ad
Ductility:- is the ability of reinforced concrete members to

Pr
undergo considerable deflection prior to failure.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
A beam is said to be deep when the ratio of its effective
r
re
span to overall depth is less than 2 for simply
tu
ec
supported beams, or 2.5 for continuous beams.
(L

re
ho
at
A beam, whether deep or conventional, is always designed
R
ep
for bending moment, apart from checks for safety in shear,
e
ad
Pr
deflections and cracking.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(251 to 260)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
The ultimate moment capacity of a prestressed concrete section
,D
is calculated using the assumption that plane sections remain
r
re
plane. This is similar to the approach for ordinary reinforced
tu
ec
concrete.
(L

re
ho
at
Ultimate moment capacity = P. Z
R
ep
e
ad
Where, P = final force in the prestressing steel

Pr
Z = Depth of cable form extreme compression fibre

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Limit state of collapse:-
,D
Flexure, Shear, Compression, Torsion
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Limit state of servicebility:-
re
ho
Deflection, Cracking, Corrosion
at
R
eep
ad
In PSC; Limit state of servicebility:-

Pr
Deflection, Cracking, Maximum compression

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
The type of cracking is associated with principal tensile
ec
(L

stresses where there are no flexural cracks. This type of
re
ho
cracking occurs near the support of highly prestressed
at
R
concrete beams having thin webs.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
A. Doubly reinforced section is a concrete section reinforced in
P)
M
both compression and tension regions.
TE
Doubly reinforced section is used when depth of the section is
,Dr
restricted and the strength available from a singly reinforced
re
tu
section is inadequate.
ec
(L

B. Limit state method:- Ultimate moment capacity
re
ho
C. Concrete is said to be durable when it performs in the working
at
environment. R
ep
e
D. In reinforced concrete design, deflection is normally controlled

ad
Pr
by limiting the span/depth ratio of a beam or slab.

As deflection is a serviceability condition.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
B. A road or path that is built higher than the area around
ec
(L

it in order to cross water.
re
ho
at
R
D. High bridge which carries a railway/road across a valley.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Impact factor is defined as the amount of force, expressed as a
P)
fraction of the static force, by which dynamic force exceeds static
M
TE
force.
,D
IRC Class AA Loading:- Used in the design of new bridge especially
r
re
heavy loading bridges like bridges on highways, in cities,
tu
ec
industrial areas etc.
(L

re
IRC class A loading:- Used in the design of all permanent bridges.
ho
at
It is considered as standard live load of bridge. When we design a
R
ep
bridge using class AA type loading, then it must be checked for
e
ad
class A loading also.

Pr
IRC Class B Loading:- Used to design temporary bridges like

Timber Bridge etc. It is considered as light loading.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(261 to 270)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Courbon’s method is valid if the following conditions are
,D
satisfied:
r
re
tu
(i) The longitudinal girders are connected by at least five
ec
(L

cross-girders, one at centre, two at ends and two at one-
re
ho
fourth points.
at
R
(ii) The depth of the cross girder is at least 0.75 of the
ep
e
ad
depth of the longitudinal girders.

Pr
(iii) The span-width ratio is greater than 2.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The various features of over reinforced section are :
M
1. Concrete is fully stressed while steel is not (i.e., the stress in
TE
,D
concrete is at its permissible value σcbc but stress in steel is less
r
re
than σst).
tu
ec
2. The actual neutral axis is below the critical neutral axis (n > nc )
(L

re
3. The percentage of steel is more than the balanced section, so
ho
at
the section is uneconomical.
R
ep
4. Sudden failure.
e
ad
5. Lever arm will be less than that for a balanced section.

Pr
* The distance between the lines of action of two forces C & T is

called the lever arm.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Drying shrinkage:- is defined as the contracting of a
r
re
tu
hardened concrete mixture due to the loss of capillary
ec
(L

water.
re
ho
at
R
Carbonation shrinkage:- Occurs when the concrete is
eep
ad
exposed to air containing carbon dioxide.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(271 to 280)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Williot-Mohr diagram is used to determine deflection
(L

re
in truss only.
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Loss due to Shrinkage of Concrete:- There is contraction due to
P)
drying of concrete and shrinkage strain occurs in concrete.
M
TE
Shrinkage strain causes the steel to lose its strength, resulting in
,D
the loss of prestress.
r
re
tu
ec
Loss of strength = shrinkage strain of concrete
(L

re
Therefore, loss in prestress =
ho
at
= 0.0003 for pre-tensioned elements, and
R
eep
ad
for post-tensioned beams

Pr
Where ‘t’ is the age of concrete.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Clear cover is the distance from outer surface of concrete
member to the outer surface of steel (either main reinfor-
P)
M
cement or stirrups).
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
IS:456-1978, the clear cover are specified as:
r
re
tu
ec
1. Column = 40 mm
(L

re
2. Beam = 25 mm
ho
at
3. Slab = 15 mm
R
ep
4. The minimum clear cover should not exceed 75 mm in
e
ad
Pr
any case
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Column:-
1. Longitudinal reinforcement:-
P)
M
Minimum = 0.4% of gross cross-sectional area.
TE
Maximum = 6% of gross cross sectional area.
,Dr
2. Minimum number of bar:-
re
tu
4 for rectangular c/s and 6 for circular c/s
ec
(L

3. Minimum diameter of bar = 12 mm
re
ho
4. The pitch of the transverse reinforcement shall not be more
at
R
than the least of the following
eep
(i) The least lateral dimension of the compression members
ad
Pr
(ii) 16 times the smallest diameter of the longitudinal

reinforcement bar to be tied.
(iii) 300 mm
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The presence of reinforcement in the form of longitudinal
(L

re
and transverse steel increases the torsional moment
ho
at
carrying capacity of beams.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Loss due to Shrinkage of Concrete:- There is contraction due to
P)
drying of concrete and shrinkage strain occurs in concrete.
M
TE
Shrinkage strain causes the steel to lose its stretch, resulting in
,D
the loss of prestress.
r
re
tu
ec
Loss of stretch = shrinkage strain
(L

re
Therefore, loss in prestress =
ho
at
= 0.0003 for pre-tensioned elements, and
R
ep
e
ad
for post-tensioned beams

Pr
Where ‘t’ is the age of concrete.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(281 to 290)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
High strength concrete is less liable to shrinkage cracks and has a
r
re
higher modulus of elasticity and smaller ultimate creep strain,
tu
ec
resulting in a smaller loss of prestress in steel.
(L

re
The use of high strength concrete results in a reduction in the
ho
at
cross-sectional dimensions of prestressed concrete structural
R
ep
elements. With a reduced dead weight of the material, longer
e
ad
spans become technically and economically practicable.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The internal pressure causes hoop tension and it can
re
ho
be resisted by prestressed concrete easily.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The yield line analysis is an upper bound method in which
(L

re
the predicted failure load of a slab for given moment of
ho
at
resistance (capacity) may be higher than the true value.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Tensile stresses are taken by steel only and concrete
re
ho
takes compression only.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
For deformed bars, the bond stress shall be increased by
ec
(L

60% of the values for plain bars in tension.
re
ho
For bars in compression, the values of bond stress for bars
at
R
in tension shall be increased by 25%.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
The deflection shall generally be limited to be following:-
M
TE
1. The final deflection due to all loads including the effects
,D
of temperature, creep and shrinkage and measured from
r
re
tu
the as-cast level of the support of floors, roofs and all
ec
(L

other horizontal members shall not normally exceed
re
ho
span/250.
at
R
2. The deflection including the effects of temperature,
eep
ad
creep and shrinkage occurring after the erection of

Pr
partitions and the application of finishes should not

normally exceed span/350 or 20 mm whichever is less.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
The bond between concrete and steel restraints shrinkage.
tu
ec
Therefore, the shrinkage curvature is influenced by the
(L

re
area of tension and compression reinforcement equally.
ho
at
Thus shrinkage deflection can be eliminated by making
R
ep
compression steel equal to tension steel.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Two way slabs are the slabs that are supported on four sides and
the ratio of longer span (l) to shorter span (b) is less than 2.
P)
M
The strip of a two way slab may be checked for deflection control
TE
,D
against shorter span to effective depth ratios.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(291 to 300)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

It means
Answer C
should be
increased.
Pr
ad
that depth
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A*
P)
M
TE
,D
Pigeaud‘s moment coefficients can be used for computing
r
re
bending moments in a panel freely supported along four
tu
ec
edges with restrained corners and carrying symmetrically
(L

re
placed load distributed over small area i.e. a concentrated
ho
at
load.
R
ep
Pieaud derived these curves for thin plates, using elastic
e
ad
Pr
theory of flexure, and assuming Poisson’s ratio of 0.15.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
It can be applied for eccentric load also.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
For column, the longitudinal bar shall not have a cover less
r
re
tu
than 40 mm or the diameter of the bar whichever is more.
ec
(L

re
ho
In case of columns of minimum dimension of 200 mm or
at
R
less, whose reinforcing bars do not exceed 12 mm
eep
ad
diameter, a cover of 25 mm may be provided.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
In load balancing method, the applied load is balanced by
(L

re
the cable profile.
ho
at
Thus bending moment and shear forces do not exist.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer D

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
In partially prestressed members, limited tensile stresses
r
re
tu
are permitted in concrete under service loads with control
ec
(L

on the maximum width of cracks.
re
ho
The untensioned reinforcement is required in the cross
at
R
section for various reasons such as to resist differential
eep
ad
shrinkage, temperature effects and handling stresses.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(301 to 310)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r
Collapse load = 1.5 × 500 = 750 kN
,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Shear span is defined as the zone where shear force is
(L

re
constant. It is the distance between a reaction and the
ho
at
nearest load point. ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B*
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Due to high prestressing force, the possibility of
re
ho
diagonal tension crack is eliminated.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
The moment Pe will cause an uplift of PeL²/8EI

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The code specifies minimum and maximum limits for the
M
TE
spacing between parallel reinforcing bars in a layer.
,Dr
re
tu
The minimum limits are necessary to ensure that the
ec
(L

concrete can be placed easily in between and around the
re
ho
bars during the placement of fresh concrete.
at
R
eep
ad
The maximum limits are specified for bars in tension for

Pr
the purpose of controlling cracks-widths and improving

bond.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Creep deflection is the deformation due to sustained load.
M
TE
,D
Concrete shrinks when it dries and hardens. The Shrinkage
r
re
deflection is due to reduction in the moisture content and
tu
ec
unequal top and bottom reinforcement.
(L

re
ho
at
Short term deflection Occurs immediately upon application of a
R
ep
load.
e
ad
Pr
Long term deflection takes into account the long term shrinkage
and creep.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
hollow core slab, also known as a voided slab, hollow
r
re
tu
core plank or simply a concrete plank is a precast slab
ec
(L

of prestressed concrete.
re
ho
at
R
Pretensioned prestressed plank can resist both
ep
e
ad
compressive and tensile stress.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(311 to 320)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
If the corner contained by edges over only one of which the slab
r
re
is continuous, torsion reinforcement equal to 0.375 times the
tu
ec
area of reinforcement provided the mid span in the same
(L

re
direction shall be provided.
ho
at
R
ep
If both edges are continuous, no torsion reinforcement shall be
e
ad
provided.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Tendons are the high tensile strength steel wires.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
re
The load balancing concept is used to decide the
tu
ec
cable profile. The shape of BMD forms the basis of
(L

re
cable profile.
ho
at
R
In the case of udl, the BMD is parabolic so cable
eep
profile will also be parabola.

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(321 to 330)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
tu
The minimum clear spacing of the cable or group of
ec
(L

cables shall be greater of the following:-
re
ho
1. 40 mm
at
R
ep
2. 5 mm plus maximum size of the aggregate.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
The slabs supported directly on columns without beams
M
TE
are known as flat slabs. In such slabs, large bending
,D
moments and shear forces are induced in the columns.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Therefore the columns are flared at the top called column
re
ho
heads or column capitals and slab are thickened around
at
R
the column capitals called drops for reducing the stresses
ep
e
ad
due to moments and shears.

Pr
The drops primarily resist shear.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
In under reinforced beam, the reinforcement failure occurs
tu
ec
first while in over reinforced beam the concrete failure
(L

re
occurs first.
ho
at
Thus under reinforced beam is ductile and over reinforced
R
ep
beams shows sudden failure i.e. Brittle.
e
ad
Pr
The various features of over reinforced section are :
1. Concrete is fully stressed while steel is not (i.e., the
P)
stress in concrete is at its permissible value σcbc but stress
M
TE
in steel is less than σst).
,D
2. The actual neutral axis is below the critical neutral axis
r
re
tu
(n > nc )
ec
(L

3. The percentage of steel is more than the balanced
re
ho
section, so the section is uneconomical.
at
4. Sudden failure. R
eep
ad
5. Lever arm will be less than that for a balanced section.

Pr
* The distance between the lines of action of two forces C

& T is called the lever arm.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B*
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Primary compression means direct compression.
re
ho
Secondary compression stresses are due to bending.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The vertical reinforcement in walls shall be spaced not
re
ho
farther apart than three times wall thickness nor 450 mm
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Shear key is a
r
re
tu
structural element
ec
(L

which is sometimes
re
ho
used in the footing
at
R
ep
of retaining walls to
e
ad
reduce wall’s sliding.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(331 to 340)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Loss due to Creep in steel (Relaxation of steel):-
,Dr
When the stresses in steel is more than half of its
re
tu
ec
yield stress there is creep in steel. Force of prestress
(L

re
falls as a result of creep in steel. Then there is a loss
ho
at
of prestress. ep
R
e
Percentage creep varies from 2 to 8%.

ad
Pr
Creep in steel is also termed as relaxation of steel.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B*
P)
M
IS:456-1978 has adopted moment coefficients derived by
TE
Rankine-Grashoff for the analysis of simply supported rectangular
,Dr
slab without any provision for torsion. For continuous RC slabs
re
tu
ec
Marcus method is the basis.
(L

re
ho
IS:456-2000 has adopted moment coefficients derived by
at
R
Rankine-Grashoff for the analysis of simply supported rectangular
ep
e
slab without any provision for torsion as in Table 27.

ad
Pr
However, for continuous RC slab, coefficient of Table 26 is based

on Yield line theory.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The yield line theory considers equilibrium of forces
re
ho
i.e. The sum of nodal forces at intersection is zero.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
1. Plane Section before bending will remain plane after
(L

bending.
re
ho
2. The tensile stress is taken by steel only or The tensile
at
R
ep
strength of concrete is ignored.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
In limit state method,
r
re
The limit state of collapse deals with the safety of structure
tu
ec
and limit state of serviceability deals with the durability of
(L

re
structure.
ho
at
R
ep
Serviceability limit state design of structures includes
e
ad
Pr
factors such as durability, shear, deflection and cracking.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Rankine’s formula for minimum depth of foundation

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC) etc.
P)
M
(341 to 350)
TE
,Dr
re
Reinforced
tu
ec
(L

re
Cement
ho
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer D

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
IS:456-2000 page no. 88 & 89
M
TE
Short-term deflection means the immediate deflection after
,D
casting and application of partial or full service load.
r
re
tu
Long-term deflection occurs over a long period of time largely
ec
(L
due to shrinkage and creep of the materials.

re
ho
at
The short term deflections may be calculated using methods for
R
ep
elastic deflections using the short term modulus of elasticity of
e
ad
concrete (Ec) and effective moment of inertia.

Pr
For long term deflections, the long term modulus Ece = Ec/(1+ θ)
is used where θ is creep coefficient.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
tu
WSM method was used in old days when knowledge about
ec
(L

reinforcement was unknown. Hence to make safe and
re
ho
serviceable structures the depth was increased and hence
at
R
amount of concrete used was more making it expensive.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D The doubly reinforced beam section is needed
1. When depth of the section is restricted and the strength
P)
available from a singly reinforced section is inadequate.
M
TE
2. At support of a continuous beam or slab where bending
,D
moment changes sign.
r
re
3. When members are subjected to alternate external loads and
tu
ec
the bending moment in the sections reverses such as in concrete
(L

re
piles etc.
ho
at
4. When the members are subjected to loading eccentric to
R
ep
either side of the axis, such as in columns subjected to wind
e
ad
loads.
Pr
5. When the members are subjected to accidental lateral loads,

shock or impact.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
High tensile steel are commonly used in prestressed
tu
ec
concrete members and ultimate strength of high tensile
(L

re
steel is equal to 2100 N/mm2, therefore the losses
ho
at
of prestress due to shrinkage and creep with a stress of
R
ep
200 N/mm2 are restricted.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, RRB-JE, State SSSC-JE, AE (State PSC) etc.
(351 to 354 End)
P)
LAST PART
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Reinforced
ec
(L

re
ho
Cement
at
R
ep
Concrete (RCC)
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
IS:456-1978 code in table 16 gives that the permissible
r
re
tu
compressive stress in bars, in a beam or slab when
ec
(L

compressive resistance of the concrete is taken into
re
ho
account, can be taken as 1.5 m times the compressive
at
R
stress in surrounding concrete (1.5 m σcbc) or permissible
eep
ad
stressin steel in compression (σsc) whichever is less.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A*

P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Design bond stress in HYSD bars is 60% more

Pr
than that for mild steel plain bars. So

development length is less in HYSD bars.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
IRC Class AA Loading:- Used in the design of new bridge especially
M
TE
heavy loading bridges like bridges on highways, in cities,
,D
industrial areas etc.
r
re
tu
ec
IRC class A loading:- Used in the design of all permanent bridges.
(L

re
It is considered as standard live load of bridge. When we design a
ho
at
bridge using class AA type loading, then it must be checked for
R
ep
class A loading also.
e
ad
Pr
IRC Class B Loading:- Used to design temporary bridges like

Timber Bridge etc. It is considered as light loading.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(01 to 15)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 1) The number of independent equations to be
M
TE
satisfied for static equilibrium of a plane structure is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1
(L

re
B. 2
ho
at
C. 3 ep
R
D. 6
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
1. For a two dimensional (2D) or plane frame
P)
M
TE
The total number of equilibrium equations = 3
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(ΣFx = 0, ΣFy = 0, ΣMxy = 0) (If x -y plane is considered)
(L

re
ho
2. For a three dimensional (3D) or space frame
at
R
eep
ad
The total number of equilibrium equations = 6

Pr
( ΣFx = 0, ΣFy =0, ΣFz 0, ΣMxy = 0, ΣMyz = 0, ΣMzx = 0)

Q. 2) If there are m unknown member forces, r
P)
unknown reaction components and j number of
M
TE
joints, then the degree of static indeterminacy of a
,D
pin jointed plane frame is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. m + r + 2j
ho
at
B. m – r + 2j ep
R
C. m + r – 2j
e
ad
Pr
D. m + r – 3j
Answer C
Static indeterminacy Or Degree of redundancy: -
P)
M
If the number of unknown reactions are more than the number
TE
,D
of equilibrium equations available then the structure is called
r
re
indeterminate structure and degree of indeterminacy is given by
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
The static indeterminacy can be divided into the parts
at
R
eep
ad
1. External Indeterminacy
Pr
2. Internal Indeterminacy
1. External Static Indeterminacy
It is the total number of
P)
additional equations required to determine the external forces.
M
TE
In general Degree of external static indeterminacy,
,D
Dse = r - e
r
re
tu
where r = Number of unknown reaction components
ec
(L
e = Total number of equilibrium equations

re
ho
at
For different types of structure it is given as,
ep
R
e
ad
(i) Plane frame or 2D frame Dse = r – 3

Pr
(ii) Space frame or 3D frame Dse = r - 6

2. Internal Static Indeterminacy: -
It is the total number of additional
equations required to determine the internal forces.
P)
M
TE
For different type of structure it is given as
,Dr
(i) Pin jointed plane frame, Dsi = m – (2j -3)
re
tu
(ii) Pin jointed space frame, Dsi = m – (3j -6)
ec
(L
(iii) Rigid jointed plane frame, Dsi = 3C – r’

re
(iv) Rigid jointed space frame, Dsi = 6C – r’
ho
at
R
ep
Where, m = total number of members
e
ad
j = total number of joints

Pr
C = total number of cuts required for open configuration

r’ = Number of additional equation due to hybrid joints.
Total degree of static indeterminacy is the sum of internal and
external static indeterminacy.
Ds = Dse + Dsi
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Where,
at
m = number of membersR
ep
e
ad
Pr

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 3) Number of unknown internal forces in each member
M
TE
of rigid jointed plane frame is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1
(L

re
B. 2
ho
at
C. 3
R
ep
D. 6
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 4) Degree of static indeterminacy of rigid jointed plane
P)
M
frame having 15 members, 3 reaction components and 14
TE
,D
joints is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 2

re
ho
B. 3
at
C. 6 R
eep
D. 8
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Rigid jointed plane frame,
r
re
tu
Ds = (r - 3) + (3C – r’) OR 3m + r – 3j
ec
(L

re
ho
Ds = 3 × 15 + 3 – 3 × 14
at
R
ep
Ds = 6
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 5) Degree of kinematic indeterminacy of a pin jointed
M
TE
plane frame is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2j – r
(L

re
B. j – 2r
ho
at
C. 3j – r
R
ep
D. 2j + r
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Kinematic indeterminacy also known as degree of freedom (DOF) is the
total number of independent joint displacement. A joint can have two
P)
types of displacements in general; rotation and linear displacement.
M
TE
Dk = aj – r + r'
,D
(1) Pin jointed plane frame, Dk = 2j - r
r
re
(2) Pin jointed space frame, Dk = 3j - r
tu
ec
(3) Rigid jointed plane frame, Dk = 3j – (r + m) + r’
(L

re
(4) Rigid jointed space frame, Dk = 6j – (r + m) + r’
ho
at
Where, a = DOF R
eep
j = Number of joints
ad
Pr
m = Number of members
r = number of reactions
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 6) Independent displacement components at each joint
M
TE
of a rigid jointed plane frame are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Three linear movements
(L

re
B. Two linear movements and one rotation
ho
at
C. One linear movement and two rotations
R
ep
D. Three rotations
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 7) If in a pin jointed plane frame (m + r) > 2j, then the
frame is
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Stable and Statically determinate
r
re
tu
B. Stable and Statically indeterminate
ec
(L
C. Unstable

re
ho
at
R
eep
Where m is the number of members, r is reaction

ad
Pr
components and j is number of joints

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Ds < 0 Unstable
,Dr
Ds = 0 Stable and determinate
re
tu
Ds > 0 Stable and Indeterminate
ec
(L

re
ho
From question, (m+ r) > 2j
at
R
m + r – 2j > 0
ep
e
Ds > 0
ad
Pr
Q. 8) A pin jointed plane frame is unstable if
P)
M
TE
A. ( m + r ) < 2j
,Dr
B. m + r = 2j
re
tu
ec
C. ( m + r) > 2j
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad

Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
Pin jointed plane frame is unstable means
,D
Ds < 0
r
re
tu
ec
m + r – 2j < 0
(L

re
(m + r) < 2j
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 9) A rigid jointed plane frame is stable and statically
determinate if
P)
M
TE
,D
A. ( m + r ) = 2j
r
re
tu
B. ( m + r ) = 3j
ec
(L
C. ( 3m + r ) = 3j

re
ho
D. ( m + 3r) = 3j
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Rigid jointed plane frame is stable and statically
,D
determinate if
r
re
tu
ec
Ds = 0
(L

re
ho
at
3m + r - 3j = 0
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
3m + r = 3j
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
For Rigid jointed plane frame, Dk = 3j – (r + m)+ r’
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Dk = 3 × 6 – (5 + 5) + (2-1) +(2-1)
e
ad
Pr
Dk = 10
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Rigid jointed plane frame
r
re
tu
ec
Ds = 3m + r - 3j
(L

re
Ds = 3 × 2 + 3 – 3 × 3
ho
at
Ds = 0
ep
R
- Hence Stable and Determinate
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Degree of kinematic indeterminacy of pin jointed
TE
,D
plane frame is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Dk = 2j – r

re
ho
at
R
Dk = 2 × 3 – 4
eep
ad
Pr
Dk = 2
P)
Q. 14) The number of independent equations to be
M
TE
satisfied for static equilibrium in a space structure is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2
(L

re
B. 3
ho
at
C. 4
R
ep
D. 6
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 15) Degree of static indeterminacy of a pin jointed
space frame is given by
P)
M
TE
,D
A. m + r – 2j
r
re
tu
B. m + r – 3j
ec
(L
D. 3m + r – 3j

re
ho
D. m + r + 3j
at
R
eep

ad
Pr

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(16 to 30)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 16) The degree of static indeterminacy of a rigid-jointed
P)
space frame is
M
TE
,Dr
A. m + r – 2j
re
tu
ec
B. m + r + - 3j
(L

re
C. 3m + r – 3j
ho
at
D. 6m + r - 6j
R
eep
ad
Where m, r and j have their usual meanings

Pr
Answer D
P)
If the number of unknown reactions are more than the number of
M
TE
equilibrium equations available then the structure is called indeterminate
,D
structure and degree of indeterminacy is given by static indeterminacy.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Where, m = number of membe, j = number of joints,

Pr

Q. 17) The degree of kinematic indeterminacy of a pin-
P)
jointed space frame is
M
TE
,Dr
A. 2j – r
re
tu
ec
B. 3j – r
(L

re
C. j – 2r
ho
at
D. j – 3r
R
ep
e
ad
Where j is number of joints and r is reaction components

Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(3) Rigid jointed plane frame, Dk = 3j – r + r’
(L

re
Dk = 3j – (r + m) + r’ (Axial deformation ignored)
ho
(4) Rigid jointed space frame, Dk = 6j – r + r’
at
R
Dk = 6j – (r + m) + r’ (Axial deformation ignored)
eep
ad
Pr
Where, j = Number of joints, m = Number of reactions,

r = number of reactions
P)
Q. 18) The number of independent displacement
M
TE
components at each joint of a rigid-jointed space frame is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1
(L

re
B. 2
ho
at
C. 3
R
ep
D. 6
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 19) If in a rigid-jointed space frame, (6m+r)<6j, then the
M
TE
frame is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Unstable
(L

re
B. Stable and statically determinate
ho
at
C. Stable and statically indeterminate
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
For rigid-jointed space frame, Ds = 6m + r – 6j
TE
,Dr
re
If Ds < 0, then Unstable
tu
ec
Ds = 0, then stable and determinate
(L

re
Ds > 0, Indeterminate and Stable
ho
at
R
ep
From question, (6m + r) < 6j
e
ad
6m +r - 6j < 0
Pr
Ds < 0
P)
Q. 20) The principle of virtual work can be applied to
M
TE
elastic system by considering the virtual work of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Internal forces only
(L

re
B. External forces only
ho
at
C. Internal as well as external forces
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 21) Castigliano’s first theorem is applicable
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. For statically determine structures only
ec
(L
B. When the system behaves elastically

re
ho
C. Only when principle of superposition is valid
at
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 22) Principle of superposition is applicable when
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Deflections are linear functions of applied forces
tu
ec
B. Material obeys hooke’s law
(L

re
C. The action of applied forces will be affected by small
ho
at
deformations of the structure
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A and B
This is applicable when
P)
M
1. Linear relationship between external forces and corresponding
TE
,D
structural displacements.
r
re
2. The material used in the structure must be Linearly Elastic.
tu
ec
(Obeys Hooke’s law)
(L

re
ho
The principle of superposition may be stated as the deflection at
at
R
a given point in a structure produced by several loads acting
eep
ad
simultaneously on the structure can be found by superposing

Pr
deflections at the same point produced by loads acting

individually.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 23) In moment distribution method, the sum of
P)
M
distribution factors of all the members meeting at any joint
TE
,D
is always
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Zero

re
ho
B. Less than 1
at
C. 1 R
ep
e
D. Greater than 1
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Moment distribution method is a structural analysis
r
re
tu
method for statically indeterminate beams and frames
ec
(L
developed by Hardy Cross.

re
ho
at
R
The method only accounts for flexural effects and ignores
eep
axial and shear effects.

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 24) The carryover factor in a prismatic member whose
M
TE
far end is fixed is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 1/2
ho
at
C. 3/4
R
ep
D. 1
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Carry over factor: - It is a moment developed at the far end due
M
TE
to the unit rotation at the near end (Sign of applied and
,D
developed moment is same).
r
re
tu
ec
(L
COF = Carry over moment / Moment at near end

re
ho
at
R
COF = Developed moment (far end) /Applied moment (near end)
eep
ad
1. Far end fixed, then COF = ½

Pr
2. Far end hinged, then COF = 0

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 25) The carryover factor in a prismatic member whose
M
TE
far end is hinged is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 1/2
ho
at
C. 3/4
R
ep
D. 1
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 26) The moment required to rotate the near end of a
prismatic beam through a unit angle without translation,
P)
M
the far end being simply supported, is given by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 3EI/L
ec
(L
B. 4EI/L

re
ho
C. 2EI/L
at
D. EI/L R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Where EI is flexural rigidity and L is span of beam

Answer A
Flexural stiffness: - Moment required to rotate the near end, produce
P)
unit rotation without translation. K = M/(θ=1)
M
TE
Required moment depends on far end
,D
1. Far end fixed, K = 4EI/L 2. Far end hinged, K = 3EI/L
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 27) The moment required to rotate the near end of a
prismatic beam through unit angle, without translation (
P)
M
the far end being fixed ), is given by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. EI/L
ec
(L
B. 2EI/L

re
ho
C. 3EI/L
at
D. 4EI/L R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Where EI is flexural rigidity and L is span of beam

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 28) If M is the external moment which rotates the near
P)
M
end of a prismatic beam without translation ( the far and
TE
,D
being fixed ), then the moment induced at the far end is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. M/2 in same direction as M

re
ho
B. M/2 in opposite direction as M
at
C. R
M in opposite direction
ep
e
D. 0
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 29) The principle of superposition is not applicable
when
i) The material does not obey Hooke’s law
P)
M
ii) The effects of temperature changes are taken into
TE
,D
consideration
r
re
tu
iii) The structure is being analysed for the effect of support
ec
(L
settlement

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
B. Both (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. Both (ii) and (iii)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 30) If the displacement at coordinate i due to unit
P)
force at coordinate j is δij, and displacement at
M
TE
coordinate j due to unit force at coordinate i is δji,
,D
then according to Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem,
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. δij = δji
ho
at
B. δij > δji ep
R
C. δij < δji
e
ad
Pr
D. δij ≠ δji
Answer A
Maxwell's reciprocal theorem state that in a linearly elastic
P)
structure, the deflection at any point A due to a load
M
TE
applied at some other point B will be equal to the
,Dr
deflection at B when the same load is applied at A.
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(31 to 45)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 31) The ordinates of influence line diagram for bending
M
TE
moment always have the dimensions of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Force
(L

re
B. Length
ho
at
C. Force×length
R
ep
D. Force/length
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
An influence line for any given point or section of structure is a
P)
curve whose ordinates represent to scale the variation of a
M
TE
function such as shear force, bending moment, deflection etc at
,D
a point or section, as the unit load moves across the structure.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 32) If one end of prismatic beam AB with fixed ends is
given a transverse displacement Δ without any rotation,
P)
then the transverse reactions at A or B due to
M
TE
displacement is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6EIΔ/L²
(L

re
B. 6EIΔ/L³
ho
at
C. 12EIΔ/L²
R
ep
D. 12EIΔ/L³
e
ad
Pr
Where L is span of beam AB and EI is flexural rigidity

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 33) If the sinking of a support of a fixed beam causes
P)
M
the beam to rotate in the clockwise direction, then the
TE
,D
moments induced at both the ends of the beam will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. In anticlockwise direction and of equal magnitude

re
ho
B. In clockwise direction and of different magnitudes
at
R
C. In opposite directions and equal magnitude
ep
e
D. In opposite directions and of different magnitudes

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 34) In column analogy method, the area of an
P)
M
analogous column for a fixed beam of span L and flexural
TE
,D
rigidity EI is taken as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. L/EI

re
ho
B. L/2EI
at
C. L/3EI R
ep
e
D. L/4EI
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 35) The degree of static indeterminacy up to which
M
TE
column analogy method can be used is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2
(L

re
B. 3
ho
at
C. 4
R
ep
D. Unrestricted
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 36) The deflection at any point of a perfect frame can
M
TE
be obtained by applying a unit load at the joint in
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Vertical direction
(L

re
B. Horizontal direction
ho
at
C. Inclined direction
R
ep
D. The direction in which the deflection is required
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
re
The method of virtual work, or sometimes referred to as the unit-
tu
ec
load method.
(L

re
Applying a unit load at the point in the direction of which a
ho
at
displacement needs to be calculated.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 37) In the slope deflection equations, the deformations
are considered to be caused by
P)
M
TE
i) Bending moment
,Dr
ii) Shear force
re
tu
ec
iii) Axial force
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i)
R
ep
B. (i) and (ii)
e
ad
C. (ii) and (iii)

Pr

Answer A
P)
M
Slope deflection equation give the relationship between bending
TE
,D
moment acting on a structures member and displacement of the
r
re
member at its ends.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 38) The three moments equation is applicable only
M
TE
when
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. The beam is prismatic
(L

re
B. There is no settlement of supports
ho
at
C. There is no discontinuity such as hinges within the span
R
ep
D. The spans are equal
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
A prismatic beam is simply a beam in which there is a
P)
M
uniform cross section throughout.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Three moment equation relates moments at three
ec
(L
successive (no discontinuity) supports to applied loading

re
ho
on adjacent spans.
at
R
eep
Fixed end is replaced by an additional span of zero length.

ad
Pr
Q. 39) While using three moments equation, a fixed end
P)
M
moment of a continuous beam is replaced by an additional
TE
,D
span of
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Zero length

re
ho
B. Infinite length
at
R
C. Zero moment of inertia
eep

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 40) The Castigliano’s second theorem can be used to
M
TE
compute deflections
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. In statically determinate structures only
(L

re
B. For any type of structure
ho
at
C. At the point under the load only
R
ep
D. For beams and frames only
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Castigliano's second theorem The first partial derivative of the
ec
(L

total internal energy in a structure with respect to the force
re
ho
applied at any point is equal to the deflection at the point of
at
R
application of that force in the direction of its line of action.
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 41) Bending moment at any section in a conjugate
M
TE
beam gives in the actual beam
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Slope
(L

re
B. Curvature
ho
at
C. Deflection
R
ep
D. Bending moment
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Conjugate beam is defined as the imaginary beam with the same
,D
span as that of the original beam
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The conjugate-beam method is an engineering method to derive

re
ho
the slope (Shear force in original beam) and deflection (Bending
at
R
moment in original beam) of a beam.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 42) For a two-hinged arch, if one of the supports
M
TE
settles down vertically, then the horizontal thrust
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Is increased
(L

re
B. Is decreased
ho
at
C. Remains unchanged
R
ep
D. Becomes zero
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 43) For a symmetrical two hinged parabolic arch, if one
P)
M
of the supports settles horizontally, then the horizontal
TE
,D
thrust
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Is increased

re
ho
B. Is decreased
at
C. Remains unchanged R
eep
D. Becomes zero
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 44) A single rolling load of 8 KN rolls along a grider of 15
M
TE
m span. The absolute maximum bending moment will be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 8 KN-m
(L

re
B. 15 KN-m
ho
at
C. 30 KN-m
R
ep
D. 60KN-m
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 45) The maximum bending moment due to a train of
M
TE
wheel loads on a simply supported girder
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Always occurs at centre of span
(L

re
B. Always occurs under a wheel load
ho
at
C. Never occurs under wheel load
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(46 to 60)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 46) When a uniformly distributed load, longer than the
P)
span of the girder, moves from left to right, then the
M
TE
maximum bending moment at mid section of span occurs
,Dr
when the uniformly distributed load occupies
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Less than the left half span
ho
at
B. Whole of the half span
R
ep
C. More than the left half span
e
ad
D. Whole span
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q 47) When a uniformly distributed load, shorter than the span
P)
M
of the grider, moves from left to right, then the conditions for
TE
maximum bending moment at a section is that
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. The head of the load reaches the section
(L

B. The tail of the load reaches the section
re
ho
C. The load position should be such that the section divides it equally on
at
both sides.
R
ep
D. The load position should be such that the section divides the load in
e
ad
the same ratio as it divides the span

Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 48) When a series of wheel loads crosses a simply supported
girder, the maximum bending moment under any given wheel
P)
M
load occurs when
TE
,Dr
re
A. The centre of gravity of the load system is Midway between
tu
ec
the centre of span and wheel load under consideration
(L

re
B. The centre of Span Midway between the centre of gravity of
ho
the load system and the wheel load under consideration
at
R
C. The wheel load under consideration is the Midway between
eep
ad
the centre of span and the centre of gravity of the load system
Pr

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 49) Which of the following is not the displacement
M
TE
method
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equilibrium method
(L

re
B. Column analogy method
ho
at
C. Moment distribution method
R
ep
D. Kani’s method
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Force method: - Primary unknown are forces.
TE
1. Method of consistent deformation
,D
2. Theorem of least work
r
re
tu
3. Column analogy method
ec
4. Flexibility matrix methd
(L

re
ho
Displacement method: -Primary unknowns are the displacements.
at
1. Slope deflection method R
eep
2. Moment distribution method

ad
Pr
3. Kani’s method
4. Stiffness matrix method
Q. 50) The muller-Breslau principle can be used to
i) Determine the shape of the influence line
P)
ii) Indicate the parts of the structure to be loaded to obtain
M
TE
the maximum effect
,Dr
iii) Calculate the ordinates of the influence lines
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i)
R
ep
e
ad
C. Both (ii) and (iii)

Pr

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
The basis of the Müller-Breslau Principle is that we can find the
r
re
influence line for a determinate beam by:
tu
ec
(L

re
1. Removing the restraint caused by the parameter that we want
ho
to find the influence line for
at
R
ep
e
ad
2. Then, displace or rotate the resulting structure by one unit.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
There will be no moment in central column.

C.
B.
A.
D.
0
1t
2t
0.5t
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Total degree of static indeterminacy is the sum of internal and
external static indeterminacy.
Ds = Dse + Dsi
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Where,
at
m = number of membersR
ep
e
ad
Pr

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Rigid jointed plane frame, Ds = r – 3 + (3C – r’)
(L

re
Ds = 6 – 3 + (3×0 - 0)
ho
at
Ds = 3
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 56)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
What is the degree of kinematic indeterminacy of the beam
ho
at
shown in fig. 12.10
R
ep
A. 2
e
ad
B. 3
Pr
C. 4
D. 5
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
Dk = 5
R
at
Dk = 3j – r ho
re
Dk = 3×3 – 4 (L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 57) What is the degree of kinematic indeterminacy of
the beam shown in fig 12.10, if the axial deformation is
ignored
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. 2 R
eep
B. 3
ad
Pr
C. 4
D. 5
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
Dk = 3
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
Dk = 3j – (m + r)
re
r
Dk = 3×3 – (2+4)
,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Dk = aj – r + r’
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
(3) Rigid jointed plane frame, Dk = 3j –(r + m) + r’ (Axial deformation ignored)

re
Dk = 3j – r + r’
ho
at
(4) Rigid jointed space frame, Dk = 6j – (r + m) + r’ (Axial deformation ignored)
R
ep
Dk = 6j – r + r’
e
ad
Where, a = DOF, j = Number of joints

Pr
m = Number of members, r = number of reactions

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Rigid jointed plane frame, (Axial deformation ignored)
ec
(L

Dk = 3j – (r + m) + r’
re
ho
Dk = 3×6 – (4+6) + 0
at
R
Dk = 8
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Rigid jointed plane frame,
ec
(L
Ds = r - 3 + [3C - r’]

re
ho
Ds = 6 – 3 + [3×0 – (2-1)]
at
R
Ds = 2
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
The portal frame shown in fig 12.13 will
ep
A. Not sway
e
ad
B. Sway towards left

Pr
C. Sway towards right

D. Sway either to left or right
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,Dr
re
(61 to 75)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Structural ep
R
at
e
Analysis
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Flexibility Matrix:- A unit force or moment is applied at a coordinates and the
displacement (deflection and rotation) are calculated at all coordinates.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 65) The elements of flexibility matrix of a structure
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Are dependent on the choice of coordinates
ec
(L
B. Are independent of the choice of coordinates

re
ho
C. Are always dimensionally homogenous
at
D. Both A and B R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 66) Study of the following statements
i) The displacement method is more useful when degree of kinematic
indeterminacy is greater than the degree of static indeterminacy
P)
ii) The displacement method is more useful when degree of kinematic
M
TE
indeterminacy is less than the degree of static indeterminacy
,D
iii) The force method is more useful when degree of static indeterminacy
r
re
is greater than the degree of kinematic indeterminacy
tu
ec
iv) The force method is more useful when degree of static indeterminacy
(L

is less than the degree of kinematic indeterminacy
re
ho
at
The correct answer is R
ep
A. (i) and (iii)
e
ad
B. (ii) and (iii)

Pr
C. (i) and (iv)

D. (ii) and (iv)
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
Force method:- Ds < Dk
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
Displacement method:- Dk < Ds
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Flexibility matrix is a square symmetrical matrix
ec
(L
B. Stiffness matrix is a square symmetrical matrix

re
ho
C. Both A and B
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 68) To generate the j th column of the flexibility matrix
P)
M
TE
A. A unit force is applied at coordinate j and the displacement are
,D
calculated at all coordinates
r
re
tu
B. A unit displacement is applied at coordinate j and the forces
ec
(L
are calculated at all coordinates

re
ho
C. A unit force is applied at coordinate j and the forces are
at
caculated at all coordinatesR
ep
D. A unit displacement is applied at coordinate j and the
e
ad
displacements are calculated at all coordinates

Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Flexibility Matrix:- A unit force or moment is applied at a
(L

re
coordinates and the displacement (deflection and
ho
at
rotation) are calculated at all coordinates.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Q. 69) For stable structures, one of the important properties of
flexibility and stiffness matrices is that the elements on the main
P)
diagonal
M
TE
,D
i) Of a stiffness matrix must be positive
r
re
ii) Of a stiffness matrix must be negative
tu
ec
iii) Of a flexibility matrix must be positive
(L

iv) Of a flexibility matrix must be negative
re
ho
at
R
ep
A. (i) and (iii)
e
ad
B. (ii) and (iii)

Pr
C. (i) and (iv)

D. (i) and (iv)
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Strain energy: - When a body is subjected to gradual, sudden or impact
M
load, the body deforms and work is done upon it. If the elastic limit is not
TE
,D
exceed, this work is stored in the body. This work done or energy stored
r
re
in body is called strain energy.
tu
Strain energy = Work done
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 71) Effects of shear force and axial force on plastic
M
TE
moment capacity of a structure are respectively to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increase and decrease
(L

re
B. Increase and increase
ho
at
C. Decrease and increase
R
ep
D. Decrease and decrease
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Plastic moment capacity:- It is defined as the moment at
r
re
tu
which the entire cross section has reached its yield stress.
ec
(L

re
ho
Effect of axial load and shear:- If a member is subjected to
at
R
the combined action of bending moment and axial force,
ep
e
ad
the plastic moment capacity will be reduced.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 74) Which of the following methods of structural
M
TE
analysis is a force method
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Slope deflection method
(L

re
ho
at
C. Moment distribution method
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
4. Flexibility matrix method
(L

re
ho
at
Displacement method:- Primary unknown are displacement.
R
ep
1. Slope deflection method
e
ad

Pr
3. Kani’s method
P)
Q. 75) Which of the following methods of structural
M
TE
analysis is a displacement method
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Moment distribution method
(L

re
ho
at
C. Three Moment equation
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(76 to 90)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 76) In the displacement method of structural analysis,
M
TE
the basic unknowns are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Displacements
(L

re
B. Force
ho
at
C. Displacements and forces
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
4. Flexibility matrix method
(L

re
ho
at
Displacement method:- Primary unknown are displacement.
R
ep
e
ad

Pr
3. Kani’s method
P)
Q. 77) The fixed support in a real beam becomes in the
M
TE
conjugate beam a
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Roller support
(L

re
B. Hinged support
ho
at
C. Fixed support
R
ep
D. Free end
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 78) The width of the analogous column in the method
M
TE
of column analogy is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2/EI
(L

re
B. 1/EI
ho
at
C. 1/2EI
R
ep
D. 1/4EI
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
dimensions (length) as that of the original beam but load at any
TE
,D
point on the conjugate beam is equal to the bending moment at
r
re
that point divided by EI.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 79) A simply supported beam deflects by 5 mm when it
P)
is subjected to concentrated load of 10 KN at its centre.
M
TE
What will be the deflection in a 1/10 model of a beam if
,Dr
the model is subjected to a 1 KN load at its centre
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 5 mm
ho
at
B. 0.5 mm
R
ep
C. 0.05 mm
e
ad
D. 0.005 mm
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 80) The deformation of a spring produced by a unit load
M
TE
is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Stiffness
(L

re
B. Flexibility
ho
at
C. Influence coefficient
R
ep
D. Unit strain
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The expression of stiffness for an elastic body is as below.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Here, the stiffness is k, applied force is F, and deflection is δ.
ho
at
R
Flexibility is inverse of stiffness
ep
e
ad
Pr
Flexibility = deflection/force
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 82) A fixed beam of span L is carrying a point load P at
P)
its midspan. If the moment of inertia of the middle half
M
TE
length is two times that of the remaining length, then the
,Dr
fixed and moments will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. PL/32
ho
at
B. 5PL/48
R
ep
C. 3PL/32
e
ad
D. 5PL/32
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 84) Consider the following statements
i) Conjugate beam can be used to determine slopes and
deflection in non Prismatic beam
P)
M
ii) conjugate beam may be statically indeterminate
TE
,D
iii) conjugate beam method gives absolute slope and
r
re
tu
deflection
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (iii) R
ep
e
B. (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

Answer A
P)
dimensions (length) as that of the original beam but load at any point on
M
TE
the conjugate beam is equal to the bending moment at that point divided
,D
by EI.
r
re
tu
ec
The conjugate-beam method is an engineering method to derive the
(L

re
slope and displacement of a beam.
ho
at
R
1. The slope at a point in the real beam is numerically equal to the shear
ep
force at the corresponding point in the conjugate beam.
e
ad
Pr
2. The displacement of a point in the real beam is numerically equal to

the moment at the corresponding point in the conjugate beam.
Q. 85) In a three hinged arch,
i) Influence line for horizontal thrust is parabolic
P)
ii) Maximum horizontal thurst occurs when the unit load is at the
M
TE
crown
,D
iii) Maximum sagging moment occurs when the unit load is at the
r
re
tu
section itself
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) ep
R
B. (i) and (iii)
e
ad
C. (ii) and (iii)

Pr

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 86) Influence line for horizontal thrust in a two hinged
M
TE
parabolic arch is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Parabolic
(L

re
B. Cubic
ho
at
C. Triangular
R
ep
D. Rectangular
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 87) For a single point load W moving on a symmetrical
P)
three hinged parabolic arch of span L, the maximum
M
TE
sagging moment occurs at a distance X from ends.
,Dr
The value of X is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.211L
ho
at
B. 0.25L
R
ep
C. 0.234L
e
ad
D. 0.5L
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 88) Muller Breslau’s principle for obtaining influence lines is
applicable to
(i) Trusses
P)
M
(ii) Statically determinate beams and frames
TE
,D
(iii) Statically indeterminate structures, the material of which is
r
re
elastic and follows Hooke’s law
tu
ec
(iv) Any statically indeterminate structure
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i), (ii) and (iii) R
eep
ad
B. (i), (ii) and (iv)

Pr
C. (i) and (ii)

D. Only (i)
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Muller Breslau’s principle is used to draw ILD for determinate and
(L

re
indeterminate structures (material of which is elastic and follows
ho
at
Hooke’s law).
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 89) Consider the following statements in regard to finding stresses in
Truss members due to moving loads
(i) The stress in a web member is given by the influence line of shear
P)
force for the panel containing the member
M
TE
(ii) The stress in a web member is given by the influence line of bending
,D
moment for the node find opposite to the member
r
re
(iii) The stress in a chord member is given by the influence line of shear
tu
ec
force for the panel containing the member
(L

(iv) The stress in a chord member is given by the influence line of bending
re
ho
moment for the node point opposite to the member
at
ep
A. (i) and (iii)
e
ad
B. (i) and (iv)

Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (ii) and (iv)
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 90) In which of the following truss members the stress
P)
M
depends upon, whether the load is moving on the top
TE
,D
chord or bottom chord
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Top chord and bottom chord

re
ho
B. Verticals
at
C. Diagonals R
eep
D. Verticals and diagonals

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Deck type truss

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(91 to 100)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 91) for analysis of building frames under vertical loads,
M
TE
the point of inflection is assumed at
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Centre of each beam
(L

re
B. Centre of each column
ho
at
C. One tenth of the span length from each end of thebeam
R
ep
D. Both A and B
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Inflection point - Point of zero moment
tu
ec
(L

re
For analysis of building frames under vertical loads, the point of
ho
at
inflection is assumed at 1/10th of the span length from each end
R
ep
of the beam.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 92) In the cantilever method of lateral load analysis, which of the
following assumptions are made
(i) The axial force in the beam is zero
P)
(ii) The intensity of axial stress in each column of a storey is proportional
M
TE
to the horizontal distance of that column from the centre of gravity of all
,D
columns of the storey under consideration
r
re
(iii) The total horizontal shear on each storey is divided between the
tu
ec
columns of that storey so that is each interior column carries twice as
(L

much shear as each exterior column
re
ho
at
ep
A. (i) and (ii)
e
ad
B. (i) and (iii)

Pr
C. Only (ii)
D. Only (iii)
Answer C
The following methods can be employed for lateral load analysis of rigidly jointed
P)
frames.
M
1. The Cantilever method
TE
,D
2. The Portal method
r
3. The Factor method
re
tu
1. Cantilever method
ec
following assumption in the cantilever method
(L

re
1) An inflection point occurs at the mid point of each girder.
ho
2) An inflection point occurs at mid height of each column.
at
R
3) In a storey, the intensity of axial stress in a each column is proportional to its
ep
horizontal distance from the center of gravity of all the columns in that storey.
e
ad
2. Portal method
Pr
1) and 2) similar to cantilever

3) The total horizontal shear at each storey is divided between the columns of that
storey such that the interior column carries twice the shear of exterior column.
Q. 93) The factor method of analysing building frames is
P)
M
(i) More accurate than either the portal or the cantilever method
TE
,D
(ii) Based upon the slope deflection method of analysis
r
re
(iii) Used for lateral as well as vertical load analysis
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Only (i)
at
B. (i) and (ii) R
eep
ad
C. Only (ii)
Pr

Answer B
The following methods can be employed for lateral load analysis
P)
of rigidly jointed frames.
M
TE
,D
1. The Portal method.
r
re
2. The Cantilever method
tu
ec
3. The Factor method
(L

re
ho
The factor method is more accurate than either the portal method or the
at
cantilever method. R
eep
ad
Pr
The portal method and the cantilever method yield good results only
when the height of a building is approximately more than five times its
least lateral dimension.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 95) Consider the following assumptions in the analysis of a
plane Truss
P)
M
TE
1. The individual members are the straight
,D
2. The individual members are connected by frictionless hinges
r
re
tu
3. The loads and reactions act only at the joints
ec
(L

re
ho
Of these assumptions
at
A. 1 and 2 are valid ep
R
B. 1 and 3 are valid
e
ad
C. 2 and 3 are valid

Pr
D. 1,2 and 3 are valid

Answer D
P)
Assumptions in the analysis of truss:-
M
TE
,D
1. Truss members are connected together at their ends only.
r
re
tu
2. Truss are connected together by frictionless pins.
ec
(L
3. The weights of the members may be neglected.

re
ho
4. The individual members are the straight and prismatic.
at
R
5. The truss structure is loaded only at the joints.
ep
6. The truss members subjected purely axial forces either by axial
e
ad
tension or axial compression. Never by transverse forces.

Pr
7. The members cannot develop moments at the ends.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
If the number of unknown reactions are more than the number of
M
TE
equilibrium equations available then the structure is called indeterminate
,D
structure and degree of indeterminacy is given by static indeterminacy.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Where, m = number of membe, j = number of joints,

Pr

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(101 to 110)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 101) Which of the structures of fig. 12.28 will experience sway?
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
Select the correct answer using the codes given below
ep
A. A and B
e
ad
B. A and C
Pr
C. C and D
D. B and D
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
sway frame.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
symmetrical R
ep
e
ad

Pr
symmetrical
Q.102) A symmetrical two-hinged parabolic arch when
P)
M
subjected to a uniformly distributed load on the entire
TE
,D
horizontal span, is subject to
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Radial shear alone

re
ho
B. Normal thrust alone
at
R
eep
D. Normal thrust, radial shear and bending moment

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 103) A two span continuous beam ABC is simply
supported at A and C and is continuous over support B.
P)
M
Span AB = 6m, BC = 6m. The beam carries a udl of 2 t/m
TE
,D
over both the spans. EI is constant for the entire span. The
r
re
tu
fixed end moment at B in span BA Or BC would be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 12 t.m
at
B. 9 t.m R
ep
e
C. 8 t.m
ad
Pr
D. 6 t.m
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 105) The strain energy stored in a simply supported
P)
M
beam of span l and flexural rigidity EI due to a central
TE
,D
concentrated load W is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. W²l³/48EI

re
ho
B. W²l²/48EI
at
C. W²l²/96EI R
ep
e
D. W²l³/96EI
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 106) In a two hinged arch an increase in temperature
M
TE
induces
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. No bending moment in the arch rib
(L

re
B. Uniform bending moment in the arch rib
ho
at
C. Maximum bending moment at the crown
R
ep
D. Minimum bending moment at the crown
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Effect of temperature on 3 hinge arch:-
TE
,D
1. Thermal stress will not developed on statically determinate structure
r
re
have no change in bending moment
tu
2. Temperature increase → horizontal thrust decrease
ec
(L

re
ho
Effect of temperature on 2 hinge arch:-
at
1. Two hinge arch are Statically indeterminate, hence thermal stress are
R
ep
developed.
e
ad
2. Temperature increase → Horizontal thrust increase and BM maximum

Pr
at crown.
Q. 107) The following methods are used for structural analysis
1. Macaulay method
P)
M
TE
,D
3. Kani’s method
r
re
4. Method of sections
tu
ec
Those used for indeterminate structural analysis would include
(L

re
ho
A. 1 and 2
at
B. 1 and 3 R
ep
e
ad
C. 2 and 3
Pr
D. 2,3 and 4
Answer C
P)
M
TE
The following methods are used to solve indeterminate structures:
,Dr
1. Flexibility method
re
tu
ec
(L

re
4. Kani's method
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 110) The absolute maximum bending moment in a
P)
M
simply supported beam of span 20 m due to a moving udl
TE
,D
of 4 t/m spanning over 5 m is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 87.5 t-m at the support

re
ho
B. 87.5 t-m near the midpoint
at
R
C. 3.5 t-m at the midpoint
ep
e
D. 87.5 t-m at the midpoint

ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(111 to 120)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
Option A is correct for ILD of a Horizontal thurst in 3 hinge arch.
tu
ec
Because 3 hinge arch is Statically determinate, hence ILD is linear.
(L

re
ho
Option B is correct for ILD of a Horizontal thurst in 2 hinge arch
at
R
Because 2 hinge arch is Statically indeterminate, hence ILD is parabolic.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 116) Consider the following statements with respect to arches
1. The normal thrust at any section of the arch is the component of
interacting forces on the section along the tangent to the centre line of
P)
the arch
M
TE
2. The radial shear at any section of the arch is the component of the
,D
interacting forces on the section along the normal to the centre line of
r
re
the arch
tu
ec
3. The intercept between a given arch and the linear arch at a section is
(L

proportional to the bending moment at the section.
re
ho
at
Of these statements R
ep
A. 1,2 and 3 are correct
e
ad

Pr

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Total force acting along the normal is called normal thrust and
,D
Total force acting along the radial direction is called radial shear.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 117) A symmetrical parabolic arch of span 20 metres
and risee 5 metres is hinged at the springings. It supports a
P)
M
uniformly distributed load of 2 tonnes per metre run of the
TE
,D
span. The horizontal thrust in tonnes at each of the
r
re
tu
springings is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 8
at
B. 16 R
ep
e
C. 20
ad
Pr
D. Zero
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 118) A beam AB is fixed at both ends and carries a
uniformly distributed load of intensity p per unit length run
P)
M
over its entire length. Due to some constructional defects,
TE
,D
the end B is now reduced to a simple support. The
r
re
tu
percentage increase in bending moment at A is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 25
at
B. 50 R
ep
e
C. 75
ad
Pr
D. 100
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 119) Match list I with list II and select the correct answer using
P)
the codes given below the lists:
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 120) A fixed beam AB is subjected to a triangular load
P)
M
varying from zero at end A to w per unit length at end B.
TE
,D
The ratio of fixed end moment at B to A will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1/2

re
ho
B. 1/3
at
C. 2/3 R
eep
D. 3/2
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(121 to 130)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 121)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad

Pr
Since force in member XY is zero,

Hence strain energy is zero
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 127) Consider the following statements
Sinking of an intermediate support of a continuous beam
P)
M
1. Reduces the negative moment at support
TE
,D
2. Increases the negative moment at support
r
re
3. Reduces the positive moment at support
tu
ec
4. Increases the positive moment at the centre of span
(L

re
ho
Of these statements
at
A. 1 and 4 are correct R
e ep
ad

Pr

Answer A
Continuous beam is subjected to negative bending moments at supports and
P)
M
positive bending moments at mid-span.
TE
,D
When one of the intermediate supports
r
re
is sinking. It results in reduction of
tu
ec
negative bending moment at the
(L

support but increase in bending
re
ho
moments at midspan on the
at
either side.
R
e ep
The change in moment is

ad
Pr
calculated through moment

distribution method
of the structural analysis.
Q. 128) A number of wheel loads 3t, 4t, 5t and 6t spaced 2
m, 3 m and 4 m respectively move on a simply supported
P)
M
beam AB of span 24 m with the 3t load leading from left to
TE
,D
right. To find the maximum bending moment at 18 m from
r
re
tu
a from A, the load that must be placed at the section is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 3t
at
B. 4t R
ep
e
C. 5t
ad
Pr
D. 6t
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 129) A load W is moving from left to right support on a
P)
M
simply supported beam of span l. The maximum bending
TE
,D
moment at 0.4 l from the left support is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.16 Wl

re
ho
B. 0.20 Wl
at
C. 0.24 Wl R
eep
D. 0.25 Wl
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 130) Consider the following statements regarding the beams
P)
and their loading shown in figures. 12.46 and 12.47
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(131 to 140)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 132) A cantilever beam AB, fixed at A and carrying a
P)
load W at the free end B, is found to be deflect by δ at the
M
TE
midpoint of AB. The deflection of B due to a load W/2 at
,Dr
the midpoint will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 2δ
ho
at
B. δ
R
ep
C. δ/2
e
ad
D. δ/4
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
The shape of the bending moment diagram is due to free

re
ho
bending moment and due to moment distribution method
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Fixed end moment in the horizontal member of the frame
r
re
tu
ec
= 6EIδ/L²
(L

re
ho
at
= 6EIδ/4²
R
ep
e
ad
= 6EIδ/16
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The structure is symmetrical but loading is antisymmetrical about
ec
(L
midpoint of BC. If a symmetric structure is subjected to an

re
ho
antisymmetric loading, the structural response is antisymmetric.
at
R
Hence θb = -θc and Δ present
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Ds = Dse + Dsi
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
(iii) Rigid jointed plane frame,

re
Ds = (r - 3) + (3C – r’) OR 3m + r – 3j
ho
at
Ds = 6 – 3 + ( 3 × 2 – 0) OR 3 × 11 + 6 – 3 × 10 = 9
R
ep
e
ad
Where,
Pr
m = number of members, j = number of joints

P)
M
TE
Dk = aj – r + r'
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
(3) Rigid jointed plane frame, Dk = 3j – r + r’

re
Dk = 3 × 10 - 6 + 0 = 24
ho
at
(4) Rigid jointed space frame, Dk = 6j – r + r’
R
eep
ad
Where, a = DOF, j = Number of joints

Pr
m = Number of member, r = number of reactions

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(141 to 150)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
The Muller-Breslau principle states:
re
tu
The influence line for a function (reaction, shear, moment) is to
ec
(L

the same scale as the deflected shape of the beam when the
re
ho
beam is acted on by the function.
at
R
ep
e
To draw the deflected shape properly, the ability of the beam to

ad
Pr
resist the applied function must be removed.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
sway frame.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
symmetrical R
ep
e
ad

Pr
symmetrical
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 148) Due to some point load anywhere on a fixed beam,
P)
M
the maximum free bending moment is M. The sum of fixed
TE
,D
end moment is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. M

re
ho
B. 1.5M
at
C. 2.0M R
eep
D. 3.0M
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(151 to 160)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Structural

re
ho
at
R
Analysis
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 151) A fixed beam of uniform section is carrying a point
P)
load at its mid span. If the moment of inertia of the middle
M
TE
half length is now reduced to half its previous value, then
,Dr
the fixed end moments will
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Increase
ho
at
B. Decrease
R
ep
C. Remain constant
e
ad
D. Change their directions

Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
Since the moment of inertia of middle half is reduced, so the
tu
ec
redistribution of moment will occur in such a manner that less strong
(L

re
portion is subjected to less moment and more strong portion is subjected
ho
to more moment.
at
R
From this argument, the fixed end moment will increase.
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 152) The maximum bending moment at the left quarter
P)
point of simple beam due to crossing of UDL of shorter
M
TE
than the span in the direction left to right; would occur
,Dr
after the load had just crossed the section by
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. One-fourth of its length
ho
at
B. Half of its length
R
ep
C. Three-fourth of its length
e
ad
D. It’s full length

Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 153) When a load crosses a through type Pratt truss in
P)
M
the direction left to right, the nature of force in any
TE
,D
diagonal member in the left half of the span would
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Change from compression to tension

re
ho
B. Change from tension to compression
at
C. Always be compression R
eep
D. Always be tension
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

By giving unit translation in the positive direction of support
re
ho
reaction at Rc, the deformed shape of beam is ILD of Rc
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 156) The moment at the intermediate support of a two
P)
span continuous beam of 6 m each with simple supports at
M
TE
the ends carrying a udl of 20 kN/m over only the left span
,Dr
is (flexural rigidity is the same for both the spans)
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 90 kN.m hogging
ho
at
B. 45 kN.m hogging
R
ep
C. 45 kN.m sagging
e
ad
D. Zero
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
C. 30 kN.m
B. 20 kN.m
A. 10 kN.m
D. 40 kN.m

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Ds = Dse + Dsi
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
(iii) Rigid jointed plane frame,
ho
Ds = (r - 3) + (3C – r’) OR 3m + r – 3j – r’
at
R
Ds = 12 – 3 + ( 3 × 2 – (4-1)) OR 3 × 12 + 12 – 3 × 11 – (4-1) = 12
ep
e
(iv) Rigid jointed space frame,Ds = (r – 6) + (6C – r‘) OR 6m + r – 6j - r'

ad
Pr
Where, m = number of members, j = number of joints

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Last Part
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
(161 to 170 END)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Structural ep
R
at
e
Analysis
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Since the diagrams shows a displacement at X-X, so the figuree
re
ho
represents ILD for shear force at section X-X
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Introduce pinned connection at given section and give unit
re
ho
rotation at the section to find the ILD for BM
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 166) Assertion A : The concept strain energy can be
P)
used to analyse a statically indeterminate structure
M
TE
Reason R : There is a direct relationship between strain
,D
energy of a structure and the slopes and deflection caused
r
re
tu
in it.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 167) Assertion A : In the analysis of rigid frames, the
P)
usual practice is to consider the strain energy due to
M
TE
flexure only.
,D
Reason R : The Strain energy due to axial and shear forces
r
re
tu
are usually quite small compared to that of flexure.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 168) Assertion A : Whether it is maximum BM at a section or
absolute maximum BM, the moving UDL should cover the entire
P)
span of a simple beam if span is less than load length.
M
TE
Reason R : Whether it is maximum BM at a section or absolute
,D
maximum BM, the moving UDL should be divided by the section
r
re
tu
in the same ratio in which the section divides the span, if the
ec
(L
span is greater than load length

re
ho
at
ep
R
e
ad

Pr

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 169) Assertion A : Influence line diagram (ILD) for SF at
P)
the fixed end of a cantilever and SFD due to unit load at
M
TE
the free end are same.
,D
Reason R : ILD for BM at the fixed end of a cantilever and
r
re
tu
BMD due to unit load at the free end are same.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Answer C
P)
ILD for SF:- Introduce a roller at section, so that it gives freedom to the
M
beam in the vertical direction.
TE
,D
ILD for BM:- Introduce pinned connection at given section and give unit
r
re
rotation at the section to find the ILD for BM
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad

Pr

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Reaction at right support
tu
ec
RB = Wa/L
(L

re
ho
So shear force on the right
at
for all spans is constant. R
eep
ad
Pr
The End
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
🙏☺ep
R
e
ad
Pr
SSS-JE, AE(PSC), RRB etc.
P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(01 to 15)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Highway ep
R
at
e
ad
Engineering
Pr
P)
Q.1) Nagpur road plan formulae were prepared by
M
TE
assuming
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Rectangular or block road pattern
(L

re
b. Radial or star and block road pattern
ho
at
c. Radial or star and circular road pattern
ep
R
d. Radial or star and grid road pattern
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
a. Nagpur road plan formulae take into account the towns with very large
r
re
tu
population.
ec
(L
b. Nagpur road plan has a target road length of 32km per 100 sq.m

re
c. Second 20-year plan has provided 1600km expressway out of the
ho
at
proposed national highway
R
d. Second 20-year plan allowed deduction of length of railway track in the
ep
e
area while caculating length of roads

ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 3 The sequence of four stages survey in a highway
alignment is
P)
M
TE
,D
a. Reconnaissance, map study, preliminary survey and detailed
r
re
survey
tu
ec
b. Map study, preliminary survey, reconnaissance and detailed
(L

re
survey
ho
at
c. Map study, reconnaissance survey, preliminary survey and
R
ep
detailed survey
e
ad
d. Preliminary survey, map study, reconnaissance survey and

Pr
detailed survey.
Answer: C
The position of the center line on the highway in the ground is called highway
alignment.
P)
M
TE
Engineering Survey and its stages:
,Dr
re
1. Map Study - The study of the topographical map is done to find out the possible
tu
ec
routes of the road.
(L
2.Reconnaissance - Simple Survey Instruments are used in the reconnaissance

re
procedure
ho
at
3.Preliminary Survey -
R
To estimate the quantity of earthwork.
ep
e
To finalize the best alignment.

ad
4. Final Location and Detailed Survey

Pr
The data during the detailed survey should be elaborated and completed for the
preparation of the plans, designing, and estimation of the project.
P)
Q. 4) The shape of the camber, best suited for the
M
TE
cement concrete pavement is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Straight line
(L

re
b. Parabolic
ho
at
c. Elliptical ep
R
d. Combination of straight and parabolic
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Camber - slope in transverse direction to
drain of water from the road surface.
P)
M
X% - X vertical and 100 horizontal
TE
1 in n – 1 vertical and n horizontal
,Dr
re
a. Straight line camber -
tu
ec
They are generally adopted for very flat
(L

slopes such as PCC or RCC Pavement.
re
ho
at
b. Parabolic camber –
Designed for fast moving highways. R
eep
Adopted for Bituminous pavement.
ad
Pr
c. Composite camber –
Design for mixed traffic.
P)
Q. 5) For water bound macadam road in localities of
M
TE
heavy rainfall, the recommended value of camber is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1 in 30
(L

re
b. 1 in 33
ho
at
c. 1 in 48 ep
R
d. 1 in 60
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 6) The stopping sight distance depends upon
TE
,Dr
re
a. Total reaction time of driver
tu
ec
(L
b. Speed of vehicle

re
ho
c. Efficiency of brakes
at
d. All the above R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
SSD - It is the minimum distance open to the vision of the driver to stop
P)
the vehicle to avoid collision with an obstruction(moving or stationary)
M
TE
which is present on the carriage way
,Dr
re
Factors affecting SSD = Lag distance + Braking distance
tu
ec
(L

= ( 0.278Vt) + V² / 254(f±n)
re
ho
at
R
1. Total reaction time of the driver ↑
ep
2. Speed of the vehicle ↑
e
ad
3. Friction between the Tyre and the pavement surface ↓

Pr
4. Brake efficiency ↓
5. Gradient of the road → Up/ascending ↓ and down/descending ↑
Q. 7) When the path travelled along the road surface
P)
M
is more than the Circumferential movement of the
TE
,D
wheels due to rotation, then it result is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Slipping

re
ho
b. Skidding
at
c. Turning R
eep
ad
d. revolving
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Answer: B → Skidding
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 8) Coefficient of friction is less when the
M
TE
pavement surface is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Rough
(L

re
b. Dry
ho
at
c. Smooth and dry ep
R
d. Smooth and wet
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
Answer: D → Smooth and wet
P)

P)
Q. 9) The shoulder provided along the road edge
M
TE
should be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Rougher than the traffic lanes
(L

re
b. Smoother than the traffic lanes
ho
at
c. Of same colour as that of the pavement
ep
R
d. Of very low load bearing capacity
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
1. The purpose of building a
TE
,D
shoulder is that in the event of
r
re
an emergency or breakdown a
tu
ec
vehicles.
(L

re
ho
2. Shoulders help provide extra
at
structural support of the R
ep
roadway.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 10) Camber in road provided for
TE
,Dr
re
a. Effective drainage
tu
ec
(L
b. Counteracting the centrifugal force

re
ho
c. Having proper sight distance
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: A
M
TE
,D
a. Effective drainage – Camber
r
re
tu
ec
(L
b. Counteracting the centrifugal force – Super elevation

re
ho
at
R
c. Sight distance – SSD, OSD etc
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 11) Compared to a level surface, on a descending
M
TE
gradient the stopping sight distance is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Less
(L

re
b. More
ho
at
c. Same ep
R
d. Dependent on speed
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
Descending gradient > Level > Ascending
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 12) On a single lane road with two way traffic, the
M
TE
minimum stopping sight distance is equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Stopping sight distance
(L

re
b. Two times the stopping distance
ho
at
c. Half the stopping distance
ep
R
d. Three times the stopping distance
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
Single lane two way traffic
,D
= 2 × SSD
r
re
tu
ec
Two lane two way traffic
(L

= SSD
re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 13) The desirable length of overtaking zone as per
M
TE
IRC recommendation is equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Overtaking sight distance
(L

re
b. Two times the overtaking sight distance
ho
at
c. Three times the overtaking sight distance
ep
R
d. Five times the overtaking sight distance
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
Overtaking zones are provided when OSD cannot be
TE
,D
provided throughout the length of the highway
r
re
tu
ec
(L
IRC recommendation

re
ho
at
R
1. Desirable Length = 5 × OSD
ep
e
ad
Pr
2. Minimum Length = 3 × OSD

P)
M
Q. 14) Stopping sight distance is always
TE
,Dr
re
a. Less than overtaking sight distance
tu
ec
(L
b. Equal to overtaking sight distance

re
ho
c. More than overtaking sight distance
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
Less than over taking sight distance
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 15) Reaction time of a driver
TE
,Dr
re
a. Increases with increase in speed
tu
ec
(L
b. Decreases with increase in speed

re
ho
c. Is same for all speeds
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
THANK 🙏 YOU

Pr
ad
e
(16 to 30)
ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
Objective Questions
ec
Highway Engineering
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 16) If the stopping distance is 60 metres, then the
P)
M
minimum stopping sight distance for two Lane, two
TE
,D
way traffic is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 30m

re
ho
b. 60m
at
c. 120m R
ep
e
ad
d. 180m
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
For two lane two way traffic
,D
= SSD
r
re
tu
ec
For One lane two way traffic
(L

= 2 × SSD
re
ho
at
R
e ep
ad
Pr
Q. 17) The effect of grade on safe overtaking sight
distance is
P)
M
TE
a. To increase it on descending grades and to
,D
decrease it on ascending grades
r
re
tu
ec
b. To decrease it on descending grades and to
(L

re
increase it on ascending grades
ho
at
c. To increase it on both descending and ascending
ep
R
grades
e
ad
Pr
d. To decrease it on both descending and ascending

grades
Answer : C
P)
M
OSD always increases either descending gradient or
TE
,D
ascending gradient.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 18) The ruling design speed on a National
P)
M
highway in plain Terrain as per IRC recommendation
TE
,D
is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 60 kmph

re
ho
b. 80 kmph
at
c. 100 kmph R
eep
ad
d. 120 kmph
Pr
Answer:C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 19) The terrain may be classified as rolling terrain
M
TE
if the cross slope of land is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Upto 10%
(L

re
b. Between 10% and 25%
ho
at
c. Between 25% and 60%
ep
R
d. More than 60%
e
ad
Pr
Answer : B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 20) If b is the wheel track of a vehicle and h is the
height of centre of gravity above road surface, then
P)
M
the avoid overturning and Lateral skidding on
TE
,D
horizontal curve, the centrifugal ratio should always
r
re
be
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
a. Less than b/2h and greater than coefficient of lateral friction
at
R
b. Less than b/2h and also less than coefficient of lateral friction
ep
c. Greater than b/2h and less than coefficient of lateral friction

e
ad
Pr
d. Greater than b/2h and also greater than coefficient of lateral

friction
Answer : B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 21) As per IRC recommendations, the maximum
P)
M
limit of superelevation for mixed traffic in plain
TE
,D
Terrain is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 1 in 15

re
ho
b. 1 in 12.5
at
c. 1 in 10 R
eep
ad
d. Equal to camber
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
Maximun super elevation
TE
,Dr
re
tu
1. Plain and rolling terrain – 7% or 1 in 15
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Hilly terrain - 10% or 1 in 10
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 22) For the design of superelevation for mixed
M
TE
traffic conditions, the speed is reduced by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 15%
(L

re
b. 20%
ho
at
c. 25% ep
R
d. 75%
e
ad
Pr
Answer :C
P)
Design of super elevation, e + f = V²/127R
M
TE
Step1. Calculate super elevation for 75% of design speed, neglecting the effect of friction
,D
e = (0.75V) ²/127R
r
re
tu
If e < emax. emax. ( 7% for plain and rolling 10% for hilly terrain ), then provide e, other wise
ec
Step2. Calculate coefficient of friction assuming maximum value of super elevation
(L

re
ho
0.70 + f = V²/127R
at
R
If f < 0.15, then provide super elevation is 7% or 0.70, other wise
e ep
ad
Step3. Reduce the speed

Pr
0.7 +0.15 = V²/127R

Q. 23) On horizontal curve if the pavement is kept
P)
M
horizontal across the alignment, then the pressure on
TE
,D
the outer wheels will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. More than the pressure on inner wheels

re
ho
b. Less than the pressure on inner wheels
at
R
c. Equal to the pressure on inner wheels
eep
ad
d. Zero
Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 24) The equilibrium superelevation required to
counteract the centrifugal force fully is given by
P)
M
TE
,D
a. V² / 27.5R
r
re
tu
ec
(L
b. V² / 75R

re
ho
at
c. (0.75V) ² / 127R R
e ep
ad
Pr
d. V² / 127R
Answer: D
P)
Super elevation, e + f = V²/127R
M
TE
,Dr
re
Equilibrium super elevation or super elevation to
tu
ec
counteract fully centrifugal force, then f = o
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 25) For constant value of coefficient of lateral
friction, the value of required superelevation
P)
M
increases with
TE
,Dr
re
a. Increase in both speed and radius curve
tu
ec
(L
b. Decrease in both speed and radius of curve

re
ho
c. Increase in speed and with decrease in radius of
at
curve R
eep
ad
d. Decrease in speed and with increase in radius of

Pr
curve
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r
Super elevation, e + f = V²/127R
,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 26) To calculate the minimum value of ruling
P)
M
radius of horizontal curves in Plains, the design speed
TE
,D
is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 8 kmph

re
ho
b. 12 kmph
at
c. 16 kmph R
eep
ad
d. 20 kmph
Pr
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 27) The absolute minimum radius of curve for
M
TE
safe operation for a speed of 110 kmph is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 110 m
(L

re
b. 220 m
ho
at
c. 440 m ep
R
d. 577 m
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
Design speed(kmph) 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
TE
Rmin in m 40 70 100 150 200 260 320 400 440
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 28) The attainment of superelevation by rotation
M
TE
of pavement about the inner edge of the pavement
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Is preferable in steep terrain
(L

re
b. Results in balancing the earth work
ho
at
c. Avoids the drainage problem in flat terrain
ep
R
d. Does not change the vertical alignment of road
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 29) select the correct statement
P)
M
a. Psychological extra widening depends on the
TE
,D
number of traffic lanes
r
re
b. Mechanical extra widening depends on the speed
tu
ec
(L
of vehicle

re
ho
c. Psychological extra widening depends on the
at
length of wheel base R
eep
ad
d. Psychological extra widening depends on the

Pr
speed of vehicle
Answer: D
When a vehicle takes a turn on horizontal curve, the rear wheels do not follow the same path
P)
M
as that of the front wheels.
TE
,D
The vehicle has occupies more width that it occupies on straight portion of the road.
r
re
tu
To compensate this, the carriageway width increased on the entire curved portion of the road,
ec
which is called extra widening of pavement on curve.
(L

re
ho
Extra widening = Mechanical widening(Wm) + Psychological widening(Wps)
at
= nl²/2R R + V/9.5√R
e ep
ad
Where 'n' is the number of the traffic lane, l is the length of the wheelbase of the longer
Pr
vehicle in m (generally taken as 6 m), V is the design speed of the vehicle in Kmph and R is the
radius of the horizontal curve in m.
Q. 30) In case of Hill roads, the extra widening is
P)
M
generally provided
TE
,Dr
re
a. Equally on inner and outer sides of the curve
tu
ec
(L
b. Fully on the inner side of the curve

re
ho
c. Fully on the outer side of the curve
at
R
d. One fourth on inner side and three fourth on outer
eep
ad
side of the curve

Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
THANK🙏 YOU
M
P)

Pr
ad
e
(31 to 45)
ep
R
at
ho
re
Objective Question
(L
Highway Engineering
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 31) The mechanical extra widening required for
10.5m wide pavement on a horizontal curve of a
P)
radius R metre is given by
M
TE
,D
a. L²/2R
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
b. 2L²/3R
ho
at
R
ep
c. L²/R
e
ad
Pr
d. 3L²/2R
Answer: D
Width of road or carriage way (1) Single lane = 3.75m
(2) Two lane = 7m
P)
M
(3) Multi lane = number of lane × 3.5m
TE
,D
When a vehicle takes a turn on horizontal curve, the rear wheels do not follow the same path
r
as that of the front wheels, is known as mechanical widening or off tracking. The vehicle has
re
tu
occupies more width that it occupies on straight portion of the road.
ec
Extra widening = Mechanical widening(Wm) + Psychological widening(Wps)
(L

= nl²/2R + V/9.5√R
re
ho
at
Where 'n' is the number of the traffic lane, l is the length of the wheelbase of the longer vehicle in m
R
(generally taken as 6 m), V is the design speed of the vehicle in Kmph and R is the radius of the horizontal
ep
curve in m.
e
ad
Pr
Given, Width of pavement = 10.5m means three lane road, the value of n = 3
Mechanical widening, Wm = 3l²/2R

Q. 32) The transition curve used in the horizontal
P)
M
TE
alignment of highways as per IRC recommendations is
,Dr
re
tu
a. Spiral
ec
(L

b. Lemniscate
re
ho
at
c. Cubic parabola ep
R
d. Any of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
A transition curve may be defined as a
P)
curve of varying radius of infinity to R
M
TE
,D
Objective:
r
re
tu
1. To gradually introduce the centrifugal force between the tangent point and the
ec
(L
beginning of the circular curve thereby avoiding sudden jerk on the vehicle.

re
2. To increase the comfort of passengers.
ho
3. To introduce designed superelevation at a desirable rate
at
R
4. To enable the driver to turn the steering gradually for his own comfort and
ep
security
e
ad
5. To introduce designed extra widening at a desirable rate

Pr
6. To enhance the aesthetic appearance of the road

IRC recommends spiral as the transition curve because, it fulfills the requirement of
an ideal transition curve
Q. 33) For design, that length of transition curve
P)
M
should be taken which is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Based on allowable rate of change of centrifugal
ec
(L

acceleration
re
ho
b. Based on rate of change of super elevation
at
c. Higher of (a) and (b) R
eep
ad
d. Smaller of (a) and (b)

Pr
Answer: C
1. Based on allowable rate of change of centrifugal acceleration, Lc = V³/cR
P)
2. Based on rate of change of super elevation, Lc
M
(a) If superelevation was provided by rotating the pavement surface about the inner edge
TE
Lc = N × e × (W + We)
,D
Where, e is the rate of superelevation, W is the width of the pavement, We are the extra widening
r
re
and N are the gradient of terrain.
tu
ec
(b) f the pavement is rotated about the center line, double effect is achieved.
(L
Therefore, Lc = 0.5 × N × e × (W + We)

re
ho
Higher value of 1 and 2
at
R
ep
3. By Empirical formula
e
IRC suggest the length of the transition curve is minimum,

ad
For plain and rolling terrain, Ls = 2.7V²/ R

Pr
For steep and hilly terrain, Ls = V²/R
Where, V is the design speed in kmph and R is the radius of the curve in meters.
P)
Q. 34) The maximum design gradient for vertical
M
TE
profile of a road is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Ruling gradient
(L

re
b. Limiting gradient
ho
at
c. Exceptional gradient
ep
R
d. Minimum gradient
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Gradient - It is the rate of rise or fall of road level along the length.
Raise wrt horizontal distance is called Upward gradient or ascending gradient (+n %)
P)
Fall wrt Horizontal distance is called Downward Gradient descending gradient (-n %)
M
Types of gradients
TE
1. Ruling gradient - This is the maximum gradient which is generally used to design the vertical profile of highway. So it is also
,D
called as design gradient.
r
2. Maximum or Limiting gradient - This gradient is provided as shorter stretches in highways. Whenever ruling gradients
re
tu
costs high for the hilly terrains then limiting gradient is provided which will reduce the cost.
ec
3.Exceptional gradient - These are very steeper gradients given at unavoidable situations and they are adopted for stretches
(L
not exceeding 100m of length.

4.Minimum gradient - To drain of rain water from the road minimum gradient is needed. Generally for lateral drainage
re
ho
Camber is provided. But for the longitudinal drainage along the side drains require some slope for smooth flow of water
at
R
e ep
ad
Pr
Q. 35) The percentage compensation in gradient for
P)
M
ruling gradient of 4% and horizontal curve of radius
TE
,D
760 m is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 0.1%

re
ho
b. 1%
at
c. 10% R
eep
ad
d. No compensation
Pr
Answer: D
Grade Compensation
When a horizontal circular curve lies in vertical curve there will be an increased
P)
M
resistance offered by the circular curve in the form of curve resistance in addition to
TE
the component of gravity.
,Dr
re
IRC specifications for grade compensations are:
tu
ec
(L
1. For grades flatter than 4% - grade compensation is not required.

re
ho
at
2. Grade compensation in% = (30 + R) /R
R
ep
3. Maximum value of gradient compensation in% = 75/R
e
ad
Pr
Where, R= radius of horizontal curve in metre

Q. 36) If ruling gradient is 1 in 20 and there is also a
P)
M
horizontal curve of radius 76m, then the
TE
,D
compensated grade should be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 3%

re
ho
b. 4%
at
c. 5% R
ep
e
ad
d. 6%
Pr
Answer: B
1. Grade compensation in% = (30 + R) /R
P)
M
TE
= (30 + 76) /76
,Dr
re
= 106/76 = 1.39%
tu
ec
(L
2. Maximum value of gradient compensation in% = 75/R

re
ho
at
= 75/76 = 0.99%
Minimum of 1 and 2 that is 0.99%R
ep
e
ad
Given, ruling gradient is 1 in 20 means 5%

Pr
So Compensated grade = 5 – 0.99 = 4% approx.

P)
Q. 37) The camber of road should be approximately
M
TE
equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Longitudinal gradient
(L

re
b. Two times the longitudinal gradient
ho
at
c. Three times the longitudinal gradient
ep
R
d. Half of longitudinal gradient
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Gradient = 2 × Camber
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 38) Which of the following shapes is preferred in
M
TE
valley curve
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Simple parabola
(L

re
b. Cubic parabola
ho
at
c. Spiral ep
R
d. Lemniscate
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
Answer: B → Cubic parabola
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 39) The value of ruling gradient in plains as per
M
TE
IRC recommendation is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1 in 12
(L

re
b. 1in 15
ho
at
c. 1 in 20 ep
R
d. 1 in 30
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 40) In case of summit curves, the deviation angle
P)
M
will be maximum when
TE
,Dr
re
a. An ascending gradient meets with another ascending gradient
tu
ec
(L

re
b. An ascending gradient meets with a descending gradient
ho
at
R
c. A descending gradient meets with another descending gradient
eep
ad
d. An ascending gradient meets with a level surface

Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 41) If the design speed is V kmph and deviation
angle is N radians, then the total length of valley
P)
curve in metres is given by the expressions
M
TE
,Dr
re
a. 0.38NV^3/2
tu
ec
(L

re
b. 0.38 (NV³) ^1/2
ho
at
R
ep
c. 3.8 NV^1/2
e
ad
Pr
d. 3.8 (NV³) ^1/2

Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 42) If an ascending gradient of 1 in 50 meets a
P)
M
descending gradient of 1 in 50, the length of summit
TE
,D
curve for a stopping sight distance of 80 m will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Zero

re
ho
b. 64m
at
R
c. 80m
eep
ad
d.60m
Pr
L >SSS
L < SSD →
Pr
ad
e ep
R
→ L = NS²/4.4
at
ho
re
L = 2S – 4.4/N
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 43) Highway facilities are designed for
TE
,Dr
re
a. Annual average hourly volume
tu
ec
(L
b. Annual average daily traffic

re
ho
c. Thirtieth highest hourly volume
at
R
d. Peak hourly volume of the year
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
TE
Traffic volume may be defined as the number of vehicles crossing
,D
a selected section of the road per unit time. Unit is vehicle/hour
r
re
tu
ec
(L
30th highest hourly volume – It is that hourly volume which will

re
ho
be exceeded only 29 times in a year.
at
R
ep
IRC consider 30th highest hourly volume because it is economical

e
ad
and it suited Indian traffic conditions.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 44) Enoscope is used to find
TE
,Dr
re
a. Average speed
tu
ec
(L
b. Spot speed

re
ho
c. Space mean speed
at
d. Time mean speed R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
Average speed – It is the average spot speed of all vehicles passing
TE
through a particular section or spot.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Spot speed - Spot speed is the instantaneous speed of a vehicle at a
(L

re
specified location. Find using Enoscope.
ho
at
R
Space-mean speed is the distance traveled divided by
ep
e
ad
an average travel time.

Pr
Time-mean speed is an average of individual vehicle speeds.

P)
Q. 45) For highway geometric design purposes the
M
TE
speed used is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 15th percentile
(L

re
b. 50th percentile
ho
at
c. 85th percentile ep
R
d. 98 percentile
th
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
d. Design speed or 98th percentile speed – It is the speed at or
TE
below which 98% of vehicle are moving and only 2% exceeds that
,Dr
limit
re
tu
ec
(L

a. 15th Percentile speed – It is lower safe speed.
re
ho
at
R
b. 50th Percentile speed – It is mean speed.
eep
ad
Pr
c. 85th Percentile speed – It is upper safe speed limit for

regulation of traffic.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
THANK 🙏 YOU

Pr
ad
(46 to 60)
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Objective Question
(L
Highway Engineering
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
a. Traffic volume should always be more than traffic capacity
tu
ec
b. Traffic capacity should always be more than traffic volume
(L

re
c. Spot speed is the average speed of a vehicle at specified
ho
section
at
R
d. 85th percentile speed is more than 98th percentile speed
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
Traffic volume is the numbers of vehicles that pass a point on a highway
M
on a particular lane on particular direction in unit time, generally in per
TE
,D
unit hour.
r
re
tu
Traffic capacity is expressed as the maximum number of vehicle in a lane
ec
(L

or a road that can pass a given point in unit time, usually an hour, i.e.,
re
ho
vehicles per hour per lane.
at
R
ep
Spot speed is the instantaneous speed of a vehicle at a specified location.
e
ad
Pr
Design or 98th percentile speed - It is the speed at or below which 98% of

vehicle are moving and only 2% exceeds that limit.
P)
Q. 47) Length of a vehicle affects
M
TE
,Dr
re
a. Width of traffic lanes
tu
ec
b. Extra width of pavement and minimum turning radius
(L

re
c. Width of shoulders and parking facilities
ho
at
d. Clearance to be provided under structures overbridges,
R
ep
underbridges etc.
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Length of vehicle affects:
P)
Extra widening and radius of curve
M
Extra widening refers to the additional width of carriageway that is required on a
TE
curved section.
,Dr
1.Mechanical widening or off tracking
re
tu
2.Psychological widening
ec
(L

re
Width of vehicle affects:
ho
Width of pavement, shoulder and parking facilities.
at
R
ep
Height of vehicle affects:
e
ad
Vertical clearance for road over bridge, electric line etc

Pr
Weight of vehicle affects:

Thickness of pavement
P)
Q. 48) The maximum width of vehicle as recommended by
M
TE
IRC is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1.85m
(L

re
b. 2.44m
ho
at
c. 3.81m
R
ep
d. 4.72m
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
Maximum dimension and weight of a vehicle by IRC
TE
,Dr
re
Width = 2.44m
tu
ec
Height = 4.75m
(L

re
Length = 18.0m
ho
at
Weight = 52.2 tones R
e ep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 49) Desire lines are plotted in
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Traffic volume studies
ec
(L
b. Speed studies

re
ho
c. Accident studies
at
R
d. Origin and destination studies
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
a. Traffic volume may be defined as the number of vehicles crossing a selected section of the
road per unit time.
P)
Method of volume counting
M
(1) Mannual counts, (2) Automatic counters, (3) Moving car method
TE
,D
b. Speed studies are useful for establishing speed zones, traffic signals, regulatory signs, non-
r
re
passing zones, warning zones etc.
tu
ec
(L
c. The various steps involved in the traffic accident studies:

re
(1) Collection of accident data, (2) Preparation of report,
ho
(3) Study of accident, (4) Suggestions for remedial measures.
at
R
ep
d. Origin and Destination studies:
e
Desire line are prepared. (Two points connect by a straight line)

ad
Thickness of desire line, show volume of that road.

Pr
Methods of collecting O and D study data

(1) Road side interview method, (2) License plate method, (3) Return post card method,
(4) Tag on car method, (5) Home interview method
Q. 50) Which of the following methods is preferred for
P)
M
collecting origin and destination data for a small area like a
TE
,D
mass business Centre or large intersection
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Road side Interview method

re
ho
b. Licence plate method
at
c. Return postcard method R
eep
d. Home interview method

ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
→ License plate method
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 52) The diagram which shows the approximate path of
M
TE
vehicles and pedestrians involved in accidents is known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Spot maps
(L

re
b. Pie charts
ho
at
c. Condition diagram
R
ep
d. Collision diagram
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
Accident record may be maintained by means of location files, spot maps, collision
diagram and condition diagram.
P)
M
TE
- Location file record locations where accidents have taken place.
,Dr
re
- Spot maps show, accidents by spots, pin or symbol on the road map of the locality
tu
ec
(L

Collision diagram - Details of accident location and show approximate path of the
re
ho
vehicles and pedestrian involved in the accident and also other objects with which
at
the vehicle have Collided.
R
ep
e
- Condition diagram drawing of accident location showing important physical

ad
Pr
features of the road and adjoining area.
Pie chart showing segregation of fast moving traffic.

Q. 53) With increase in speed of the traffic stream, the
P)
minimum spacing of vehicles
M
TE
,Dr
a. Increases
re
tu
ec
b. Decreases
(L

re
c. First decreases and then increases after reaching a
ho
at
minimum value at optimum speed
R
ep
d. First increase and then decrease after reaching a
e
ad
maximum value at optimum speed

Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 54) Traffic volume is equal to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Traffic density × Traffic speed
ec
(L
b. Traffic density/traffic speed

re
ho
c. Traffic speed/traffic density
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 55) which of the following is known as design capacity
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Basic capacity
ec
(L
b. Theoretical capacity

re
ho
c. Possible capacity
at
d. Practical capacity R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
Traffic capacity is expressed as the maximum number of vehicle in a lane or a road that can pass a
TE
given point in unit time, usually an hour, i.e., vehicles per hour per lane or roadway.
,Dr
re
Basic capacity is the maximum number of vehicles(PCU) that can pass a given point on a lane or
tu
ec
roadway during one hour under the most nearly ideal roadway and traffic conditions.
(L

re
Possible Capacity is the maximum number of vehicles which can pass a given point on a lane or
ho
highway during one hour under the prevailing roadway and traffic conditions.
at
This means that the possible capacity of a highway will always be lower than the basic capacity
R
ep
unless the prevailing conditions of the traffic, approach the ideal conditions.
e
ad
Practical Capacity is the maximum number of vehicle that can pass a given point on a lane or
Pr
roadway during one hour, without traffic density

Q. 56) If the average Centre to Centre spacing of vehicles is
P)
M
20 metres, then the basic capacity of a traffic Lane at a
TE
,D
speed of 50kmph is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 2500 vehicles per day

re
ho
b. 2000 vehicles per hour
at
c. 2500 vehicles per hour R
ep
e
d. 1000 vehicles per hour

ad
Pr
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 57) With increase in speed of the traffic stream, the
P)
maximum capacity of the lane
M
TE
,Dr
a. Increases
re
tu
ec
b. Decreases
(L

re
c. First increases and then decreases after reaching a
ho
at
maximum value at optimum speed
R
ep
d. First decrease and then increase after reaching
e
ad
minimum value at optimum speed

Pr
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 58) Equivalent factor of Passenger car unit (PCU) for a
M
TE
Passenger car as per IRC is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1.0
(L

re
b. 2.0
ho
at
c. 0.5
R
ep
d. 10
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 59) If the stopping distance and average length of a
P)
vehicle are 18m and 6m respectively, then the theoretical
M
TE
maximum capacity of a traffic Lane at a speed of 10 m/sec
,Dr
is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
a. 1500 vehicles per hour
ho
at
b. 2000 vehicles per hour
R
ep
c. 2500 vehicles per hour
e
ad
d. 3000 vehicles per hour

Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 60) Scientific planning of transportation system and
M
TE
mass transit facilities in cities should be based on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Spot speed data
(L

re
b. Origin and destination data
ho
at
c. Traffic volume data
R
ep
d. Accident data
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
Origin and destination studies
,Dr
re
These studies are very essential in planing of new highway
tu
ec
facilities or for improving existing road system. It is also
(L

re
used for planing of mass rapid transit system.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Thank You For Watching ☺

Pr
ad
e
(61 to 75)
ep
R
at
ho
re
Objective Questions
(L
Highway Engineering
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 61) The diagram which shows all important physical
P)
conditions of an accident location like roadway limits,
M
TE
bridges, trees and all details of roadway conditions is
,Dr
known as
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Pie chart
ho
at
B. Spot maps
R
ep
C. Condition diagram
e
ad
D. Collision diagram
Pr
Answer C
A. Pie chart showing segregation of fast moving traffic.
P)
M
→Accident record may be maintained by means of location files, spot maps,
TE
collision diagram and condition diagram.
,D
- Location file record locations where accidents have taken place.
r
re
tu
ec
B. Spot maps show, accidents by spots, pin or symbol on the road map of the
(L

locality
re
ho
at
C. Condition diagram - drawing of accident location showing important physical
R
features of the road and adjoining area.
ep
e
ad
Pr
D. Collision diagram - Details of accident location and show approximate path of the
vehicles and pedestrian involved in the accident and also other objects with which
the vehicle have Collided.
Q. 62) When the speed of traffic flow becomes zero, then
P)
M
TE
A. Traffic density attains maximum value whereas traffic volume
,D
becomes zero
r
re
tu
B. Traffic density and traffic volume both attain maximum value
ec
(L
C. Traffic density and traffic volume both become zero

re
ho
D. Traffic density becomes zero whereas traffic volume attains
at
maximum value R
ep
e
ad
Answer A
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 63) On a right angled road intersection with two way
M
TE
traffic, the total number of conflicts points is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6
(L

re
B. 11
ho
at
C. 18
R
ep
D. 24
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Conflict point - Point at which a highway user crossing, merging with, or diverging from a road or
driveway conflicts with another highway user using the same road or driveway.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 64) The background colour of the informatory sign
M
TE
board is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Red
(L

re
B. Yellow
ho
at
C. Green
R
ep
D. White
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Traffic control device is the medium used for communicating between traffic engineer and road users.The
major types of traffic control devices used are- traffic signs, road markings , traffic signals and parking
P)
control.
M
TE
Types of traffic sign: -
,D
Regulatory signs
r
re
These signs are also called mandatory signs because it is mandatory that the drivers must obey these signs.
tu
White background and circular in shape with red borders.
ec
(L

Warning signs
re
Warning signs or cautionary signs give information to the driver about the road condition.
ho
White background and shape is upward triangular or diamond shape with red bordsigns
at
R
ep
Informatory signs
e
Informative signs also called guide signs, are provided to assist the drivers to reach their desired
ad
destinations.
Pr
examples are route markers, destination signs, mile posts, service information, recreational and cultural
interest area signing etc.
They are written black letters on yellow background.
P)
Q. 65) Which of the following is indicated by a warning
M
TE
sign
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Level crossing
(L

re
B. No parking
ho
at
C. End of speed limit
R
ep
D. Overtaking prohibited
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 66) “Dead Slow” is a
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Regulatory sign
ec
(L
B. Warning sign

re
ho
C. Informatory sign
at
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 67) The most efficient traffic signal system is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Simultaneous system
ec
(L
B. Alternate system

re
ho
C. Flexible progressive system
at
R
D. Simple progressive system
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
Flexible system –
re
tu
It is possible to automatically vary the length of signal cycle at
ec
(L

intersection with the help of sensors to detect vehicle arrival and
re
ho
connecting to the master computer.
at
This is the most efficient system.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 68) The provision of traffic signals at intersections
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Reduces right angled and rear end collisions
r
re
tu
B. Increases right angled and rear end collisions
ec
(L
C. Reduces right angled collisions but may increase rear

re
ho
end collisions
at
R
D. Reduces rear end collisions but may increase right
eep
angled collisions
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
A. Stop or red time of a signal is the sum of go and
,Dr
clearance intervals for the cross flow
re
tu
ec
B. Go or green time of a signal is the sum of stop and
(L

re
clearance intervals for the cross flow
ho
at
C. Clearance time is generally 3 to 5 seconds
R
ep
D. The cycle length is normally 40 to 60 seconds for two
e
ad
phase signals.
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
1. Red for stop
tu
ec
2. Green for go
(L

re
3. Amber (yellow) for proceed
ho
at
G+Y=R R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 70) Center Line markings are used
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. To designate traffic lanes
tu
ec
B. To roadways meant for two way traffic
(L

re
C. To indicate that overtaking is not permitted
ho
at
D. To designate proper lateral placement of vehicles before
R
ep
turning to different directions
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Traffic marking are special signs used to regulate the traffic.
M
TE
1. Centre line – used to separate two way traffic. 5 m long and 8 m space
,Dr
re
tu
2. Lane line – indicate traffic lanes and used to guide the traffic
ec
(L

re
3. No passing zone marking – Overtaking is not permissible
ho
at
R
4. Stop line – Made near the pedestrians crossings, signalized intersections etc. to
ep
indicate that vehicles have to stop before this line and then proceed.
e
ad
Pr
A) Cross walk – Where the pedestrian have to cross the pavement

B) Parking space limit – indicate the space for parking and its proper utilisation
Q. 71) The particular places where pedestrians are to cross
P)
M
the pavement are properly marked by the pavement
TE
,D
marking known as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Stop lines

re
ho
B. Trun markings
at
C. Crosswalk lines R
ep
e
D. Lane lines
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 73) The entrance and exit curves of a Rotary have
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Equal radii and equal widths of pavement
r
re
tu
B. Equal radii but pavement width is more at
ec
(L
entrancethean at exit curve

re
ho
C. Equal pavement widths but radiis is more at entrance
at
curve than at exit curve R
eep
d. Different radii and different widths of pavement

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Rotary intersection is an enlarged Road intersection where all converging vehicles
M
are forced to know around large central Island in One Direction before they are
TE
allowed to weave out of traffic flow.
,Dr
re
tu
1. Radius of curve at entrance = 30.5m for 40kmph speed and 18.3 m for 32 kmph
ec
at exit = 47 m for 40kmph speed and 30.5m for 32 kmph
(L

re
ho
2. The width of the carriageway at entry and exit will be lower than the width of the
at
carriageway at the approaches to enable reduction of speed.
R
ep
IRC suggests that a two lane road of 7 m width should be kept as 7 m for urban
e
ad
roads and 6.5 m for rural roads.

Pr
Further, a three lane road of 10.5 m is to be reduced to 7 m and 7.5 m respectively

for urban and rural roads.
Q. 74) When two equally important roads cross roughly at
P)
M
right angles, the suitable shape of Central Island is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Circular
ec
(L
B. Elliptical

re
ho
C. Tangent
at
D. Turbine R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Shape of Central island
TE
,D
a. Circular - Suitable when roads of
r
re
equal importance and cross each
tu
ec
other at right angle.
(L

re
b. Elliptical – When four or more than
ho
at
four intersecting roads.
R
eep
c. Turbine – reduce speed at entry
ad
and increase at leaving.

Pr
d. Tangent – One road is important.

P)
Q. 75) the maximum number of vehicles beyond which the
M
TE
Rotary may not function efficiently is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 500 vehicles per hour
(L

re
B. 500 vehicles per day
ho
at
C. 5000 vehicles per hour
R
ep
D. 5000 vehicles per day
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
As per IRC
(L

re
1. Volume of traffic is between 500 to 3000 Vehicles per hour
ho
at
2. Number of intersecting roads between 4 to 7
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e
(76 to 90)
ep
R
at
ho
re
Objective Questions
(L
Highway Engineering
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 76) A traffic rotary is justified where
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Number of intersecting roads is between 4 and 7
tu
ec
B. Space is limited and costly
(L

re
C. When traffic volume is less than 500 vehicles per hour
ho
at
D. When traffic volume is more than 5000 vehicles per
R
ep
hour
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
1. As per IRC traffic volume for rotary 500 to 3000 Vehicles per
TE
hour
,Dr
re
tu
ec
2. Number of intersecting roads is between 4 to 7
(L

re
ho
3. Rotary requires large area of land hence cost of its
at
R
construction may be very high.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 77) When a number of roads are meeting at a point and
P)
M
only one of the roads is important, then the suitable shape
TE
,D
of rotary is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Circular

re
ho
B. Tangent
at
C. Elliptical R
eep
D. Turbine
ad
Pr
Answer B
Shape of Central island
P)
M
TE
a. Circular - Suitable when roads of
,D
equal importance and cross each other
r
re
tu
at right angle.
ec
(L

re
b. Elliptical – When four or more than
ho
four intersecting roads.
at
R
ep
e
c. Turbine – reduce speed at entry and

ad
increase at leaving.
Pr
d. Tangent – One road is important.

P)
M
Q. 78) Maximum number of vehicles can be parked with
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Parallel parking
ec
(L
B. 30° angle parking

re
ho
C. 45° angle parking
at
D. 90° angle parking R
e ep
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 79) When the width of kerb parking space and width of
M
TE
Street are Limited, generally preferred parking system is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Parallel parking
(L

re
B. 45° angel parking
ho
at
C. 65° angel parking
R
ep
D. 90° angel parking
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 80) As per IRC recommendations, the average level of
M
TE
illumination on important roads carrying fast traffic is
,Dr
re
tu
A. 10 lux
ec
(L

B. 15 lux
re
ho
C. 20 lux
at
R
ep
D. 30 lux
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 81) The most economical lightning layout with the
M
TE
suitable for narrow roads is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Single side lightning
(L

re
B. Staggered system
ho
at
C. Central lightning system
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Lighting layout
P)
M
1. Single side system–
TE
Suitable only for narrow pavements.
,D
Spacing of poles 30m to 60m
r
re
tu
2. Staggered system -
ec
Wider roads with three or more lanes.
(L

Spacing of poles 30m to 60m
re
ho
3. Central system -
at
R
For three or more lanes with narrow Central
ep
strip and heavy traffic conditions
e
ad
Pr
4. Opposite system -
For Wider roads depending upon situation.
P)
M
Q. 82) The direct interchange ramp involves
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Diverging to the right side and merging from left
ec
(L
B. Diverging to the left side and merging from right

re
ho
C. Diverging to the right side and merging from right
at
R
D. Diverging to the left side and merging from left
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 83) In soils having same values of plasticity index, if
P)
M
liquid limit is increased, then
TE
,Dr
re
A. Compressibility and permeability decrease and dry strength
tu
ec
increases
(L

re
B. Compressibility, permeability and dry strength decrease
ho
at
C. Compressibility, permeability and dry strength increase
R
ep
D. Compressibility and permeability increase and dry strength
e
ad
decreases
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Plasticity index = Liquid limit – Plastic limit

P)
Q. 84) Which of the following tests measures the
M
TE
Toughness of road aggregates
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Crushing strength test
(L

re
B. Abrasion test
ho
at
C. Impact test
R
ep
D. Shape test
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
A. Crushing test – Strength of coarse aggregate
P)
Procedure
M
1. Aggregate specimen 10 mm to 12.5mm
TE
2. Test cylinder filled with three layers and tamped each layer 25times (W2)
,D
3. 4 t/m up to 40 Tonnes (CTM)
r
re
tu
4. Weight Finer than 2.36 mm IS sieve (W2)
ec
(L

Aggregate crushing value = W2/W1
re
ho
at
B. Abrasion test (By Los Angeles machine) – Hardness
R
ep
e
ad
C. Impact test – Toughness

Pr
D. Shape test – Flakiness index and Elongation index

P)
M
Q. 85) Los Angeles testing machine is used to conduct
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Abrasion test
ec
(L
B. Impact test

re
ho
C. Attrition test
at
D. Crushing strength testR
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Attrition – This is action of mutual rubbing of stones or aggregate. Tested
re
ho
by Abrasion test.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 86) If in a Dorry abrasion test the loss in weight is 21
M
TE
grams, then the coefficient of hardness is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 9.5
(L

re
B. 13
ho
at
C . 17
R
ep
D. 21
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Coefficient of hardness = 20 – (Loss in gms)/3)
r
re
tu
ec
= 20 – (21/3)
(L

re
ho
at
= 20 – 7
R
ep
e
ad
= 13
Pr
P)
M
Q. 87) In CBR test the value of CBR is calculated at
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 2.5 mm penetration only
ec
(L
B. 5.0 mm penetration only

re
ho
C. 7.5 mm penetration only
at
R
D. Both 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm penetrations
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 88) If aggregate impact value is 20 to 30%, then it is
M
TE
classified as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Exceptionally strong
(L

re
B. Strong
ho
at
C. Satisfactory for road surfacing
R
ep
D. Unsuitable for road surfacing
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Procedure
P)
1. Aggregate specimen 10 to 12.5 mm filled in three layers and tamped each layer
M
by 25 blows (W1)
TE
2. Sample transfer in impact test apparatus and compacted by tamping road 25
,D
times
r
re
tu
3. Hammer drop freely from 38 cm and give 15blows
ec
4. Finer than 2.36 mm IS (W2)
(L

Impact value = (W2/W1) × 100
re
ho
at
Impact value < 10% Exceptionally strong
R
ep
Impact value 10-20% Strong
e
ad
Impact value 20-30% Satisfactory for road construction

Pr
For surface or wearing courses IV should not be more than 30%

For base courses allowed up to 45%
P)
Q. 89) The maximum allowable Los Angeles abrasion value
M
TE
for high quality surface course is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10%
(L

re
B. 20%
ho
at
C. 30%
R
ep
D. 45%
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Abrasion value
r
re
tu
ec
1. CC construction < 16%
(L

re
2. Bituminous (a) Surface course up to 30%
ho
at
(b) Base course up to 50%
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q.90) Percentage of free carbon in Bitumen is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. More than that in tar
ec
(L
B. Less than that is tar

re
ho
C. Equal to that in tar
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Bitumen is obtained by fractional distillation of crude
M
TE
petroleum (in the presence of air).
,Dr
It have less free carbon content
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Tar is a viscous black liquid which is derived through the
ho
at
process of destructive distillation of crude petroleum (in
R
ep
the absence of air).
e
ad
It have more free carbon

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, AE(PSC),RRB etc.
P)
M
TE
,D
Objective Questions
r
re
tu
ec
(91 to 105)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Highway Engineering
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 91) The ductility value of bitumen for suitability in road
M
TE
construction should not be less than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 30 cm
(L

re
B. 40 cm
ho
at
C. 50 cm
R
ep
D. 60 cm
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
Ductility is a measure of elasticity of bitumen. It is expressed as the
re
tu
distance in centimetre to which standard briquette of bitumen can be
ec
(L
stretched before the thread breaks

re
ho
at
The ductility of bitumen 5 to 100 cm
R
ep
For satisfactory performance should not be less than 50 cm
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 92) The maximum limit of water absorption for
M
TE
aggregate suitable for road construction is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.4%
(L

re
B. 0.6%
ho
at
C. 0.8%
R
ep
D. 1.0%
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
As per IRC Water absorption shall not be more than 0.6%.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 93) Which of the following represents hardest grade of
M
TE
bitumen
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 30/40
(L

re
B. 60/70
ho
at
C. 80/100
R
ep
D. 100/120
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Penetration test: -
TE
It measures the hardness or softness of bitumen by measuring
,D
the depth in tenths of a millimeter to which a standard loaded needle will
r
re
penetrate vertically in 5 seconds.
tu
ec
(L

The penetrometer consists of a needle assembly with a total weight of 100gm
re
ho
at
A grade of 40/50 bitumen means the penetration value is in the range 40 to 50 at
R
ep
standard test conditions.
e
ad
Pr
In hot climates, a lower penetration grade is preferred.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 94) Penetration test on bitumen is used for determining
M
TE
its
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Grade
(L

re
B. Viscosity
ho
at
C. Ductility
R
ep
D. Temperature susceptibility
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 95) Bitumen of grade 80/100 means
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Its penetration value is 8 mm
ec
(L
B. Its penetration value is 10 mm

re
ho
C. Its penetration value is 8 to 10 mm
at
R
D. Its penetration value is 8 to 10 cm
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
It measures the hardness or softness of bitumen by measuring the depth
(L

in tenths of a millimeter to which a standard loaded needle will penetrate
re
ho
vertically in 5 seconds.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 96) RC-2, MC-2 and SC-2 correspond to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Same viscosity
ec
(L
B. Viscosity in increasing order from RC-2 to SC-2

re
ho
C. Viscosity in decreasing order from RC-2 to SC-2
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Normal practice is to heat bitumen to reduce its viscosity.
P)
M
Cut Back Bitumen: - Whose viscosity has been reduced by addition of
TE
some volatile dilutent.
,Dr
-Cut back mix and volatile matter evaporates.
re
tu
Types of cutback bitumen
ec
(L
1. Rapid curing cut back (RC) – Evaporate quickly

re
2. Medium curing cut back (MC) - slowly
ho
at
3. Slow curing cut back (SC) – very slowly
R
eep
ad
The grade of cut back designated by RC-0, MC-0, SC-0.

Pr
Suffix numericals as 0,1,2,3 etc designate more viscous as the number

increases.
P)
Q. 97) The recommended grade of tar for grouting
M
TE
purpose is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. RT-1
(L

re
B. RT-2
ho
at
C. RT-3
R
ep
D. RT-4
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Grouting - injection of pumpable materials into a soil or rock formation to change
M
its physical characteristics
TE
,Dr
Tar: - it is viscous liquid obtained by the destructive distillation of wood or coal in
re
tu
absence of air.
ec
(L

re
Grade of Tar
ho
RT-1 used for surface painting in exceptionally cold weather.
at
R
RT-2 standard surface painting under normal conditions.
ep
RT-3 can be used for surface painting, renewal coats for light carpets and premix
e
ad
chips for top surface.

Pr
RT-4 used for premixing macadam in base courses.

RT-5 used for grouting purposes.
Q. 98) Softening point of bitumen to be used for road
P)
M
construction at a place where maximum temperature is
TE
,D
40°C should be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Less than 40°C

re
ho
B. Greater than 40°C
at
C. Equal to 40°C R
eep

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Softening point is defined as the temperature at
(L

re
which a substance attains a particular degree of
ho
at
softening under specified conditions of test.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 99) For Rapid curing cutbacks, the oil used is
M
TE
,Dr
A. Gasoline
re
tu
ec
B. Kerosene oil
(L

re
C. Light diesel
ho
at
D. Heavy diesel
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Kerosene oil - Mediun curing cut back

P)
Q. 100) The method of design of flexible pavement as
M
TE
recommended by IRC is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Group index method
(L

re
B. CBR method
ho
at
C. Westergaard method
R
ep
D. Benkelman method
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 101) The group index for a soil, whose liquid limit is
P)
M
40%, plasticity index is 10% and percentage passing 75
TE
,D
Micron IS sieve is 35, is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0

re
ho
B. 3
at
C. 5 R
eep
D. 7
ad
Pr
Answer A
GI = 0.2a + 0.005 a.c. + 0.01b.d
P)
where,
M
a= p – 35 (p = percentage of soil finer than 0.075 mm or 75micron)
TE
b= p – 15
,D
c= LL - 40
r
d= PI - 10
re
tu
GI = 0.2a + 0.005 a.c. + 0.01b.d
ec
(L

re
GI = 0.2 × (35-35) + 0.005 × (35-35) × (40-40) + 0.01 (35-15) × (10-10)
ho
at
GI = 0 R
ep
Greater the value of group index poor will be the quality of soil.
e
ad
0–2 Good
Pr
2–5 Fair
5 – 10 Poor
10 – 20 Very poor
P)
M
Q. 102) Bottom most layer of pavement is known as
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Wearing course
ec
(L
B. Base course

re
ho
C. Sub-base course
at
D. Subgrade R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Flexible pavement
TE
1. Sub grade
,Dr
2. Sub base course
re
tu
3. Base course
ec
(L

4. Surface course
re
ho
at
Rigid pavement R
eep
1. Sub Grade
ad
Pr
2. Base course
3. Surface course
P)
M
Q. 103) Flexible pavement distribute the wheel load
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Directly to subgrade
ec
(L
B. Through structural action

re
ho
C. Through a set of layers to the subgrade
at
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Flexible pavements will transmit wheel load stresses to the
r
re
lower layers by grain-to-grain.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Rigid pavement, load is distributed by the slab action and
at
R
directly to the sub grade.
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 104) The number of repetitions, which the pavement
P)
M
thickness designed for a given wheel load should be able
TE
,D
to support during the life of pavement is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1,000

re
ho
B. 10000
at
C. 100000 R
eep
D. 1000000
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 105) Group index mthod of design of flexible pavement
P)
is
M
TE
,Dr
A. A theoretical method
re
tu
ec
B. An empirical method based on physical properties of
(L

re
subgrade soil
ho
at
C. An empirical method based on strength characteristics
R
ep
of subgrade soil
e
ad
D. A Semi empirical method

Pr
Answer B
Group Index method of flexible pavement design is an empirical method which is
P)
based on the physical properties of the soil sub-grade.
M
TE
,D
To design the thickness of the pavement you have to go through the following steps:
r
re
tu
1.Find out the Group Index Value(GI) of the soil: -
ec
(L
Group Index is a number assigned to the soil based on its physical properties like

re
particle size, Liquid limit and plastic limit.
ho
at
It varies from a value of 0 to 20, lower the value higher is the quality of the sub-
R
grade and greater the value, poor is the sub-grade.
ep
e
ad
Pr
GI = 0.2a + 0.005 a.c. + 0.01b.d
2. Use the design charts to find out the thickness of the pavement and layers.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Objective Questions
r
re
tu
ec
(106 to 120)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Highway Engineering
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
A. More value of group index, less thickness of pavement will be
r
re
required
tu
ec
B. More value of CBR, greater thickness of pavement will be
(L

re
required
ho
C. Minimum and maximum values of group index can be zero and
at
20 respectively R
ep
e
ad
D. All of the above

Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Greater the value of group index poor will be the quality of soil.
r
re
GI is between 0 to 20.
tu
ec
(L

re
Good (0 – 2)
ho
Fair (2 – 5)
at
Poor (5 – 10) R
ep
e
ad
Very poor (10 – 20)

Pr
P)
Q. 107) If the group index value of subgrade is between 5
M
TE
and 9, then the subgrade is treated is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Good
(L

re
B. Fair
ho
at
C. Poor
R
ep
D. Very poor
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 108) Tyre pressure influences the
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Total depth of pavement
ec
(L
B. Quality of surface course

re
ho
C. Both of the above
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
-Influence of tyre pressure is Predominant in the upper layers.
M
TE
,D
-Upper layers of pavements should be of high quality materials.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
-Tyre pressure does not affect total depth(thickness) of the

re
ho
pavements.
at
R
ep
-Distribution of wheel load is assumed on a circular area, but by
e
ad
actual measurement of the imprint of tyre in many cases has

Pr
been found as elliptical in shape.

P)
Q. 109) Rigidity factor for tyre pressure greater than 7
M
TE
kg/cm²
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to 1
(L

re
B. Less than 1
ho
at
C. Greater than 1
R
ep
D. Zero
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Contact pressure = Wheel load / Contact area
P)
M
TE
,D
Contact area = (0.9 × Wheel load ) / Tyre pressure
r
re
tu
ec
The contact area can also be found by taking actual impression of
(L

re
the tyre imprint.
ho
at
R
Rigidity factor = Contact pressure / Tyre pressure
ep
e
ad
When tyre pressure = 7 kg/cm² RF = 1

Pr
When tyre pressure < 7 kg/cm² RF > 1

When tyre pressure > 7 kg/cm² RF < 1
Q. 110) In a dual wheel assembly if P is equal to each wheel load,
P)
S is the centre to centre distance of dual wheels and d is the
M
TE
distance between walls of wheels, then
,Dr
re
tu
A. Each wheel load acts independently upto a depth d
ec
B. Total stress due to the dual wheels at any depth greater than 2S is
(L

re
equivalent to a single wheel load of magnitude 2P
ho
C. Total stress due to the total dual wheels at any depth greater than S is
at
R
ep
e
D. Total stress due to the dual wheels at any depth greater than 2D is
ad
Pr

Answer B
Wheels act independently at depth approximately d/2
P)
M
TE
Beyond d/2 the stresses induced in the pavement result from
,D
each wheel load are overlap.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
As depth increase the overlap of stresses also increases, but after

re
ho
a certain limit, the overlap is negligible.
at
R
ep
By experiments observed that this limit starts at a depth of about
e
ad
twice the center to center distance (2S) between the wheels and
Pr
the equivalent single wheel load is equal to the load on whole

assembly that is 2P.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 111) Main drawback of CBR method is that it
P)
M
TE
A. Does not consider the strength characteristics of
,Dr
subgrade soil
re
tu
ec
B. Is a complex method
(L

re
C. Give the total thickness which remains the same
ho
at
irrespective of the quality of materials used in the
R
ep
component layers
e
ad
D. Does not give the thickness of individual layers

Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
A certain degree of resistance to slab deflection is offered by the
TE
sub-grade.
,Dr
re
tu
The sub-grade deformation is same as the slab deflection.
ec
(L

re
ho
Hence the slab deflection is direct measurement of the
at
R
magnitude of the sub-grade pressure.
ep
e
ad
Pr
This pressure deformation characteristics of rigid pavement lead

Westergaard to the define the term radius of relative stiffness.
P)
Q. 113) Critical load position in a rigid pavement design is
M
TE
taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Interiors loading
(L

re
B. Edge loading
ho
at
C. Corner loading
R
ep
D. Interior, edge and corner loading
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Radius of wheel load 30 > 1.724 × 15
P)
Because the radius of wheel load distribution is more than 1.724
M
TE
times slab thickness, hence radius of resisting section is equal to
,D
the radius of wheel load distribution.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 115) The critical combination of stresses for corner
M
TE
region in cement concrete roads is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Load stress + warping stress – fictional stress
(L

re
B. Load stress + warping stress + frictional stress
ho
at
C. Load stress + warping stress
R
ep
D. Load stress + frictional stress
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Temperature stresses:- developed in CC pavement due to
variation in slab temp.
P)
This is caused by
M
TE
(i) Daily variation resulting in a temperature gradient across the
,D
thickness of the slab is known as warping stresses
r
re
tu
(ii) Seasonal variation resulting in overall change in the slab
ec
(L
temperature is known as frictional stresses.

re
ho
At interior and edge
at
R
1. During Summer → Load stress + warping stress – frictional
ep
stress
e
ad
2. During Winter → Load stress + warping stress + frictional

Pr
stress
At corner → Load stress + warping stress
P)
M
Q. 116) Tie bars in cement concrete pavements are at
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Expansion joints
ec
(L
B. Contraction joints

re
ho
C. Warping joints
at
D. Longitudinal joints R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
1. Transverse joints
TE
,D
(a) Construction joints(b) Expansion joints(c) Contraction joints
r
re
(d) Warping joints
tu
ec
2. Longitudinal joints or tie bars
(L

re
ho
Tie bars- tie bars are not load transfer devices, but serve as a
at
means to tie two slabs R
ep
e
ad
They are smaller than dowel bars and placed at large intervals.
Pr
They are provided across longitudinal joints.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Dowel bars - The purpose of the dowel bar is to effectively
TE
,D
transfer the load between two concrete slabs and to keep the
r
re
two slabs in same height
tu
ec
The dowel bars are used in Contraction and Expansion joints.
(L

re
The design consideration are: -
ho
1. Mild steel rounded bars,
at
R
2. bonded on one side and free on other side
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 117) The maximum spacing of contraction joints in rigid
M
TE
pavement is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2.5 m
(L

re
B. 3.5 m
ho
at
C. 4.5 m
R
ep
D. 5.5 m
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Contraction joints
r
re
tu
The purpose of the contraction joint is to allow
ec
(L
the contraction of the slab due to fall in slab temperature below

re
ho
the construction temperature.
at
R
ep
Maximum spacing of 4.5 m as per IRC

e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 118) The maximum thickness of expansion joint in rigid
M
TE
pavements is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 25 mm
ho
at
C. 50 mm
R
ep
D. 100 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Expansion joints
TE
,D
The purpose of the expansion joint is to allow the
r
re
expansion of the pavement due to rise in temperature with
tu
ec
respect to construction temperature.
(L

re
ho
at
Expansion joint thickness 2 to 2.5 cm specified by IRC
R
eep
ad
Provided at interval of 18 m to 21 m
Pr
P)
Q. 119) The function of an expansion joint in rigid
M
TE
pavements is to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Relieve warping stresses
(L

re
B. Relieve shrinkage stresses
ho
at
C. Resist stresses due to expansion
R
ep
D. Allow free expansion
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 120) A traffic survey revealed the present average daily traffic
P)
of commercial vehicles as 1000. The annual rate of growth of
M
TE
traffic is found to be 8 percent. The pavement construction is to
,D
be completed in three years after the last traffic count. Then the
r
re
tu
number of vehicles for design of rigid pavements will be taken as
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 1000(1.08)¹³
at
B. 1000(1.08)²³ ep
R
C. 1000(0.92)¹³
e
ad
D. 1000(1.08)³
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Objective Questions
re
tu
ec
(L
(121 to 135)

re
ho
at
R
ep
Highway Engineering
e
ad
Pr
Q. 121) The fundamental factor is the selection of
P)
M
pavement type is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Climatic condition
ec
(L
B. Type and intensity of traffic

re
ho
C. Subgrade soil and Drainage conditions
at
R
D. Availability of funds for the construction construction
ep
e
project
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Selection of type of pavement:- the most important factors is the
M
traffic volume or intensity.
TE
,Dr
re
-If traffic intensity is 30 to 200 tonnes per day then low cost road,
tu
ec
i.e. Earth and soil stabilized road used.
(L

re
ho
at
-If traffic intensity up to 500 tonnes per day for WBM
R
eep
ad
-Bituminous road upto 1500 tonnes per day

Pr
-Cemenet concrete road over 2000 tonnes per day

P)
Q. 122) Most suitable material for Highway embankments
M
TE
is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Granular soil
(L

re
B. Organic soil
ho
at
C. Silts
R
ep
D. Clays
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Raising the grade of a roadway (or railway) above the level of the existing
P)
M
surrounding ground surface is known as embankment.
TE
,D
For highway embankments, generally granular soil are preferred, clay and
r
re
tu
silt is less desirable while organic soils are unsuitable.
ec
(L

re
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt (coarse grained soil) with little or
ho
at
no clay content.
R
eep
For economic considerations generally best locally available soil should

ad
Pr
be used.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 123) Maximum daily traffic capacity of bituminous
M
TE
pavements is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 500 tonnes per day
(L

re
B. 1000 tonnes per day
ho
at
C. 1500 tonnes per day
R
ep
D. 2000 tonnes per day
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 124) The most suitable equipment for compacting
M
TE
clayey soils is a
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Smooth wheeled roller
(L

re
B. Pneumatic tyred roller
ho
at
C. Sheep foot roller
R
ep
D. Vibrator
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
A. Smooth wheeled roller B. Pneumatic tyred roller C. Sheep foot roller
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 125) The aggregates required for one kilometre length
P)
M
of water bound macadam road per metre width and for 10
TE
,D
mm thickness is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 8 cubic metre

re
ho
B. 10 cubic metre
at
C. 12 cubic metre R
ep
e
D. 15 cubic metre
ad
Pr
Answer C
Quantity of aggregate = Area × Thickness
P)
M
TE
,D
= (1000 × 1) × (1/1000)
r
re
tu
ec
= 10 m³
(L

re
ho
20% extra broken stones on volume basis are recommended
at
R
ep
e
ad
Total quantity of aggregate = 1.2 × 10

Pr
= 12 m³
P)
126) The camber of shoulders in water bound macadam
M
TE
roads is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to the cross slope of pavement
(L

re
B. Less than the cross slope of pavement
ho
at
C. Greater than the cross slope of pavement
R
ep
D. Zero
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer A
M
TE
,Dr
The term macadam in the present time means the road surfaces
re
tu
and bases constructed of crushed or broken aggregates
ec
(L

cemented together by the action of rolling and water.
re
ho
at
R
Camber for pavement and shoulder is 1 in 36 to 1 in 48
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 127) The Binder normally used in flexible pavement
M
TE
construction is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Cement
(L

re
B. Lime
ho
at
C. Bitumen
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 128) In highway construction, rolling starts from
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Sides and proceed to centre
ec
(L
B. Centre and proceed to sides

re
ho
C. One side and proceed to Other Side
at
D. Any of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Rolling is started from edges toward the centre. When half
(L

re
surface is rolled, then rolling again is started from the other edge.
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q. 129) For the construction of water bound macadam roads, the correct
,D
sequence of operations after spreading coarse aggregate is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Dry rolling, wet rolling, application of screening and application of filler

re
B. Dry rolling, application of filler, wet rolling and application of screening
ho
C. Dry rolling, application of screening, wet rolling and application of Filler
at
R
D. Dry rolling, application of screening, application of filler and wet rolling
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Construction procedure of macadam road
P)
M
TE
,D
1. Preparation of subgrade
r
re
The site is cleared and weak spot corrected and rolled.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. Pavement construction
ho
Coarse aggregate is Spread on the prepared surface of subgrade
at
R
ep
e
ad
3. Dry rolling
Pr
After spreading the coarse aggregate, the rolling is done.

4. Application of screenings
Screening is generally used to fill about 50% of total voids and rest 50%
voids are filled with filler materials.
P)
M
TE
5. Wet rolling
,Dr
After the spreading the screenings, the surface of the layer is sprinkled
re
tu
with water and rolled again.
ec
(L

re
6. Application of filler
ho
at
After the application of the filler, water is sprinkled on the surface and
R
ep
slurry is allowed to fill the voids.
e
ad
Pr
7. Surface finishing
Q. 130) The penetration macadam construction, the
P)
M
bitumen is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Sprayed after the aggregates and spread and compacted
ec
(L
B. Premixed with aggregates and then spread

re
ho
C. Sprayed before the aggregates are spread and
at
compacted R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer A
Grouted or Penetration macadam:- In water bound macadam
(WBM) the strength is developed due to mechanical interlocking
P)
M
and bond due to soil binder. The stresses induced due to heavy
TE
,D
mixed traffic destroys these surface very soon. Thus in order to
r
re
increase the stability of such road, bitumen is used as a binder.
tu
ec
(L

re
-Bitumen is spread over the compacted aggregate surface.
ho
-Bitumen penetrates into voids from the surface, filling up a part
at
R
of voids and binding the aggregate together.
ep
e
ad
1. Semi grouted - When bitumen penetrates up to half of the

Pr
thickness of the road

2. Full grouted – Bitumen penetrates upto full depth
Q. 131) When the bituminous surfacing is done on already
P)
M
existing black top Road or over existing cement concrete
TE
,D
Road, the type of treatment to be given is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Seal coat

re
ho
B. Tack coat
at
C. Prime coat R
e ep
D. Spray of emulsion
ad
Pr
Answer B
1. Prime coat: - It is recommended when the first coat of
bituminous surfacing is done on an existing previous texture base
P)
M
such as WBM Road.
TE
,D
2. Tack coat: - It is usually recommended when the bituminous
r
re
surfacing is done over an existing cement concrete top or already
tu
ec
existing black top surface road.
(L

re
3. Seal coat: - it is usually recommended as a final coat over
ho
certain pervious bitumen the pavements.
at
Main function of seal coat R
eep
ad
1. To develop the skid resistance.

Pr
2. To make the surface water proof.

3. To increase the life of the surface.
P)
Q. 132) Which of the following premix methods is used for
M
TE
base course
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Bituminous carpet
(L

re
B. Mastic asphalt
ho
at
C. Sheet asphalt
R
ep
D. Bituminous bound macadam
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Premix method:- The aggregate and binder is mixed prior to
placing and spreading over the desired surface.
P)
1. Bitumen bound macadam: -
M
TE
Binder and aggregate are mixed prior to placement.
,D
In hilly region, the WBM have been found more resistant to frost
r
re
tu
action than normal base courses.
ec
(L
In regions of high water table, the WBM offers an impervious cut

re
ho
off.
at
2. Bituminous carpet: - ep
R
It is construction is usually recommended for surface course layer
e
ad
only.
Pr
Premix prepared from 10 to 12 mm size chhipings with sand and

bitumen.
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Quantity of Binder required for tack coat is less than that
r
re
required for prime coat
tu
ec
B. Prime coat treatment is given for plugging the voids in water
(L

re
bound macadam during bituminous road construction
ho
at
C. Seal coat is the final coat over certain pervious bituminous
R
ep
pavements
e
ad
D. A bitumen primer is a high viscosity cutback

Pr
P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Bitumen Primer is a locally manufactured bitumen solution
tu
ec
suitable for sealing and priming porous and non-porous surfaces.
(L

re
Used on concrete, metal and timber surfaces.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 134) The suitable surfacing material for a bridge deck
M
TE
slab is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sheet asphalt
(L

re
B. Bituminous carpet
ho
at
C. Mastic asphalt
R
ep
D. Rolled asphalt
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Mastic asphalt on bridges as protection, decking (deck is the
tu
ec
surface of a bridge) and finishing layers.
(L

re
ho
at
Mastic asphalt is an ideal construction material for absorbing
R
ep
dynamic stresses that occur on bridges.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 135) Which of the following is considered to be the
P)
M
highest quality construction in the group of Black top
TE
,D
pavements
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Mastic asphalt

re
ho
B. Sheet asphalt
at
C. Bituminous carpet R
eep
D. Bituminous concrete
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Bituminous concrete: -
M
TE
,D
Bituminous concrete premix pavement surface construction is
r
re
tu
the best and used for heavier and mixed traffic
ec
(L

re
ho
Coarse and fine aggregates are used along with bitumen to give
at
dense mass. ep
R
e
ad
Tickness depends on the traffic intensity and the quality of the

Pr
base course.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Objective Questions
re
tu
ec
(L
(136 to 150)

re
ho
at
R
ep
Highway Engineering
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 136) The thickness of bituminous carpet varies from
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 20 to 25 mm
ec
(L
B. 50 to 75 mm

re
ho
C. 75 to 100 mm
at
D. 100 to 120 mm R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Premix method of bitumen construction
P)
M
The aggregates and binder is mixed prior to placing and
TE
,D
spreading over the desired surface.
r
re
1. Bitumen bound macadam
tu
ec
Binder and aggregates are mixed prior to placement and finishing
(L

re
Thickness is kept from 5 to 7.5 cm.
ho
2. Bituminous carpet
at
R
Recommended for surface course layer only.
ep
e
ad
Premix of 10-12 mm size chippings with sand and bitumen

Pr
binder.
The tickness varies from 2 cm to 2.5 cm
3. Bituminous concrete
Coarse and fine aggregates are used along with bitumen to give
P)
M
dense mass.
TE
,D
This is the best and used for heavier and mixed traffic
r
re
tu
ec
4. Sheet asphalt
(L

re
A premix of bitumen and sand
ho
at
5. Mastic asphalt R
ep
e
ad
Mastic asphalt is a mixture of a bitumen binder, stone filler and

Pr
mineral powder heated and mixed in the hot state.

P)
Q. 137) Which of the following represents a carpet of
M
TE
sand-bitumen mix without coarse aggregate
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Mastic asphalt
(L

re
B. Sheet asphalt
ho
at
C. Bituminous carpet
R
ep
D. Bituminous concrete
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 138) In highway construction on superelevated curves,
M
TE
the Rolling shall proceed from
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sides towards the centre
(L

re
B. Centre towards the sides
ho
at
C. Lower edge towards the upper edge
R
ep
D. Upper edge towards the lower edge
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Superelevated curve: - The rolling shall proceed from lower edge
r
re
towards uper edge.
tu
ec
(L

re
Level surface: - Rolling is started from edges toward the centre.
ho
at
When half surface is rolled, then rolling again is started from the
R
ep
other edge.
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 139) Expansion joints in cement concrete pavements
M
TE
are provided at an interval of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10 m
(L

re
B. 15 m
ho
at
C. 18 m to 21 m
R
ep
D. 25 m to 30 m
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Expansion joints: -
M
These joints are provided to allow the expansion
TE
,D
of concrete slab due to temperature rise.
r
re
Provided at interval of 18 m to 21 m
tu
ec
Approximate gap width of joints is provided between 2 to 2.5 cm
(L

re
ho
at
Contraction joints: -
R
ep
The purpose of the contraction joint is to
e
ad
allow the contraction of the slab due to fall in slab temperature

Pr
below the construction temperature.

Maximum spacing of 4.5 m as per IRC
P)
M
TE
A. Contraction joints are spaced closer than Expansion
,Dr
joints
re
tu
ec
B. Longitudinal joints are provided in cement concrete
(L

re
roads to prevent longitudinal cracking
ho
at
C. Dowel bars are provided in longitudinal joints
R
ep
D. Warping joints are provided to relieve stresses induced
e
ad
due to warping
Pr
Answer C
1. Transverse joints
P)
M
(a) Construction joints (b) Expansion joints (c) Contraction joints (d) Warping joints
TE
2. Longitudinal joints or Tie bars
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Longitudinal joints Or Tie bars
(L

This are provided in CC roads if their width is more than 4.5 m.
re
ho
Provided to keep the two portion of slab in same level.
at
R
ep
Dowel bars: - Are used in expansion and contraction Joints.
e
ad
Pr
Warping joints:- Provided to relieve stresses developed due to warping

P)
Q. 141) Hill Road is one which passes through a terrain
M
TE
with a cross slope
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0 to 10%
(L

re
B. 10 to 25%
ho
at
C. 25 to 60%
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Types of terrain Cross slope in%
r
re
tu
ec
(L
1. Plain terrain < 10

re
ho
2. Rolling terrain 10 to 25
at
3. Hilly terrain R
25 to 60
ep
4. Steep terrain > 60
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The resisting length of a road is its effective length.
M
TE
If two points are to be connected by the shortest distance in a
,D
straight line, the gradient may be steeper than the ruling
r
re
tu
gradient; therefore, it becomes necessary to increase the length
ec
(L

so as to have the desired ruling gradient.
re
ho
at
R
Resisting length = Actual length of route + (Rise and fall) /
ep
Coefficient of friction bt
e
ad
Pr
tyre and pavement

Lr = L1 + h/f
Q. 143) In hill roads if several alternate alignments are
P)
M
surveyed which fulfill to Geometric standards, then the
TE
,D
preferred alignment is the one which is resisting length as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Maximum

re
ho
B. Minimum
at
R
C. Very near to average resisting length of all the alignments
ep
e
D. Zero
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Since, in hill roads, ineffective rises and falls are unavoidable, the
TE
particular alignment for which the resisting length is the
,Dr
minimum is the most desirable one.
re
tu
ec
(L

The following surveyed for fixing the alignment: -
re
ho
(a) Reconnaissance survey
at
(b) Preliminary survey R
ep
e
(c) Determination of final centre line

ad
Pr
(d) Final location survey.

P)
Q. 144) The camber for hill roads in case of bituminous
M
TE
surfacing is adopted as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2%
(L

re
B. 2.5%
ho
at
C. 3%
R
ep
D. 4%
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Camber is the slope, provided in the transverse direction of the
M
TE
road to drain off the rain water from the road surface
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 145) The superelevation to be provided in horizontal
curves of radius R in hill roads is given by
P)
M
TE
,D
A. V²/127R
r
re
tu
ec
(L
B. V²/17.5R

re
ho
at
C. V²/225R R
eep
ad
Pr
D. (V+8)²/127R
Answer C
P)
Super elevation: - It is the ratio of the height of outer edge
M
TE
with respect to horizontal width.
,D
In hill roads super elevation is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
e = V² / 225R

re
ho
at
Where, R
eep
e = super elevation
ad
Pr
V = design speed in kmph

R = radius of curve in metre
P)
Q. 146) The minimum design speed for hair pin bends in
M
TE
hill road is taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 20 kmph
(L

re
B. 30 kmph
ho
at
C. 40 kmph
R
ep
D. 50 kmph
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
For design of hair pin bend following criteria may be adopted
,Dr
re
tu
1. Minimum design speed = 20 kmph
ec
(L
2. Minimum length of transition curve = 15 m

re
ho
3. Gradients
at
R
(a) Maximum = 1 in 40 (2.5%)
ep
(b) Minimum = 1 in 200 (0.5%)

e
ad
Pr
4. Super elevation = 1 in 10 (10%)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 147) The drain which is provided parallel to roadway to
M
TE
intercept and divert the water from hill slopes is known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sloping drain
(L

re
B. Catchwater drain
ho
at
C. Side drain
R
ep
D. Cross drain
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Hill roads, drains on both sides of the road can only be provided if the road runs
P)
wholly through cutting.
M
TE
In the case of side cutting, drains are provided only on one side, usually on the
,D
Hill side.
r
re
tu
Catch drain: -
ec
(L
When the road runs in steep side Hill, the water from the upper slopes comes to

re
the road surface and causes major damage of the road.
ho
at
R
Divert the water from the hill slope, catch water drains are provided on the same
ep
e
side as the side drains, running parallel to the road.

ad
Pr
The water from this catch water drain is diverted to the nearest cross drainage
work such as culvert or to a natural stream.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
A. Drain on both side
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
B. Drain on hill side

Q. 148) The walls which are necessary on the hill side of
P)
M
roadway where earth has to be retained from slipping is
TE
,D
known as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Retaining wall

re
ho
B. Breast wall
at
C. Parapet wall R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Breast wall
r
re
A breast is wall constructed to prevent the soil on a natural slope
tu
ec
of embankment from sliding down the slope due to effects of
(L

re
weather, erosion etc.
ho
at
R
ep
Retaining wall
e
ad
A retaining wall is used when artificial excavation is done

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 149) In hill roads the side drains are provided
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Only on the hill side of road
ec
(L
B. Only on the opposite side of Hill

re
ho
C. On both sides of the road
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 150) select the incorrect statement
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Emulsion is used for stabilizing desert sand
r
re
tu
B. Soil lime stabilization is very effective for stabilizing
ec
(L
black cotton soils

re
ho
C. Soil lime stabilization is quite effective in warm regions
at
R
D. Soil cement stabilization is quite durable for surface
eep
course
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
Stabilisation is the process of improving the engineering
,D
properties of the soil before construction.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

A. Desert sand is a very light and very weakly saturated reddish
re
ho
yellow colour which corresponds specifically to the coloration of
at
sand. R
eep
ad
Pr
D. Uses Of Cement In Soil Stabilization for subgrade or road base.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Objective Questions
re
tu
ec
(L
(151 to 160)

re
ho
at
R
ep
Highway Engineering
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 151) For sandy soils the most common method of
M
TE
stabilization is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Soil cement stabilization
(L

re
B. Mechanical stabilization
ho
at
C. Soil lime stabilization
R
ep
D. Soil bitumen stabilization
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Soil stabilization is the process of improving the engineering
P)
properties of soil and making it more stable.
M
TE
1. Cement Stabilization: -
,D
Is done by mixing pulverised soil and
r
re
tu
portland cement with water and compacting the mix to attain a
ec
(L
strong material.

re
ho
at
2. Mechanical Stabilization: -
ep
R
Is the process of improving the soil
e
ad
by changing its gradation. Two or more types of natural soils are

Pr
mixed to obtain a composite material which is superior to any of

its components. It is also known as granular stabilization.
3. Lime Stabilization:-
Is done by adding lime to a soil. It is useful
P)
M
for stabilization of clayey soils.
TE
,Dr
re
4. Bitumen Stabilization: -
tu
ec
Is generally done with asphalt as binder.
(L

Emulsion are also used but in this form they require a longer
re
ho
drying period.
at
R
eep
The amount of bitumen is 4% to 7%. The actual amount is

ad
Pr
determined by trial.
Q. 152) In which one of the following types of bituminous
P)
M
Constructions is proportioning of materials determined
TE
,D
from laboratory tests?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Grouted macadam

re
ho
B. Premix carpet
at
R
C. Bituminous or asphalt concrete
eep
D. Bituminous macadam
ad
Pr
Answer C
1. Grouted or penetration macadam: -
P)
The strength is developed due to
M
TE
mechanical interlocking and bond due to soil binder. The stresses induced
,D
due to heavy mixed traffic order to increase the stability of such roads,
r
re
bitumen is used as a binder.
tu
ec
The bitumen is spread over the compacted aggregate surface. The
(L

re
bitumen penetrates into voids from the surface, filling up a part of voids
ho
and binding the aggregate together.
at
R
ep
e
2. Premix Carpet: -
ad
Pr
is usually recommended for surface courses layer only.

Bituminous carpet or premix carpet is a premix prepared from 10 to 12
mm size chipping with sand and bitumen binder.
3. Bituminous or asphalt concrete: -
Best and can be used for
P)
M
heavier and mixed traffic. In this method coarse and fine
TE
,D
aggregates are used along with bitumen to give dense mass.
r
re
The premix is carefully designed and the aggregates and bitumen
tu
ec
heated separately upto specified temperature and mixed
(L

re
together till all particles are coated with bitumen.
ho
at
4. Bitumen Macadam: - R
ep
e
ad
The binder and aggregates are mixed prior

Pr
to placement and the finished thickness is kept from 5 to 7.5 cm.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 154) Which one of the following is associated with
TE
“Limiting Gradient” on highways?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Requirement of maximum tractive effort for a short distance
(L

re
B. Requirement of minimum tractive effort on the whole gradient
ho
at
C. Efficient drainage conditions
R
ep
D. Alignment design in general
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Gradient: - It is the rate of rise or fall of road level along its length.
P)
M
TE
1. Maximum gradient: - It is the maximum or steepest or limiting gradient which
,D
is allowed to be provided in a road and which must never be exceeded in any
r
re
part of the road as steeper gradient are very inconvenient to the traffic, more
tu
ec
specially for slow moving traffic.
(L

re
2. Ruling or desing gradient: - This is desirable upper limit or permissible limit of
ho
at
gradient in the alignment of the road.
R
eep
3. Minimum gradient: - Provided on flat or level road to drain off rain water.
ad
Pr
4. Exceptional gradient: - Provided in exceptional situations such as in approaches

to cause way or near hairpin bends etc.
Q. 155) While aligning a hill road with a ruling gradient of 1
P)
M
in 20, a horizontal curve of radius 80 m is encountered.
TE
,D
The compensated gradient on curve will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1 in 15

re
ho
B. 1 in 17
at
C. 1 in 25 R
eep
D. 1 in 27
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 156) While designing the superelevation of a highway,
TE
,D
its maximum value is fixed considering the need to
r
re
tu
ec
A. Avoid toppling of slow moving vehicles in mixed traffic flow
(L

re
B. Avoid tranverse skidding
ho
at
C. Provide drainage
R
ep
D. Counteract centrifugal force due to 75% of design speed
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Design of superelevation
M
Superelevation is designed for the particular vehicle called design
TE
,D
vehicle which has some standard weight and dimensions. But in
r
re
the actual case, the road has mixed traffic conditions. Different
tu
ec
vehicles require different values of superelevation.
(L

re
ho
at
Example
R
ep
1. Heavily loaded trucks require the small value of superelevation
e
ad
otherwise toppling may occur.

Pr
2. Fast moving vehicles may be provided with high superelevation

while slow moving ones require small superelevation.
Q. 157) In a Group Index method of flexible pavement
P)
M
design, which one of the following factors decides the
TE
,D
thickness of base and surface course?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Percentage of subgrade soil passing 75 Micron sieve

re
ho
B. Type of surface and base course materials
at
R
C. Daily volume of commercial vehicles
eep
D. Percentage of liquid limit of subgrade soil

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Step 1. First the value of group index is found out by equation
TE
GI = 0.2a + 0.005ac + 0.01bd
,Dr
re
tu
Step 2. Traffic is estimate and classified as
ec
(L

light (< 50 commercial vehicles per day),
re
ho
medium (40-300) and
at
heavy (>300) R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Step 3. Appreciate curve is choosen and the total thickness of

pavements is calculated.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 158) In a bituminous pavement, alligator cracking is
M
TE
mainly due to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Inadequate wearing course
(L

re
B. Inadequate thickness of subbase course of pavement
ho
at
C. Use of excessive bituminous material
R
ep
D. Fatigue arising from repeated stress applications
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Failure of flexible pavements
P)
1. Map or Alligator cracking:
M
TE
-Occurs due to fatigue.
,Dr
re
2. Consolidation of pavement layers: -
tu
ec
Repeated loads on same location of the
(L

re
road causes consolidation, deformation,
ho
causing depression (ruts) on the road
at
R
ep
3. Shear failure: - Weakness of pavement
e
ad
mixtures. The shear failure causes

Pr
upheaval of the pavement material forming

cracking or fracture.
4. Frost heaving: - Shear or other failure the upheaval of the pavement is
followed by a depression while in frost heaving it is a localized upheaval
P)
M
TE
5. Longitudinal cracking: -
,D
Due to differential volume changes or
r
re
other reasons such as frost action, settlement
tu
ec
of embankment etc
(L

re
ho
6. Lack of cohesion in different layers: - Whene there is no proper bond
at
R
between them wearing course and underlying base course etc.
ep
e
ad
7. Formation of waves and corrugation: -

Pr
The sequence of such depression and heaving up.

P)
Q. 159) The main function of prime coat is to
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Provide bond between old and new surfacing
tu
ec
B. Improve riding quality of pavement
(L

re
C. Provide bond between the existing base and surfacing
ho
at
of new construction
R
ep
D. Control dust nuisance
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
1. Prime coat: - It is recommended when the first coat of bituminous
M
TE
surface is done on an existing pervious texture base such as WBM road.
,Dr
re
2. Tack coat: - It is usually recommended when bituminous surfacing is
tu
ec
done over an existing cement concrete top or already existing black top
(L

re
surface road.
ho
at
R
3. Seal coat: - It is usually recommended as a final coat over certain
ep
e
pervious bitumen pavements.

ad
Pr
-To make the surface water-proof.

-To increase the life of the surface.
Q. 160) The design of horizontal transition curve length of
highways should take into account
P)
M
TE
A. Three factors namely, allowable values of rate of change of
,D
centrifugal acceleration and superelevation and the minimum
r
re
tu
length formula given by the IRC
ec
(L

B. Two factors, namely, comfort and rate of change of
re
ho
superelevation
at
R
C. Two factors, namely, rate of change of superelevation and
ep
minimum length formula given by the IRC
e
ad
Pr
D. Only one factor, namely, the rate of change of centrifugal

acceleration
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A Length of the transition curve maximum of three

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(161 to 175)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Highway ep
R
at
e
ad
Engineering
Pr
Q. 161) The radius of horizontal curve is 100 metres. The
P)
design speed is 50 kmph and design coefficient of lateral
M
TE
friction is 0.15. What would be the rate of superelevation if
,Dr
full lateral friction is considered?
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 1 in 21.2
ho
at
B. 1 in 15.8
R
ep
C. 1 in 25.0
e
ad
D. 1 in 32.6
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 162)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
A. The penetration value of bitumen is measured by distance in tenths of
P)
M
mm that a standard needle would penetrate vertically into bitumen
TE
sample under standard conditions of test.
,Dr
re
tu
By this test we can determine the hardness or softness value of bitumen.
ec
(L

re
Penetration test is a commonly adopted
ho
at
test on bitumen to grade the material in
terms of its hardness. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
A 80/100 grade bitumen indicates

that its penetration value lies
between 80 & 100.
B. Bituminous concrete mix is commonly designed by Marshall Method.
P)
M
TE
C. Softening point of bitumen indicates the point at which bitumen
,Dr
attains a particular degree of softening under specified conditions of the
re
tu
test. Take small amount of bitumen sample and heat it up to 75-100oC.
ec
(L
Ring and ball apparatus is used to conduct this test.

re
ho
at
D. The Benkelman beam method is one of the methods for measuring
R
ep
surface deflections in field.
e
ad
Method to access pavement condition and overlay design.

Pr
P)
Q. 163) In the design of highways, expansion and
M
TE
contraction joints should respectively be provided at
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 50 m and 32 m
(L

re
B. 50 m and 10 m
ho
at
C. 25 m and 10 m
R
ep
D. 25 m and 32 m
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Expansion joints: - The purpose of the expansion joint is to allow the
TE
,D
expansion of the pavement due to rise in temperature with respect to
r
re
construction temperature.
tu
ec
Spacing between 50 to 500 ft (15 to 150 m)
(L

re
ho
Contraction joints: - The purpose of the contraction joint is to allow the
at
contraction of the slab due to fall in slab temperature below the
R
ep
construction temperature.
e
ad
The joint spacing should be 24 to 30 times the pavement thickness.

Pr
The maximum joint spacing is 30 ft (9.0 m)

P)
M
Q. 164) Reflection cracking is observed in
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Flexible pavement
ec
(L
B. Rigid pavement

re
ho
C. Bituminous overlay over cement concrete surface
at
R
D. Rigid overlay over flexible pavement
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Reflective cracking can include cracks that occur away from an underlying
,D
joint.
r
re
tu
ec
Reflection cracking is observed in
(L

re
Bituminous overlay over CC surface
ho
at
R
Problem: Allows moisture infiltration
ep
e
and can cause roughness in the

ad
Pr
pavement ride.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
1. Psychological widening (Wep):
P)
M
While negotiating a horizontal curve, the driver has a tendency to follow the inner
TE
of the pavement. This reduces the effective width of the pavement at curves. In
,D
order to have a smooth operation at curves, you need to provide an extra widening
r
re
at the curve of the road.
tu
ec
The IRC recommended a value of extra widening formula for psychological reasons
(L
Wep = V / 9.5 √r

re
ho
2.Mechanical Widening (Wem):
at
While negotiating a curve, rear wheels have a tendency to follow the inner track. To
R
ep
accommodate this, there will be a widening is provided called mechanical widening
e
have to be provided. This is due to the offtracking of the vehicle.

ad
Pr
The off-tracking in a highway is one the main criteria during curve widening design.
The IRC value for the mechanical widening is given by
Wem = nL² / 2R
Q. 166) Which one of the following items of Hill Road
P)
M
Construction does not help in the prevention of landslides
TE
,D
in the monsoon season
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Retaining walls

re
ho
B. Catch water drains
at
C. Breast wall R
eep
D. Hair-pin bends
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Breast wall:- A breast is wall constructed to prevent the soil on a natural slope of
M
embankment from sliding down the slope due to effects of weather, erosion etc.
TE
,Dr
Retaining wall:- A retaining wall is used when artificial excavation is done.
re
tu
ec
Catch drain: - When the road runs in steep side Hill, the water from the upper
(L

re
slopes comes to the road surface and causes major damage of the road.
ho
at
R
Divert the water from the hill slope, catch water drains are provided on the same
ep
side as the side drains, running parallel to the road.
e
ad
Pr
The water from this catch water drain is diverted to the nearest cross drainage
work such as culvert or to a natural stream.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 167) In the Los Angeles Abrasion test on aggregate, if
P)
M
the speed of the drum is increased to 50 rpm, then the
TE
,D
abrasion value will
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Increase

re
ho
B. Decrease
at
C. Remain unchanged R
eep
D. Be unpredictable
ad
Pr
Answer A
Los Angeles Abrasion Test:- It consists of a hollow cylindrical machine
closed at both ends having 70 cm internal diameter and 50 cm long,
P)
mounted on supports so that it may rotate about its horizontal axis.
M
TE
Steel spherical balls 4.5 cm diameter and weight 390 grams to 445 grams.
,D
The weight and number of balls per charge of aggregate depends upon
r
re
the grading of aggregate simple.
tu
ec
Procedure:-
(L

1. Sample 5 kg or 10 kg depending on the grading of aggregate sample.
re
ho
2. Machine is rotated at a speed of 30 to 33 r.p.m. For 500-1000 r.p.m
at
depending on grading. R
ep
3. Sample is taken out and sieved through 1.7 mm I.S. Sieve and weight of
e
ad
aggregate passing through it.

Pr
Abrasion value = W2/W1× 100%

W1 is the weight of sample put in the machine.
Q. 168) The maximum superelevation to be provided on a
road curve road is 1 in 15. If the rate of change of
P)
M
superelevation is specified as 1 in 120 and the road width
TE
,D
is 10 m, then the minimum length of the transition curve
r
re
tu
on either end will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 180 m
at
B. 125 m R
eep
C. 80 m
ad
Pr
D. 30 m
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 169) A summit curve is formed at the intersection of a
P)
3% up gradient and 5% down gradient. To provide a
M
TE
stopping distance of 128 m, the length of summit curve
,Dr
needed will be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 271 m
ho
at
B. 298 m
R
ep
C. 322 m
e
ad
D. 340 m
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 170) Which one of the following causes ravelling in
M
TE
bituminous pavement?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Use of soft bitumen
(L

re
B. Excessive bitumen content
ho
at
C. Low bitumen content
R
ep
D. Use of open graded aggregates
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Disintegration in Bituminous Pavements and their Causes
TE
Caused by insufficient compaction of the surface, insufficient asphalt in
,D
the mix, loss of adhesion between the asphalt coating and aggregate
r
re
tu
particles, or overheating of the mix.
ec
(L

re
The most common type of disintegration in bituminous pavements is
ho
raveling. Raveling is the wearing away of the pavement surface caused by
at
R
the dislodging of aggregate particles and the loss of asphalt binder. As the
eep
raveling continues, larger pieces are broken free, and the pavement takes
ad
Pr
on a rough appearance.
Q.171) In desire-line diagram
P)
M
TE
A. Width of desire-line is proportional to the number of trips in
,D
one direction
r
re
tu
B. Length of the desire-line is proportional to the number of trips
ec
(L
in both directions

re
ho
C. Width of desire-line is proportional to the number of trips in
at
both directions ep
R
D. Both length and width of desire-line are proportional to the
e
ad
number of trips in both directions

Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
The origin and destination studies give idea of the number of
,D
vehicular traffic, their origin and destination in each zone of
r
re
tu
study.
ec
(L

re
ho
Desire-line are ploted.
at
R
ep
Thickness or width of desire-line, shows volume (Number of trips
e
ad
Pr
on both directions) on that road.

Q. 172) A typical Marshall test graph is shown in fig. 4.5.
P)
The variable on the y-axis is
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 173) Given that
r = radius of load distribution, E = Modulus of elasticity of concrete
P)
M
K = modulus of subgrade reaction, u = poisson’s ratio of concrete
TE
h = thickness of slab, P = wheel load
,Dr
re
tu
The combination of parameters required for obtaining the radius of
ec
relative stiffness of cement concrete slab is
(L

re
ho
at
A. E, K, u, r
B. h, K, u, r R
ep
e
C. E, h, K, u
ad
Pr
D. P, h, K, u
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Where,
(L

L = Radius of relative stiffness in cms
re
ho
E = Modulus of elasticity of cement concrete kg/cm²
at
R
u = Poisson ratio of cement concrete = 0.15
ep
e
h = Slab thickness in cms

ad
Pr
K = Subgrade modulus or modulus of subgrade reaction kg/cm²

Q. 174) Consider the following situations
1. Traffic volume entering from all roads is less than 3000 vehicles per
P)
hour
M
TE
2. Pedestrian volume is high
,D
3. Total right turning traffic is high
r
re
4. A road in a hilly region
tu
ec
(L

A rotary will be more suitable than control by signals, in situations listed
re
ho
against
at
R
ep
A. 1 and 3
e
ad
B. 1 and 4
Pr
C. 2 and 4
D. 2 and 3
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
Guidelines for the selection of rotary:-
tu
ec
1. Traffic volume entering from all roads is 500 to 3000 vehicles per hour.
(L

re
2. Total right turning traffic is high.
ho
3. If the number of intersecting roads is between 4 and 7 then rotaries
at
R
can be constructed with advantage
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Durability:- Aggregates used in pavements have to withstand the adverse action
P)
M
of weather such as physical and chemical action of rain and ground water and
TE
effects of atmosphere etc. The durability of aggregates is determined by
,D
soundness test.
r
re
tu
ec
Abrasion:- The aggregates used in the surface course are subjected to constant
(L

abrasion due to moving vehicles. The removal of material from the surface of the
re
ho
road by grinding action is known as abrasion.
at
R
ep
Attrition:- The mutual rubbing of stones also causes wear in the aggregates. This
e
ad
action of mutual rubbing or grinding of stones is known as attrition.

Pr
Crazing:- Breaking up of road surface layer through cracking into irregular shaped
areas.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(176 to 190)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Highway ep
R
at
e
ad
Engineering
Pr
Q. 176) Ratio of the width of the car parking area required
P)
M
at kerb for 30° parking relative to 60° parking is
TE
,D
approximately
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.5

re
ho
B. 0.7
at
C. 0.8 R
eep
D. 2.0
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 177) Consider the following statements with reference to pavements
1. Flexible pavements are more suitable then rigid pavements in regions
P)
where subgrade strength is uneven.
M
TE
2. Load carrying capacity of rigid pavements depends more on the
,D
properties of concrete then the strength of subgrade.
r
re
3. Compared to flexible pavements, rigid pavements are more affected by
tu
ec
temperature variations.
(L

re
ho
Of these statements
at
R
ep
e
ad

Pr

D. 3 alone is correct
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Load carrying capacity of rigid pavement is mainly due to the
re
ho
rigidity and high modulus of elasticity of the slab itself.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 178) For the relationship u = 55 – 0.44 k, where u is this
P)
M
speed in kmph and k is the density in vpkm, what will be
TE
,D
the maximum flow in vph?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1718

re
ho
B. 1250
at
C. 625 R
ep
e
D. 125
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Collision diagram is used to
P)
M
1. Study accident pattern
TE
2. Eliminate accidents
,Dr
3. Determine remedial measures
re
tu
4. Make statistical analysis of accidents
ec
(L

re
Of these statements
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad

Pr

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Collision diagrams are used to display and identify similar accident
r
re
tu
patterns. They provide information on the type and number of accidents;
ec
including conditions such as time of day, day of week, climatic conditions,
(L

re
pavement conditions, and other information.
ho
at
R
Collision diagram are most useful to compare the accident pattern before
ep
e
and after the remedial measures have been taken.

ad
Pr
P)
Q. 180) In which one of the following grades of highway is
M
TE
an emergency escape ramp provided
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1 in 200
(L

re
B. Zero grade
ho
at
C. Down grade
R
ep
D. Up grade
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
Runaway truck ramp / Runaway truck lane / Escape lane /
re
tu
Emergency escape ramp / Truck arrester bed:- is a traffic device
ec
(L

that enables vehicles which are having braking problems to safely
re
ho
stop. It is typically a long, sand or gravel-filled lane connected to
at
R
a steep downhill grade section of a main road, and is designed to
ep
accommodate large trucks or buses.

e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 181) The Plasticity Index of the fraction passing 425
M
TE
micron I.S. Sieve in case of sub base/base course would be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than 6
(L

re
B. Greater than 6
ho
at
C. Greater than 9
R
ep
D. Between 15 and 30
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

According to IS:2720 the plasticity index of binding material in
re
ho
WBM for Base / sub base Should be less than 6%
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 181) Assuming the safe stopping sight distance to be
P)
80 m on a flat Highway section and with a setback distance
M
TE
of 10 m, what would be the radius of the negotiable
,Dr
horizontal curve?
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 800 m
ho
at
B. 160 m
R
ep
C. 80 m
e
ad
D. 70 m
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 183) If the CBR value obtained at 5 mm penetration is
P)
higher than that at 2.5 mm, then the test is repeated for
M
TE
checking; and if the check test reveals a similar trend
,Dr
trend, then the CBR value is to be reported as the
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Mean of the values for 5 mm and 2.5 mm penetrations
ho
at
B. Higher value minus the lower value
R
ep
C. Lower value corresponding to 2.5 mm penetration
e
ad
D. Higher value obtained at 5 mm penetration

Pr
Answer D
It is the ratio of force per unit area required to penetrate a soil mass with
standard circular needle at the rate of 1.25 mm/min. to that required for
P)
the corresponding penetration of a standard material.
M
TE
C.B.R. = Test load/Standard load × 100
,Dr
Penetration of plunger (mm) Standard load (kg)
re
2.5 1370
tu
ec
5.0 2055
(L
7.5 2630

10.0 3180
re
ho
12.5 3600
The C.B.R. values are usually calculated for penetration of 2.5 mm and 5
at
R
mm. Generally the C.B.R. value at 2.5 mm will be greater that at 5 mm
e ep
and in such a case the former shall be taken as C.B.R. for design purpose.
ad
Pr
If C.B.R. for 5 mm exceeds that for 2.5 mm, the test should be repeated.
If identical results follow, the C.B.R. corresponding to 5 mm penetration
should be taken for design.
Q. 184) A vehicle was stopped in two seconds by fully
P)
M
Jamming the brakes. The skid marks measured 9.8 metres.
TE
,D
The average skid resistance coefficient will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 0.7

re
ho
B. 0.5
at
C. 0.4 R
eep
D. 0.25
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 185) Which one of the following is the chronological
P)
M
sequence in regard to road construction/design
TE
,D
development?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Telford, Tresaguet, CBR, Macadam

re
ho
B. Tresaguet, Telford, Macadam, CBR
at
R
C. Macadam, CBR, Tresaguet, Telford
eep
D. Tresaguet, Macadam, Telford, CBR

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Tresaguet construction was started in 1764 AD in France.
r
re
tu
ec
Telford construction was started in 1803 AD in London (England).
(L

re
ho
at
Macadam construction was started in 1815 AD in England.
R
ep
e
ad
CBR construction was started in 1928 AD in USA.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 186) The general requirement in constructing a
P)
M
reinforced concrete road is to place a single layer of
TE
,D
reinforcement
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Near the bottom of the slab

re
ho
B. Near the top of the slab
at
C. At the middle R
eep
D. Equally distributed at the top and bottom

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The greater quantity of reinforcement should be place In the
ec
(L
longitudinal direction. Further the reinforcement should either

re
ho
be placed in the mid depth or towards top of the pavement for
at
better functioning. R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 187) It is a common practice to design a highway to
M
TE
accommodate the traffic volume corresponding to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 30th hour
(L

re
B. Peak hour
ho
at
C. ADT
R
ep
D. 15-min peak period
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Design Hour Volume (DHV) is the hourly traffic volume used in the
ec
(L
design of highways.

re
The 30th highest hourly volume Is the hourly volume that will be
ho
at
exceeded only 29 times In a year and all hourly volumes of the year will
be less than this value. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 188) The amount of mechanical energy imposed on the
M
TE
aggregate during aggregate impact test is of the order of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 5320 kg-cm
(L

re
B. 6750 kg-cm
ho
at
C. 7980 kg-cm
R
ep
D. 11400 kg-cm
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Procedure of Impact test
P)
M
1. Sample 10 mm to 12.5 mm using sieve.
TE
2. Sample transferred to the cup of the impact test apparatus and compacted by tamping road
,D
25 times.
r
3. Now the hammer is raised to a height of 38 cm above the surface of the aggregate in the
re
tu
cup and is allowed to fall freely on the specimen.
ec
4. 15 blows are given.
(L

5. Sieved through 2.36 mm IS sieve and passing fraction is weighed (W1) .
re
ho
at
Impact value = W2/W1 × 100
R
ep
Where W2 is the weight of sample.
e
ad
Pr
In impact test 15 blows of 14 kg hamer with a drop of 38 cm are given. Therefore mechanical
energy imposed on aggregate is
= 15 × 14 × 38 = 7980 kg.cm
P)
Q. 189) Which one of the following binders is
M
TE
recommended for a wet and cold climate?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 80/100 penetration asphalt
(L

re
B. Tar
ho
at
C. Cutback
R
ep
D. Emulsion
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
Bitumen emulsion is a mixture of water & bitumen. The bitumen
,Dr
content in the emulsion is around 60% and the remaining is
re
tu
water.
ec
(L

re
ho
1. Emulsion can be used in wet weather even when it is raining.
at
R
2. Also emulsions have been used in soil stabilization, particularly
ep
for stabilization of sands in desert areas.

e
ad
Pr
3. Emulsion are used in maintenance and patch repair works.

Q. 190) With reference to the Marshall mix design criteria
P)
M
for highways, which one of the following pairs is not
TE
,D
correctly matched?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Stability value............. 340 min

re
ho
B. Flow value.................. 8-16
at
R
C. VFB............................. 50-75
eep
D. % Air voids................. 3-5

ad
Pr
Answer C
design mix.
Marshall method
Used for bituminous
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(191 to 200)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Highway ep
R
at
e
ad
Engineering
Pr
Q. 191) It was noted that on a section of road, the free
P)
speed was 80 kmph and the jam density was 70 kmph. The
M
TE
maximum flow in vph that could be expected on this road
,Dr
is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 800
ho
at
B. 1400
R
ep
C. 2800
e
ad
D. 5600
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 192) Which of the criteria given below are used for the
design of valley vertical curves on road?
P)
1. Rider comfort.
M
TE
2. Headlight sight distance
,Dr
3. Drainage
re
tu
ec
Select the correct answer using the codes given below
(L

re
ho
at
A. 1,2 and 3
R
ep
B. 1 and 3
e
ad
C. 2 and 3
Pr
D. 1 and 2
Answer A
Valley (Sag) curves are those curves which have convexity downwards.
They are formed under the four following conditions:
P)
1. When a negative gradient meets another mild negative gradient
M
TE
2. When a negative gradient meets a level zero gradient
,D
3. When a negative gradient meets with a positive gradient
r
re
4. When a positive gradient meets another steeper positive gradient
tu
ec
(L

re
During day time the visibility in valley curves are not hindered but during
ho
night time the only source of visibility becomes headlight in the absence
at
of street lights. R
eep
And in valley curves, the centrifugal force generated by the vehicle

ad
Pr
moving along a valley curve acts downwards along with the weight of the
vehicle and this adds to the stress induced in the spring of the vehicle
which causes jerking of the vehicle.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
A. Bird baths:- form typically as the result of settlement due to
TE
inadequate compaction of the material under the asphalt during
,Dr
construction and are particularly noticeable after a rain.
re
tu
ec
(L

B. Potholes:- this type of failure occurs when there is no proper
re
ho
bond between the wearing course and underlying base course
at
R
etc. This results in opening up and loss of material forming pot
ep
e
holes. This type of failure generally takes place when the

ad
Pr
bituminous surfacing is provided over the existing cement

concrete base course etc.
C. Ravelling:- is caused by the continued infiltration of water and
P)
the degradation of an asphalt top coat. Once the top layer of
M
TE
asphalt bitumen wears down water and sunlight will continue to
,D
damage the asphalt surface causing the bond between asphalt
r
re
tu
bitumen and aggregate rock to break. When water begins to
ec
(L
intrude into an asphalt surface it will cause further cracks and

re
ho
pavement failure to occur.
at
R
ep
D. Subsidence:- Abrupt (Sudden) lowering of the road surface due
e
ad
to poor drainage.
Pr
P)
Q. 194) For carrying out bituminous patch work during the
M
TE
rainy season, the most suitable binder is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Road tar
(L

re
B. Hot bitumen
ho
at
C. Cutback bitumen
R
ep
D. Bituminous emulsion
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Patching is the process of filling potholes or excavated areas in
P)
M
the asphalt pavement.
TE
,Dr
re
Bitumen emulsion is a mixture of water & bitumen. The bitumen
tu
ec
content in the emulsion is around 60% and the remaining is
(L

re
water.
ho
at
R
1. Emulsion can be used in wet weather even when it is raining.
eep
ad
2. Also emulsions have been used in soil stabilization, particularly

Pr
for stabilization of sands in desert areas.

3. Emulsion are used in maintenance and patch repair works.
Q. 195) The corrected characteristic rebound deflection on
a pavement, using Benkelman beam study 2 mm. The
P)
M
equivalent granular overlay thickness required for an
TE
,D
allowable deflection of 1 mm as per original IRC guidelines
r
re
tu
is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 33 mm
at
B. 66 mm R
eep
C. 133 mm
ad
Pr
D. 166 mm
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 196) For a circular curve of radius 200 m, the coefficient
P)
of lateral friction is 0.15 and the design speed 40 kmph.
M
TE
The equilibrium superelevation (for equal pressure on
,Dr
inner and outer wheels) would be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 21.3
ho
at
B. 7
R
ep
C. 6.3
e
ad
D. 4.6
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 197) If a descending gradients of 1 in 25 meets an
P)
M
ascending gradient of 1 in 40, then the length of valley
TE
,D
curve required for head light distance of 100 m will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 30 m

re
ho
B. 130 m
at
C. 310 m R
ep
e
D. 630 m
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Head light sight distance
tu
ec
is the distance visible to a
(L

re
driver during night driving
ho
at
under the illumination of
R
ep
head lights.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 198) An ascending gradient of 1 in 100 meets a
P)
descending gradient of 1 in 50. The length of summit curve
M
TE
required to provide overtaking sight distance of 500 m will
,Dr
be
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 938 m
ho
at
B. 781 m
R
ep
C. 470 m
e
ad
D. 170 m
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q 199) Which one of the following pairs is not correctly
M
TE
matched?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Horizontal curves........................ Superelevation
(L

re
B. Origin and destination studies... Desire lines
ho
at
C. Los Angeles test.......................... Hardness of aggregates
R
ep
D. Soundness test............................ Purity of bitumen
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
Durability:- Aggregates used in pavements have to withstand the
,D
adverse action of weather such as physical and chemical action
r
re
tu
of rain and ground water and effects of atmosphere etc.
ec
(L
The durability of aggregates is determined by soundness test.

re
ho
at
R
Solubility test:- is used to measure purity of bitumen. Pure
ep
bitumen is completely soluble in solvents like carbon disulphide
e
ad
Pr
and carbon tetrachloride.

Q. 200) Which one of the following expressions gives
P)
intermediate sight distance as per IRC standards? (SSD:
M
TE
stopping sight distance; OSD: overtaking sight distance)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2 SSD
(L

re
B. (SSD + OSD) / 2
ho
at
C. (OSD – SSD) / 2
R
ep
D. 2 OSD
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Answer A
tu
ec
(L

re
Intermediate sight distance (ISD) is defined as twice SSD.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
(201 to 207 END)
TE
,Dr
Last Part
re
tu
ec
(L

Highway
re
ho
at
R
ep
Engineering
e
ad
Pr
Q. 201) Consider the following:
1. L.L. of soil,
2. P.L. of soil,
P)
3. S.L of soil
M
TE
4. Annual average rainfall,
,D
5. Temperature of soil
r
re
tu
ec
As per the latest IRC guidelines, the set of essential data required to
(L

determine moisture correction factor of clayey subgrade soil in
re
ho
Benkelman beam study would include
at
R
ep
A. 1,2 and 4
e
ad
B. 1,2,3 and 4
Pr
C. 2,3 and 5
D. 4 and 5
P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
The seasonal variation cause variation in subgrade moisture. The
tu
ec
plasticity index (LL – PL) and annual average rainfall are the data
(L

re
required to determine moisture correction factor.
ho
at
R
ep
Temperature correction is separately applied.
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 202) As per latest IRC guidelines for designing flexible
M
TE
pavement by CBR method, the load parameter required is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Number of commercial vehicles per day
(L

re
B. Cumulative standard axles is msa
ho
at
C. Equivalent single axle load
R
ep
D. Number of vehicles (all types) during design life
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Indian roads congress has specified the design procedures for flexible
TE
,D
pavements based on:-
r
re
1. Design traffic in terms of cumulative number of standard axles and
tu
ec
2. CBR value of subgrade.
(L

re
ho
The method considers traffic in terms of the cumulative number of
at
R
standard axles (8160 kg) to be carried by the pavement during the
ep
design life.
e
ad
Pr
MSA Means million standard axle.

Q. 203) If the load, warping and frictional stresses in a
P)
cement concrete slab are 210 N/mm², 290N/mm² and
M
TE
10N/mm² respectively, the critical combination of stresses
,Dr
during summer midday is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 290 N/mm²
ho
at
B. 390 N/mm²
R
ep
C. 490 N/mm²
e
ad
D. 590 N/mm²
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 204) Brake is applied on a vehicle which then is skids a
distance of 16 m before coming to stop. If the developed
P)
M
average coefficient of friction between the tyres and the
TE
,D
pavement is 0.4, then the speed of the vehicle before
r
re
tu
skidding would have been nearly
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 20 kmph
at
B. 30 kmph R
ep
e
C. 40 kmph
ad
Pr
D. 50 kmph
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 205) When two roads with two-lane, two-way traffic,
P)
M
cross at an uncontrolled intersection, the total number of
TE
,D
potential major conflict points would be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 32

re
ho
B. 24
at
C. 16 R
eep
D. 4
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 206) Rapid curing cutback bitumen is produced by
M
TE
blending (admixture) bitumen with
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Kerosene
(L

re
B. Benzene
ho
at
C. Diesel
R
ep
D. Petrol
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Cutback bitumen:- Normal practice is to heat bitumen to reduce its
P)
M
viscosity. In cutback bitumen suitable solvent is used to lower the
TE
viscosity of the bitumen. From the environmental point of view also
,D
cutback bitumen is preferred. The solvent from the bituminous material
r
re
tu
will evaporate and the bitumen will bind the aggregate.
ec
(L

re
The distillates used for preparation of cutback bitumen are naphtha,
ho
at
kerosene, diesel oil, and furnace oil.
R
ep
e
There are different types of cutback bitumen like

ad
Pr
1. Rapid curing (RC)- Petrol

2. Medium curing (MC) – Kerosene
3. Slow curing (SC)
Q. 207) A two lane single carriage-way is to be designed for
design life period of 15 years. Total two way traffic intensity in the
P)
year of completion of construction is expected to be 2000
M
TE
commercial vehicles per day. Vehicle damage factor = 3.0, land
,D
distribution factor = 0.75. Assuming annual rate of traffic growth
r
re
tu
as 7.5%, design traffic, expressed as cumulative number of
ec
(L
standard axles, is

re
ho
at
A. 42.9 × 106 ep
R
B. 22.6 × 106
e
ad
C. 10.1 × 106
Pr
D. 5.3 × 106
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
The End
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
🙏☺
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
AE State PSC
P)
M
(01-10) Gupta and Gupta
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
ISJB – Indian Standard Junior Beams (Small depth)
tu
ec
ISMB – Indian Standard Medium Beams
(L

re
ISLB – Indian Standard Light Beams (Light weight)
ho
at
ISHB – Indian Standard Heavy Beams (Heavy weight)
R
ep
ISWB – Indian Standard Wide Beams
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
When tension members are connected to a gusset plate by rivets or
P)
M
bolts, some material is removed from the cross-section due to bolt or
TE
rivet holes.
,D
The net area at any section is equal to the gross area minus the
r
re
tu
deduction for holes at that section.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
1. Single angles in tension,
connected by one leg only R
eep
Net effective area = A1 + K 1A2

ad
Pr
Where, A1 is the area of the connected leg, A1 = (b-d-t/2) × t

A2 is the area of the outstanding leg, A2 = (a-t/2) × t
And K 1 = 3A1/(3A1+A2)
2. In the case of pair of angles back to back (or a single tee) in
tension connected by only one leg on each angle (or by the
P)
flange of a tee) to the same side of the gusset plate,
M
Net effective area = A 1 + K2A2 (Where, K2 = 5A1/5A1+A2)
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
3. In the case of double angles or tees carrying direct tension,

Pr
placed back to back and connected to both sides of the gusset,

Net effective area = gross area of section – area of holes
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Generally, the maximum deflection for a beam shall not
re
ho
exceed span/325
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
If the column ends and gusset materials are not faced or machined for complete
bearing, the fasteners are designed for the total forces to be transferred.
P)
M
If they are faced or machined for complete bearing, 50% of the forces are
TE
transferred directly by the column and 50% through the fasteners (something
,D
that fastens things together)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
The process by which two plates are joints together by use
TE
,D
of rivet is called riveting.
r
re
tu
ec
Two types of rivet joints.
(L

re
1. Lap joint:-
ho
at
When the two members to
ep
R
be connected together by
e
ad
Pr
overlapping, and rivet inserted

in overlap section.
2. Butt joint:-
When the two members are to be connected by placing
P)
the members end to end and additional plate/plates
M
provided on either one or both sides to attach them
TE
,D
properly, then this joint is called butt joint.And the
r
re
tu
additional plate is called cover plate.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Provide a butt joint rather than a lap joint for main two
P)
reasons:
M
TE
,D
1. In the case of a double cover butt joint,the total shear
r
re
tu
force to be transmitted by the members is split into two
ec
(L

parts and the force acts on each half.
re
ho
at
R
2. In the case of a double cover butt joint,eccentricity of
eep
ad
forces does not exist and hence bending is eliminated,

Pr
whereas it exists in the case of a lap joint.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Nominal diameter of rivet (d):-
TE
Diameter of the cold shank before driving.
,Dr
re
tu
Gross diameter of rivet (D):-
ec
(L

The diameter of the hole is slightly
re
ho
greater than the diameter of the rivet shank.
at
R
As the rivet is heated and driven, the rivet fills the hole fully.
eep
ad
Pr
Gross diameter = Nominal diameter + 1.5 (If d ≤ 25 mm)

Gross diameter = Nominal diameter + 2.0 (If d > 25 mm)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Shop rivet:- a rivet driven in place in a shop.
P)
Field rivet:- a rivet driven in place on work in the field.
M
TE
,D
Hot driven rivet:- For driving the rivets, they are heated till they
r
re
tu
become red hot and are then placed in the hole.
ec
(L
Keeping the rivets pressed from one side, a number of blows are

re
ho
applied and a head at the other end is formed.
at
R
When the hot rivet so fitted cools it shrinks and presses the
ep
plates together.
e
ad
Cold driven rivets:- are driven at atmospheric temperature.

Pr
The cold driven rivets need larger pressure to form the head and
complete the driving.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Unwin’s formula
r
re
tu
ec
Diameter of the hole (d) = 6.05 √t ≈ 6 √t
(L

re
= 6 √16
ho
at
= 24 mm
R
eep
ad
Pr
Where, t is thickness of the plate.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
1. Shear failure of rivets:- The shear stress in the bolt may exceed
M
TE
the working shear stress in the bolt.
,D
Shear stresses are generated because the plates slip due to
r
re
applied forces.
tu
ec
Single shear occurring in a lap joint and double shear occurring in
(L

re
but joint.
ho
at
2. Bearing failure of rivets:- Bearing failure of a rivet occurs when
R
ep
the rivet is crushed by the plates.
e
ad
3. Tension/Tearing failure of plates:- The tensile stress in the plate

Pr
at the net cross-section may exceed the working tensile stress.

Tearing failure occurs when bolts are stronger than the plates.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

4. Shear failure of plates:- A plate may fail in shear along two
lines. This may occur when minimum proper edge distance is not
P)
provided.
M
5. Bearing failure of plates:- The plate may be crushed when the
TE
,D
bearing stress in the plate exceeds the working bearing stress.
r
re
Bearing failure of a plate may occur because of insufficient edge
tu
ec
distance in the riveted joint.
(L

re
6. Splitting/cracking failure of plates at the edges:- insufficient
ho
at
edge distance in the riveted joint. Splitting (cracking) of plate as
R
ep
takes place in such failure.
e
ad
Pr
Shearing, bearing and splitting failure of plates may be avoided by

providing adequate proper edge distance.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pitch of rivet (p):
The distance between two consecutive rivets measured parallel to the
P)
M
direction of the force in the structural member, lying on the same rivet
TE
line.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Minimum pitch = 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the rivet.

Maximum pitch = 32 times the thickness of the thinner outside plate
OR 300 mm whichever is less.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
The efficiency of a riveted joint is defined as the ratio of
M
TE
least strength of a riveted joint (Ps, Pb, Pt) to the strength
,D
of solid plate (P).
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Efficiency of riveted joint, per pitch width
re
ho
= {(p – d) t × Pt} / { p × t × Pt}
at
= (p-d) / p R
ep
e
ad
= (2.5d – d) / 2.5d
Pr
= 1.5/2.5
= 0.6 Or 60%
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
When a nut is tightened over a screw following stresses are
P)
induced:
M
(a) Tensile stresses due to stretching of the bolt
TE
,D
(b) Torsional shear stress due to frictional resistance at the
r
re
threads.
tu
ec
(c) Shear stress across threads
(L

re
(d) Compressive or crushing stress on the threads
ho
at
(e) Bending stress if the surfaces under the bolt head or nut are
R
ep
not perfectly normal to the bolt axis.
e
ad
Since none of the above mentioned stresses can be accurately

Pr
determined bolts are usually designed on the basis of direct

tensile stress with a large factor of safety.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
A stress reversal occurs when a given element of a load-
ec
(L

carrying member is subjected to a certain level of
re
ho
tensile stress followed by the same level of compressive
at
stress. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Leg of a Fillet Weld: The leg of a fillet weld is the distance
M
TE
from the root of the joint to the toe of the fillet weld.
,D
There are two legs in a fillet weld.
r
re
tu
Root of the Weld: This is the point at which the bottom of
ec
(L

the weld intersects the base metal surface.
re
ho
Face of the Weld:- This is exposed surface of the weld,
at
R
made by an arc or gas welding process on the side from
ep
e
ad
which the welding was done.

Pr
Toe of the Weld: This is the junction between the face of

the weld and the base metal.
Throat of a fillet weld:-
Actual throat:- The shortest distance between the weld root and
the face of a fillet weld.
P)
M
Theoretical throat:- The distance from the beginning of the joint
TE
root perpendicular to the hypotenuse of the largest right triangle
,Dr
re
that can be inscribed within the cross section of a fillet weld.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
Answer B (IS:800-2007, Page 78)
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Throat thickness = K × Size Of weld
P)
M
t=K×S
TE
S/t = ?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Sinθ = t / S
ho
at
Sin45° = t /S
R
ep
1 / √2 = t / S
e
ad
√2 / 1 = S / t
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
IS 800: 1984
P)
M
The direct stress on the cross-sectional area of axially loaded
TE
compression members should not exceed 0.6fy nor the
,Dr
permissible stress calculated using Merchant – Rankine formula.
re
tu
Permissible stress in axial compression (MPa):
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
Where,
ad
Pr
fy = yield stress of steel in Mpa

fcc = elastic critical stress in compression
n = factor assumed as 1.4
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
In a built-up section, the different components are
r
re
tu
connected together so that they act as a single column.
ec
(L

re
ho
Lacing is generally preferred in case of eccentric loads.
at
R
Battening is normally used for axially loaded columns and
eep
ad
in sections where the components are not far apart.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
A plate girder is a built up I-beam section, used to carry heavy
P)
M
loads.
TE
Web:- The deep central vertical plate.
,Dr
Web is responsible to resist shear developed in the plate girder.
re
tu
Flanges:- Flanges or flange plates are horizontal elements of plate
ec
(L

girder which are provided at the top (Compression) and bottom
re
ho
(Tension) and they are separated by the web.
at
R
The main purpose of flange plates is to resist the bending
ep
e
moment acting on the girder.

ad
Pr
Horizontal stiffeners Or Longitudinal stiffeners

Are provided in parallel to the flange plates.
These improve the buckling strength of the web portion.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Vertical stiffeners or ransverse stiffeners:-
Are provided at right angles to the flanges.
Based on their position classified
P)
M
1) End stiffeners Or Bearing stiffener
TE
Are provided at both the ends of the girder.
,Dr
They receive the load from the beam and transfer it to the
re
tu
support.
ec
(L

Play an important role by keeping the web safe from crushing.
re
ho
2) Intermediate stiffeners
at
R
Are required when concentrated loads acting on the plate girder.
ep
e
When the thickness of the web is very less, then the web may
ad
Pr
buckle due to shear.

Intermediate stiffeners are provided in order to improve the
buckling strength of the web.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Minimum thickness of the plates girders
ec
(L

Exposed to weather but accessible for painting, it is 6 mm;
re
ho
Exposed to weather but not accessible for painting, it is
at
8mm. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
The most critical location for failure due to web crippling is
P)
root of fillet since resisting area has the smallest value
M
TE
here.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
Top Flange 16t
Bottom Flange 20t

ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Bearing Stiffeners:-
M
TE
Are vertical stiffeners provided at points of application of
,D
concentrated loads and end reactions.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
When they are provided at the end

re
called as end bearing stiffeners.
ho
at
R
ep
The bearing stiffeners are provided
e
ad
to prevent the web from crushing

Pr
and buckling sideway, under the

action of concentrated load.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Splices in the web of the plate girder are designed to
ec
(L

resist the shear and moment at the spliced section.
re
ho
at
R
The splice plates are provided on each side of the web.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Overhead travelling cranes are used in factories and workshops
P)
to lift heavy materials, equipments, etc and to carry them from
M
TE
one place to the other.
,D
A trolley or a crab is mounted on the bridge. The trolley moves
r
re
along the bridge.
tu
ec
The bridge as a whole moves longitudinally on rails provided at
(L

re
the ends.
ho
at
The gantry girders are
R
ep
the girders which support
e
ad
the loads transmitted through

Pr
the travelling (moving) wheels

of the cranes.
Design Loads
1. Vertical loads from the crane,
2. The eccentricity effects induced by the vertical loads, and the impact
P)
M
factors,
TE
3. Internal (surge) thrust across the crane rail and
,D
4. Longitudinal horizontal thrust along the crane rail.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Bearing Stiffeners:-
M
TE
Are vertical stiffeners provided at points of application of
,D
concentrated loads and end reactions.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
When they are provided at the end

re
called as end bearing stiffeners.
ho
at
R
ep
The bearing stiffeners are provided
e
ad
to prevent the web from crushing

Pr
and buckling sideway, under the

action of concentrated load.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
Spacing of Trusses:
r
re
tu
Is determined by the spacing of the columns.
ec
(L

The spacing of the trusses may be such as to minimize the
re
ho
cost of roofing.
at
R
The spacing of trusses may be about 1/3 to 1/5 of the
ep
e
ad
span.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
The maximum permissible span of AC sheets 1680 mm

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
S is the spacing of the trusses, Ct ∝ 1/S → Ct = k1/S
P)
M
Ct is the cost of trusses/unit area, Cp ∝ S² → Cp = k2S²
TE
Cp is the cost of purlins/unit area,
,D
Cr is the cost of roof coverings/unit area, and Cr ∝ S → Cr = k3S
r
re
tu
C is the overall cost of the roof system/unit area.
ec
(L

re
Total cost C = Ct + Cp + Cr
ho
= k1/S + k2S² + k3S
at
R
For the overall cost is to be minimum, dC/dS should be zero.
ep
e
dC/dS = -k1/S² + 2k2S + k3

ad
Pr
0 = -k1/S + 2k2S + k3S

0 = -Ct + 2Cp + Cr
Ct = 2Cp + Cr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Panel Point – Also called a joint, it’s the location on a truss
where the web members and top or bottom chords
P)
intersect and are connected by metal connector plates.
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Purlins are beams used on trusses to support the sloping roof
M
TE
system.
,D
They are placed in an inclined position over the main rafters of
r
re
tu
the trusses.
ec
(L
To avoid bending in the top chords of roof trusses, it is

re
theoretically desirable to place purlins only at panel points.
ho
at
R
ep
Dead loads act through the centre of gravity of the purlin section
e
ad
Wind loads act normal to the roof trusses.

Pr
Thus, the purlin section is subjected to bending and twisting

resulting in unsymmetrical bending.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Live load on sloping roofs,
re
ho
0.75 - 0.2 × (15-10) = 0.65 kn/m²
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Continue........
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Internal air pressure depends upon the degree of
re
ho
permeability of roof or wall.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Internal pressure
Opening of wall area
(L

coefficient
re
ho
±0.2p Low permeability
at
R
(p is basic wind pressure)
ep < 5%
e
Medium permeability
ad
±0.5p
Pr
5-20%
Large permeability
±0.7p
> 20%
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
system. They are placed in an inclined position over the main
TE
,D
rafters of the trusses.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Dead loads act through the centre of gravity of the purlin section
e
ad
& Wind loads act normal to the roof trusses.

Pr
Thus, the purlin section is subjected to bending and twisting

resulting in unsymmetrical bending.
The recommended bending moments are
Mu = PL/10 and Mv = HL/10
It has to be noted that the purlins at the edges or end spans be designed
P)
M
considering local wind effects.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
Zone
33 m/s
39 m/s
47 m/s
50 m/s
44 m/s
55 m/s
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Seismic waves are the vibrations from earthquakes that travel
TE
through the Earth.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Seismic zones in Indian subcontinent is divided into four seismic
(L

zones (II, III, IV, and V) based on scientific inputs relating to
re
ho
seismicity, earthquakes occurred in the past and tectonic setup of
at
the region. R
eep
ad
Pr
Previously, earthquake zones divided into five zones but now the
first and second seismic zones were unified.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Yield strength is defined as being the amount of stress
,D
applied to a material that will deform it permanently.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The value of yield strength or stress depends on the grade
re
ho
of steel.
at
R
eep
ad
Mild steel has a yield strength of apprx 250 Mpa in tension

Pr
Fe415 grade has a yield strength of 415 Mpa (N/mm²)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Weight of tank, wind pressure, earthquake forces are
(L

re
important for supporting structures like column, bracing
ho
at
etc.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
A system of lateral or diagonal bracing is provided to
tu
ec
prevent the structure from twisting.
(L

re
ho
at
Open sections such as angles and channels are weak in
R
ep
torsion.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
The capacity of the smallest pressed steel tank is 1950 litre
ec
(L

and corresponding size of the tank is 1.25m × 1.25m ×
re
ho
1.25m.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
The main function of the bracing in steel structures that
r
re
tu
the lateral forces due to wind, earthquake etc. are
ec
(L

transmitted efficiently to the foundation of the building.
re
ho
at
R
2.5% of column load is added because braces support the
ep
e
ad
column laterally.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Steel Stacks OR Steel chimneys
P)
M
Are cylindrical in shape.
TE
,Dr
To provide larger base and greater
re
tu
stability, and to allow for easy entrance of
ec
(L

flue gases, the lower portion of the steel
re
ho
chimney is widened or flared out.
at
R
eep
The steel chimneys are constructed for
ad
Pr
the emission of flue gases to such a

height that the gases do not contaminate
the surrounding atmosphere.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Dead load of trusses:-
TE
(A) Hudson Formula:
,Dr
re
Weight per metre of trusses and bracings = 0.785A N/m
tu
ec
Where, A = Maximum net area of the tension chord
(L

(B) Fuller’s Formula:
re
ho
1. Weight per metre of truss bridges (spans 30 m to 90 m)
at
R
= (150 L + 5500) Newton/metre
ep
e
2. Weight per metre of plate girders (spans 10 m to 30 m)

ad
Pr
= (200 L + 1000) Newton/metre

where L = span of the bridge in metres
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Impact Factor:- Vehicular Live loads are multiplied with an
TE
,D
Impact Factor to accommodate this dynamic effect in the
r
re
design of bridges.
tu
ec
(L

re
Impact factor = 0.15 + 8/(6+L) ≤ 1
ho
at
= 0.15 + 8/(6+6)
R
ep
= 0.82
e
ad
Pr
Where L is loaded of span in metre

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Classification of Bridge according to the floor location:
P)
M
1. Deck type bridge
TE
Carriageway rests on the top of the main load carrying members.
,Dr
re
In the deck type plate girder bridge, the roadway or railway is
tu
ec
placed on the top flanges.
(L

In the deck type truss girder bridge, the roadway or railway is
re
ho
placed at the top chord level
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Through type bridge
Carriageway rests at the bottom level of the main load carrying
P)
members.
M
TE
In the through type plate girder bridge, the roadway or railway is
,D
placed at the level of bottom flanges.
r
re
In the through type truss girder bridge, the roadway or railway is
tu
ec
placed at the bottom chord level.
(L

re
The bracing of the top flange or lateral support of the top chord
ho
at
under compression is also required.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Half (Semi) through type bridge
The deck lies in between the top and the bottom of the
P)
M
main load carrying members.
TE
,D
The bracing of the top flange or top chord under
r
re
tu
compression is not done and part of the load carrying
ec
(L
system project above the floor level.

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Railway Bridges:
M
TE
For Railway bridges the horizontal load and load due to
,Dr
centrifugal force which may be assumed to act at a height
re
tu
ec
of 1830 mm above the rail level, is-
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Lateral bracings shall be designed to resist in addition to
(L

re
the wind and centrifugal loads, a lateral load due to
ho
at
racking forces.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Sway bracing is provided between the trusses in the plane of
M
either verticals or diagonals.
TE
,D
Portal bracing is sway bracing placed in the plane of the end
r
re
posts.
tu
ec
(L

re
Sway bracing is Designed to transfer 50% of the top panel wind
ho
at
load to Bottom Bracing.
R
eep
ad
Main function of Sway Bracing:-

Pr
1 Minimizing the relative vertical deflections between the trusses

2. Keeps the rectangular shape of the bridge cross section.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Sway bracing is provided between the trusses in the plane of
TE
either verticals or diagonals.
,Dr
Portal bracing is sway bracing placed in the plane of the end
re
tu
posts.
ec
(L

re
ho
Portal bracing is Designed for Wind force + 1¼ % of the
at
R
compression force in two end posts.
eep
ad
Pr
Main function of Portal Bracing:-

1. Transfer load from top of end posts to bearings.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Bridge bearings are structural devices installed between bridge
P)
M
substructure and superstructure to transfer the load.
TE
The pin of a rocker bearing in a bridge is designed for Bearing,
,Dr
re
Shear and Bending.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Elastic Strains:- Strain upto Elastic limit.
TE
,Dr
Elastic Limit- Recover original shape upon the removal of the load
re
tu
ec
(L

Strain Hardening- when a steel is strained beyond the yield point.
re
ho
at
R
Yield point Point at which the material starts to deform plastically
ep
e
After yield point, permanent plastic deformation occurs.

ad
Pr
Elastic Strain = Strain hardening/12 & Maximum Strain/200

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Lower & Upper Bound theorems are used to predict design loads.
P)
Lower Bound Theorem is used to predict the minimum load at
M
which there is an onset of plastic deformation or plastic hinge
TE
,D
formation at any point in the structure.
r
re
With further increase in the load, the moment at some other
tu
ec
point in the structure exceeds it’s plastic moment capacity
(L

re
leading to formation of one more plastic hinge.
ho
at
When sufficient number of plastic hinges are formed to finally
R
ep
destabilize the structure and cause its collapse. This is called a
e
ad
mechanism.
Pr
Upper Bound Theorem is used to predict the load that shall cause
such a mechanism to form.
Lower bound theorem is known as Statical method and the
upper bound is known as Mechanism method.
P)
M
TE
Statical theorem satisfies the equilibrium and plastic moment
,Dr
condition whereas Mechanism method satisfies equilibrium and
re
tu
mechanism conditions.
ec
(L

re
ho
1. Below the Lower Bound Theorem → Structure Safe
at
R
2. Between LBT & UBT → Some plastic hinges shall form and
eep
deformations shall increase.
ad
Pr
3. Above Upper bound plastic hinges will cause mechanism to

form and cause the structure to collapse.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

When a section is subjected to Axial force & Shear force, then the
re
ho
plastic moment capacity is reduced.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Procedure of Plastic Analysis
M
Kinematic Or Mechanism or Upper Bound Methods:-
TE
,D
1. Select the possible locations are plastic hinges such as load points,
r
re
frame joints, maximum bending moment points etc.
tu
ec
2. Select the independent and combined mechanism.
(L

Number of independent mechanism
re
ho
= Number of Plastic hinges – Number of Redundants
at
R
3. Form and solve the equilibrium equations for virtual work. Find the
ep
maximum collapse or ultimate load for forming a mechanism. The lowest
e
ad
load forming a mechanism is the upper bound of collapse load.

Pr
4. Check that the bending moment at every point in the structure is less
than or equal to the plastic moment.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
2.0
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
1.5
1.12 - 1.15
1.698 ≈ 1.7
Triangle 2.34

Answer D
The ratio of plastic moment and yield moment is called the Shape
P)
M
Factor (S). It depends only on the shape of the section.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Load factor :- it is the ratio of ultimate collapse load and working
ho
load. It is usually constant.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
The ratio of plastic moment and yield moment is called the shape
P)
M
factor (S). It depends only on the shape of the section.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Load factor :- it is the ratio of ultimate collapse load and working
ho
load. It is usually constant.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Civil Engineering Pathshala

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Shape Factor (S):- Ratio of plastic moment & yield moment
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
It depends only on the shape of the section.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
1. Equilibrium Condition:- Sum of the forces and moments acting
M
on the structure must be equal to zero.
TE
,D
2. Yield / Plastic Moment Condition:- The plastic moment must
r
re
not be exceeded any where in the structure.
tu
ec
3. Mechanism Condition:- At ultimate collapse load, the number
(L

re
of plastic hinges must be just enough to form a mechanism.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

This is due to favorable redistribution of moments from
re
ho
zones of high moments to zones of low moment.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
Principle of Virtual Work→ “If a particle is in equilibrium under
(L

re
the action of a number of forces, the total work done by the
ho
at
forces for a small VIRTUAL DISPLACEMENT of the particle is zero”.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
1. Elastic Stage (M < My)- For low values of BM(M), the maximum
P)
extreme fibre stress will be within the elastic range.
M
TE
,D
2. Elastic-Plastic Stage (My < M < Mp)- With further increase in
r
re
BM, yielding of extreme fibres will start.
tu
ec
(L

re
3. Plastic Stage (M=Mp)- With further increase in BM a stage will
ho
at
come when the entire cross section will yield and will act as a
R
ep
plastic hinge. The corresponding BM is called plastic plastic
e
ad
moment (Mp).
Pr
The Beam can not resist bending moment more than (Mp).
The NA of fully plastic section passes through the equal area axis.
PLASTIC HINGE
P)
M
TE
→ When the section is completely yielded, the section is fully
,Dr
plastic.
re
tu
ec
(L

→ A fully plastic section behaves like a plastic hinge.
re
ho
at
R
→ Plastic hinge is defined as an yielded zone due to bending in
eep
the structural member, at which Large Rotations can occur at a
ad
Pr
section at Constant Plastic Moment (Mp).

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
IS 800-1984
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
IS 800-1984
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
IS 800-1984
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
IS 800-1984

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
IS 800-1984
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Lug Angle can be used effectively in designing of tension
,Dr
member.
re
tu
ec
(L

Lug angle is small piece of angle used to connect outstand legs of
re
ho
the members to the gusset plate.
at
R
eep
The purpose of lug angle is to reduce the length of connection to
ad
Pr
the gusset plate and to reduce shear lag effect.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Stringer:- is an inclined member that supports the threads of
stair.
P)
M
Lintel Beam:- Lintel is a horizontal structural members spanning
TE
and usually carrying load above an opening.
,Dr
Opening may be like the opening of doors and windows.
re
tu
Lintels are provided above the doors and windows to support
ec
(L

load of the wall above it.
re
ho
Spandrel Beam:- are load bearing structural elements around the
at
R
perimeter of a floor of a building.
ep
e
It support loads of wall and some roof load also.

ad
Pr
Header Beam:- is a flooor or roof beam placed between two long

beams that supports the ends of the tailpieces or accept
common joints in order to frame around an opening.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Web splices:- A joint in the web plate provided
M
to increase its length is known as...
TE
,D
Web splice is designed to resist the actual
r
re
shear at the section.
tu
ec
The splice plate are provided on each side of
(L

re
the web.
ho
at
Flange splices:- A joint in the flange element
R
ep
provided to increase the length of flange plate
e
ad
is known as...
Pr
Flange splice is designed for actual BM at the

section.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
IS 800-1984

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
Answer D
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
Answer B
re
tu
ec
(L

ISLB – Indian Standard Light Weight Beam
re
ho
ISWB – Indian Standard Wide Flange Beam
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Increasing carbon content increases hardness and
tu
ec
strength.
(L

re
ho
at
But carbon also increases brittleness and reduces
R
ep
weldability.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Fatigue failure is the formation of cracks due to a cyclic
tu
ec
load.
(L

re
ho
at
Fatigue cracks normally initiate at stress concentrations,
R
ep
structural discontinuities.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Shape Factor Type of Cross Section
re
tu
ec
2.34 Triangular
(L

re
2.00 Diamond
ho
at
1.90-1.95 R T - Section
eep
1.7 Solid Circle

ad
Pr
1.5 Square & Rectangular

1.12-1.15 I - Section
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
IS 800:1984

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B IS 800:1984
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Fatigue failure is the formation of cracks due to a cyclic
e
ad
load.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

(Longitudinal)
(Transverse)
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Ductility:- Ability of material to deform under tensile stress.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Yield strength or Yield stress:- stress corresponding to
(L

the yield point at which the material begins to deform plastically.
re
ho
at
R
Toughness:- The area under the stress-strain curve.
eep
ad
Pr
Strain energy:- Energy stored in a body due to deformation.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Gross diameter Or Diameter of rivet hole
TE
,D
= Nominal diameter + 1.5 (If d ≤ 25 mm)
r
re
= Nominal diameter + 2.0 (If d > 25 mm)
tu
ec
(L

re
PITCH is centre to centre spacing of rivets
ho
at
in a row, measured along direction of load.
R
eep
ad
GAUGE is the distance between two consecutive rivets of

Pr
adjacent row measured at right angles to the direction of load.

P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Maximum pitch, p = 12t Or 200 mm → whichever is less

= 12 × 6 Or 200 mm
= 72 mm ← Answer
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Gross diameter Or Diameter of rivet hole
TE
,D
= Nominal diameter + 1.5 (If d ≤ 25 mm)
r
re
= Nominal diameter + 2.0 (If d > 25 mm)
tu
ec
(L

re
Diameter of rivet hole = 18 + 1.5 = 19.5 mm / 10 = 1.95 cm
ho
at
R
ep
The net cross section area of plate
e
ad
= (B – nd) × t
Pr
= (30 – 1 × 1.95) × 1 = 28.05 cm²

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
When the applied load is non-ecentric (concentric). It is assumed
ec
(L

that all the rivet in the riveted connection share the applied load
re
ho
equally. This assumption is valid when applied load is equal to the
at
failure load. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
At the location of plastic hinge, curvature is infinite and moment
ec
(L

is equal to plastic moment capacity while radius of curvature at
re
ho
plastic hinge zero.
at
R
It means that infinite rotation can occur at fully plastic section.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C The location of shear centre for the Z-purlin coincide
with the centroid. Therefore both the orientations are
structurally equally efficient.
P)
M
Shear centre:- point on the beam section where load is applied
TE
and no twisting is produced.
,Dr
re
tu
system.
ec
(L

They are placed in an inclined position over the main rafters of
re
ho
the trusses.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Panel Point – Also called a joint, it’s the location on a truss where
the web members and top or bottom chords intersect and are
connected by metal connector plates.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Given,
M
Shape factor = 1.12 & FOS = 1.5
TE
,D
Allowable stress is increased by 20% , Load Factor =?
r
re
tu
ec
FOS = Yield stress / Allowable stress
(L

re
With increase in allowable stress, the factor of safety will reduce
ho
at
to = 1.5/1.2 = 1.25
R
ep
e
ad
Load factor = FOS × SF

Pr
= 1.25 × 1.12
= 1.40
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Web is relatively large in depth and thin. It is poor in compression
tu
ec
and hence, the possibility of vertical and diagonal buckling is
(L

re
always there. Either the web is stiffened vertically as well as
ho
at
horizontally or the compressive stress in the web should be low
R
ep
enough to prevent buckling.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
1. The modulus of elasticity (E) of aluminum is about one third
M
that of steel.
TE
,D
EAluminum (69 Gpa) ≈ ⅓Esteel (200 Gpa)
r
re
tu
ec
2. The coefficient of thermal expansion (K at 20°C) of aluminum is
(L

re
double that of steel.
ho
at
KAluminum (24×10-6) ≈ KSteel (13×10-6)
R
eep
ad
3. & 4. Aluminium has greater strength to unit weight ratio

Pr
compared to steel therefore they are being increasingly used for

structural purposes.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Actual throat – The shortest distance between
M
TE
the weld root and the face of a fillet weld.
,Dr
re
tu
Throat being the minimum section will carry maximum
ec
(L

stress. Thus, it is weakest.
re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
IS:800-1984

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
Crane girder is designed as laterally unsupported beam carrying
TE
,D
vertical and horizontal load at the level of the top flange.
r
re
tu
ec
The channel section provides at top flange areas to resist bending
(L

re
in horizontal plane due to horizontal forces acting in transverse
ho
at
direction →
R
ep
1. It increases moment of inertia about vertical axis.
e
ad
2. Improve lateral buckling strength.

Pr
3. Increase the torsional stiffness of girder.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,Dr
t1 = the minimum of
re
tu
the nail headside
ec
(L

member thickness
re
ho
and the nail
at
R
ep pointside
penetration.
e
ad
t2 = the central
Pr
member thickness
for a connection.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Endurance limit:- is the stress level below which an infinite
M
number of loading cycles can be applied to a material without
TE
,D
causing fatigue failure.
r
re
tu
ec
Creep:- deformation under sustained load.
(L

re
ho
at
Ultimate strength:- is the maximum stress that a material can
R
ep
withstand before it breaks or weakens.
e
ad
Pr
Residual stresses:- are stresses that remain in a solid material

after the original cause of the stresses has been removed.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
When external tensile load is applied on a material, initially it undergoes
M
elastic deformation and then plastic deformation starts.
TE
,Dr
re
Elastic Deformation:- The recovery of the original dimensions of a
tu
ec
deformed body when the load is removed.
(L

The limiting load beyond which the material no longer behaves elastically
re
ho
is the Elastic Limit.
at
R
ep
Plastic Deformation:- If the elastic limit is exceeded, the body will
e
ad
experience a permanent deformation when the load is removed.

Pr
Brittle Material:- When an external
force is applied. Brittle material breaks
with very small elastic deformation
P)
M
and without plastic deformation.
TE
For brittle materials elastic limit,
,D
yield strength, ultimate tensile strength
r
re
tu
and breaking strength are the same.
ec
(L

re
Ductile Material:- exhibits elastic and
ho
plastic deformation.
at
R
ep
e
Plastic Material:- Similar to ductile materials, some plastic materials

ad
Pr
exhibit elastic properties upto proportional limit. But plastic material

requires very less stress compared to ductile material to produce
deformation.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Stress-Strain curve represents the behavior of material when an
P)
M
external force is applied.
TE
Upper Yield Point (B) :- is the point at which maximum external
,Dr
load or stress is required to initiate plastic deformation inside
re
tu
the material. Strength of material corresponding to Point B is
ec
(L

known as Yield Strength.
re
ho
Lower Yield Point (C) :- After point C, material length will increase
at
R
with a very small increase in external load. OR It is the point at
eep
which minimum load is required to maintain the plastic behavior
ad
Pr
of the material.
The upper yield point in the stress-strain curve in structural steel
can be avoided by hot working.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer D

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Design Of
tu
ec
(L

re
Steel
ho
at
R
ep
Structure
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
The effective length of fillet weld
tu
ec
= Overall (Total) length – 2 × weld size.
(L

re
ho
at
The effective length of a fillet should not be less than 4 times the
R
ep
weld size.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
First the hinges will form at A and C simultaneously because the
re
tu
carry over factor for support A is zero while support C transfers
ec
(L

half of the moment to fixed support on the right side.
re
ho
The hinge at C will form 0.5Mp while at A the moment Mp is
at
required. R
eep
Now due to redistribution of moments the hinge at B will form.
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
To prevent lateral buckling, the minimum width of the beam is
(L

re
kept equal to are more than L/50 and d/3.
ho
at
In no case width should be less than 50 mm.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Spaced columns:- consist of
M
two or more parallel single
TE
,D
members separated at specific
r
re
locations along their length by
tu
ec
blocking and rigidily tied
(L

together at their ends.
re
ho
at
R
Built-up columns:- consists of
ep
two or more members join
e
ad
together by mechanical
Pr
fasteners such that the

Assembly act as a single unit
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
tu
ec
🙏☺
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(01 to 15)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 1) Assertion A: The consumption of water increases with
increase in the distribution pressure.
P)
M
TE
Reason R: Higher distribution pressure causes more loss and
,D
waste of water.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Select your answer according to the coding system given below

re
ho
at
A. Both A and R are true and R is correct explanation of A
ep
R
B. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of R
e
ad

Pr

Answer A
Factors affecting per capita demand or consumption of water:-
P)
M
TE
,D
1. Size of city – ↑
r
re
2. Presence of industries ↑
tu
ec
3. Climatic conditions
(L

re
4. Habits of people and their economic status
ho
5. Quality of water ↑
at
R
6. Pressure in the distribution system ↑
ep
e
ad
7. Efficiency of water works administration ↑

Pr
8. Cost of water ↓
9. Charging method: Metering or fixed monthly rate.
Q. 2) The per capita consumption of a locality is affected
by
P)
i) Climatic conditions
M
TE
ii) Quality of water
,Dr
iii) Distribution pressure
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i)
R
ep
e
ad

Pr

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 3) Which of the following causes a decrease in per
M
TE
capita consumption
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Use of metering system
(L

re
B. Good quality of water
ho
at
C. Better standard of living of the people
R
ep
D. Hotter climate
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 4) The hourly variation factor is usually taken as
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 1.5
ec
(L
B. 1.8

re
ho
C. 2.0
at
D. 2.7 R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
1. Seasonal variation:- The demand peaks during summer. Firebreak outs
M
are generally more in summer, increasing demand. So, there is seasonal
TE
,D
variation .
r
re
2. Daily variation:- depends on the activity. People draw out more water
tu
on Sundays and Festival days, thus increasing demand on these days.
ec
(L

3. Hourly variations:- are very important as they have a wide range.
re
ho
During active household working hours i.e. from six to ten in the morning
at
and four to eight in the evening, the bulk of the daily requirement is
R
ep
taken
e
ad
Pr
Maximum hourly demand of maximum day i.e. Peak demand

= 1.5 x average hourly demand
Q. 5) If the average daily consumption of a city is 100,000
P)
M
m³, the maximum daily consumption on peak hourly
TE
,D
demand will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 100000 m³

re
ho
B. 150000 m³
at
C. 180000 m³ R
ep
e
D. 270000 m³
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Maximum hourly demand of maximum day i.e. Peak demand
M
TE
,D
= 1.5 x average hourly demand
r
re
tu
ec
= 1.5 x (1.8 x average daily demand)
(L

re
ho
at
= 2.7 x average daily demand
R
ep
e
ad
= 2.7 × 100000
Pr
= 270000 m³
P)
M
Q. 6) The distribution mains are designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Maximum daily demand
ec
(L
B. Maximum hourly demand

re
ho
C. Average daily demand
at
R
D. Maximum hourly demand on maximum day
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Maximum hourly demand on maximum day
(L

re
ho
at
= 2.7 × Average daily demand
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 7) As compared to geometrical increase method of
M
TE
forecasting population, arithmetical increase method gives
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Lesser value
(L

re
B. Higher value
ho
at
C. Same value
R
ep
D. Accurate value
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 8) The population of a town in three consecutive years
P)
are 5000, 7000 and 8400 respectively. The population of
M
TE
the town in the fourth consecutive year according to
,Dr
geometrical increase method is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 9500
ho
at
B. 9800
R
ep
C. 10100
e
ad
D. 10920
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 9) The suitable method of forecasting population for a
M
TE
young and rapidly increasing city is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Arithmetical increase method
(L

re
B. Geometrical increase method
ho
at
C. Incremental increase method
R
ep
D. Graphical method
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
A. Arithmetical increase method:- Old, Large and established
P)
M
cities.
TE
,Dr
re
B. Geometrical increase method:- Young and rapidly grown cities
tu
ec
with unlimited scope of expansion.
(L

re
ho
C. Incremental increase method:- Combination of above two
at
methods R
ep
e
ad
Pr
D. Graphical method:- This method gives very approximate

results.
P)
Q. 10) The depression of water table in a well due to
M
TE
pumping will be maximum
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. At a distance R from the well
(L

re
B. Close to the well
ho
at
C. At a distance R/2 from well
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 11) The devices which are installed for drawing water
M
TE
from the sources are called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Aquifers
(L

re
B. Aquiclude
ho
at
C. Filters
R
ep
D. Intakes
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Aquifer:- Aquifers are the permeable formations having structures which
M
appreciable quantity of water to move through them under ordinary field
TE
conditions. Thus these are the geologic formations in which ground water
,Dr
occurs (i.e. sands and gravels)
re
tu
Aquicludes:- Aquicludes are the impermeable formations which contains
ec
(L
water but are not capable of transmitting or supplying a significant

re
quantity (i.e. clays)
ho
at
Intake:- Intake structures are used for collecting water from the surface
R
ep
sources such as river, lake, and reservoir and conveying it further to the
e
ad
water treatment plant. These structures are masonry or concrete

Pr
structures and provides relatively clean water, free from pollution, sand
and objectionable floating material.
P)
Q. 12) Select the correct relationship between porosity (N),
M
TE
specific yield (y) and specific retention (R)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. N = y + R
(L

re
B. y = N + R
ho
at
C. R = N + y
R
ep
D. R > (N + y)
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Porosity (N):- The ratio of volume of voids or pores in the material to its
P)
total volume.
M
TE
Specific yield (y): - The volume of water released from ground water
,D
storage per unit surface area of aquifer per unit decline in water table is
r
re
known as specific yield.
tu
ec
Specific retention (R):- The ratio of the volume of water that a given body
(L

re
of rock or soil will hold against the pull of gravity to the volume of the
ho
body itself.
at
R
ep
Specific yield tells how much water is available for use and specific
e
ad
retention tells how much water remains in the rocks after it is drained by
Pr
gravity.
N=y+R
P)
Q. 13) The type of valve, which is provided on the suction
M
TE
pipe in a the tube well, is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Air relief valve
(L

re
B. Reflux value
ho
at
C. Pressure relief valve
R
ep
D. Sluice value
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
A. Air Release Valves/Air Relief Valve:- function to release air
P)
M
TE
,D
B. Check valve/clack valve/non-return valve/reflux valve/retention
r
re
valve/one-way valve is a valve that normally allows fluid to flow
tu
ec
through it in only one direction.
(L

re
ho
at
C. Pressure relief valve is a type of safety valve used to control or
R
ep
limit the pressure
e
ad
Pr
D. Gate valve/sluice valve are linear motion valves and are used to
start or stop the flow of the fluid in piping.
P)
M
Q. 14) The maximum discharge of a tube-well is about
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 5 liters/sec
ec
(L
B. 50 liters/sec

re
ho
C. 500 liters/sec
at
D. 1000 liters/sec R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 15) As compared to shallow-wells, deep wells have
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. More depth
ec
(L
B. Less depth

re
ho
C. More discharge
at
d. Less discharge R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(16 to 30)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 16) Ground water is usually free from
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Suspended impurities
ec
(L
B. Dissolved impurities

re
ho
C. Both suspended and dissolved impurities
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
1. Suspended Impurities: - These impurities impact turbidity,
TE
color and odour to water.
,Dr
a) Inorganic: - Clay, sand, silt and mineral eroded from the land.
re
tu
b) Organic: -Animal body minerals, Vegetables etc.
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Colloidal impurities: - Small particles remain dispersed in
at
R
colloidal form. These include finely divided silica, clay, etc.
eep
ad
Pr
3. Dissolved impurities: - contain inorganic salts, gases and

dissolved organic matter.
P)
Q. 17) The polluted water is one which
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Contains pathogenic bacteria
tu
ec
B. Consists of undesirable substances rendering it unfit for
(L

re
drinking and domestic use
ho
at
C. Is safe and suitable for drinking and domestic use
R
ep
D. Is contaminated
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
1. Pure water: - chemically pure composition of H2O
P)
M
TE
,D
2. Potable water: - Which is fit for drinking.
r
re
tu
ec
3. Mineral water: - Which contains desirable minerals.
(L

re
ho
4. Polluted water: - Which contains undesirable substance that is
at
R
harmful but don’t contains pathogenic bacteria
ep
e
ad
Pr
5. Contaminated water: - It is polluted water in which contains

pathogenic bacteria.
P)
M
Q. 18) Which of the following is not a water borne disease
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Dysentery
ec
(L
B. Cholera

re
ho
C. Typhoid
at
D. Maleria R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Water borne diseases: -
r
re
1. Cholera
tu
ec
2. Guinea worm disease
(L

re
3. Typhoid
ho
at
4. Dysentery
R
ep
5. Malaria – Most commonly associated with mosquitoes and
e
ad
germs in contaminated water.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 19) The most common cause of acidity in water is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Carbon dioxide
ec
(L
B. Oxygen

re
ho
C. Hydrogen
at
D. Nitrogen R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Carbon dioxide is the most common cause of acidity in water.
M
TE
,D
While carbon dioxide react with water to form carbonic acid:
r
re
tu
ec
CO2 + H2O ←→ H2CO3
(L

re
ho
at
H2CO3 can then lose one or both of its hydrogen ions:
R
ep
e
ad
H2CO3 ←→ HCO3– + H+ ........... HCO3– ←→ CO3-2 + H+

Pr
The released hydrogen ions decrease the pH of water.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 20) The phenolic compounds in public water supply
M
TE
should not be more than
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.1 ppm
(L

re
B. 0.01 ppm
ho
at
C. 0.001 ppm
R
ep
D. 0.0001 ppm
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Phenolic compounds exist in water bodies due to the discharge of
M
polluted wastewater from industrial, agricultural and domestic activities
TE
,D
into water bodies.
r
re
tu
ec
These compounds both severe and long‐lasting effects on both humans
(L

and animals.
re
ho
at
They act as carcinogens (a substance capable of causing cancer in living
R
ep
tissue) and cause damage to the red blood cells and the liver, even at low
e
ad
concentrations.
Pr
It should not be more than 0.001 ppm

P)
Q. 21) The maximum permissible limit for fluoride in
M
TE
drinking water is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.1 mg/litre
(L

re
B. 1.5 mg/litre
ho
at
C. 5 mg/litre
R
ep
D. 10 mg/litre
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Fluoride is found naturally in soil, water, and foods. It is also produced
synthetically for use in drinking water, toothpaste, mouthwashes and
P)
various chemical products.
M
TE
,D
Water authorities add fluoride to the municipal water supply, because
r
re
studies have shown that adding it in areas where fluoride levels in the
tu
ec
water are low can reduce the prevalence of tooth decay in the local
(L

re
population.
ho
at
R
Too much fluoride can lead to dental fluorosis or skeletal fluorosis, which
ep
e
can damage bones and joints.

ad
Pr
As per World Health Organization (WHO) desirable limit of flourides is 1.5

mg/litres
P)
Q. 22) Standard EDTA (ethylene diamine tetra acetic acid)
M
TE
solution is used to determine the
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Hardness in water
(L

re
B. Turbidity in water
ho
at
C. Dissolved oxygen in water
R
ep
D. Residual chlorine in water
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
The standard EDTA solution is used to determine water hardness.
M
TE
The total calcium and magnesium content.
,D
Expressed as equivalent calcium carbonate mass concentration.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 23) Is coliform bacteria is present in a sample of water,
then the coliform test to be conducted is
P)
M
i) Presumptive coliform
TE
,D
ii) Confirmed coliform test
r
re
tu
iii) Completed coliform test
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Answer D
Coliform test are performed in three stages
P)
M
1. Presumptive stage: - By selecting a suitable set of sampling
TE
,D
tubes, the raw water sample is filled and culture medium is
r
re
added then the entire set is kept in incubation.
tu
ec
After incubation, if gas is formed in any one of sampling tube
(L

re
then it’s reported as positive test or else negative test.
ho
at
R
2. Confirmed stage: - The positive set obtain in the presumptive
eep
ad
stage is again mixed with the other culture medium and

Pr
incubated. At this stage if gas is formed then it indicate that the

presence of bacteria is confirmed.
P)
3. Completed stage: - The positive set obtain in confirmed stage
M
TE
is again added with the culture medium and incubated then the
,D
total number of bacteria colonies expressed as MPN (most
r
re
tu
probable number) per 100 ml of water. This stage is known as
ec
(L
completed stage of E-coli test.

re
ho
at
R
ep
For a drinking water MPN = Nil
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 24) Alkalinity in water is expressed is milligrams per litre
M
TE
in terms of equivalent
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Calcium carbonate
(L

re
B. Magnesium carbonate
ho
at
C. Sodium carbonate
R
ep
D. Calcium hydroxide
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
Total alkalinity is measured by collecting a water sample, and
,D
measuring the amount of acid needed to bring the sample to a
r
re
tu
pH of 4.2.
ec
(L

re
ho
At this pH all the alkaline compounds in the sample are used up.
at
R
ep
The result is reported as milligrams per liter (mg/l) of calcium
e
ad
carbonate.
Pr
P)
Q. 25) The product of H+ ions and OH- ions in a stronger
M
TE
alkali is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 1
ho
at
C. 10-1
R
ep
D. 10-14
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
The lower the pH number, the more acidic the water is.
The higher the number, the more basic it is.
P)
M
A pH of 7 is considered neutral water.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 26) Which of the following values of PH represents a
M
TE
stronger acid
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2
(L

re
B. 5
ho
at
C. 7
R
ep
D. 10
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 27) Turbidity is measured on
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Standard silica scale
ec
(L
B. Standard cobal scale

re
ho
C. Standard platinum scale
at
D. Platinum cobalt scale R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
Turbidity defined is the resistance offered by the water sample to
P)
M
the passing of the light.
TE
,D
Turbidity due to: -
r
re
1. Presence of suspended particles (clay, silt etc)
tu
ec
2. Presence of organic and inorganic matter.
(L

re
3. Presence of bacteria, algae, fungi etc.
ho
4. Decomposed vegetational matter.
at
R
ep
e
ad
- Turbidity is measured on the “Silica scale”

Pr
- 1mg silica mixed in 1 litre water (1 mg/litre or ppm)

- Permissible value of turbidity for drinking water is 5 to 10 ppm
P)
Q. 28) On standard silica scale, the turbidity in drinking
M
TE
water should be limited to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10 ppm
(L

re
B. 20 ppm
ho
at
C. 30 ppm
R
ep
D. 50 ppm
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 29) Residual chlorine in water is determined by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Starch iodide method
ec
(L
B. Orthotolidine method

re
ho
C. Both A and B
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
The amount of residual chlorine left in the chlorinated water after the
TE
,D
required contact period, can be determined by using any of the following
r
re
tests:
tu
1. Starch iodide method
ec
(L

2. Orthotolidine Test
re
ho
In this test, 10 ml of chlorinated sample of water is taken after the
at
required contact period, in a glass tube. To this 0.1 ml of orthotolidine
R
ep
solution is added. The color formed is observed after 5 minutes.
e
ad
The of yellow color normally indicates the presence of chlorine in the

Pr
water. The more yellow the color, the greater, is the chlorine residual.
P)
M
Q. 30) Orthotolidine test is used for determination of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Dissolved oxygen
ec
(L
B. Residual chlorine

re
ho
C. Biochemical oxygen demand
at
D. Dose of coagulant R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(31 to 45)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 31) If the total hardness of water is greater than its total
M
TE
alkalinity, the carbonate hardness will be equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Total alkalinity
(L

re
B. Total hardness
ho
at
C. Total hardness – Total alkalinity
R
ep
D. Non carbonate hardness
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Hardness are generally expressed as ppm of calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
P)
1. Temporary hardness:-
M
TE
-Due to cabonates and bicarbonates of ca and mg ions.
,D
-Also know as carbonate hardness or alkaline hardness.
r
re
-Remove easily by boiling of water or addition of lime.
tu
ec
2. Permanent hardness:-
(L

re
-Due to other salts.
ho
-Also know as non-carbonate or non-alkaline hardness.
at
R
-Remove by special method i.e. Lime soda process, zeolite process etc.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Alkalinity test measures the level of bicarbonates, carbonates, and

hydroxides in water and test results are generally expressed as ppm of
calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
P)
Total hardness = Carbonate hardness(CH)+Non-carbonate hardness(NCH)
M
TE
,D
1. If Total hardness > Alkalinity
r
re
then Carbonate hardness = Alkalinity
tu
ec
and NCH = TH – CH
(L

re
ho
2. If Total hardness ≤ Alkalinity
at
R
then Carbonate hardness = Total hardness
ep
and NCH = TH - CH
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 32) The amount of residual chlorine left in public water
M
TE
supply for safety against pathogenic bacteria is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.01 to 0.05 ppm
(L

re
B. 0.05 to 0.5 ppm
ho
at
C. 0.5 to 1.0 ppm
R
ep
D. 1.0 to 5.0 ppm
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Dosage of chlorine = Demand of chlorine + Residual chlorine/freechlorine
M
TE
,D
1) Demand of chlorine:- A sufficient amount of chlorine was added
r
re
initially to the water to inactivate the bacteria and some viruses that
tu
ec
cause disease.
(L

re
ho
2)Residual chlorine:- The water is protected from recontamination during
at
storage. R
ep
e
ad
The amount of residual chlorine left in public water supply for safety
Pr
against pathogenic bacteria is about 0.05 to 0.5 mg/L (ppm or parts per
million)
Q. 33) The dissolved oxygen level in natural unpolluted
P)
M
waters at normal temperature is found to be of the order
TE
,D
of
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1 mg/litre

re
ho
B. 10 mg/litre
at
C. 100 mg/litre R
eep
D. 1000 mg/litre
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The higher the DO, better the water quality.
TE
,Dr
re
If dissolved oxygen levels are too low, some fish and other
tu
ec
organisms may not be able to survive.
(L

re
As dissolved oxygen levels in waterdrop below 5.0 mg/litre,
ho
at
aquatic life is put under stress.
R
eep
ad
The dissolved oxygen level in natural unpolluted waters at normal

Pr
temperature is 10 mg/litre
P)
Q. 34) The velocity of flow of water in a sedimentation
M
TE
tank is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 5 to 10 cm/sec
(L

re
B. 15 to 30 cm/sec
ho
at
C. 15 to 30 cm/minute
R
ep
D. 15 to 30 cm/hour
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Sedimentation is the process of removing suspended coarser
P)
M
particles in water by settling down them to the bottom of tank.
TE
,Dr
re
Design Details:-
tu
ec
1. Detention period: The average time taken by water to travel
(L

re
from inlet to outlet.
ho
-Plain sedimentation = 4 hours
at
R
-Sedimentation With coagulation = 2 – 2.5 hours.
eep
ad
Pr
2. Velocity of flow: Not greater than 30 cm/min (horizontal flow

of particles)
3. Tank dimensions: L : B = (3 to 5) : 1
P)
M
TE
,D
4. Surface Overflow Rate: The volume of water applied per unit
r
re
time per unit horizontal surface area is called over flow velocity.
tu
ec
It is also called as surface loading rate or surface over flow rate.
(L

re
ho
-Plain sedimentation 12000 to 18000 L/d/m² tank area;
at
R
ep
e
ad
-Sedimentation with coagulation 24000 to 30000 L/d/m²tankarea

Pr
Q. 35) The length of rectangular sedimentation tank
P)
should not be more than
M
TE
,Dr
A. B
re
tu
ec
B. 2B
(L

re
C. 4B
ho
at
D. 8B
R
ep
e
ad
Where B is the width of the tank

Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 36) The overflow rate for plain sedimentation tanks is
M
TE
about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 500 to 750 litres/hour/m²
(L

re
B. 1000 to 1250 litres/hour/m²
ho
at
C. 1250 to 1500 litres/hour/m²
R
ep
D. 1500 to 2000 litres/hour/m²
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 37) Percentage of bacterial load that can be removed
M
TE
from water by the process of plain sedimentation is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10 to 25
(L

re
B. 50
ho
at
C. 75
R
ep
D. 100
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Plain sedimentation tank can remove about 60% of suspended
re
ho
matter and about 75% of bacterial load from water.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 38) The settling velocity of a particle in a sedimentation
M
TE
tank depends on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Depth of tank
(L

re
B. Surface area of tank
ho
at
C. Both depth and surface area of tank
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 39) The settling velocity of a particle in sedimentation
M
TE
tank increases if
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Particle size is decreased
(L

re
B. The surface area of tank is increased
ho
at
C. The depth of tank is decreased
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 40) For given discharge, the efficiency of sedimentation
M
TE
tank can be increased by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increasing the depth of tank
(L

re
B. Decreasing the depth of tank
ho
at
C. Increasing the surface area of tank
R
ep
D. Decreasing the surface area of tank
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A sedimentation tank will be more efficient when smaller
(L

re
particles are removed which requires low overflow rate and
ho
hence large surface area of tank
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 41) The detention period and overflow rate respectively
P)
M
for plain sedimentation as compared to sedimentation
TE
,D
with coagulation are generally
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Less and more

re
ho
B. Less and less
at
C. More and less R
ep
e
D. More and more

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Detention period: The average time taken by water to travel from
TE
inlet to outlet.
,Dr
re
tu
-Sedimentation with coagulation = 2 – 2.5 hours.
ec
(L

re
ho
Surface Overflow Rate: The volume of water applied per unit time
at
R
per unit horizontal surface area is called over flow velocity. It is
ep
also called as surface loading rate or surface over flow rate.

e
ad
Pr
-Plain sedimentation 12000 to 18000 L/d/m² tank area;

-Sedimentation with coagulation 24000 to 30000 L/d/m²tankarea
Q. 42) The amount of coagulant needed for coagulation of
water increases with
i) increase in turbidity of water
P)
M
ii) decrease in turbidity of water
TE
,D
iii) increase in temperature of water
r
re
tu
iv) decrease in temperature of water
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii) R
ep
e
B. (i) and (iv)

ad
Pr
C. (ii) and (iii)

D. (ii) and (iv)
Answer B
P)
Coagulation/flocculation is a process used to remove turbidity,
M
color, and some bacteria from water..
TE
,D
These particles have a negative charge, so the positively
r
re
charged coagulant chemicals neutralize them during coagulation
tu
ec
(L

re
1. For high alkalinity water, an excessive amount
ho
at
of coagulant may be required to lower the pH to the optimal pH
R
ep
ranges (alum pH 6 to 8, iron 5.5 to 6.5).
e
ad
Pr
2. Temperature also impacts the coagulation process because

it affects the viscosity of the water.
P)
Q. 43) Alum as a coagulant is found to be most effective
M
TE
when pH range of water is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2 to 4
(L

re
B. 4 to 6
ho
at
C. 6 to 8
R
ep
D. 8 to 10
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 44) The detention period in coagulation tanks is usually
M
TE
kept as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1 to 2 minutes
(L

re
B. 30 to 45 minutes
ho
at
C. 2 to 6 hours
R
ep
D. 2 to 6 days
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Detention period:
r
re
The average time taken by water to travel from
tu
ec
inlet to outlet.
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
-Sedimentation With coagulation = 2 – 2.5 hours.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 45) The alum, when added as a coagulant in water
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Does not require alkalinity in water for flocculation
ec
(L
B. Does not affect pH value of water

re
ho
C. Increases pH value of water
at
R
D. Decreases pH value of water
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
For high alkalinity water, an excessive amount of coagulant may
ec
(L

be required to lower the pH to the optimal pH ranges (alum pH 6
re
ho
to 8, iron 5.5 to 6.5).
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(46 to 60)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 46) The chemical most commonly used to increase
M
TE
speed of sedimentation of sewage is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sulphuric acid
(L

re
B. Copper sulphate
ho
at
C. Lime
R
ep
D. Sodium permanganate
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Lime is a manufactured product made from limestone (calcium
r
re
carbonate) or dolomite (calcium magnesium carbonate).
tu
ec
(L

re
It's used to treat both drinking water and wastewater.
ho
at
R
Chemical most commonly used to increase speed of
eep
ad
sedimentation of sewage is Lime

Pr
P)
Q. 47) In water treatment, rapid gravity filters are adopted
M
TE
to remove
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Dissolved organic substances
(L

re
B. Dissolved solids and dissolved gases
ho
at
C. Floating solids and dissolved inorganic solids
R
ep
D. Bacteria in Colloidal solids
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 48) The rate of filtration in slow sand filters in million
M
TE
litres per day per hectare is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 50 to 60
(L

re
B. 100 to 150
ho
at
C. 500 to 600
R
ep
D. 1400 to 1500
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 49) The effective size of sand particles used in slow
M
TE
sand filters is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.25 to 0.35 mm
(L

re
B. 0.35 to 0.60 mm
ho
at
C. 0.60 to 1.00 mm
R
ep
D. 1.00 to 1.80 mm
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 50) As compared to rapid sand filters, slow sand filters give
i) Slow filtration rate
P)
M
ii) Higher filtration rate
TE
,D
iii) Lesser efficiency in removal of bacteria
r
re
iv) Higher efficiency in removal of bacteria
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. (i) and (ii)
at
B. (ii) and (iii) R
ep
e
ad
C. (i) and (iv)

Pr
D. (ii) and (iv)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 51) Assertion A: Slow sand filters are more efficient in removal
P)
of bacteria than rapid sand filters
M
TE
Reason R: The sand used in slow sand filters is finer than that in
,D
rapid sand filters
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e

ad
Pr

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 52) Air binding phenomena in rapid sand filters occur
M
TE
due to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Excessive negative head
(L

re
B. Mud ball formation
ho
at
C. Higher turbidity in the effluent
R
ep
D. Low temperature
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Air binding:-
P)
M
When the filter is new, head loss is generally very small. The loss of head
TE
goes on increasing as more and more impurities get trapped into it.
,D
A stage is finally reached when the frictional resistance offered by the
r
re
tu
filter media. Most of this resistance is offered by the top 10 to 15 cm
ec
(L
sand layer. The bottom sand acts like a vacuum, and water is sucked

re
through the filter media rather than getting filtered through it. The
ho
at
negative pressure so developed.
R
The formation of bubbles takes place. This phenomenon is known as Air
eep
Binding as the air binds the filter and stops its functioning.
ad
Pr
To avoid such troubles, the filters are cleaned as soon as the head loss
exceeds the optimum allowable value.
P)
M
TE
Formation of Mud Balls:-
,D
The mud from the atmosphere usually accumulates on the sand surface
r
re
tu
to form a dense mat. During inadequate washing this mud may sink down
ec
into the sand bed and stick to the sand grains and other arrested
(L

re
impurities, thereby forming mud balls.
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 53) The percentage of filtered water, which is used for
M
TE
backwashing in rapid sand filters, is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.2 to 0.4
(L

re
B. 0.4 to 1.0
ho
at
C. 2 to 4
R
ep
D. 5 to 7
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 54) Period of cleaning of slow sand filters is about
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 24-48 hours
ec
(L
B. 10-12 days

re
ho
C. 2-3 months
at
D. 1-2 year R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 55) The rate of filtration of pressure filter is
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Less than that of slow sand filters
tu
ec
B. In between the filtration rate of slow sand filters and
(L

re
rapid sand filters
ho
at
C. Greater than that of rapid sand filters
R
ep
D. Equal to that of slow sand filters
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 56) Double filtration is used
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. To increase the filtration capacity of slow sand filters
ec
(L
B. To increase the filtration capacity of rapid sand filters

re
ho
C. For isolated buildings like swimming pools, hotels etc.
at
D. All of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 57) Cleaning is done by
i) Scraping and removal in slow sand filters
P)
ii) Back washing in slow sand filters
M
TE
iii) Scraping and removal in rapid sand filters
,Dr
iv) Back washing in rapid sand filters
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. (i) and (ii)
R
ep
B. (ii) and (iii)
e
ad
C. (i) and (iv)

Pr
D. (ii) and (iv)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 58) Disinfection of water results in
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Removal of turbidity
ec
(L
B. Removal of hardness

re
ho
C. Killing of disease bacteria
at
D. Complete sterilisation R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Disinfection:- process of killing of pathogenic bacteria.
,Dr
re
tu
Methods of disinfection
ec
(L
- Usage of Lime

re
ho
- Usage of Ozone
at
- UV treatment R
ep
- Usage of kmno4 (Potesium permanganate)
e
ad
- Usage of chlorine
Pr
Q. 59) The disinfection efficiency of chlorine increases by
i) Decreasing the time of contact
P)
M
ii) Decreasing the temperature of water
TE
,D
iii) Increasing the temperature of water
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Only (i)
at
B. Both (i) and (ii) R
ep
e

ad
Pr
D. Only (iii)
Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Efficiency of chlorination increases with
r
re
tu
ec
1. ↓pH of water
(L

re
ho
at
2. ↑Temperature of water
R
ep
e
ad
3. ↑Time of contact
Pr
P)
M
Q. 60) Chlorine demand of water is equal to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Applied chlorine
ec
(L
B. Residual chlorine

re
ho
C. Sum of applied and residual chlorine
at
R
D. Difference of applied and residual chlorine
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Dosage (Applied) of chlorine = Demand of chlorine + Residual chlorine
M
TE
,D
1) Demand of chlorine:- A sufficient amount of chlorine was added
r
re
initially to the water to inactivate the bacteria and some viruses that
tu
ec
cause disease.
(L

re
ho
2)Residual chlorine:- The water is protected from recontamination during
at
storage. R
ep
e
ad
The amount of residual chlorine left in public water supply for safety
Pr
against pathogenic bacteria is about 0.05 to 0.5 mg/L (ppm or parts per
million)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, AE(PSC), RRB JE etc.
P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(61 to 70)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 61) The process in which the chlorination is done
M
TE
beyond the break point is known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Pre chlorination
(L

re
B. Post chlorination
ho
at
C. Super chlorination
R
ep
D. Break point chlorination
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Chlorination is the process of adding chlorine to drinking water to
disinfect it and kill bacteria.
P)
M
TE
A. Pre Chlorination:- application of chlorine to raw water before anyother
,D
treatment to improve the coagulation & to remove the taste,odor & color
r
re
B. Post Chlorination:- Application of chlorine to treated water after all the
tu
ec
other treatment.
(L

re
C. Super chlorination:- Super chlorination followed by de chlorination
ho
comprises the addition of large doses of chlorine to the water and
at
R
removal of excess of chlorine after disinfection.
ep
e
Super chlorination is done beyond the break point.

ad
Pr
This method is applicable to heavily polluted waters

D. Breakpoint chlorination is the point where the demand for chlorine has
been fully satisfied in terms of chlorine addition to the water.
P)
Q. 62) The percentage of chlorine in fresh bleaching
M
TE
powder is about
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 10 to 15
(L

re
B. 20 to 25
ho
at
C. 30 to 35
R
ep
D. 40 to 50
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 63) The treatment of water with bleaching powder is
M
TE
known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Pre chlorination
(L

re
B. Super chlorination
ho
at
C. Dechlorination
R
ep
D. Hyperchlorination
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Hyperchlorination is the use of high doses of chlorine to disinfect water
r
re
tu
systems.
ec
(L

re
A mixture of lime and calcium chloride, it is marketed as chlorine powder
ho
at
or bleaching powder (CaoCl2) for water treatment and as a bleaching
R
agent. It is also known as chlorinated lime. This compound is relatively
eep
stable and has greater available chlorine.

ad
Pr
P)
Q. 64) The suitable method for disinfection of swimming
M
TE
pool water is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Ultra violet rays treatment
(L

re
B. Lime treatment
ho
at
C. By using potassium permanganate
R
ep
D. Chlorination
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 65) Which of the following chemical compounds can be
M
TE
used for dechlorination of water?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Carbon dioxide
(L

re
B. Bleaching powder
ho
at
C. Sulphur dioxide
R
ep
D. Chloramines
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Dechlorination can be accomplished by several means, the most
(L

re
widely used being sulfur dioxide – either as a gas (SO2) or as a
ho
at
salt (e.g., sodium metabisulfite).
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 66) In chlorination, with the rise in temperature of
M
TE
water, death rate of bacteria
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Increases
(L

re
B. Decreases
ho
at
C. Remains unaffected
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
The efficiency of the disinfection depends upon the following factors:
TE
1. Nature of the disinfectant
,Dr
re
2. Dose of the disinfectant ↑
tu
ec
(L

3. Length of contact time with the disinfectant ↑
re
ho
at
4. Temperature:- At lower temperatures, bacterial kill tends to be slower and
R
ep
higher doses are needed.
e
ad
Pr
5. Type and concentration of organisms in water to be disinfected
6. pH of water:- In lower pH of water disinfection will be more efficient.

Q. 67) As compared to higher pH values, the contact
P)
M
period required for efficient chlorination at lower pH
TE
,D
values is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Smaller

re
ho
B. Larger
at
C. Same R
ep
e

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 68) Disinfection efficiency is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Reduced at higher pH value of water
ec
(L
B. Unaffected by pH value of water

re
ho
C. Increased at higher pH value of water
at
R
D. Highest at pH value equal to 7
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 69) In lime-soda process
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Only carbonate hardness is removed
r
re
tu
B. Only non-carbonate hardness is removed
ec
(L
C. Lime reduces the carbonate hardness and soda-ash

re
ho
removes the non-carbonate hardness
at
R
D. Lime reduces the non-carbonate hardness and soda-ash
eep
removes the carbonate hardness

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Soda lime is a process used in water treatment to remove
TE
,D
hardness from water. This process is now outdated but was very
r
re
useful for the treatment of large volumes of hard water.
tu
ec
Addition of lime (CaO) and soda (Na2CO3) to the hard water
(L

re
precipitates calcium as the carbonate, and magnesium as its
ho
at
hydroxide.
R
eep
ad
Lime addition removes only magnesium hardness and calcium

Pr
carbonate hardness.
Soda ash is added to remove calcium non-carbonate hardness.
Q. 70) The major disadvantage of lime soda process of
P)
water softening is that
M
TE
,Dr
A. It is unsuitable for turbid and acidic water
re
tu
ec
B. Huge amount of precipitate is formed which creates a
(L

re
disposal problem
ho
at
C. The effluent cannot be reduced to zero hardness
R
ep
D. It is unsuitable for softening the water of excessive
e
ad
hardness
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Disadvantage of Lime-Soda Process:
r
re
1. For efficient and economical softening, careful operation and skilled
tu
ec
supervision in required.
(L

re
ho
2. Disposal of large amounts of sludge (insoluble precipitate) poses a
at
problem. R
ep
e
ad
3. This can remove hardness only up to 15 ppm, which is not good for
Pr
boilers.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(71 to 80)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 71) Which of the following compounds is widely used
M
TE
for algae control?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sodium sulphate
(L

re
B. Copper sulphate
ho
at
C. Sodium chloride
R
ep
D. Calcium chloride
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
1. Copper Sulfate or blue stone is probably the most commonly
ec
(L

used algal treatments because of its availability and low cost.
re
ho
at
R
2. Floating plants, such as lilies and lotus, provide shade and
eep
reduce direct sunlight in the pond to control the growth of algae.

ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 72) Activated carbon is used for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Disinfection
ec
(L
B. Removing hardness

re
ho
C. Removing odours
at
D. Removing corrosivenessR
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Activated carbon is produced from carbonaceous source
r
re
materials, such as coconuts, nutshells,coal, peat and wood.
tu
ec
(L

re
Activated carbon is used to purify liquids and gases in a variety of
ho
at
applications, including municipal drinking water, food and
R
ep
beverage processing, odours removal, industrial pollution
e
ad
control.
Pr
P)
M
Q. 73) As compared to cast iron pipes, steel pipes are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Heavier
ec
(L
B. Stronger

re
ho
C. Costlier
at
R
D. Less susceptible to corrosion
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
- Iron is a hard grey metal, and heavier than any of the other
,D
elements found on Earth. During a process, impurities or slag is
r
re
tu
removed from iron, and it is turned into a steel alloy.
ec
(L
- This confirms that steel is an alloy, whereas iron is an element.

re
ho
- The main difference is :- Around 4% of carbon in iron makes it
at
cast iron, and less than 2% of carbon makes it steel.
ep
R
- Cast iron is cheaper than steel, and it has a low melting point.
e
ad
- The strength of both cast iron and steel is also controversial, as

Pr
some think steel is stronger than cast iron.

P)
Q. 74) The suitable layout of a distribution system for
M
TE
irregularly growing town is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Dead end system
(L

re
B. Grid iron system
ho
at
C. Radial system
R
ep
D. Ring system
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
The purpose of distribution system is to deliver water to
TE
consumer with appropriate quality, quantity and pressure.
,Dr
The distribution pipes are generally laid below the road
re
tu
pavements, and as such their layouts generally follow the layouts
ec
(L

of roads.
re
ho
at
R
1. Ring System:- The supply main is
eep
laid all along the peripheral roads

ad
Pr
and sub mains branch out from

the mains.
2. Radial System:- The area is divided
into different zones. The water is
P)
M
pumped into the distribution reservoir
TE
kept in the middle of each zone and the
,D
supply pipes are laid radially ending
r
re
towards the periphery.
tu
ec
(L

3. Grid Iron System:- It is suitable for
re
ho
cities with rectangular layout, where
at
R
the water mains and branches are laid
ep
in rectangles.
e
ad
Pr
4. Dead End System:- It is suitable for

old towns and cities having no definite
pattern of roads.
P)
Q. 75) The layout of distribution system in which water
M
TE
flows towards the outer periphery is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Ring system
(L

re
B. Dead end system
ho
at
C. Radial system
R
ep
D. Grid iron system
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 76) The suitable layout of distribution system for a city
M
TE
with roads of rectangular pattern is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Grid iron system
(L

re
B. Dead end system
ho
at
C. Ring system
R
ep
D. Radial system
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 77) The commonly used material for water supply
P)
M
pipes, which has the properties of being strong, not easily
TE
,D
corroded and long life but is heavy and brittle is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Steel

re
ho
B. Cast iron
at
C. Copper R
eep
D. Reinforced cement concrete

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 78) Hardy cross method of analysis of distribution system
P)
i) Involves successive trials
M
TE
ii) Takes economic aspects into account
,D
iii) Is time consuming
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) ep
R
B. (i) and (ii)
e
ad
C. (i) and (iii)

Pr
D. All the correct

Answer C
P)
M
TE
Procedure:-
,D
1. Assume the diameter of each pipe in the loop.
r
re
2. Assume the flow in the pipe such that
tu
ec
sum of the inflow = sum of the outflow at any junction or node.
(L

3. Compute the head losses in each pipe by Hazen William equation.
re
ho
4. Taking clock wise flow as positive and anti clock wise as negative
at
R
5. Find sum of the ratio of head loss and discharge in each pipe without
ep
regard of sign.
e
ad
6. Find the correction for each loop.

Pr
7. Repeat the procedure with corrected values of flow and continue till
the correction become very small.
Q. 79) The method of analysis of distribution system in
P)
M
which the domestic supply is neglected and fire demand is
TE
,D
considered is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Circle method

re
ho
B. Equivalent pipe method
at
R
C. Electrical analysis method
eep
D. Hardy cross method

ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L
In circle method of analysis of distribution system:-

re
ho
Domestic supply is neglected and fire demand is considered.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 80) Which of the following methods of analysis of water
P)
M
distribution system is most suitable for long and narrow
TE
,D
pipe system?
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Circle method

re
ho
B. Equivalent pipe method
at
C. Hardy cross method R
eep
D. Electrical analysis method

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Equivalent Pipe Method:- Equivalent pipe is a method of reducing
TE
,D
a combination of pipes into a simple pipe system for
r
re
easier analysis of a pipe network, such as a water distribution
tu
ec
system.
(L

re
ho
at
An equivalent pipe is an imaginary pipe in which the head loss
R
ep
and discharge are equivalent to the head loss and discharge for
e
ad
the real pipe system.

Pr
This method is most suitable for long and narrow pipe system.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(81 to 90)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 81) The type of valve which is provided to control the
P)
M
flow of water in the distribution system at street corners
TE
,D
and where the pipe lines intersect is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Check valve

re
ho
B. Sluice valve
at
C. Safety valve R
eep
D. Scour valve
ad
Pr
Answer B A. Check valve, non-return valve, reflux valve:- is a valve that
normally allows fluid to flow through it in only one direction.
B. Sluice valve:- are movable gates set over a moving body of water that
P)
control the quantity of water permitted to flow through the gate. Raising
M
TE
the gate increases water flow, and lowering the gate reduces it. It is
,D
provided to control the flow of water in the distribution system at street
r
re
corners and where the pipe lines intersect.
tu
ec
C. Safety Valve:- Valve that automatically actuates when the pressure of
(L

re
inlet side of the valve increases to a predetermined pressure, to open the
ho
valve disc and discharge the fluid (steam or gas ) ; and when the pressure
at
R
decreases to the prescribed value, to close the valve disc again.
ep
e
D. Scour valves:- are located at low points or at every depression and

ad
Pr
dead ends of the pipeline. Their function is to allow periodic flushing of

the lines to remove sediment and to allow the line to be drained for
maintenance and repair work.
P)
Q. 82) The type of valve which allows water to flow in one
M
TE
direction but prevents its flow in the reverse direction is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Reflux valve
(L

re
B. Sluice valve
ho
at
C. Air relief valve
R
ep
D. Pressure relief valve
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 83) Scour valves are provided
P)
M
TE
,D
A. At street corners to control the flow of water
r
re
tu
B. At every depression and dead ends to drain out the
ec
(L
waste water that may collect there

re
ho
C. At the foot of rising main along the slope to prevent
at
back running of water R
ep
e
D. At every summit of rising mains

ad
Pr
Answer B
B. Scour valves
A. Sluice valves
C. Reflux valves
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 84) A sewer that receives the discharge of a number of
M
TE
house sewers is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. House sewer
(L

re
B. Lateral sewer
ho
at
C. Intercepting sewer
R
ep
D. Submain sewer
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
1. House sewer:- A pipe conveying sewage from plumbing system of
P)
single building and delivers it to the lateral sewer.
M
TE
1. Lateral sewer:- The sewer which obtains its discharge directly from
,D
buildings (house sewers).
r
re
2. Branch or sub-main sewer:- The sewer which obtains its discharge from
tu
ec
a few laterals and delivers it to the main sewer.
(L

re
3. Main Sewer:- The sewer which obtains its discharge from a few branch
ho
or sub-main sewers.
at
R
4. Trunk Sewer:- The sewer which obtains its discharge from two or more
eep
main sewers.
ad
Pr
5. Intercepting sewer:- The sewer which obtains the discharge from a

number of main or outfall sewer and carries the same to the point of
treatment and disposal.
Q. 85) A pipe conveying sewage from plumbing system of
P)
M
single building to common sewer or point of immediate
TE
,D
disposal is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. House sewer

re
ho
B. Lateral sewer
at
C. Main sewer R
ep
e
D. Submain sewer
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 86) For a country like India, where rainfall is mainly
P)
M
confined to one season, the suitable sewerage system will
TE
,D
be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Separate system

re
ho
B. Combined system
at
R
C. Partially combined system
ep
e
D. Partially separate system

ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
The sewage systems are classified as follows:
TE
,D
1. Combined system:- When only one set of sewers is laid, carrying both
r
re
tu
the sanitary sewage and storm water.
ec
(L

re
2. Separate system:- When the domestic and industrial sewage are taken
ho
at
in one set of sewers, whereas storm and surface water are taken in
another set of sewers. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
3. Partially separate/combined system:- In the separate system, if a

portion of storm water is allowed to enter in the sewers carrying sewage,
and the remaining storm water flows in separate set of sewers.
The combined system is used:-
P)
1. In areas having small rainfall which is evenly distributed throughout the
M
TE
area, because at such places self-cleaning velocity will be available in
,D
every season.
r
re
2. Used in crowded areas, where it is very difficult to lay two sewers.
tu
ec
3. In area having less sewage, to obtain the self-cleaning velocity.
(L

re
ho
The separate system is used:-
at
R
1. If rainfall is mainly in one seasons. (because in combined system self-
ep
cleaning velocity will not be available for most of the period of the years)
e
ad
2. In rocky areas it is more expensive to lay one large sewer.

Pr
3. If the sanitary sewage is to be pumped.

P)
Q. 87) Average rate of water consumption per head per
M
TE
day as per Indian Standard is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 100 litres
(L

re
B. 135 litres
ho
at
C. 165 litres
R
ep
D. 200 litres
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 88) Sewerage system is usually designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 10 years
ec
(L
B. 25 years

re
ho
C. 50 years
at
D. 75 years R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The design period for sewerage systems may be not less than 20
re
ho
years and not more than 30 years.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 89) Which of the following sewers is preferred for
M
TE
combined system of sewage?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Circular sewer
(L

re
B. Egg shaped sewer
ho
at
C. Rectangular sewer
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The Egg shaped sewer provides slightly higher velocity for low
(L

re
flows over the circular sewer of equal capacity.
ho
at
This makes it useful during combined sewerage system.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 90) the suitable system of sanitation for area of
P)
M
distributed rainfall throughout the year with less intensity
TE
,D
is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Separate system

re
ho
B. Combined system
at
R
C. Partially separate system
ep
e
D. Partially combined system

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Objective Questions
M
TE
(91 to 100)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 91) The water carriage system of collection of waste
M
TE
product
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Is cheaper in initial cost than dry conservancy system
(L

re
B. Requires treatment before disposal
ho
at
C. Creates hygenic problem
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
1. Conservancy System:-
Waste disposal (refuse) are collected separately and disposed off.
P)
A. Garbage is collected separately in dustbins and conveyed by covered carts.
M
TE
B. The human and animal waste are collected in pans. (Night-soil)
,D
C. The storm water is conveyed separately by close and open channels.
r
This system is outdated now and can be used in rural areas.
re
tu
This system has the following disadvantages.
ec
(L
1. The system has less initial cost but the maintenance cost is high.

re
2. The lavatory has to be built away from the residential building which causes
ho
inconvenience. 3. The night soil is carried once in 24 hours while it becomes
at
R
insanitary after 5-6 hours causing bad smell and fly nuisance.
ep
4. If the labour goes on strike the system totally fails.
e
ad
5. The night soil trenching ground required large areas of disposal.

Pr
6. It is highly undesirable to allow night soil carts to pass through roads of the city.
7. Storm water following in open drains cause unhygienic condition in the area.
8 The liquid wastes from lavatories may seep into the ground polluting groundwater
2. Water Carriage System:- In this system water is used as a medium to
carry wastes to the point of final disposal. The quantity of water is so high
(99.9%) that wastes becomes liquid which is carried by the sewers.
P)
This system is universally used nowadays because of the following
M
TE
advantages.
,D
1. The initial cost of the system is high but the maintenance cost is less.
r
re
2. The lavatories can be accommodated inside the building which causes
tu
ec
compact design of building and also convenience.
(L

3. The sewage is carried in covered drains thus the risk of epidemic are
re
ho
reduced.
at
R
4. Less land is required for treatment and disposal thus making the
ep
system economical.
e
ad
5. Proper treatment of sewage is possible to make the sewage suitable

Pr
for disposal.
1. The only disadvantage of this system is the wastage of water (99.9%)
Q. 92) If the time of concentration is 9 minutes, then the
P)
M
intensity of rainfall according to British Ministry of Health
TE
,D
formula will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 4 mm/hr

re
ho
B. 10 mm/hr
at
C. 20 mm/hr R
eep
D. 40 mm/hr
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Time of concentration:-
TE
1. The time taken by rainfall water to run from most distant point of
,D
water shed to the inlet of sewer.
r
re
tu
2. The time required for flow of water in the sewer to the point under
ec
(L
consideration.

re
ho
at
British Ministry of Health formula
R
1. I = 760 / (t + 10) (for storm duration of 5 to 20 minutes)
eep
I = 760 / (9+10) = 40 mm/h

ad
Pr
2. I = 1020 / (t + 10) (for storm duration of 20 to 100 minutes)
Where, I is intensity of rainfall in mm/h and t is duration of storm minutes

Q. 93) The time of concentration is defined as
P)
M
TE
,D
A. The time taken by rainfall water to run from most
r
re
tu
distant point of water shed to the inlet of sewer
ec
(L
B. The time required for flow of water in the sewer to the

re
ho
point under consideration
at
C. Sum of A and B R
eep
D. Difference of A and B
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 94) The specific gravity of sewage is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Much greater than 1
ec
(L
B. Slightly less than 1

re
ho
C. Equal to 1
at
D. Slightly greater than 1R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C.
r
re
Particulates with specific gravity less than 1.0 float to the surface
tu
ec
and particulates with specific gravity greater than 1.0 sink.
(L

re
ho
at
Sewage consists of 99.9% of water and 0.1% solid matter and it’s
R
ep
specific gravity is 1.001 but the sewage and water are considered
e
ad
identical for design.

Pr
P)
Q. 95) The self cleansing velocity for all sewers in India is
M
TE
usually
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than 1.0 m/sec
(L

re
B. 1.0 m/sec to 2.0 m/sec
ho
at
C. 1.5 m/sec to 2.0 m/sec
R
ep
D. 3.0 m/sec to 3.5 m/sec
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
1. Self cleansing velocity:- The sewers should be laid at such a gradient
TE
that a minimum velocity, which will prevent the silting of particles in
,D
sewers are developed.
r
re
tu
The self cleansing velocity for all sewers in India is usually 1.0 m/sec to
ec
2.0 m/sec
(L

re
ho
at
2. Maximum velocity (non-scouring velocity):- If the velocity of flow
R
exceeds a certain limit, the particles of solid matter start to damage the
ep
e
inside surface of sewers or in other words, a scouring action takes place.

ad
Pr
The maximum permissible velocity at which no such scouring action will

occur is known as non-scouring velocity and it mainly depends on the
material of sewers.
P)
Q. 96) The slope of sewer shall be
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Given in the direction of natural slope of ground
tu
ec
B. Given in the direction opposite to the natural slope of
(L

re
ground
ho
at
C. Zero
R
ep
D. Steeper than 1 in 20
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Direction of Sewer Line:- Sewer should flow, as for as
(L

re
possible the Natural Slope of Ground.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 97) The design discharge for the separate sewer system
M
TE
shall be taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to dry weather flow (DWF)
(L

re
B. 2 × DWF
ho
at
C. 3 × DWF
R
ep
D. 6 × DWF
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Dry weather flow refers to the wastewater flow in a sewer system
r
re
tu
during periods of dry weather with minimum infiltration.
ec
(L

re
ho
The design discharge for
at
R
1. Separate sewer system:- 6 × DWF
ep
2. Combined sewer system - Rainfall + 2 DWF
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 98) The design discharge for the combined sewer
M
TE
system shall be taken
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to rainfall
(L

re
B. Rainfall + DWF
ho
at
C. Rainfall + 2 DWF
R
ep
D. Rainfall + 6 DWF
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 99) The minimum and maximum diameters of sewers
M
TE
shall preferably be
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 15 cm and 100 cm
(L

re
B. 15 cm and 300 cm
ho
at
C. 30 cm and 450 cm
R
ep
D. 60 cm and 300 cm
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Minimum Sewer Size:- 15 cm is taken as the minimum sewer size.
TE
,D
The reason being that, the choking does not take place even with
r
re
the bigger size particles, which are usually thrown into the sewer
tu
ec
through manholes.
(L

re
ho
at
Maximum Sewer Size:- 300 cm
R
eep
ad
Minimum Cover of Sewer:- 1 metre is taken as the minimum

Pr
cover over the sewers to avoid damage from live loads coming on
the sewer.
P)
Q. 100) The main disadvantage of cement concrete sewers
M
TE
is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less strength
(L

re
B. Difficulty in construction
ho
at
C. Difficulty in transportation due to heavy weight
R
ep
D. Less life
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Cement Concrete Sewer:-
TE
,Dr
re
1. PCC – for dia upto 60 cm
tu
ec
i) Suitable for small storm drains.
(L

re
ii) Not durable .
ho
at
R
ep
2. RCC – for dia > 60 cm
e
ad
i) They may be cast in situ or precast,

Pr
ii) Resistant to heavy loads, corrosion and high pressure.

iii) These are very heavy and difficult to transport.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
SSC-JE, RRB-JE, AE(PSC) etc.
M
TE
(Q.101 to 110)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 101) Most suitable section of sewer in separate sewage
M
TE
system is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Rectangular section
(L

re
B. Circular section
ho
at
C. Standard from of egg shaped sewer
R
ep
D. Modified egg shaped section
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
In separate system, discharge is more or less constant.
(L

re
A circular section gives a maximum area for a given perimeter,
ho
at
hence, it is economical but it is not suitable for combined system
R
ep
because of great variation in discharge.
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 102) An egg shaped section of sewer
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Is economical than circular section
ec
(L
B. Provides self cleansing velocity at low discharge

re
ho
C. Is more stable than circular section
at
D. Is easy to construct R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The Egg shaped sewer provides slightly
TE
,D
higher velocity for low flows over the
r
re
circular sewer of equal capacity. This
tu
ec
makes it useful during combined
(L

re
sewerage system. These sewers can
ho
at
generate self cleansing velocity during
R
ep
dry weather flow
e
ad
Pr
The lower portion of Egg shaped sewer is known as invert which

is circular in shape and is smaller than the arch.
P)
M
Q. 103) The velocity of flow does not depend on
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Grade of sewer
ec
(L
B. Length of sewer

re
ho
C. Hydraulic mean depth of sewer
at
D. Roughness of sewer R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 104) The hydraulic mean depth (HMD) for an egg-
M
TE
shaped sewer flowing two-third full is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Equal to HMD when flowing full
(L

re
B. Less than HMD when flowing full
ho
at
C. Greater than HMD when flowing full
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
A. Hydraulic Mean Depth (HMD) of
M
Standard Egg-Shaped Sewer:
TE
,D
1. When flowing full, HMD = 0.58 b
r
re
2. Sewer flowing 2/3 Full, HMD = 0.63b
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
B. Hydraulic Mean Depth (HMD) of
at
New Egg-Shaped Sewer: R
ep
e
1. When flowing full, HMD = 0.57 b

ad

Pr

P)
Q. 105) The effect of increasing diameter of sewer on the
M
TE
self cleansing velocity is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. To decrease it
(L

re
B. To increase it
ho
at
C. Fluctuating
R
ep
D. Nil
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
The self cleansing velocity Vs is given by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Where,
at
Gs is the specific gravity R
ep
g is the acceleration due to gravity
e
ad
Pr
ds is the diameter of sewer and

f is the Darcy Weisbach friction factor.
P)
M
Q. 106) The most commonly used sewer under culverts is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Circular brick sewer
ec
(L
B. Circular cast iron sewer

re
ho
C. Semi-elliptical sewer
at
D. Horse-shoe type sewer R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 107) The type of sewer which is suitable for both
M
TE
combined and seperate system is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Circular sewer
(L

re
B. Egg shaped sewer
ho
at
C. Horse-shoe type sewer
R
ep
D. Semi-elliptical sewer
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
The Egg shaped sewer provides slightly
TE
,D
higher velocity for low flows over the
r
re
circular sewer of equal capacity. This
tu
ec
makes it useful during combined
(L

re
sewerage system. These sewers can
ho
at
generate self cleansing velocity during
R
ep
dry weather flow
e
ad
Pr
The lower portion of Egg shaped sewer is known as invert which

is circular in shape and is smaller than the arch.
P)
Q. 108) The characteristics of fresh and septic sewage
M
TE
respectively are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Acidic and alkaline
(L

re
B. Alkaline and acidic
ho
at
C. Both acid
R
ep
D. Both alkaline
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
pH is used to describe the acid (pH<7) or alkaline (pH>7)
TE
,D
properties of water solutions.
r
re
The pH of sewage is initially high (alkaline) and drops when the
tu
ec
sewage becomes septic.
(L

re
ho
at
Color of fresh sewage is yellowish grey to light brown. While that
R
ep
of the septic is black or dark due to oxidation of organic matter.
e
ad
Pr
Smell of the fresh sewage is oily or soapy while the septic sewage
develops an objectionable. H2S is the major source of pollution.
P)
M
Q. 109) The pathogens can be killed by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Nitrification
ec
(L
B. Chlorination

re
ho
C. Oxidation
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
Disease causing microorganisms, such as bacteria, fungi, and viruses,
TE
,D
found commonly in sewage, hospital waste, run-off water from farms,
r
re
and in water used for swimming.
tu
ec
(L

Water systems add disinfectants to destroy microorganisms that can
re
ho
cause disease in humans.
at
Primary methods of disinfection are
R
ep
1. Chlorination
e
ad
2. Chloramines
Pr
3. Ozone
4. Ultraviolet light
P)
Q. 110) Which of the following retards the self purification
M
TE
of stream?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Higher temperature
(L

re
B. Sunlight
ho
at
C. Satisfying oxygen demand
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Factors Affecting Self-Purification of Stream:
r
re
tu
1. The pathogens are killed if they are exposed to sunlight,
ec
(L
therefore, sunlight helps in self-purification.

re
ho
2. treams will get self purified in less time at higher temperature.
at
R
3. If the oxygen demand is satisfied, then stream becomes
ep
purified.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
(Q.111 to 120)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 111) Sewage treatment units are normally designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 5-10 years
ec
(L
B. 15-20 years

re
ho
C. 30-40 years
at
D. 40-50 years R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 112) Settling velocity increases with
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Specific gravity of solid particles
ec
(L
B. Size of particles

re
ho
C. Depth of tank
at
D. Temperature of liquid R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
The main principle involved in the sedimentation tank is to reduce the
,D
flow velocity of water which allows the major amount of suspended
r
re
tu
particles to settle down. The velocity with which the particle is settling is
ec
known settling velocity.
(L

re
ho
Two types of settling velocity occurs one theoretical and other actual
at
R
And also actual velocity does not depend upon dimension of tank it
eep
depend upon dimension of particle.

ad
Pr
But theorical settling velocity, Vs = Discharge / surface area = Q / ( B x L)

P)
M
Q. 113) Standard BOD is measured at
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 20°C – 1 day
ec
(L
B. 25°C – 3day

re
ho
C. 20°C – 5day
at
D. 30°C – 5day R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
BOD is a measure of, the amount of oxygen that require for the bacteria
r
re
to degrade the organic components present in water / waste water.
tu
ec
(L

The more organic matter there is (e.g., in sewage and polluted bodies of
re
ho
water), the greater the BOD; and the greater the BOD, the lower the
at
amount of dissolved oxygen available for higher animals such as fishes.
R
ep
e
ad
The BOD value is most commonly expressed in milligrams of oxygen

Pr
consumed per litre of sample during 5 days of incubation at 20°C

Q. 114) The correct relation between theoretical oxygen
P)
M
demand (TOD), Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) and
TE
,D
chemical oxygen demand (COD) is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. TOD>BOD>COD

re
ho
B. TOD>COD>BOD
at
C. BOD>COD>TOD R
ep
e
D. COD>BOD>TOD
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
1. Theoretical oxygen demand (ThOD) is the calculated amount
TE
,D
of oxygen required to oxidize a compound to its final oxidation products.
r
re
tu
ec
2. COD or Chemical Oxygen Demand is the total measurement of all
(L

chemicals (organics & in-organics) in the water / waste waterwater.
re
ho
at
3. BOD is a measure of, the amount of oxygen that require for the
R
ep
bacteria to degrade the organic components present in water / waste
e
ad
water.
Pr
TOD > COD > BOD

P)
M
TE
,D
A. 5 day BOD is the ultimate BOD
r
re
tu
B. 5 day BOD is greater than 4 day BOD keeping other
ec
(L
conditions same

re
ho
C. 5 day BOD is less than 4 day BOD keeping other
at
conditions same R
eep
D. BOD does not depend on time

ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
When you take a water sample from source and you measure the
r
re
oxygen concentration immediately, that value would be BOD0
tu
ec
(starting),After 3 days you measure the oxygen concentration
(L

re
again, that value would be BOD3 and after 5 days, it is BOD5
ho
at
R
ep
Normally, the value of BOD5 will be lower than BOD4 because
e
ad
the microorganism more time to consume oxygen concentration

Pr
in the water.
Q. 116) If biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) of a town is
P)
M
20,000 kg/day and BOD per capita per day is 0.05 kg, then
TE
,D
population equivalent of town is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1000

re
ho
B. 4000
at
C. 100000 R
ep
e
D. 400000
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
BOD of a town, in kg/day = Population equivalent × Average
tu
ec
Standard BOD
(L

re
20000 = Population × 0.5
ho
at
R
ep
Population equivalent = 400000
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 117) The rate of BOD exerted at any time is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Directly proportional to BOD satisfied
ec
(L
B. Directly proportional to BOD remaining

re
ho
C. Inversely proportional to BOD satisfied
at
R
D. Inversely proportional to BOD remaining
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 118) The ratio of 5 day BOD to ultimate BOD is about
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 1/3
ec
(L
B. 2/3

re
ho
C. 3/4
at
D. 1.0 R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
If you determine the BOD after 5 days, this is called the 5 day BOD
,D
If you determine the BOD after 20 days, this is called the 20 day BOD
r
re
tu
ec
Ultimate BOD (Lo) is the amount of oxygen required to
(L

re
decompose all of the organic material after infinite time.
ho
at
OR
R
ep
Ultimate BOD (Lo) is defined as the maximum BOD exerted by the
e
ad
wastewater.
Pr
The ratio of BOD5/BODultimate is about 2/3

Q. 119) In a BOD test, 1.0 ml of raw sewage was diluted to
100 ml and the dissolved oxygen concentration of diluted
P)
M
sample at the beginning was 6 ppm and it was 4 ppm at
TE
,D
the end of 5 day incubation at 20°C. The BOD of raw
r
re
tu
sewage will be
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 100 ppm
at
B. 200 ppm R
eep
C. 300 ppm
ad
Pr
D. 400 ppm
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 120) The minimum dissolved oxygen which should
P)
M
always be present in water in order to save the aquatic life
TE
,D
is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1 ppm

re
ho
B. 4 ppm
at
C. 10 ppm R
ep
e
D. 40 ppm
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Adequate dissolved oxygen is necessary for good water quality.
,Dr
As dissolved oxygen levels in water drop below 5.0 mg/l, aquatic
re
tu
life is put under stress. The lower the concentration, the greater
ec
(L

the stress.
re
ho
at
R
Oxygen levels that remain below 1-2 mg/l for a few hours can
ep
e
result in large fish kills.

ad
Pr
The minimum dissolved oxygen for aquatic life is 4 ppm or mg/l

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
(Q.121 to 130)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 121) The relative stability of a sewage sample, whose
P)
M
dissolved oxygen is same as the total oxygen required to
TE
,D
satisfy BOD, is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1

re
ho
B. 100
at
C. Infinite R
eep
D. Zero
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Relative stability of sewage is defined as the ratio of the amount
(L

re
of oxygen available in sewage to the amount of oxygen required
ho
at
to satisfy the first-stage BOD of sewage.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 122) Dissolved oxygen in streams is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Maximum at noon
ec
(L
B. Minimum at noon

re
ho
C. Maximum at midnight
at
R
D. Same throughout the day
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
At noon, rate of photosynthesis is high and hence the amount
(L

re
of oxygen produced exceeds the amount required for respiration.
ho
at
Therefore,the dissolved oxygen in streams is maximum at noon.
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 123) Facultative bacteria are able to work in
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Presence of oxygen only
ec
(L
B. Absence of oxygen only

re
ho
C. Presence as well as in absence of oxygen
at
D. Presence of water R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
1. Aerobic bacteria require oxygen for growth.
re
tu
ec
(L

2. Anaerobic bacteria does not require oxygen for growth.
re
ho
at
R
3. Facultative bacteria are able to work in Presence as well as in
ep
e
absence of oxygen.
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 124) The means of access for inspection and cleaning of
M
TE
sewer line is known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Inlet
(L

re
B. Manhole
ho
at
C. Drop manhole
R
ep
D. Catch basin
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Manholes are used for inspection and cleaning of sewer line.
,Dr
re
tu
The manhole in which a vertical pipe is used is called a drop manhole,
ec
where as the one using an inclined pipe is called a ramp.
(L

re
ho
The construction of a drop manhole in place of an ordinary manhole in
at
R
case a high level branch sewer enters a low levelled main sewer.
ep
e
ad
Pr
While catch basins have openings at the top to allow water to collect in
them.
P)
M
Q. 125) Sewerage system is designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Maximum flow only
ec
(L
B. Minimum flow only

re
ho
C. Average flow only
at
R
D. Maximum and minimum flow
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
1. Minimum velocity (Self cleansing velocity):- The sewers should be laid
TE
,D
at such a gradient that a minimum velocity, which will prevent the silting
r
re
of particles in sewers are developed.
tu
ec
The self cleansing velocity for all sewers is usually 1.0 to 2.0 m/sec
(L

re
ho
2. Maximum velocity (non-scouring velocity):- If the velocity of flow
at
exceeds a certain limit, the particles of solid matter start to damage the
ep
R
inside surface of sewers or in other words, a scouring action takes place.
e
ad
The maximum permissible velocity at which no such scouring action will

Pr
occur is known as non-scouring velocity and it mainly depends on the

material of sewers.
P)
M
Q. 126) Sewage treatment units are designed for
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Maximum flow only
ec
(L
B. Minimum flow only

re
ho
C. Average flow only
at
R
D. Maximum and minimum flow
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 127) Laying of sewers is usually done with the help of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. A theodolite
ec
(L
B. A compass

re
ho
C. Sight rails and boning rods
at
D. A plane table R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
The various steps involved in the laying and testing of sewers are: 1.
TE
Setting out Sewer Centre Line
,D
2. Alignment and Gradient of Sewers
r
re
tu
3. Excavation of Trenches, Timbering and Dewatering
ec
(L
4. Laying and Jointing of Pipe Sewers

re
5. Testing of Pipe Sewers 6. Backfilling of Trenches.
ho
at
R
Laying of sewers is usually done with the help of Sight rails and boning
eep
rods.
ad
Pr
Sight rails are used for slope and Boning rods are used to set out
horizontal lines or lines with a constant slope.
P)
M
Q. 128) Corrosion in concrete sewers is caused by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Septic conditions
ec
(L
B. Dissolved oxygen

re
ho
C. Chlorine
at
D. Nitrogen R
e ep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Corrosion in concrete sewers is mainly caused by Hydrogen
TE
,D
sulphide gas which is formed due to Anaerobic decomposition of
r
re
sewage.
tu
ec
(L

re
Bacterial action converts,H2S gas to sulphuric acid which causes
ho
at
corrosion in the crown of the pipe and this corrosion is also
R
ep
called crown corrosion.
e
ad
Pr
Septic conditions occur when bacteria use all of the available

oxygen while decomposing organic matter in wastewater.
P)
Q. 129) If the sewage contains grease and fatty oils, these
M
TE
are removed in
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Grit chambers
(L

re
B. Detritus tanks
ho
at
C. Skimming tanks
R
ep
D. Sedimentation tanks
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Detritus tank are nothing but grit chamber designed to flow with a
M
TE
smaller flow velocity and longer detention period.
,D
The function of detritus tank is to remove finer particles than those
r
re
removed by a grit chamber.
tu
ec
Grit chamber has a detention period with a value of 40-60 seconds.
(L

re
ho
Sedimentation tank is structure in which wastewater is filled and stored
at
R
for some time to remove the suspended particles present in the water.
eep
These particles may settle at the bottom of the tank and are removed by
ad
Pr
using scrapers.
If the suspended particles have low specific gravity than water, they settle
at the top of the tank.
P)
Q. 130) Generally detention period for grit chamber is kept
M
TE
as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1 minute
(L

re
B. 5 minutes
ho
at
C. 2-4 hours
R
ep
D. 12 hours
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
(Q.131 to 140)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 131) Which of the following unit works in anaerobic
M
TE
conditions?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sludge digestion tank
(L

re
B. Sedimentation tank
ho
at
C. Activated sludge treatment
R
ep
D. Trickling filters
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
A. The residue that accumulates in sewage treatment plants is called
M
TE
sludge (or biosolids). Sewage sludge is the solid, semisolid, or slurry
,D
residual material that is produced as a by-product of wastewater
r
re
treatment processes.
tu
ec
B. A sedimentation tank allows suspended particles to settle out of water
(L

re
or wastewater as it flows slowly through the tank, thereby providing
ho
some degree of purification. A layer of accumulated solids, called sludge,
at
R
forms at the bottom of the tank and is periodically removed.
ep
e
C. The activated sludge process is a type of wastewater treatment

ad
Pr
process for treating sewage or industrial wastewaters using aeration.

D. Trickling filters (TFs) are used to remove organic matter from
wastewater. The TF is an aerobic treatment system.
Q. 132) Septic tank is
i) Settling tank
P)
M
ii) Digestion tank
TE
,D
iii) Aeration tank
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
A. Only (i) R
eep
B. (i) and (ii)

ad
Pr
C. (i) and (iii)

D. Only (iii)
Answer B
P)
M
Septic tank is an underground chamber made of concrete, fiberglass, or
TE
plastic through which domestic wastewater flows for basic treatment.
,D
Settling and anaerobic processes reduce solids and organics, but the
r
re
tu
treatment efficiency is only moderate
ec
(L

re
Aeration tank:- The biological treatment of the wastewater takes place in
ho
the aeration tank. Before the wastewater gets to this tank, it is mixed
at
R
with activated sludge. This contains countless microorganisms, such as
ep
e
bacteria, that are able to break down the colloidal, organic contaminants
ad
Pr
dissolved in the wastewater.

To create optimum living conditions for the bacteria, the aeration tank
must be continuously supplied with oxygen.
P)
Q. 133) The maximum efficiency of BOD removal is
M
TE
achieved in
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Oxidation pond
(L

re
B. Oxidation ditch
ho
at
C. Aerated lagoons
R
ep
D. Trickling filters
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
A. Oxidation ponds are ponds designed and built for wastewater
treatment to reduce the organic content and remove pathogens from
P)
wastewater. They are man-made depressions confined by earthen
M
TE
structures. The BOD removal efficiency of an oxidation pond lies between
,D
80% and 90%.
r
re
tu
ec
B. Oxidation ditch is a modified activated sludge biological treatment
(L

re
process. The oxidation ditch can remove suspended solids upto 95 %. It is
ho
suitable for small communities or small industries.
at
R
ep
e
C. Aerated lagoons are deep waste stabilization ponds in which sewage is

ad
Pr
aerated by mechanical aerators to stabilize the organic matter present in

the sewage, rather than relying only on photosynthetic oxygen produced
by algae.
Q. 134) The working conditions in imhoff tanks are
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Aerobic only
r
re
tu
B. Anaerobic only
ec
(L
C. Aerobic in lower compartment and anaerobic in upper

re
ho
compartment
at
R
D. Anaerobic in lower compartment and aerobic in upper
eep
compartment
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
It consists of an upper chamber in
re
tu
which sedimentation takes place
ec
(L
(Presence of oxygen), from which

re
collected solids slide down inclined
ho
at
bottom slopes to an entrance into a
R
ep
lower chamber in which the sludge is
e
ad
collected and digested (Absence of

Pr
oxygen).
P)
Q. 135) In facultative stabilization pond, the sewage is
M
TE
treated by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Aerobic bacteria only
(L

re
B. Algae only
ho
at
C. Dual action of aerobic bacteria and anaerobic bacteria
R
ep
D. Sedimentation
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
1. Aerobic bacteria require oxygen for growth.
re
tu
ec
(L

2. Anaerobic bacteria does not require oxygen for growth.
re
ho
at
R
3. Facultative bacteria are able to work in Presence as well as in
ep
e
absence of oxygen.
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 136) The detention period for oxidation ponds is usually
M
TE
kept as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 4 – 8 hours
(L

re
B. 24 hours
ho
at
C. 10 to 15 days
R
ep
D. 3 months
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Oxidation ponds have a long detention period between 10 to 20
r
re
days. The BOD removal efficiency of an oxidation pond lies
tu
ec
between 80% and 90%, so the maximum BOD removal efficiency
(L

re
is 90%.
ho
at
R
ep
Oxidation ditch normally employs a detention period up to 24
e
ad
hours. The oxidation ditch can remove suspended solids upto

Pr
95 %. It is suitable for small communities or small industries.

P)
M
Q. 137) Compositing and lagooning are the methods of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Sludge digestion
ec
(L
B. Sludge disposal

re
ho
C. Sedimentation
at
D. Filtration R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Composting is an aerobic process of mixing sewage sludge with
,Dr
agricultural byproduct sources of carbon such as sawdust, straw
re
tu
or wood chips.
ec
(L

In the presence of oxygen, bacteria digesting both the sewage
re
ho
sludge and the plant material generate heat to kill disease-
at
causing microorganisms. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Lagoons are pond-like bodies of water or basins designed to

receive and hold wastewater.
P)
M
Q. 138) The main disadvantage of oxidation pond is that
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Large area required for construction
ec
(L
B. Maintenance and operation cost are high

re
ho
C. BOD removal is very low
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
Advantages of oxidation ponds:-
,D
1. Easy to construct.
r
re
tu
2. Low initial and maintenance costs.
ec
(L

3. Effluent dose not required disinfection.
re
ho
4. Ideal for small communities and also tropical regions.
at
R
5. Completes sludge treatment.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Disadvantages:-
1. Requires a large land area.
P)
Q. 139) For satisfactory working of a sludge digestion unit,
M
TE
the pH range of digested sludge should be maintained as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 4.5 to 6.0
(L

re
B. 6.5 to 8.0
ho
at
C. 8.5 to 10.0
R
ep
D. 10.5 to 12.0
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
pH measures the hydrogen ion concentration of the sludge and indicates
TE
,D
if the sludge is acid (pH<7) or alkaline (pH>7).
r
re
tu
ec
Generally, the pH must be maintained between 6.5 to 8.0 to promote
(L

methane gas formation.
re
ho
at
Decreases in pH mean possible digester upset.
ep
R
e
ad
Normally, however, the decreases in pH occur very rapidly and hence pH

Pr
gives little advance notice of trouble. A low pH indicates that an upset

has already occurred.
Q. 140) Sludge volume index is defined as the ratio of
P)
M
TE
A. Percentage of sludge by volume to percentage of
,Dr
suspended solids by weight
re
tu
ec
B. Percentage of sludge by volume to percentage of total
(L

re
solids by weight
ho
at
C. Percentage of suspended solids by weight to percentage
R
ep
of sludge by volume
e
ad
D. Percentage of total solids by weight to percentage of

Pr
sludge by volume
Answer A
P)
M
Sludge volume index:- The standard measure of the physical
TE
,D
characteristics of activated sludge processes.
r
re
tu
ec
It is defined as 'the volume (in mL) occupied by 1 gram of
(L

re
activated sludge after settling the aerated liquid for 30 minutes’.
ho
at
R
ep
It is also defined as “Percentage of sludge by volume to
e
ad
percentage of suspended solids by weight”.

Pr
SVI:- 50 to 150 mL/gm (its indicate good settling sludge)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
(Q.141 to 150)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

Environmental
re
ho
at
R
Engineering
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 141) For normal sludge, the value of sludge index for
M
TE
Indian conditions is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0 to 50
(L

re
B. 50 to 150
ho
at
C. 150 to 350
R
ep
D. 350 to 500
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
Sludge volume index:- The SVI is a measure of the settleability of sludge.
TE
Lower values of the SVI indicate better sludge settleability.
,Dr
re
tu
It is defined as 'the volume (in mL) occupied by 1 gram of activated
ec
sludge after settling the aerated liquid for 30 minutes’.
(L

re
ho
It is also defined as “Percentage of sludge by volume to percentage of
at
suspended solids by weight”. R
eep
ad
Pr
Good settling sludge, the value of sludge index is 50 to 150 ml/gm
Normal sludge, the value of sludge index is 150 to 350 ml/gm

P)
Q. 142) When there is no recirculation of sewage, then
M
TE
recirculation factor is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0
(L

re
B. 1
ho
at
C. Infinity
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
In high rate trickling filter the effluent is again sprinkled
TE
,D
over the filter media, which is known as recirculation.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Recirculation ratio is the ratio of recirculated flow to the

re
ho
total flow of raw sewage.
at
R
eep
Recirculation factor = 1+ Recirculation Ratio

ad
Pr
=1+0
=1
Q. 143) For the same solid content, if the quantity of
P)
M
sludge with moisture content of 98% is X, then the
TE
,D
quantity of sludge with moisture content of 96% will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. X/4

re
ho
B. X/2
at
C. X R
eep
D. 2X
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 144) A pipe which is installed in the house drainage to
M
TE
preserve the water seal of traps is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Vent pipe
(L

re
B. Antisiphonage pipe
ho
at
C. Waste pipe
R
ep
D. Soil pipe
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Vent pipe is open at top and bottom, to facilitate exit of foul
P)
M
gases. It is carried at least one meter higher than the roof level.
TE
,Dr
re
Rain water pipe it is a pipe which carries only the rain water.
tu
ec
(L

re
Anti-siphonage pipe it is pipe which is installed in the house
ho
drainage to preserve the water seal of traps.
at
R
eep
ad
Waste pipe baths, kitchens, basins etc are connected.

Pr
Soil pipe W.Cs and urinals are connected.

P)
Q. 145) In the two pipe system of house plumbing the
M
TE
pipes required are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. One soil pipe, one waste pipe and one vent pipe
(L

re
B. One soil pipe, two waste pipes and one vent pipe
ho
at
C. One soil pipe, one waste pipe and two vent pipes
R
ep
D. Two soil pipes, one waste pipe and one vent pipe
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 146) The pipe which is used to carry discharge from
M
TE
sanitary fittings like bathrooms, kitchens etc. is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Waste pipe
(L

re
B. Soil pipe
ho
at
C. Vent pipe
R
ep
D. Antisiphonage pipe
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 147) The gas from sludge digestion tank is mainly
M
TE
composed of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Nitrogen
(L

re
B. Carbon dioxide
ho
at
C. Hydrogen sulphide
R
ep
D. Methane
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
Methane gas evolves the most during the sludge digestion
ec
(L
process by approximately 60 to 70% of the total gas evolved.

re
ho
at
R
And Carbon dioxide is 20 to 30%.
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 148) Most of the bacteria in sewage are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Parasitic
ec
(L
B. Saprophytic

re
ho
C. Pathogenic
at
D. Anaerobic R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A saprophytic or saprotroph is an organism which gets its energy
(L

re
from dead and decaying organic matter.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 149) The process of lagooning is primarily a means of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Reducing the excessive flow in sewers
ec
(L
B. Disposing of sludge

re
ho
C. Increasing the capacity of storage reservoirs
at
R
D. Increasing flow of sewage through imhoff tanks
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Lagooning:
ec
A lagoon is a shallow lake. In which the residue slurry is pumped
(L

re
directly into land-based ponds.
ho
at
R
ep
Lagooning convenient method of sludge disposal if the treatment
e
ad
plant is located at a remote place.

Pr
P)
Q. 150) The biochemical treatment of sewage effluents is
M
TE
essentially a process of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Oxidation
(L

re
B. Dehydration
ho
at
C. Reduction
R
ep
D. Alkalinization
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
Answer A
tu
ec
(L

re
The destruction of organic substances is called biochemical oxidation.
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(151 to 160)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Jumping Weirs OR Leaping Weir:-
M
TE
,D
The excessive quantity of sewage
r
re
leap or jump across the opening.
tu
ec
The opening of the crown can be
(L

re
adjusted by using movable crests
ho
at
depending upon the theoretical analysis.
R
ep
When the discharge is small, the velocity is low due to which all
e
ad
the sewage drops into the sanitary sewer. When the discharge
Pr
increase, the velocity increases, due to which more quantity of

sewage jumps over the gap and goes to the outfall.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
Chlorine is used as a disinfectant in sewage treatment
ec
(L

plants. Sewage is treated to remove all the chemical and
re
ho
biological hazards, making it safe to release into water
at
bodies. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
Grit Chambers:- Grit chambers are basin to remove the inorganic
TE
particles to prevent damage to the pumps, and to prevent their
,Dr
accumulation in sludge digestors.
re
tu
ec
(L

1. The detention period for grit chambers may vary from 45 to 90
re
ho
seconds. A detention period of 60 seconds is usually adopted in
at
the design of grit chambers.R
ep
e
ad
Pr
2. Horizontal velocity of flow of 15 to 30 cm/s is used at peak

flows.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
A. The most common source of acidity in unpolluted water is
P)
carbon dioxide in the form of carbonic acid.
M
TE
,D
B. Aluminium sulfate or Alum is used as a flocculant to remove
r
re
unwanted colour and turbidity from water supplies.
tu
ec
Alum is very effective coagulant for water treatment and is most
(L

re
commonly used. It is quite cheap, forms excellent stable floc and
ho
at
does not require any skilled supervision.
R
eep
ad
C. Cyclone separators or simply cyclones are separation devices

Pr
(dry scrubbers) that use the principle of inertia to remove

particulate matter from flue gases.
D. Sewage contains suspended and floating matters in it. The
P)
suspended matters are of large size such as tree leaves, paper,
M
gravel; timber-pieces etc. as well as of small size such as sand, silt
TE
,D
etc.
r
re
The large size suspended and floating matters can be removed by
tu
ec
passing sewage through screens.
(L

re
The process of removing the large matters from sewage by
ho
at
passing it through screens is called screening.
R
ep
The floating matters such as oils, grease etc. are removed from
e
ad
the sewage by skimming tanks and this process of removing is

Pr
called skimming.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
If diameter is less than economic diameter, then cost of
(L

re
pipe will be less but head loss will be high. Hence cost of
ho
at
pumping will be more.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Incrustation: The deposition of materials on the interior
tu
ec
of pipes.
(L

re
It decreases the cross-section area of the pipe.
ho
at
R
ep
Option D is correct for corrosion of tubewell pipes.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The maximum velocity occurs in an egg shaped sewer
re
ho
when the ratio of depth of flow to vertical diameter is 0.81
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Well Shrouding: The shrouding is a layer of coarse material
tu
ec
such as gravel and coarse sand interposed in the annular
(L

re
space between the well pipe and the aquifer soil.
ho
at
It is also essential in a slotted type tube well where wire
R
ep
mesh (or screen) is not used.
e
ad
Pr
In the initial stages when the water is pumped out fine sand comes in
the tube well with the water and consequently a hollow or cavity is
formed at the bottom.
P)
The main difference between a strainer and cavity tube well is that in the
M
TE
former the inflow is radial whereas in the later it is spherical.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Relative Stability is defined as the ratio of oxygen available
TE
,D
in the effluent to the total oxygen required to satisfy its
r
re
first stage BOD demand.
tu
ec
It is expressed as percentage of the total oxygen required
(L

re
and can be expressed by the equation,
ho
at
R
ep
𝑆 = 100 [ 1 − ( 0.794)^𝑡] incubation at 20°C
e
ad
Pr
𝑆 = 100 [ 1 − ( 0.630)^𝑡] incubation at 37°C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
When ultraviolet light waves (UV) strike chlorofluorocarbons
re
tu
ec
(CFCl3) molecules in the upper atmosphere, a carbon-chlorine
(L

bond breaks, producing a chlorine (Cl) atom. The chlorine atom
re
ho
then reacts with an ozone (O3) molecule breaking it apart and so
at
destroying the ozone. R
ep
e
A single CFC molecule can destroy 100,000 ozone molecules.

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(161 to 170)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
When fossil fuels such as coal are burned for energy, huge
TE
,D
amounts of carbon dioxide are released into the Earth's
r
re
atmosphere, intensifying the greenhouse effect.
tu
ec
(L

re
The greenhouse effect happens when certain gases, which are
ho
at
known as greenhouse gases, accumulate in Earth's atmosphere.
R
eep
ad
Greenhouse gases include carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4),

Pr
nitrous oxide (N2O), ozone (O3), and fluorinated gases.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
Electrostatic precipitator, also called electrostatic air
TE
,D
cleaner, a device that are used for air pollution control.
r
re
tu
ec
An electrostatic precipitator (ESP) is a filtration device that
(L

re
removes fine particles, like dust and smoke, from a flowing
ho
at
gas.
R
eep
ad
Pr
The precipitator functions by applying energy only to the

particulate matter being collected.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
From the point of view of their origination pollutants may be
divided into two classes.
P)
M
1. Primary pollutants or emission pollutants are directly emitted
TE
from the processes such as fossil fuel consumption. Volcanic
,Dr
eruption and factories.
re
tu
The major primary pollutants are oxides of sulphur, oxides of
ec
(L

nitrogen, oxides of carbon, particulate matter, methane,
re
ho
ammonia, chlorofluorocarbons.
at
R
2. Secondary pollutants are not emitted directly. The secondary
ep
e
pollutants form when the primary pollutants react with

ad
Pr
themselves or other components of the atmosphere.

Most important secondary level air pollutants are ground level
Ozone, PAN, Smog and pops (persistent organic pollutants)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
The pollution that is most commonly generated by the
r
re
combustion of organic compounds is carbon monooxide.
tu
ec
Carbon monoxide is a compound containing one carbon
(L

re
atom and one oxygen atom, therefore, giving it the
ho
at
formula CO.
R
ep
It results from the incomplete combustion of organic
e
ad
Pr
compounds such as wood, coal, oil and natural gas.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
1. Primary pollutants are directly emitted from the processes such
M
TE
as fossil fuel consumption. Volcanic eruption and factories.
,D
The major primary pollutants are oxides of sulphur, oxides of
r
re
nitrogen, oxides of carbon, particulate matter, methane,
tu
ec
ammonia, chlorofluorocarbons.
(L

re
ho
at
2. Secondary pollutants are not emitted directly. The secondary
R
ep
pollutants form when the primary pollutants react with
e
ad
themselves or other components of the atmosphere.

Pr
Most important secondary level air pollutants are ground level

Ozone, PAN, Smog and pops (persistent organic pollutants)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
The Clean Air Act in the US requires the Environment Protection
Agency (EPA) to set National Ambient Air Quality Standards.
P)
M
TE
Pollutant Averaging Time Standard
,Dr
8 hr 10 mg/m3
re
Carbon Monoxide
tu
ec
(CO)
(L

re
Nitrogen Dioxide Annual 100 ug/m3
ho
at
(NO2)
R
eep
Annual 80 ug/m3
ad
Sulphur Dioxide
Pr
(SO2)
Ozone (O3) 1 hr 235 ug/m3
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Spray towers can be utilized in decreasing the pollutant
TE
concentration in the atmosphere.
,Dr
Many nozzles are placed across the tower at different heights to
re
tu
ec
spray all of the gas as it moves up through the tower.
(L

The reasons for using many nozzles is to maximize the number of
re
ho
fine droplets impacting the pollutant particles and to provide a
at
R
large surface area for absorbing gas.
ep
e
Theoretically, the smaller the droplets formed, the higher the

ad
Pr
collection efficiency achieved for both gaseous and particulate

pollutants.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Ozone depletion is a major environmental problem
tu
ec
because it increases the amount of ultraviolet (UV)
(L

re
radiation that reaches Earth’s surface, which increases the
ho
at
rate of skin cancer, motiyaabind, and genetic and immune
R
ep
system damage.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Normal, clean rain has a pH value of between 5.0 and 5.5,
,D
which is slightly acidic.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

However, when rain combines with sulfur dioxide or
re
ho
nitrogen oxides (produced from power plants and
at
R
automobiles) the rain becomes much more acidic.
eep
ad
Pr
Acid rain has a pH of 5.0 or less.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(171 to 180)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Acid rain is caused by a chemical reaction that begins
,D
when compounds like sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides
r
re
tu
are released into the air.
ec
(L

re
ho
These substances can rise very high into the atmosphere,
at
R
where they mix and react with water, oxygen, and other
ep
e
ad
chemicals to form more acidic pollutants, known as acid

Pr
rain.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Human ear audible sound pressure levels range from 20
tu
ec
μPa (hearing threshold) till 20 Pa (pain threshold).
(L

re
ho
at
The scale uses the hearing threshold of 20 μPa or
R
ep
20 x 10-6 Pa as the reference level. This is defined as 0 dB.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pollutants Concentration Of Ambient Air (ug/m3)
P)
Industrial Area Residential Sensitive
M
TE
,D
SPM 500 200 100
r
re
tu
ec
(L
SO2 120 80 30

re
ho
at
NO 120 R 80 30
eep
ad
Pr
CO 5000 2000 1000

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Effective stack height = Stack height + vertical plume rise
(L

re
= 150 + 8
ho
at
= 158 m
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The Lapse Rate is the rate at which temperature changes with
M
height in the Atmosphere.
TE
,Dr
re
The Environmental Lapse Rate is the actual rate at which the
tu
ec
ambient temperature changes with height.
(L

re
ho
at
The adiabatic lapse rate is the rate at which the temperature of
R
ep
an air parcel changes in response to the compression or
e
ad
expansion associated with elevation change, under the

Pr
assumption that the process is adiabatic, i.e., no heat exchange

occurs between the given air parcel and its surroundings.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The Lapse Rate is the rate at which temperature changes with
M
height in the Atmosphere.
TE
,Dr
re
The Environmental Lapse Rate is the actual rate at which the
tu
ec
ambient temperature changes with height.
(L

re
ho
at
The adiabatic lapse rate is the rate at which the temperature of
R
ep
an air parcel changes in response to the compression or
e
ad
expansion associated with elevation change, under the

Pr
assumption that the process is adiabatic, i.e., no heat exchange

occurs between the given air parcel and its surroundings.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Hardness of water is the property of water which prevent
M
TE
lathering of the soap.
,D
1. Temporary Hardness Or Carbonate Hardness:- is caused due to
r
re
presence of bicarbonates of calcium and magnesium.
tu
ec
It can be removed easily by either boiling or by adding lime
(L

re
solution in the water.
ho
at
R
ep
2. Permanent Hardness Or Non-Carbonate Hardness:- is due to
e
ad
the presence of sulphates, chlorides and nitrates of calcium and

Pr
magnesium.
This hardness can not be removed by boiling only.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
A. For potable water, the amount of chloride should not exceed 250 ppm.
P)
M
B. The most common cause of blue baby syndrome is water
TE
contaminated with nitrates. After a baby drinks formula made with
,D
nitrate-rich water, the body converts the nitrates into nitrites. These
r
re
tu
nitrites bind to the hemoglobin in the body, forming methemoglobin,
ec
(L
which is unable to carry oxygen.

re
Nitrates should not exceed 45ppm.
ho
at
C. Flourides are found in natural waters and are desirable at a minimum
R
limit of about 0.6ppm to 1.5ppm to prevent dental caries and at a
ep
e
maximum of about 3ppm to prevent molting of the teeth of infants. The

ad
Pr
maximum limit permitted is 1.5ppm.

D. Lead the presence of lead in water causes lead poisoning, because of
it’s tendency to accumulate in the body.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(181 to 190)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
De-Chlorination:- The partial or complete reduction of residual
TE
chlorine after treatment is called de-chlorination.
,Dr
re
tu
1. Sulphur dioxide:- In bigger plants it is mostly used.
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Sodium Bisulphite:- It is used in small plants.
at
R
eep
3. Sodium Thiosulphate:- It is used mostly in laboratory tests.
ad
Pr
4. Activated Carbon:- It is used in small plants.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Sedimentation is the process of removing suspended
P)
coarser particles in water by settling down them to the
M
TE
bottom of tank. For a particle to settle down, the flow
,D
velocity must be reduced. This process is carried out in a
r
re
tu
structure called sedimentation tank or settling tank.
ec
(L

re
ho
Efficiency is nothing but the performance of sedimentation
at
R
tank. It is maximum when the maximum amount of
ep
e
ad
suspended particles in the raw water are separated.

Pr
In sedimentation tanks, efficiency depends upon the depth

of tank.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Excessive salinity (seawater) can only be reduced by using
(L

re
the Reverse Osmosis (RO) or Electro dialysis membrane
ho
at
techniques or by distillation.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Parameters Desirable Limits
Turbidity 10 ppm
Colour 10-20 For domestic water on
P)
platinum cobalt scale
M
TE
pH 6.5 to 8.5
,D
Taste and Odour Would not be objectionable
r
re
tu
Total dissolved solids 500 ppm
ec
Total hardness 200 ppm
(L

re
Chlorides 200
ho
at
Sulphates 200
R
ep
Fluorides 0.6 to 1.2
e
ad
Nitrates 45
Pr
Calcium 75
Magnesium 30
Iron 0.3
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(191 to 200)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Sludge Volume Index:- is the volume in millilitres occupied
(L

re
by one gram of activated sludge after settling period of 30
ho
at
minutes.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand) is the total measurement of all
TE
chemicals (organics & in-organics) in the water / waste water.
,Dr
re
tu
BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand) is a measure of, the amount
ec
(L

of oxygen that require for the bacteria to degrade the organic
re
ho
components present in water / waste water.
at
R
eep
BOD is preferred to COD as an index of sewage concentration
ad
Pr
because BOD relates specifically to putrescible organic matter

which is the most objectionable sewage constituent.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Detention period is a time taken by a water particle to
tu
ec
travel from inlet to outlet of settling tanks.
(L

re
It is the ratio of volume of basin to discharge rate.
ho
at
R
ep
Detention period (t) = V/Q.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
When sewage is continuously applied on a piece of land
ec
(L

the pores or void in the soil gets clogged and the free
re
ho
circulation of air will be prevented . This is known as
at
sewage sickness. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Carbon Monooxide – Asphyxia or asphyxiation is a
r
re
condition of deficient supply of oxygen to the body that
tu
ec
arises from abnormal breathing.
(L

re
B. The combustion of fossil fuels releases carbon dioxide
ho
at
(CO2), a major greenhouse gas, into the atmosphere.
R
ep
D. The gases responsible for acid rain are Sulphur dioxide
e
ad
Pr
(SO2) and Nitrogen (NOx).

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(201 to 210)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Confined aquifer is an aquifer below the land surface that is
M
TE
saturated with water. Layers of impermeable material are both
,D
above and below the aquifer, causing it to be under pressure so
r
re
that when the aquifer is penetrated by a well, the water will rise
tu
ec
above the top of the aquifer.
(L

re
ho
at
Unconfined aquifer is an aquifer whose upper water surface
R
ep
(water table) is at atmospheric pressure, and thus is able to rise
e
ad
and fall. Water-table aquifers are usually closer to the Earth's

Pr
surface than confined aquifers are, and as such are impacted by

drought conditions sooner than confined aquifers.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Properties Rapid Sand Filter Slow Sand Filter
P)
Area Small area Large area
M
TE
Rate of filtration 4000-7500 100-400
,Dr
re
(L/m2/hr)
tu
ec
Sand size 0.4-0.7 mm 0.2-0.3 mm
(L

re
ho
Pretreatment Coagulation and Sedimentation
at
R
Sedimentation
ep
e
Filter cleaning Backwashing Scraping

ad
Pr
Operation More skilled Less skilled

Removal of Bacteria 98-99% 99.99%
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Depending on the concentration of solids and the tendency of
TE
particles to interact the following four types of settling may
,Dr
occur:
re
tu
ec
1. Type 1 – Discrete settling:- In discrete settling, particles settle
(L

as individual entities, and there is no significant interaction with
re
ho
neighbouring particles.
at
R
ep
e
2. Type 2 – Flocculent settling:- In flocculent settling, particles

ad
Pr
flocculate or during settling. By flocculation , the particles

increase in mass and thus settle at a faster rate.
3. Type 3 – Hindered or zone settling:- When concentration of
flocculent particles in intermediate range, they are close enough
P)
M
together so that inter-particle forces are sufficient to hinder the
TE
settling of neighbouring particles resulting in hindered settling.
,Dr
re
tu
4. Type 4 – Compression settling:- This refers to settling in which
ec
(L

the concentration of particles is so high that particles are in
re
ho
physical contact with each other resulting in the formation of a
at
R
structure with lower layers supporting the weight of upper layers.
ep
e
Consequently further settling occurs due to compression of the

ad
Pr
whole structure of particles and accompanied by squeezing out

of water from the pores between the solid particles.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Advantages of Dead End System
P)
1. Pipes in this network can be laid easily.
M
TE
,D
2. The pressure and discharge in each pipe can be determined
r
re
very easily and accurately which makes design calculations very
tu
ec
simple.
(L

re
ho
at
3. The diameters of pipes of main, sub mains and branches can
R
ep
be designed based on the required demand of population. So,
e
ad
cost of the project can be reduced.

Pr
4. Dead end system requires less number of cutoff valves.

Disadvantages
1. The pressure is not constant and is very less at remote parts.
P)
M
2. Because of dead ends water stagnation takes place which
TE
,D
results in deposition of sediment. To remove this sediments,
r
re
more number of scour valves are to be provided at the dead ends
tu
ec
which increase economy.
(L

re
ho
at
3. If there is any damage occurs in the branch line, the whole
R
ep
portion should be stopped to repair that which creates
e
ad
discomfort to the other users in that sub main line.

Pr
4. In this system, Limited discharge is available for firefighting.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Dissolved oxygen in and unpolluted river will be equal to
tu
ec
saturation DO which reduces with increase in temperature.
(L

re
Since temperature is more in summer than winter, an
ho
at
unpolluted river would contain less DO in summer than in
R
ep
winter.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
ec
BOD reaction rate constant (K) varies with temperature T°C
(L

re
by the equation
ho
at
KT = K20 (1.047)^(T-20)
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Combined sewer systems are sewers that are designed to
M
TE
collect rainwater runoff, domestic sewage, and industrial
,D
wastewater in the same pipe.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(211 to 220)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
A. Sludge Volume Index is used to describe the settling
M
TE
characteristics of sludge in the aeration tank in Activated Sludge
,D
Process.
r
re
tu
B. Sludge thickening is a process in which the solids concentration
ec
(L
is increased and the total sludge volume is correspondingly

re
decreased, but the sludge still behaves like a liquid instead of a
ho
at
solid.
R
ep
C. Heavy organic material sinks to the bottom (as sludge), and
e
ad
light material (fats, oils and greases) floats to the top (as scum).
Pr
Skimmers remove scum from the surface of the water and

conveyor belts remove sludge from the tank bottom.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
1. Preliminary treatment:-
M
TE
A. Screening:- To remove dead animals, tree branches and large size solid
,D
matters.
r
re
B. Grit chamber and Detritus tanks:- To remove heavy settleable inorganic
tu
ec
matters.
(L

C. Skimming tanks:- To remove grease and oily matters and also to
re
ho
remove other small floating matters.
at
R
2. Sedimentation:- At sewage treatment plants, sedimentation is generally
ep
carried out twice, once before the biological treatment (Primary
e
ad
sedimentation) and once after the biological treatment (Secondary

Pr
sedimentation).
@Aerations
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Mixed liquor is a mixture of raw or settled wastewater and
M
activated sludge contained in an aeration basin in the activated
TE
,D
sludge process.
r
re
Mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) is the concentration
tu
ec
of suspended solids in mixed liquor, usually expressed in
(L

re
milligrams per liter (mg/l).
ho
at
R
ep
Mixed liquor suspended solids = 1000 mg/l × 400 m3
e
ad
= 1000 mg/l × 400 × 1000 l

Pr
= 1000 × 400 × 1000 mg

= 400 kg
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Anaerobic digestion is a natural biological process that
TE
,D
converts biomass into energy (biogas) in the absence of
r
re
oxygen.
tu
ec
(L

re
Stages
ho
at
1. Acid Fermentation / Acid Production
R
ep
2. Acid Regression
e
ad
Pr
3. Alkaline Fermentation
4. Stabilised sludge and Methane gas
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Traps are defined as
tu
ec
fittings at the end of
(L

re
soil pipes to prevent
ho
at
foul gases coming out
R
ep
of the soil pipe.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
A thermal power plant is a power station that converts heat
M
TE
energy into electric power.
,Dr
re
1. Carbon dioxide is one of the main gases that is released from
tu
ec
the burning of the fossil fuels and is known to be a greenhouse
(L

re
gas and a contributor of global warming.
ho
at
2. Sulfur dioxide & Nitrogen oxides are another gases that are
R
ep
released to the atmosphere by thermal power plants.
e
ad
3. The other big pollutant to the atmosphere is ash. Ash often

Pr
contains harmful particulate matter {Suspended particulate

matter (SPM) } as well as heavy metals.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Methods of Sanitary Landfilling:- Sanitary landfill as a
r
re
method of disposing of refuse on land.
tu
ec
(L

re
1. Area method is best suited for flat or gently sloping
ho
at
areas where some land depressions may exist. The wastes
R
ep
are spread, compacted and then covered with material
e
ad
Pr
which may need to be hauled in from adjacent areas.

2. Trench method consists of an excavated trench into
which the solid wastes are spread, compacted and
P)
covered. The trench method is best suited for nearly level
M
TE
land where the water table is not near the surface. Usually
,D
the soil excavated from the trench is used for cover
r
re
tu
material.
ec
(L

re
ho
3. Slope or ramp is sometimes used in combination with
at
R
the other two methods. The wastes are spread on an
eep
ad
existing slope, compacted and covered. This variation may

Pr
be suitable for most areas. The cover materials usually

come from just ahead of the working face.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
A. Surface water contains inorganic suspended matter, organic
M
TE
suspended matter and pathogens mainly. They are generally soft
,D
and less corrosive than ground water. So coagulation,
r
re
flocculation, sedimentation, filtration and disinfection shall be
tu
ec
the treatment.
(L

re
C. Lake water will have odour, taste and colour due to heavy algal
ho
at
growth. Some turbidity will also be there due to mixing of layers.
R
ep
So CuSO4 treatment for colour, odour and taste followed by
e
ad
coagulation, sedimentation, filtration and disinfection is needed.

Pr
D. Ground water has no suspended matter and it can be used

after disinfection.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Defluoridation using Nalgonda technique uses alum with
tu
ec
prior mixing of lime (CaO) or sodium carbonate (Na2CO3).
(L

re
The added lime helps to ensure adequate alkalinity
ho
at
required for effective hydrolysis of alum, so that residual
ep
R
alum does not remain in the treated water.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(221 to 230)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The ions usually accounting for majority of TDS in natural
ec
(L

waters are Na, Ca, Mg, HCO-3, SO4-2,Cl- etc.
re
ho
Hence their presence increases the electrical conductivity
at
of water. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
When two pumps operate in Series, discharge remains
(L

re
same and head produced is doubled and if they operate in
ho
at
Parallel, discharge is doubled and head remains the same.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
For d/D = 0.5 and v/V = 1.0
TE
,Dr
re
Where,
tu
ec
d is depth of flow
(L

re
v is flow velocity at depth d
ho
at
D is diameter of sewer
R
ep
V is flow velocity at full flow
e
ad
Pr
v = 1.0 m/sec
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Imhoff tank and septic tanks have anaerobic bacteria for
re
ho
BOD removal and waste stabilization.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Sludge volume index is the volume occupied in mL by 1 gm of solids in the
M
mixed liquor after settling for 30 minutes. It indicates the physical state of
TE
,D
sludge produced in a biological aeration system. It is used to decide the
r
re
rate of recycle of sludge (Q) required to maintain the desired Mixed
tu
ec
Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS) and Food to Micro organism (F/M) ratio
(L

in the aeration tank to achieve the desired degree of purification. So by
re
ho
reducing recycling ratio SVI can be controlled.
at
R
The settled sludge volume ep
VOb = 27 cm³/lit = 27 ml/lit
e
ad
The concentration of suspended solids in mixed liquor, Xob = 3 g/lit

Pr
SVI = VOb/ Xob= 27/3 = 9 ml/gm

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
B. Intercepting Trap
eep
R
at
ho
D.Cowl – Ventilating pipe
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r
C. P-Trap
,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(231 to 240)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
P)
M
TE
Carbon monoxide (CO) affect human aerobic metabolism
,D
by forming carboxyhaemoglobin (COHb).
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Oxides of nitrogen (NOx) includes – nitric oxide (NO),
re
ho
nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
at
R
NO and NO2 are of primary concern as air pollutants.
eep
ad
NO2 plays major role in the production of secondary air

Pr
pollutant ozone (O3).

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
A. Sanitary landfill method pollute ground water.
M
TE
,D
B & C. Incineration and pyrolysis release air pollutants.
r
re
tu
ec
D. Composting dose not has any harmful effect.
(L

re
Composting is an aerobic method (meaning that it requires the
ho
at
presence of air) of decomposing organic solid wastes.
R
ep
It can therefore be used to recycle organic material.
e
ad
The process involves decomposition of organic material into a

Pr
humus-like material, known as compost, which is a good fertilizer

for plants.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Impounding reservoirs can store water during high flow
(L

re
and utilize the same during lean flow period (i.e. When
ho
at
flow in stream is less than demands)
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Chlorides are generally present in water in the form of sodium
TE
chloride and may be due to leaching of marine sedimentary
,D
deposits, pollution from sea water, brine or industrial and
r
re
tu
domestic wastes etc. Their concentration above 250 mg/l
ec
(L

produce brackish taste which is objectionable. It is measured by
re
ho
potentio-metric method using titration with silver nitrate
at
R
solution. In Argentometric method, of chloride measurement,
ep
silver nitrate titration in the presence of potassium chromate
e
ad
Pr
indicator is used.
The red precipitate of silver chromate indicates end of titration.
Brackish tatse of chlorides can be removed by:
P)
1. Evaporation and distillation,
M
TE
2. Electrodialysis method,
,D
3. Reverse osmosis,
r
re
tu
4. Freezing process,
ec
(L

5. Solar distillation method.
re
ho
at
R
Lime soda process and cation exchange process are used
ep
e
ad
for hardness removal.

Pr
Chemical coagulation is used for colloidal particle removal.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
The cleaning of slow sand filters is not done by
ec
(L

backwashing as is done for rapid sand filters, but is done
re
ho
by scrapping and removing the 1.5 to 3 cm of top sand
at
layer. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Fluoride can be removed by:
M
TE
1. Nalgonda technique
,D
2. Activated alumina
r
re
3. Bone char
tu
ec
Nalgonda technique uses aluminium salt (alum) or manganese
(L

re
zeolite (a natural green sand coated with manganese dioxide).
ho
at
R
ep
Taste and odour can be removed by:
e
ad
1. Aeration
Pr
2. Activated carbon
3. Copper sulphate
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Check valve, clack valve, non-return valve, reflux valve,
(L

re
retention valve or one-way valve is a valve that normally
ho
at
allows fluid to flow through it in only one direction.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Turbidity is a measure of the degree to which the water
r
re
tu
loses its transparency due to the presence of suspended
ec
(L

particulates.
re
ho
at
R
Rivers during monsoon season have high suspended solids
ep
e
ad
concentration in suspension. This causes high turbidity.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(241 to 250)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Oxidation Pond (Waste Stabilization Ponds):- is biological
P)
treatment system in which stabilization of organic material is
M
carried out by bacterial oxidation and/or photosynthetic
TE
,D
reduction of algae.
r
re
Oxidation ponds are used to treat sewage and bio-degradable
tu
ec
industrial waste.
(L

re
Types of oxidation pond
ho
at
1. Aerobic ponds:- Treatment of soluble organic waste & effluents
R
ep
from waste water treatment plant.
e
ad
2. Anaerobic ponds:- Treatment of domestic and industrial waste.

Pr
3. Facultative ponds:- Treatment untreated screened waste

water.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
M
The amount of oxygen that is required for the chemical oxidation of the
TE
,D
organic and inorganic chemicals present in the wastewater.
r
re
tu
ec
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
(L

BOD is defined as the amount of oxygen demanded by the micro-
re
ho
organisms in the sewage for the decomposition of bio-degradable matter.
at
R
This is the most commonly used parameter to determine the strength of
ep
municipal or organic quality of the water.
e
ad
Pr
D. Nitrate concentrations above 45 mg/l may cause methemoglobinemia

or blue baby disease.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Preliminary treatment units are:
ec
(L

1. Screening and communitor
re
ho
2. Grit chamber
at
R
ep
3. Flow equalization tank and flow meter constant.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
1. The Forest Act, 1927
ec
(L

2. The Forest conservation Act, 1980
re
ho
3. The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
at
R
4. The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
The process of too many plants growing on the surface
tu
ec
water bodies is called Eutrophication.
(L

re
ho
at
Nutrients (phosphorus and nitrate nitrogen) cause
R
ep
eutrophication. It results in excessive algal growth.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Non-disposal of solid waste will result in biodegradation of
re
ho
organic matter.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,Dr
re
A spigot joint is a type of pipe fitting connection that is inserted
tu
ec
into another pipe fitting.
(L

The spigot end typically has the same outer diameter as the pipe
re
ho
and is usually fitted into another joint called a socket.
at
R
Together, these two elements form what is commonly known as a
ep
e
socket and spigot joint.

ad
Pr
P)
1. Handle Pipes with Care
M
TE
Use only proper lifting equipment.
,D
Make sure the pipe is balanced so
r
re
that it is
tu
ec
horizontal.
(L

re
ho
at
2. Fit the Ring
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
3. Clean the Socket End

4. Prepare the Trench Bed
P)
M
TE
5. Line Up the Pipes
,D
Carefully centre the spigot
r
re
tu
within the socket
ec
(L

re
6. Make the Joint
ho
The jointing procedure should develop a steady controlled push or pull
at
R
until joint is in final position. Method of jointing will depend on size of
e ep
pipe. Ensure timber blocks are used to prevent damage to socket of pipe.
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Hydraulic conductivity of the material can be defined as
tu
ec
the ability of the fluid to pass through the pores and
(L

re
fractured rocks.
ho
at
The conductivity depends on the type of the soils that are
R
ep
found in the region.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(251 to 260)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A*
,Dr
re
tu
Design period considers the useful life of any structure.
ec
(L

Further hydrological analysis for design of the structure
re
ho
considers the frequency of occurance of extremes of river
at
flow. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
For highly turbid and polluted water pre-chlorination
ec
(L

before coagulation-sedimentation reduces load on filter
re
ho
and also reduces the taste, odour, algae and other
at
organisms. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Uniformity coefficient, Cu = D60/D10
ec
(L

re
ho
For SSF, Cu = 3 to 5
at
For RSF, Cu = 1.3 to 1.7 R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
The hardness of water is due to the presence of soluble
,D
bicarbonates, chlorides, and sulfates of calcium and magnesium.
r
re
Water which does not give lather with soap is hard water.
tu
ec
(L

re
Ion Exchange Resin Method:
ho
at
In this method, the permanent hardness of water is removed by
R
ep
using resins. Ca++/Mg++ ions are exchanged with Cl–, SO4-2 ions are
e
ad
exchanged with anion exchange resin (RNH2OH). Demineralized

Pr
water is formed in this process.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Detention period is a time taken by a water particle to travel from
,Dr
re
inlet to outlet of settling tanks.
tu
ec
(L

Flowing through period is the time taken by a batch of water to
re
ho
travel from the entry to exit of settling tank.
at
R
ep
e
Because of short circuits produced in water current, flowing

ad
Pr
through period is less than the detention period.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
A. Dead end system is economic and simple, and can be extended or
P)
M
expanded easily.
TE
B. Grid-iron system, the water reaches at different places through more
,D
than one route. The discharge to be carried by each pipe, the function
r
re
tu
loss, and the size of the pipe therefore, get reduced.
ec
(L
However, more length of pipe lines, a large number of sluice valves and

re
loops make the design difficult and costlier.
ho
at
C. Ring system has lesser number of valves and smaller pipe lengths. The
R
peripheral main pipe maintains reasonably equal pressures at all points.
ep
e
D. Radial system, water flow occurs from distribution reservoirs (centre)

ad
Pr
to branches (periphery and radial) in a radial manner. This ensures high

pressure and efficient water distribution to various zones. The
calculations for design of sizes are also simple.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
Small concentration (approximately 1 mg/l) of fluoride are
M
TE
helpful to prevent dental cavities in children.
,Dr
re
tu
Iron concentrations of 0.3 mg/l may cause colour problem.
ec
(L

re
ho
The Indian standard have desirable limits of 0.3 mg/l for
at
R
iron and 1.5 mg/l for fluoride.
eep
ad
Pr
Nitrate concentration above 45 mg/l may cause blue baby

disease.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
A. The major sources of fluoride in groundwater are fluoride-
,D
bearing rocks.
r
re
Fluoride enters the body through food, water, industrial
tu
ec
exposure, drugs, cosmetics, etc., drinking water is the major
(L

re
contributor (75–90% of daily intake).
ho
at
Due to its strong electronegativity, fluoride is attracted by
R
ep
positively charged calcium in teeth and bones.
e
ad
Major health problems caused by fluoride are dental and skeletal

Pr
fluorosis.
P)
M
TE
B. Eating food or drink or breathing in air contaminated with lead
,Dr
or lead compounds for a short time usually does not cause any ill
re
tu
effects. In rare cases it may cause nausea, vomiting, diarrhea or
ec
(L

kidney damage.
re
ho
Exposure over a long period may cause people to become
at
anemia. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A*
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Turbidity, bacterial count and iron has no significant effect
re
ho
on efficiency of boiler. However, hardness causes scaling.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Self Cleansing Velocity is the minimum velocity that
re
ho
ensures non-settlement of suspended matter in sewers.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(261 to 270)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
First sight rails are set over the trench. Then pegs can be driven to the
level of invert line and centre line of the sewer marked on sight rails can
P)
M
be transferred to the bottom of the trench. Finally, sewer should be
TE
placed in the trench.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Grit chambers are basin to remove the inorganic particles to
,Dr
prevent damage to the pumps, and to prevent their
re
tu
ec
accumulation in sludge digestors.
(L

re
ho
Surface loading rate = Q/A = 720/12×1.5 = 40 m³/hr/m²
at
R Or = 40000 lph/m²
eep
ad
Pr
Detention time = V/Q = (12×1.5×0.8/720) × 60 = 1.2 minutes

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Organic material is substances that come from animal or
tu
ec
plant sources. Organic substances always contain carbon,
(L

re
oxygen and hydrogen.
ho
at
Inorganic substances are on the other hand of mineral
ep
R
origin and do normally not contain carbon.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Aerobic digestion is an endogenous respiration process. Methane is not
M
produced in this process.
TE
,D
Advantages of aerobic digestion compared to anaerobic digestion are
r
re
1. Volatile solids reduction is approximately equal to that obtained
tu
ec
anaerobically.
(L

2. Lower BOD conectrations in supernatant liquor.
re
ho
3. Production of an odourless, humus like, biologically stable end
at
R
product. ep
4. Recovery of more of the basic fertilizer value in the sludge.
e
ad
5. Operation is relatively easy.

Pr
Major disadvantages are

1. High operation cost associated with supplying oxygen.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
BOD = (Initial DO – Final DO) × Dilution Factor
,Dr
re
tu
The dilution factor is the ratio of volume of diluted sample
ec
(L

of water to the volume of sewage.
re
ho
at
= (10-2) ×100/1 R
eep
ad
Pr
= 800 mg/l
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Raw sludge can be disposed of without digestion using lagoons
M
TE
(Lagoons are pond-like bodies of water or basins designed to
,D
receive, hold, and treat wastewater)
r
re
tu
ec
Seeding is the process of introducing microorganism from an
(L

re
already functioning plant into a newly constructed plant. Due to
ho
at
seeding, the micro organism take some time to acclimatize
R
ep
themselves to the new environment and this is called lag phase.
e
ad
This is true for all type of plants (Activated sludge, trickling filter,
Pr
sludge digestion, etc) based on biological treatment. However it

is more important factor in anaerobic sludge digestion process.
P)
M
TE
,D
Biofilters are high rate trickling filters based on recirculation of
r
re
effluent from trickling filter to primary clarifier.
tu
ec
(L

re
Contact beds for filtration of sewer is based on aerobic
ho
at
decomposition.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
When sewage is applied continuously on a piece of land, the soil
TE
pores or voids may get filled up and clogged with sewage matter
,Dr
retained in them.
re
tu
ec
Thus free circulation of air will be prevented and anaerobic
(L

conditions will develop within the pores.
re
ho
Sewage sickness is the condition when soil pores get filled up and
at
R
clogged with sewage matter due to continuous application of
eep
wastewater effluent.
ad
Pr
This develops anaerobic conditions and foul gases like methane,

carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulphide are evolved.
In order to prevent sewage sickness
P)
M
1. Sewage should be given primary treatment
TE
2. The soil chosen for effluent irrigation/sewage farming
,Dr
re
should be sandy or loamy.
tu
ec
3. A proper under drainage system should be designed.
(L

re
4. Land should be given rest for some time and ploughed
ho
at
thoroughly.
R
ep
5. Rotation of crops to be followed.
e
ad
6. Shallow depths of water should be applied.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Time of concentration (tc) is the time taken by water
tu
ec
droplet to reach the catchment outlet from farthest part.
(L

re
So whole catchment contributes to runoff only when the
ho
at
time of rainfall is greater than tc.
R
ep
It is used to determine critical rainfall intensity.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
The major physical processes involved in self purification
TE
,D
of watercourses are dilution, sedimentation and
r
re
resuspension, gas transfer and heat transfer. Gas transfer
tu
ec
includes oxidation.
(L

re
ho
at
Dilution- In this method relatively small quantities of waste
R
ep
are discharged into large bodies of water.
e
ad
Pr
Gas Transfer- The transfer of gases into and out of water is

an important part of the natural purification process.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Septic tanks are based on anaerobic process.
P)
M
TE
Stabilization means
,D
1. Reduction of pathogens, 2. Elimination of offensive odours and
r
re
tu
3. Inhibitation, reduction or elimination of potential for putrefaction.
ec
(L
The principal methods for stabilization are

re
1. Alkaline stabilization, 2. Anaerobic digestion
ho
at
3. Aerobic digestion and, 4. Composting
R
ep
e
In septic tanks digestion of settled solids reduces the sludge compared to

ad
Pr
that obtained from primary settling tank.

The dispersion trenches oxidize the effluent from septic tanks to reduce
BOD
Assignment
Q) Consider the following statements
P)
The daily per capita consumption of water apparently increases
M
with
TE
,D
1. higher standard of living of people
r
re
2. availability of sewerage in the city
tu
ec
3. metered water supply
(L

re
4. wholesome and potable quality of water
ho
at
which of these statements are correct?
R
ep
A. 1,2 and 3
e
ad
B. 2,3 and 4
Pr
C. 1,3 and 4
D. 1,2 and 4
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(271 to 280)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
The hydrocarbons and NOx (Nitrogen oxide) are the necessary
P)
ingredients to produce photochemical smog.
M
TE
,D
Unburnt hydrocarbons + NOx → Somg
r
re
(Sunlight)
tu
ec
(L

re
The end product of these photochemical reactions is
ho
at
photochemical smog consisting of air contaminants such as
R
ep
Ozone, PAN, aldehydes, ketones and alkyl nitrates and carbon
e
ad
monoxide.
Pr
Thus oxides of nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons are

responsible for causing photochemical smog.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
1. Electrostatic precipitator (High Voltage) is used for > 1 mm but
M
can collect submicron particles also.
TE
,Dr
re
2. Cyclone collector (based on centrifugal force) is used for 5 to
tu
ec
25 um size particle.
(L

re
ho
at
3. Wet scrubber are used for gaseous pollutants.
R
ep
e
ad
4. Adsorbers are specific to gases. A reactive liquid adsorbent

Pr
(water or limestone) may be used to remove Sulphur Dioxide for

flue gases.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
1. Eutrophication is caused by the nutrients like carbon,
P)
M
nitrogen and phosphorus. It is a natural process of algal
TE
,D
production and siltation of water body. The water body
r
re
become shallower.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. Organism that derive cell carbon from carbon dioxide
ho
at
are called autotrophs.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
3. Organisms that use organic carbon for the formation of

new biomass are called heterotrophs.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
The sealant material should be more impermeable than
tu
ec
the soil. So sand will not be suitable material.
(L

re
Flyash and lime themselves produce pollutants which
ho
at
dissolve in water. Therefore, these materials cannot be
R
ep
used as sealants.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
ec
When two pumps operate in series, discharge remains
(L

re
same and head produced is doubled and if they operate in
ho
at
parallel, discharge is doubled and head remains the same.
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Impounding reservoir is a basin constructed in the valley of
ec
(L

a stream or river for the purpose of holding stream flow so
re
ho
that the stored water may be used when supply is
at
insufficient. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D*
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Aeration will oxidize the iron and manganese and then
re
ho
they can be separated by sedimentation.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Assignment
Q) Consider the following statements
P)
The daily per capita consumption of water apparently increases
M
with
TE
,D
1. higher standard of living of people
r
re
2. availability of sewerage in the city
tu
ec
3. metered water supply
(L

re
4. wholesome and potable quality of water
ho
at
which of these statements are correct?
R
ep
A. 1,2 and 3
e
ad
B. 2,3 and 4
Pr
C. 1,3 and 4
D. 1,2 and 4
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Metering of water supply reduces the tendency of people
re
ho
to waste water.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(281 to 290)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Slow Sand Filter Rapid Sand Filter
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Effective Size (ES) = 0.2 to 0.4 mm 0.35 to 0.55 mm
(L

re
D10
ho
at
R
eep
Uniformity 3 to 5 1.3 to 1.7
ad
Pr
Coefficient (UC)
= Cu = D60/D10
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer D
,Dr
re
tu
If only ammonia is present then first chloromines will be
ec
(L

formed. Thus there will be no destruction of chlorine
re
ho
residual by reducing compounds, which is represented by
at
R
AB. So curve will be pass through origin.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Surge Tank:- tank connected to a pipe carrying a liquid and
M
TE
intended to neutralize sudden changes of pressure in the
,Dr
flow by filling when the pressure increases and emptying
re
tu
ec
when it drops.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Sludge digestion is a biological process in which organic
tu
ec
solids are decomposed into stable substances.
(L

re
Digestion reduces the total mass of solids, destroys
ho
at
pathogens, and makes it easier to dewater or dry
R
ep
the sludge.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Thickening is defined as removal of water from sludge to achieve
M
TE
a reduction in moisture content of slurries. The resulting material
,D
is still fluid. Thickening is used at most wastewater treatment
r
re
plants, as an economic measure, to reduce the volume of sludge.
tu
ec
(L

re
V1 (100 – p1) = V (100 – p)
ho
at
V1/V = (100 – 99) / (100 – 96)
R
ep
= 1 / 4 = 0.25
e
ad
Pr
Volume reduction = (V – V1) / V × 100

= 75 %
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Dissolved solids very stable inorganic or organic substances that remain in
TE
suspension
,Dr
re
tu
Colloidal soilds Tiny clay and organic materials that float in water and
ec
(L
repel each other.

re
ho
at
Volatile solid is a substance that can easily transform from its solid phase
R
to its vapor phase without going through a liquid phase.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Suspended or settleble soilds Large particles of silt and sand that settle
out in a sedimentation basin or clarifier.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Oxidation ditch is based on extended aeration process.
ec
(L

There is no need of separate sludge digester as the
re
ho
detention time is very large. So sludge can be directly
at
R
taken to sludge drying beds.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
1. Screen chamber:- remove coarse materials (pieces of
TE
wood, plastics, rags, papers, leaves, roots etc.)
,Dr
re
tu
ec
2. Grit chamber:- are designed to remove grit, consisting of
(L

re
sand, gravel, sanders, or other heavy solid materials that
ho
at
have specific gravities or setting velocities substantially
R
ep
greater than those of organic particles in wastewater.
e
ad
Pr
Grit chambers are most commonly located after the bar

screens and before the primary sedimentation.
3. Primary settling tank:- Suspended solids that pass
through screens and grit chambers are removed from the
P)
sewage in sedimentation tanks.
M
TE
,D
4. Trickling filter:- A trickling filter is simply a tank filled
r
re
tu
with a deep bed of stones. Settled sewage is sprayed
ec
(L

continuously over the top of the stones and trickles to the
re
ho
bottom, where it is collected for further treatment.
at
R
eep
ad
5. Secondary settling tank:- Secondary treatment removes

Pr
the soluble organic matter that escapes primary

treatment. It also removes more of the suspended solids.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(291 to 300)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Oxidation pond is based on algae-bacteria symbiotic relationship.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Anaerobic digestion is the process for the reduction of sludge
r
re
without the use of air or elemental oxygen.
tu
ec
(L

re
Anaerobic digestion is widely used as a source of renewable
ho
at
energy. The process produces a biogas, consisting of methane,
R
ep
carbon dioxide, and traces of other 'contaminant' gases. This
e
ad
biogas can be used directly as fuel.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Parshall flumes (Parshall flume is an open channel) are
ec
(L

proportining weirs and they maintain constant flow
re
ho
velocity in grit chamber for settling (Type-I) of inorganic
at
particles. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
The activated sludge process is an integral process used to treat
wastewater. Air or oxygen is blown into raw sewage. The process oxidizes
P)
M
organic matters in the wastewater, producing new cells, carbon dioxide,
TE
and water.
,D
The sludge particles can then be removed through the process of gravity
r
re
tu
settling.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Food to microorganism ratio, and consequently proper
P)
proportion of return sludge from the secondary settling tank are
M
important parameters. The return of sludge will be necessary to
TE
,D
maintain adequate Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS)
r
re
concentration to achieve desired degree of treatment.
tu
ec
(L

re
Sludge Volume Index (SVI) is calculated to evaluate the sludge
ho
at
setting characteristics. SVI values below 100 are desired and
R
ep
above 150 are typically associated with filamentous growth.
e
ad
The other measure of quantifying settling characteristics of

Pr
activated sludge is known setting zone.

P)
M
Oxygen is required in activated sludge process in aeration tank
TE
,D
for oxidation of part of the influent organic matter, and also for
r
re
endogenous respiration of the microorganism in this system.
tu
ec
It should maintain specified level of DO in the wastewater i.e.
(L

re
0.1-1.0 mg/l for conventional activated plants, 1-2 mg/l for
ho
at
extended aeration and above 2 mg/l for nitrification in the
R
ep
activated sludge plant.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
Every volcanic eruption is different
TE
on impact, and therefore different
,Dr
re
on the quantity and a variety of
tu
ec
pollutants emitted.
(L

On average the outgassed
re
ho
composition release is 79% water
at
vapor (H2O), 11.6% carbon R
ep
e
dioxide (CO2), 6.5% sulphur

ad
Pr
dioxide (SO2) and 2.9% of other

pollutants.
Major pollutants from Automobile
1. Particulate matter (PM),
P)
M
2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs),
TE
3. Nitrogen oxides (Nox),
,Dr
4. Carbon monoxide (CO),
re
tu
5. Sulfur dioxide (SO2),
ec
(L

6. Greenhouse gases,
re
ho
at
R
Carbon monoxide (CO):- This odorless, colorless, and poisonous
eep
gas is formed by the combustion of fossil fuels such as gasoline
ad
Pr
and is emitted primarily from cars and trucks. When inhaled, CO

blocks oxygen from the brain, heart, and other vital organs.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Aerosols or particulates or suspended particulate matter is
ec
(L

defined as the liquid or solid particles when they are
re
ho
suspended in gaseous medium. The term aerosol is used
at
R
during the time it is suspended in air.
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Aquifer is a geologic layer of porous and permeable material such
P)
as sand and gravel, limestone, or sandstone, through which
M
TE
water flows and is stored.
,D
Artesian aquifer is a confined aquifer containing groundwater
r
re
under positive pressure or more than atmospheric pressure.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Metering of water supply reduces the tendency of people
re
ho
to waste water.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(301 to 310)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
The alkalinity is measured by titrating the water with an
M
TE
acid and determining the hydrogen equivalent.
,D
Alkalinity is expressed as mg/l of CaCo3.
r
re
tu
Methyl orange is an indicator with pH range 2.8 to 4.4. It
ec
(L

changes colour from red to yellow and thus indicates end
re
ho
of titration.
at
R
eep
ad
If total alkalinity is more than or equal to total hardness.

Pr
Carbonate hardness = total hardness

Non carbonate hardness = 0
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B*
,Dr
re
tu
Small amount of chlorine (practically 0.2 mg/l) of residual
ec
(L

is ensure of the break point to safeguard the water against
re
ho
future recontamination, not for it is uneconomical to
at
remove. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Disinfection using chlorine is necessary part of water
r
re
tu
treatment for rural water supply.
ec
(L

Therefore A and C cannot be the answer.
re
ho
at
R
Before slow sand filter, coagulation is not suitable.
eep
ad
Therefore B is not possible

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Ventilation in sewers is needed to avoid
,Dr
1. The danger of asphyxiation of sewer maintenance employees.
re
tu
ec
2. The buildup of odorous gases such as hydrogen sulphide,
(L

ammonia etc.
re
ho
3. The development of explosive mixture of sewer gases
at
R
principally methane and oxygen.
eep
4. Another reason for ventilating sewers is to ensure a
ad
Pr
continuous flow of sewage inside the sewer.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
The daily BOD generated
r
re
tu
ec
= 10,000 persons × 200 L/C/day× 300 mg/L × 10^-6
(L

re
= 600 kg/day
ho
at
R
ep
Thus area requirement = 600 (kg/day) / 300 (kg/day/ha)
e
ad
Pr
= 2 hectares
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
TE
(311 to 322)
,Dr
re
tu
Environmental
ec
(L

re
Engineering
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
There are two stages of decomposition in the BOD test:
,Dr
1. Carbonaceous stage or first stage
re
tu
Represents that portion of oxygen demand involved in the
ec
(L

conversion of organic carbon to carbon dioxide.
re
ho
2. Nitrogenous stage, or second stage
at
R
Represents a combined carbonaceous plus nitrogenous demand,
ep
e
when organic nitrogen, ammonia, and nitrite are converted to

ad
Pr
nitrate.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Plumbing trap is a part of the drainage system. It is designed in such a
way that it retains a small quantity of waste water from the discharge, of
P)
M
fitting to which it is attached, as a barrier to prevent foul gases or air
TE
entering in the building.
,D
P trap is used with indian water closet.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
Hydraulic radius of sewer, R = A/P
M
TE
Where, P is the wetted perimeter of the C/S area (A) of flow
,Dr
re
Hydraulic radius of sewer flowing full
tu
ec
= (πD²/4) /(πD) = D/4 = 1/4 = 0.25 m
(L

re
ho
at
Case1 At 0.75 m depth of flow
R
ep
r/R ≈ 1.2 ≈ 1.2 × 0.25 = 0.3 m Answer
e
ad
Pr
Case2 At 0.5 m depth of flow

r/R = 1.0 = r = 0.25 m
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Stabilization (Facultative) ponds are based on symbiotic relationship of
P)
bacteria in anaerobic zone and algae in the aerobic zone.
M
TE
The usual detention time is 7 to 30 days in facultative ponds.
,D
The bacteria are facultative.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
Incineration is a waste treatment process that involves the
TE
combustion of organic substances contained in waste materials.
,Dr
re
The installation of an incineration plant is an expensive process.
tu
ec
Pollutes the environment. Incinerators produce smoke during the
(L

burning process.
re
ho
at
R
Presorting, grinding and turning are required in composting.
eep
ad
Pr
Salvage by sorting can be adopted for non-biodegradable non-

combustible material only.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C (1 Bar = 10⁴ N/m² & 1 ubar = 10 N/m²)
P)
M
TE
Sound pressure level (dB) = 20Log10(P/Po)
,Dr
re
tu
P is sound pressure in N/m²
ec
(L

Po is reference pressure (2×10^-5 N/m²)
re
ho
at
R
For given sound pressure, P = 2000 ubar = 200 N/m²
eep
ad
Pr
SPL = 20Log(2000/2×10^-5) = 140 dB

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Overflow rate is an empirical parameter describing the
tu
ec
settling characteristics of solids in a specific wastewater.
(L

re
Overflow rate is defined as the volume of water flow per
ho
at
unit of time divided by the surface area of the settling
ep
R
basin.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Food-to-microorganisms (F/M) ratio indicates the organic
r
re
load into the activated sludge system and is expressed in
tu
ec
kilogram BOD per kilogram of MLSS per day.
(L

re
The F/M ratio is one of the significant design and
ho
at
operational parameters of activated sludge systems.
R
eep
ad
Pr
F/M ratio controlled by amount of sludge wasting.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
(Calcium chloride)
ec
(L

re
ho
(Dichloramine)
at
R
eep
(Hypochlorous acid)
ad
Pr
(Sodium hypochlorite)
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
Free chlorine refers to both hypochlorous acid (HOCl) and
ec
(L

the hypochlorite (OCl-) ion, and is commonly added to
re
ho
water systems for disinfection.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

AE State PSC
P)
M
(323 to 332)
TE
,D
Last Part
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Environmental
ho
at
R
Engineering
ep
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
Coagulatio/Flocculation removes colloids and suspended
tu
ec
solids from the water.
(L

re
These particles have a negative charge, so the positively
ho
at
charged coagulant chemicals (widely used Alum) neutralize
R
ep
them during coagulation.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Tapered flocculation:- where the velocity gradient slowly
re
ho
decreases through the basin.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
P)
M
The aerobic zone in stabilization pond gives complete
TE
,D
purification by symbiotic relationship between algae and
r
re
bacteria.
tu
ec
The bacteria use oxygen as an electron acceptor to oxidize
(L

re
the wastewater organics to stable end product such as
ho
at
CO2, PO43- (Phosphate).
R
ep
The algae in turn use these compounds as a material
e
ad
Pr
source and with sunlight as energy source, produce oxygen

as an end product.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
E-coli is a nonpathogenic bacteria of Fecal coliform group
tu
ec
of organisms.
(L

re
ho
at
The number of surviving organism may be an indication of
R
ep
the time lapse since contamination.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
The cost of ozonation is two to three times higher than the
r
re
tu
cost of chlorination.
ec
(L

Since no residual remains, it will be necessary to use small
re
ho
amounts of chlorine after ozonation to provide continued
at
R
protection against regrowth of pathogens in the
eep
ad
distribution system.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
The dual media filter filtration rate between 10 to 20 m³/h/m².
It is approximately 4 times higher than that in rapid sand filter.
P)
M
The dual media filter has anthracite coal and silica sand is
TE
,D
medium.
r
re
The density of coal is less than sand so coal is on top and the flow
tu
ec
occurs from coarse medium to fine medium (silica sand).
(L

re
ho
Coal Sand
at
Depth 0.3 R 0.3
ep
e
ad
Specific gravity 1.4-1.6 2.65

Pr
Effective size (mm) 0.9-1.0 0.5-0.55

Uniformity coefficient <1.8 <1.65
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C*
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The horizontal flow velocity is maintained within 24 to 30
re
ho
cm/s, so as not to cause scouring.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
A ferrule is a connection from the main system or your water
,D
distribution system to the individual buildings.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

If you are supplying water to a single storey building at the
re
ho
ferrule point you need to have a minimum of 7 m of head.
at
R
ep
12 m for Double storey
e
ad
Pr
17 m for triple storey

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D*
P)
M
Leachate generation is a major problem for municipal solid waste
TE
,D
(MSW) landfills and causes significant threat to surface water and
r
re
groundwater.
tu
ec
(L

re
Leachate can be defined as a liquid that passes through a landfill
ho
at
and has extracted dissolved and suspended matter from it.
R
ep
e
ad
Leachate movement should be controlled by well designed

Pr
drainage system. So that ground water may not get polluted.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(01 to 15)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Soil ep
e
R
at
ho
ad
Mechanics
Pr
P)
M
Q.1) Residual soil are formed by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Glaciers
ec
(L
b. Wind

re
ho
c. Water
at
d. None of above R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
a. Glaciers – glaciers are large masses of ice formed by the compaction of Snow. As
P)
M
the glacier grow and move, they carry with them soils varying in size from fine
TE
grained to huge boulders. Soils get mixed with the ice and are transported far away
,D
from their original position. Ex. – Drift soil
r
re
tu
ec
b. Wind – Soils deposited by wind are know as aeolian deposit, loess and sand
(L

dunes.
re
ho
at
c. Water –
R
1. Alluvial soil – transported by water are settled on river bed. 2.
ep
e
Lacustrine Soils – These are deposited by still water agents such as lakes.
ad
Pr
3. Marine Soils – Deposited by salty water or ocean water.
d. Gravity - Deposited in the lower part of the mountains, ex. Colluvial Soils/Talus
P)
M
Q.2) Water content of soil can
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Never be greater than 100%
ec
(L
b. Take values only from 0% to 100%

re
ho
c. Be less than 0%
at
d. Be greater than 100% R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: D
M
TE
,D
The water content is defined as the ratio of the weight of water
r
re
tu
to the weight of solids.
ec
(L

re
ho
W (in%) = Ww/Ws × 100
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q.3) Which of the following types of soil is transported by
M
TE
gravitational force
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Loess
(L

re
b. Talus
ho
at
c. Drifts
R
ep
d. Dune sand
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: B
M
TE
,Dr
a. Loess and aeolian soil – formed by Wind
re
tu
ec
(L

b. Talus/ Colluvial Soil – Gravitational force
re
ho
at
c. Drift – Glaciers R
eep
ad
Pr
d. Dune sand – Formed by wind

P)
M
Q.4) A fully saturated soil said to be
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. One phase system
ec
(L
b. Two phase system with solids and air

re
ho
c. Two phase system with solids and water
at
d. Three phase system R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
1. Solids + Water + Air –
TE
,D
Partially Saturated soil – (Three phase
r
re
system)
tu
ec
(L

2. Solids + Water –
re
ho
Fully saturated soil (Two phase
at
system) R
eep
ad
3. Solids + Air –
Pr
Dry Soil ( Two phase system)

P)
Q.5) Valid range for S, the degree of saturation of soil in
M
TE
percentage is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. S > 0
(L

re
b. S ≤ 0
ho
at
c. 0 < S < 100
R
ep
d. 0 ≤ S ≤ 100
e
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
The degree of saturation is ratio of the volume of water to the volume of
,D
voids.
r
re
S = Vw/Vv
tu
ec
(L

re
S = Vw/(Vw+Va)
ho
at
For dry soil, S=0 R
ep
e
ad
Pr
For Fully saturated soil, S=1

Q.6) The submerged density of soil in terms of unit weight
P)
M
of water Yw, Specific gravity G and void ratio e is the given
TE
,D
by the expression
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Yw(G+1) /(1+e)

re
ho
b. Yw(G-1) /(1-e)
at
c. Yw(G+1) /(1-e) R
ep
e
d. Yw(G-1) /(1+e)
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
1. Bulk/Wet/Moist/Total unit weight = (G+eS) Yw/(1+e)
M
2. Saturated unit weight, Ysat. = (G+e) Yw/(1+e)
TE
3. Dry unit weight, Yd = GYw/(1+e)
,Dr
4. Submerged unit weight, Ysub. = (G-1) Yw/(1+e)
re
tu
ec
(L
Archimedes' Principle - states that a body immersed in a fluid is buoyed

re
up by a force equal to the weight of the displaced fluid. Consider now a
ho
at
body which sinks in water. This buoyancy is due to a volume of water
R
ep
equal to the volume of the submerged solid.
e
ad
Ysub = Ysat – Ye ≈ ½ Ysat

Pr
Ysat. > Yb > Yd > Ysub.

P)
Q.7) A soil has a bulk density of 22KN/m³ and water
M
TE
content 10%. The dry density of soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 18.6 KN/m³
(L

re
b. 20.0 KN/m³
ho
at
c. 22.0 KN/m³
R
ep
d. 23.2 KN/m³
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
We know,
,D
Bulk density = Dry density × (1 + Water content)
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Yb = Yd (1+W)

re
ho
at
22 = Yd (1+0.10) R
eep
ad
Yd = 20 KN/m³
Pr
P)
Q.8) If the voids of a soil mass are full of air only, the soil
M
TE
as termed as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Air Entrained soil
(L

re
b. Partially saturated soil
ho
at
c. Dry soil
R
ep
d. Dehydrated soil
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
system)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
system) R
eep
ad
3. Solids + Air –
Pr

P)
M
Q.9) Valid range for n, the percentage air voids, is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. 0 < n < 100
ec
(L
b. 0 ≤ n ≤ 100

re
ho
c. n > 0
at
d. n ≤ 0 R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
Percentage air voids:- It is the ratio of the volume of air to the
TE
,D
total volume.
r
re
tu
ec
n = Va/V × 100
(L

re
ho
- Va always less than total volume (V)
at
R
- For fully saturated soil, Va=0
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Q.10) Select the correct statement
,Dr
re
tu
a. Unit weight of dry soil is greater than unit weight of wet soil
ec
(L
b. For dry soil, dry unit weight is less than total unit weight

re
ho
c. Unit weight of soil increase due to submergence in water
at
R
d. Unit weight of soil decrease due to submergence in water
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
Ysat. > Yb > Yd > Ysub.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Archimedes' Principle - states that a body immersed in a fluid is
(L

buoyed up by a force equal to the weight of the displaced fluid.
re
ho
Consider now a body which sinks in water. This buoyancy is due
at
R
to a volume of water equal to the volume of the submerged
ep
e
solid.
ad
Pr

P)
M
Q.11) Void ratio of a soil mass can
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Never be greater than unity
ec
(L
b. Be zero

re
ho
c. Take any value greater than zero
at
R
d. Take values between 0 and 1 only
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: C
M
TE
,D
Void ratio(e) is defined as the ratio of volume of voids(Vv) to the
r
re
tu
volume of solids(Vs).
ec
(L
e = Vv/Vs

re
ho
at
R
*Vv can be greater than, less than or equal to Vs
eep
ad
Pr
Q.12) If the Volume of voids is equal to the volume of
P)
M
solids in a soil mass, then the values of porosity and void
TE
,D
ratio respectively are
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 1.0 and 1.0

re
ho
b. 0.0 and 1.0
at
c. 0.5 and 1.0 R
ep
e
d. 1.0 and 0.5

ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
Given,
TE
,D
Volume of voids (Vv) = Volume of solids (Vs)
r
re
tu
ec
1. Porosity, n = Vv/V
(L

re
n = Vv/(Vv+Vs)
ho
at
n = Vv/2Vv
R
ep
n = 0.5
e
ad
2. Void Ratio, e = Vv/Vs

Pr
e = Vv/Vs
e=1
P)
Q.13) When the degree of saturation is zero, the soil
M
TE
mass under consideration represents
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. One phase system
(L

re
b. Two phase system with solid and air
ho
at
c. Two phase system with solid and water
R
ep
d. Three phase system
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
,D
r
re
system)
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
system) R
eep
ad
3. Solids + Air –
Pr

P)
M
Q.14) Select the correct range of density index
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Id > 0
ec
(L
b. Id ≥ 0

re
ho
c. 0 < Id < 1
at
d. 0 ≤ Id ≤ 1 R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
,D
Density Index or Relative density or Degree of density
r
re
tu
ec
Id = (emax. – e) /(emax.-emin.)
(L

re
ho
If natural soil in loose condition, e = emax. and Id = 0
at
R
eep
ad
If natural soil in dense condition, e = emin. and Id = 1

Pr
P)
Q.15) If the degree of saturation of a partially saturated
M
TE
soil is 60%, then air content of soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 40%
(L

re
b. 60%
ho
at
c. 80%
R
ep
d. 100%
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
TE
Degree of saturation (S) = Vw/Vv
,Dr
re
tu
Air content (ac) = Va/Vv
ec
(L

re
ho
Interrelationship between s and ac is
at
S + ac = 1 R
ep
60 + ac = 1
e
ad
Pr
ac = 40%
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(16 to 30)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Soil ep
e
R
at
ho
ad
Mechanics
Pr
P)
Q.16) If the water content of a fully saturated soil maas is
M
TE
100%, then the voids ratio of the sample is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Less than specific gravity of soil
(L

re
b. Equal to specific gravity of soil
ho
at
c. Greater than specific gravity of soil
R
ep
d. Independent of specific gravity of soil
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
Given,
M
Fully saturated soil, S = 100% or 1
TE
,D
Water content, W = 100% or 1
r
re
tu
ec
We know that,
(L

re
eS = GW
ho
at
R
ep
e.1=G.1
e
ad
Pr
e=G
P)
Q.17) The ratio of volume of voids to the total volume of
M
TE
soil mass is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Air content
(L

re
b. Porosity
ho
at
c. Percentage air voids
R
ep
d. Voids ratio
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
a. Air content – The ratio of volume of air to the volume of the voids.
,Dr
re
b.Porosity – The ratio of volume of the voids to the total volume of soil
tu
ec
mass.
(L

re
ho
c. Percentage air voids – The ratio of volume of air to the total volume of
at
soil mass. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
d. Voids ratio – The ratio of volume of voids to the volume of solids.

P)
Q.18) Relative density of a compacted dense sand is
M
TE
approximately equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 0.4
(L

re
b. 0.6
ho
at
c. 0.95
R
ep
d. 1.20
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer: C
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Relative density for compacted dense sand is approximately is

re
ho
0.85 to 1.0
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q.19) If the sand in-situ is in it’s densest state, then the
M
TE
relative density of sand is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Zero
(L

re
b.One
ho
at
c. Between 0 and 1
R
ep
d. Greater than 1
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
Relative density of densest sand is 1
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q.20) Which of the following methods is most accurate for
M
TE
the determination of the water content of soil
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Oven drying method
(L

re
b. Sand bath metod
ho
at
c. Calcium carbide method
R
ep
d. Pycnometer method
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
TE
a. Oven drying – Standard and accurate lab method.
,Dr
re
tu
b. Sand bath method – Same as Oven drying except drying in
ec
(L
sand bath.

re
ho
at
R
c. Calcium carbide method – Rapid method.
eep
ad
Pr
d. Pycnometer metod – Only for coarse grain soil (If G is known).

Q.21) For proper field control, which of the following
P)
M
methods is best suited for quick determination of water
TE
,D
content of a soil mass
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Oven driving method

re
ho
b. Sand bath method
at
c. Alcohol method R
eep
d. Calcium carbide method

ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
,D
Calcium carbide method - It is a method for rapid determination
r
re
of water content from the gas pressure developed by the
tu
ec
reaction of calcium carbide with the free water of the soil.
(L

re
ho
Shake until the pressure gauge reading is constant and note the
at
R
reading. Usually it takes 4 to 8 minutes to achieve constant
ep
e
ad
reading
Pr
P)
M
Q.22) A pycnometer is used to determine
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Water content and voids ratio
ec
(L
b. Specific gravity and dry density

re
ho
c. Water content and specific gravity
at
R
d. Voids ratio and dry density
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer: C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Pycnometer is used to determine water content and specific
re
ho
gravity.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q.23) Stoke’s law is valid only if the size of particle is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Less than 0.0002 mm
ec
(L
b. Greater than 0.2 mm

re
ho
c. Between 0.2 mm and 0.0002 mm
at
d. All of the above R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer: C
TE
,Dr
re
Assumptions Stoke’s law:
tu
ec
1. Soil particles are spherical
(L

re
2.Particle settle independent
ho
3. Wall of jar no affect the settlement
at
R
4. Particle size between 0.0002 mm and 0.2 mm
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 24) In hydrometer analysis for a soil mass
P)
M
a. Both meniscus correction and dispersing agent
TE
,D
correction are additive
r
re
tu
b. Both meniscus correction and dispersing agent
ec
(L
correction are subtractive

re
ho
c. Meniscus correction is additive and dispersing agent
at
correction is subtractiveR
eep
d. Meniscus correction is subtractive and dispersing agent

ad
Pr
correction is additive
Pr
Answer: C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 25) The hydrometer method of sedimentation analysis
M
TE
is differs from the pipette analysis mainly in
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. The principle of test
(L

re
b. The method of taking observations
ho
at
c. The method of preparation of soil suspension
R
ep
d. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: B
M
TE
,D
Particle size Analysis by two methods –
r
re
tu
ec
(L
1. Sieve analysis ( For coarse grain soil > 75u)

re
ho
2. Sedimentation analysis ( For fine grain soil < 75u)
at
a) Pipette method R
ep
b) Hydrometer analysis
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 26) Which of the following is a measure of particle size
M
TE
range
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Effective size
(L

re
b. Uniformity coefficient
ho
at
c. Coefficient of curvature
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Answer: B
TE
,Dr
re
a. Effective size D10
tu
ec
(L

re
b. Uniformity coefficient (Cu = D60/D10) – Particle size
ho
at
R
ep
c. Coefficient of curvature (Cc = D30^2/D60.D10) – Particle shape
e
ad
Pr
Q. 27) Which of the following statements of correct
P)
M
TE
a. Uniformity coefficient represents the shape of the
,Dr
particle size distribution curve
re
tu
ec
b. For a well graded soil, both uniformity coefficient and
(L

re
coefficient of curvature are nearly unity
ho
at
c. A soil is said to be well graded if it has most of particles
R
ep
of about the same size
e
ad

Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
,D
a. Uniformity coefficient represents the Size of particles
r
re
tu
ec
b. For well graded soil, Cu > 4
(L

re
Cc = 1 to 3
ho
at
R
ep
c. Well graded or uniformly graded – soil contains the particles
e
ad
of different sizes in good proportion.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 28) Uniformity coefficient of a soil is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Always less than 1
ec
(L
b. Always equal to 1

re
ho
c. Equal to or less than 1
at
R
d. Equal to or greater than 1
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: D
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
D60 = Particle size such that 60% of the soil is finer than this size
tu
ec
D10 = Similarly
(L

re
ho
For a uniformly graded soil Cu is nearly unity
at
R
ep
e
ad
For well graded gravel, Cu > 4

Pr
For well graded sand, Cu > 6

P)
Q. 29) According to Atterberg, the soil is said to be of
M
TE
medium plasticity if the plasticity index PI is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 0 < PI < 7
(L

re
b. 7 ≤ PI ≤ 17
ho
at
c. 17 < PI < 27
R
ep
d. PI ⩾ 27
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
The plasticity index (PI) is a measure of the plasticity of a soil.
TE
,Dr
re
PI = Liquid Limit – Plastic Limit
tu
ec
(L

re
PI = 0 - Nonplastic
ho
PI < 7 - Slightly plastic
at
PI 7-17 - Medium plastic R
ep
e
ad
PI > 17 - Highly plastic

Pr
Q. 30) If the natural water content of soil mass lies
P)
M
between its liquid limit and plastic limit, the soil mass said
TE
,D
to be in
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Liquid state

re
ho
b. Plastic state
at
c. Semi-solid state R
ep
e
d. Solid state
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer: B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
WL =Water content at Liquid Limit

re
WP = Water content at Plastic Limit
ho
WS = Water content at Shrinkage Limit
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Soil
Objective
Questions
Mechanics

(Q.31 – Q.45)
Q. 31) The ratio of (Liquid Limit – Water Content) /
P)
M
(Plasticity Index)
TE
,D
for a soil mass is called
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Liquidity Index

re
ho
b. Shrinkage ratio
at
c. Consistency Index R
ep
e
ad
d. Toughness Index
Pr
P)
Answer: C
M
TE
,D
r
re
* Plasticity index = Liquid limit(LL) – Plastic limit (PL)
tu
ec
(L
a. Liquidity Index = (W - PL) / PI

re
ho
c. Consistency Index = (LL – W) / PI
at
R
ep
d. Toughness Index = PI / Flow index
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 32) When the plastic limit of a soil is greater than
M
TE
the liquid limit, then the plasticity index reported as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Negative
(L

re
b. Zero
ho
at
c. Non-plastic ep
R
d. 1
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
,D
Plasticity Index = Liquid Limit – Plastic Limit
r
re
tu
ec
Plasticity index is always greater than or equal to zero.
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 33) Toughness index is defined as the ratio of
TE
,Dr
re
a. Plasticity index to consistency index
tu
ec
(L
b. Plasticity index to flow index

re
ho
c. Liquidity index to flow index
at
R
d. Consistency index to liquidity index
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
Toughness Index = PI/FI
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 34) If the plasticity index of a soil mass is zero, the
M
TE
soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Sand
(L

re
b. Silt
ho
at
c. Clay ep
R
d. Clayey silt
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: A
M
TE
,D
Plasticity of a soil is its ability to undergo deformation
r
re
tu
ec
without cracking or fracturing.
(L

re
ho
at
A plastic soil can be moulded into various shapes
ep
R
when it is wet.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 35) The admixture of coarser particles like sand or
P)
silt to clay causes
M
TE
,D
a.Decrease in liquid limit and increase in plasticity
r
re
tu
ec
index
(L

re
b. Decrease in liquid limit and no change in plasticity
ho
at
index ep
R
c. Decrease in both liquid limit and plasticity index
e
ad
Pr
d. Increase in both liquid limit and plasticity index

Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Plasticity Index = Liquid Limit – Plastic Limit

P)
M
TE
,D
a. A uniform soil has more strength and stability than a non-uniform soil
r
re
tu
ec
b. A uniform soil has less strength and stability than a non-uniform soil
(L

re
ho
c. Uniformity coefficient does not affect strength and stability
at
R
ep
d. Uniformity coefficient of a poorly graded soil is more than that of a
e
ad
well graded soil.

Pr
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
For well graded soil, Cu > 4 (Sand>6 and Gravel>4)
tu
ec
(L

For well graded soil, Cc = 1to 3
re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Q. 37) The following index properties were
determined for four soils A, B, C and D
P)
M
TE
,D
Soil property A B C D
r
re
Liquid Limit 0.50 0.49 0.43 0.47
tu
ec
(L
Plastic limit 0.23 0.17 0.21 0.26

re
ho
Which of these soils contains more clay particles
at
R
ep
e
ad
a. Soil A b. Soil B
Pr
c. Soil C d. Soil D
Answer: B
P)
M
TE
,D
Plasticity index = Liquid Limit – Plastic Limit
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Soil A, PI = 0.50 – 0.23 = 0.27

re
ho
Soil B, PI = 0.49 – 0.17 = 0.32
at
Soil C, R
PI = 0.43 – 0.21 = 0.22
eep
ad
Soil D, PI = 0.47 – 0.26 = 0.21

Pr
Q. 38) The water content of soil, which represents
P)
M
the boundary between plastic state and liquid state,
TE
,D
is known as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Liquid limit

re
ho
b. Plastic limit
at
c. Shrinkage limit R
eep
ad
d. Plasticity index
Pr
Answer: A
P)
M
TE
Ws – Shrinkage limit
,D
Wp = Plastic limit
r
re
Wl = Liquid limit
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 39) Which of the following soils has more
M
TE
plasticity index
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Sand
(L

re
b. Silt
ho
at
c. Clay ep
R
d. Gravel
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
TE
Plasticity index is more for fine soil.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Clay > Silt > Sand > Gravel
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 40) At liquid limit, all soils possess
TE
,Dr
re
a. Same shear strength of small magnitude
tu
ec
(L
b. Same shear strength and large magnitude

re
ho
c. Different shear strength of small magnitude
at
R
d. Different shear strength of large magnitude
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Same shear strength and small magnitude 2.70 KN/m²

Q. 41) If the material of the base of the casagrande
P)
liquid limit device on which the cup containing soil
M
TE
paste drop is softer than the standard hard rubber,
,D
then
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
a. The liquid limit always increase
ho
at
b. The liquid limit always decreases
ep
R
c. The liquid limit of soil may increase
e
ad
Pr
d. The liquid limit of soil may decrease

Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 42) According to IS classification the range of silt
M
TE
size particles is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 4.75 mm to 2.0 mm
(L

re
b. 2.0 mm to 0.425 mm
ho
at
c. 0.425 mm to 0.075 mm
ep
R
d. 0.075 mm to 0.002 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer:D
1. Clay < 0.002 mm
P)
M
TE
2. Silt 0.002 mm to 0.075 mm
,Dr
re
3. Sand (0.075 mm to 4.75 mm)
tu
ec
a) Fine sand 0.075mm to 0.425 mm
(L

b) Medium sand 0.424 mm to 2 mm
re
ho
c) Coarse sand 2 mm to 4.75 mm
at
R
ep
4. Gravel (4.75 mm to 80 mm)
e
a) Fine gravel 4.75 mm to 20 mm

ad
Pr
b) Coarse gravel 20 mm to 80 mm
5. Cobble 80 mm to 200 mm
6. Boulder > 200 mm
Q. 43) Highway Research Board (HRB) classification
P)
M
of soils is based on
TE
,Dr
re
a. Particle size composition
tu
ec
(L
b. Plasticity characteristics

re
ho
c. Both particle size composition and plasticity
at
characteristics R
eep
ad

Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
TE
HRB also known as public roads administrations
,D
(PRA) classification system.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Based on both the particle size composition as well
ho
at
as the plasticity characteristics.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Mostly used for pavement construction.

P)
Q. 44) Inorganic soil with low compressibility are
M
TE
respectively by
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. MH
(L

re
b. SL
ho
at
c. ML ep
R
d. CH
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: C
M
TE
,D
a. MH – High Compressibility silt
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
c. ML – Low Compressibility silt
ho
at
R
ep
d. CH – High Compressibility clay

e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 45) Sand particles are made of
TE
,Dr
re
a. Rock minerals
tu
ec
(L
b. Kaolinite

re
ho
c. illite
at
d. Montmorillonite R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Answer: A
M
TE
,D
Clay minerals
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
1. Kaolinite – China clay
ho
at
2. illite - marine clays
ep
R
3. Montmorillonite - high swelling/shrinking
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
THANK YOU🙏
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Soil
Objective
Questions
Mechanics
(Q.46 – Q.60)

P)
Q. 46) The clay minerals with the largest swelling and
M
TE
shrinkage Characteristic is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Kaolinite
(L

re
b. illite
ho
at
c. Montmorillonite ep
R
d None of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
Activity (A) = (Plasticity index) / (Percentage of clay particles)
TE
,Dr
re
Activity indicates the present of clay minerals and the reaction with
tu
ec
water.
(L

re
ho
A < 0.75 Inactive clay
at
R
A between 0.75 – 1.25 Normal clay
ep
A > 1.25 Active clay
e
ad
Pr
Montmorillonite(A>7) > illite > kaolinite

P)
Q. 47) Dispersed type of soil structure is an
M
TE
arrangement comprising particles having
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Face to face or parallel orientation
(L

re
b. Edge to edge orientation
ho
at
c. Edge to face orientation
ep
R
d. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 48) Effective stress is
M
TE
,Dr
a. The stress at particles contact
re
tu
ec
b. A physical parameters that can be measured
(L

re
c. Important because it is a function of engineering
ho
at
properties of soil R
ep
d.All the above

e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Effective stress or intergrannular stress is defined as the stress caused due to soil
r
re
particles are coming close to the each other due to the distribution of the water.
tu
ec
(L
Its function of shear strength

re
ho
at
Effective stress is an abstract quantity, it cannot be measured directly in the
laboratory. R
e ep
ad
Pore water pressure can be measured by PIEZOMETER

Pr
Q. 49) Rise of water table above the ground surface
P)
causes
M
TE
,Dr
re
a. Equal increase in pore water pressure and total stress
tu
ec
b. Equal decrease in pore water pressure and total stress
(L

re
c. Increase in pore water pressure but decrease in total
ho
at
stress ep
R
d. Decrease in pore water pressure but increase in total
e
ad
stress
Pr
Answer: A
The fluctuation in WT above ground level, effective stress unchanged but total
stress and pore water pressure increase in same amount.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 50) The total and effective stresses at a depth of
P)
M
5m below the top level of water in a swimming pool
TE
,D
are respectively
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Zero and zero

re
ho
b. 0.5kg/cm2 and zero
at
R
c. 0.5kg/cm2 and 0.5kg/cm2
ep
e
ad
d. 1.0kg/cm2 and 0.5kg/cm2

Pr
Answer: B
P)
Total stress at depth of 5m below the top level of water,
M
TE
= Y. H
,D
=1×5
r
re
tu
= 5 kg/m² or 0.5kg/cm²
ec
(L

re
ho
Pore water pressure = Y. H = 1×5 = 5 kg/m² or 0.5 kg/cm²
at
R
ep
effective stress = Total stress - pore water pressure
e
ad
Pr
= 0.5 – 0.5
=0
Q. 51) If the water table rises upto ground surface,
then the
P)
M
TE
,D
a. Effective stress is reduced due to decrease in total stress only
r
re
tu
but pore water pressure does not change
ec
b. Effective stress is reduced due to increase in pore water
(L

re
pressure only but total stress does not change
ho
at
c. Total stress is reduced due to increase in pore water pressure
R
ep
only but effective stress does not change
e
ad
d. Total stress is increased due to decrease in pore water

Pr
pressure but effective stress does not change

Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 52) The critical hydraulic gradient (ic)of a soil
mass of specific gravity G and voids ratio e is given by
P)
M
TE
,D
a. G = (G+1) /(1-e)
r
re
tu
ec
(L
b. G = (G-1) /(1+e)

re
ho
at
c. G = (G+1) /(1+e) R
e ep
ad
Pr
d. G = (G-1) /(1-e)
Answer: B
The hydraulic gradient at which effective stress
P)
M
becomes zero is known as the critical hydraulic
TE
,D
garedient
r
re
tu
ec
(L
ic = Ysub/Yw

re
ho
at
i = (Gs–1) /(1+e) R { e = n/(1-n) }
eep
ad
Pr
ic = (Gs-1) (1-n)
Q. 53) Quick sand is a
P)
M
TE
,D
a. Type of sand
r
re
b. Flow condition occurring in cohesive soils
tu
ec
(L
c. Flow condition occurring in cohesionless soils

re
ho
d. Flow condition occurring in both cohesive and
at
cohesionless soils R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
M
TE
When effective stress is zero then soil is said to be quick
,D
condition.
r
re
tu
If the critical gradient is exceeded the soil particles move upward,
ec
(L
and the soil surface appears to be boiling.

re
ho
The quick condition is also known as boiling condition.
at
R
ep
Sand boiling happen in cohesionless soil such as fine sands and
e
ad
Pr
silt at a void ratio of 0.6 to 0.7

Q. 54) The hydraulic head that would produce a
P)
M
quick condition in a sand stratum of thickness 1.5m
TE
,D
specific gravity 2.67 and void ratio 0.67 is equal
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. 1.0m

re
ho
b. 1.5m
at
c. 2.0m R
eep
ad
d. 3m
Pr
Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 55) physical properties of permeant which
M
TE
influence permeability are
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. Viscosity only
(L

re
b. Unit weight only
ho
at
c. Both viscosity and unit weight
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
P)
1. Particle size ↑ = K ( Coarse grain > Fine grain)
M
TE
2. Structure of soil = Flocculated > Dispersed
,Dr
re
3. Void ratio ↑ = Coefficient of Permeability ↑
tu
ec
4. Degree of saturation↑ = K↑ (Fully saturated soil > Partially saturated soil)
(L

re
ho
5. Absorbed water = ( K↓) Fine grained soil have a layer of absorbed water strongly attached to
at
their surface. The absorbed water layer is not free to move under gravity. It cause an obstruction
R
ep
6. Entrapped air and organic matter - Air entrapped in the soil and organic matter block the
e
ad
passage of water through soil.

Pr
7. Viscosity ↑ = K ↓
P)
M
TE
a. The greater the viscosity, the greater is
,Dr
permeability
re
tu
ec
b. The greater the Unit Weight, the greater is
(L

re
permeability
ho
at
c. The greater the Unit Weight, the smaller is
ep
R
permeability
e
ad
Pr
d. Unit Weight does not affect permeability

Answer: B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 57) Effective stress on soil
M
TE
,D
a. Increase voids ratio and decrease permeability
r
re
tu
ec
b. Increase both voids ratio and permeability
(L

re
c. Decrease both voids ratio and permeability
ho
at
d. Decrease voids ratio and increase permeability
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Answer: C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 58) If the permeability of a soil is 0.8 mm/sec, the
M
TE
type of soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a.Gravel
(L

re
b. Sand
ho
at
c. Silt ep
R
d. Clay
e
ad
Pr
Answer: B
Permeability is defined as the property of porous material
P)
M
which permits the passage of water through its
TE
,D
interconnecting voids.
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Clean gravel > 10 mm/sec

re
ho
b. Coarse and medium sand – 10^-2 to 10 mm/sec
at
R
c. Fine sand, loose silt – 10^-4 to 0.01 mm/sec
eep
c. Dense silt, clayey silt 10^-5 to 1×10^-4 mm/sec

ad
Pr
d. Silt clay, Clay < 1×10^-5 mm/sec

Q. 59) Which of the following methods is most
P)
M
suitable for the determination of permeability of
TE
,D
clayey soil
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Constant head method

re
ho
b. Falling head method
at
R
c. Horizontal permeability test
eep
ad

Pr
Answer:
P)
M
a. Constant head method - Coarse grain
TE
soil
,Dr
re
tu
b. Variable or falling head method - Fine
ec
(L
grain soil

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 60) Which of the following methods is best suited
P)
M
for determination of permeability of coarse grained
TE
,D
soil
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Constant head method

re
ho
b. Falling head method
at
c. Both the above R
eep
ad

Pr
Answer: A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
Constant head method
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Objective Questions
r
re
tu
ec
(61 to 75)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Soil Mechanics
e
ad
Pr
Q. 61) Due to rise in temperature, the viscosity and the
P)
Unit Weight of the percolating fluid a reduced to 60% and
M
TE
90% respectively. If other things remain constant, the
,Dr
coefficient of permeability
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Increases by 25%
ho
at
B. Increases by 50%
R
ep
C. Increases by 33.3%
e
ad
D. Decreases by 33.3%
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 62) Coefficient of permeability of soil
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Does not depend upon temperature
ec
(L
B. Increases with the increase in temperature

re
ho
C. Increases with the decrease in temperature
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
1. Grain size ↑
TE
2. Void ratio ↑
,D
3. Particle shape → less for angular particles than rounded particles at
r
re
tu
the same void ratio.
ec
(L
4. Soil structure → More for soils with a flocculent structure.

re
5. Pore fluid properties → Decreases with the increase in viscosity
ho
at
6. Adsorbed water (in clay) → Fine-grained soils contain a layer of water
R
strongly attached to the particle surface that is known as adsorbed water.
ep
e
Adsorbed water is not free to move under gravity and hence reduces the
ad
Pr
effective void space available for fluid flow

7. Impurities and foreign matter.
Q. 63) The average coefficient of permeability of natural
P)
deposits
M
TE
,Dr
A. Parallel to stratification is always greater than that
re
tu
perpendicular to stratification
ec
(L

B. Parallel to stratification is always less than that perpendicular
re
ho
to stratification
at
R
C. Is always same in both directions
ep
D. Parallel to stratification may or may not be greater than that

e
ad
Pr
perpendicular to stratification
Answer A
P)
M
Soil Stratification:-
TE
,D
In the case of transported soils that occur in
r
re
several layers, permeability in the horizontal direction parallel to
tu
ec
the stratification is many times that in the vertical direction
(L

re
perpendicular to the stratification.
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 64) The total discharge from two Wells situated near to
TE
each other is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Sum of the discharges from individual wells
(L

re
B. Less than the sum of the discharges from individual Wells
ho
at
C. Greater than the sum of the discharges from individual Wells
R
ep
D. Equal to larger of the two discharges from individuals wells
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 65) The flownet for an earthen Dam with 30 metre water
P)
M
depth consists of 25 potential drops and 5 flow channels. The
TE
,D
coefficient of permeability of dam material is 0.03 mm/sec. The
r
re
discharge per metre length of dam is
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.00018 m³/sec
ho
B. 0.0045 m³/sec
at
C. 0.18 m³/sec R
eep
ad
D. 0.1125 m³/sec
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 66) The most suitable method for drainage of fine
M
TE
grained cohesive soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Well point system
(L

re
B. Vacuum method
ho
at
C. Deep well system ep
R
D. Electro-osmosis method
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Electro-osmotic method is used when co-efficient of permeability
P)
M
lies between 10-7cm/see to 10-5 cm/sec. In electro-osmotic
TE
,D
method, two electrodes are driven into the saturated cohesive
r
re
soil
tu
ec
(L

re
In general the surface of soil is negative charged and is
ho
surrounded by polar water and ions of other elements. When a
at
R
current is passed through the soil, the positively charged ions on
ep
e
ad
the surface are attracted towards cathode and water is collected

Pr
in the well point made of cathode. The collected water is

pumped out.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 67) Total number of stress components at a point
M
TE
within a soil mass loaded at its boundary is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 3
(L

re
B. 6
ho
at
C. 9 ep
R
D. 10
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 69) The intensity of vertical pressure directly below a
P)
M
concentrated load of 3/2π tonnes at a depth of 3/2π is
TE
,D
given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 1 t/m²

re
ho
B. 1/2 t/m²
at
C. 3/2 t/m² R
eep
D. (3/2π)^(3/2) t/m²
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 70) Vertical stress on a vertical line at constant radial
TE
distance from the axis of a vertical load
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Is same at all depths
(L

re
B. Increases with depth
ho
at
C. First increases, attains a maximum value and then decreases
R
ep
D. First decreases attains a minimum value and then increases
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 71) Phreatic line in an earthen dam is
TE
,Dr
re
A. Straight line
tu
ec
(L
B. Parabolic

re
ho
C. Circular
at
D. Elliptical R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Hydrostatic pressure acts below the phreatic line whereas atmospheric
P)
pressure exists above the phreatic line. This line separates a saturated soil
M
mass from an unsaturated soil mass.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 72) The hydrostatic pressure on the phreatic line within
M
TE
a dam section is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less than atmospheric pressure
(L

re
B. Equal to atmospheric pressure
ho
at
C. Greater than atmospheric pressure
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 73) Rate of consolidation
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Increases with decrease in temperature
ec
(L
B. Increases with increase in temperature

re
ho
C. Is independent of temperature
at
R
D. Is unaffected by permeability of soil
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
Consolidation is the process in which reduction in volume
,D
takes place by expulsion of water under long-term static
r
re
tu
loads.
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 74) The unit of the coefficient of consolidation is
M
TE
,D
A. cm²/gm
r
re
tu
ec
B. cm²/sec
(L

re
C. gm/cm²/sec
ho
at
D. gm-cm/sec ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Where,
r
re
u = Pore water pressure
tu
ec
(L
z = thickness of soil sample

re
ho
t = time of consolidation
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
ObjectiveQuestions
r
re
tu
ec
(76 to 90)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Soil Mechanics
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 76) The slope of isochrone at any point at a given time
M
TE
indicates the rate of change of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Effective stress with time
(L

re
B. Effective stress with depth
ho
at
C. Pore water pressure with depth
R
ep
D. Pore water pressure with time
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Isochrone:- A line on a
M
TE
diagram or map connecting
,D
points relating to the same
r
re
tu
time or equal times.
ec
(L

re
ho
The slope of isochrone at
at
any point at a given time R
eep
indicates the rate of change

ad
Pr
of pore water pressure with

depth.
Q. 77) Within the consolidation process of a saturated clay
P)
M
A. A gradual increase in neutral pressure and a gradual decrease
TE
,D
in effective pressure takes place and sum of the two is constant
r
re
tu
ec
B. A gradual decrease in neutral pressure and a gradual increase
(L

re
in effective pressure takes place and sum of the two is constant
ho
at
R
C. Both neutral pressure and effective pressure decrease
eep
ad
Pr
D. Both neutral pressure and effective pressure increase

Answer B
Consolidation is the process in which reduction in volume takes
P)
place by expulsion of water under long-term static loads.
M
TE
,D
When a load is applied to soil, it is carried by the water in the
r
re
pores as well as the solid grains. The increase in pressure within
tu
ec
the porewater causes drainage (flow out of the soil), and the load
(L

re
is transferred to the solid grains.
ho
at
R
ep
Effective stress: - Pressure taken by solid particles.
e
ad
Pore water pressure or neutral pressure: - Pressure taken by

Pr
water.
Total stress = Effective stress ↑ + Pore water pressure ↓
P)
Q. 78) The value of compression index for a remolded
M
TE
sample whose liquid limit is 50% is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 0.028
(L

re
B. 0.28
ho
at
C. 0.36 ep
R
D. 0.036
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Compression index is extremely useful for determination of the
P)
M
settlement in the field.
TE
,D
Compression index of clay
r
re
(a) For undistributed soils,
tu
ec
Cc = 0.009 (LL-10)
(L

re
(b) For remoulded soils,
ho
Cc = 0.007 (LL-10)
at
R
ep
e
ad
In question given remoulded soil sample

Pr
Cc = 0.007(50-10)
Cc = 0.28
P)
Q. 79) Which one of the following clays behaves like a
M
TE
dense sand?
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Overconsolidated clay with high overconsolidation ratio
(L

re
B. Overconsolidated clay with low overconsolidation ratio
ho
at
C. Normal consolidated clay
R
ep
D. Under consolidated clay
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Overconsolidation ratio is defined as the ratio of past maximum stress
M
and present existing stress.
TE
,Dr
re
If the present effective stress is equal to the past stress, then the deposit
tu
is said to be normally consolidated (NC).
ec
(L

For normally consolidated deposit, OCR = 1
re
ho
at
If the present effective stress is less than the past stress, then the soil is
R
ep
said to be over-consolidated (OC), OCR > 1
e
ad
Pr
If the present effective stress is more than the past stress, then the soil is
said to be under-consolidated (OC), OCR < 1
P)
M
Q. 80) Coefficient of consolidation of soil is affected by
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Compressibility
ec
(L
B. Permeability

re
ho
C. Both compressibility and permeability
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 81) Degree of consolidation is
P)
M
TE
A. Directly proportional to time and inversely proportional to
,D
drainage path
r
re
tu
B. Directly proportional to time and inversely proportional to
ec
(L
square of drainage path

re
ho
C. Directly proportional to drainage path and inversely
at
proportional to time R
ep
D. Directly proportional to square of drainage path and inversely
e
ad
Pr
proportional to time
Answer B
P)
The degree of consolidation (U) is the ratio of the consolidation
M
of the entire soil layer at any time to the final consolidation of
TE
,D
the layer.
r
re
Terzaghi related the degree of consolidation to a time factor (Tv)
tu
ec
(L

re
Tv = Cv t / d²
ho
at
where,
R
ep
Cv = Coefficient of consolidation
e
ad
t = time
Pr
d = drainage path
Tv = time factor depends on U
P)
M
Q. 82) Time factor for a clay layer is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. A dimensional parameter
ec
(L
B. Directly proportional to permeability of soil

re
ho
C. Inversely proportional to drainage path
at
R
D. Independent of thickness of clay layer
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 83) If the time required for 50% consolidation of a
remoulded sample of clay with single drainage is t, then
P)
M
the time required to consolidate the same sample of clay
TE
,D
with same degree of consolidation but with double
r
re
tu
drainage is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. t/4
at
B. t/2 R
ep
e
C. 2t
ad
Pr
D. 4t
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 84) Clay layer A with single drainage and coefficient of
consolidation Cv takes 6 months to achieve 50%
P)
consolidation. The time taken by the clay layer B of the
M
TE
same thickness with double drainage and coefficient of
,Dr
consolidation Cv/2 to achieve the same degree of
re
tu
ec
consolidation is
(L

re
ho
at
A. 3 months
R
ep
B. 6 months
e
ad
C. 12 months
Pr
D. 24 months
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 85) Coefficient of consolidation for clays normally
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Decreases with increase in liquid limit
tu
ec
B. Increases with increase in liquid limit
(L

re
C. First increases and then decreases with increase in
ho
at
liquid limit
R
ep
D. Remains constant at all liquid limits
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 86) Direct measurement of permeability of the
M
TE
specimen at any stage of loading can be made
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Only in fixed Ring type consolidometer
(L

re
B. Only in floating Ring type consolidometer
ho
at
C. Both A and B
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
Types of Consolidometers:
ec
(L

re
ho
1. Fixed-Ring Consolidometer
at
R
2. Floating-Ring Consolidometer
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 87) Compressibility of sandy soil is is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Almost equal to that of clayey soils
ec
(L
B. Much greater than that of clayey soils

re
ho
C. Much less than that of clayey soils
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
The property of the soil due to which can decrease in
r
re
tu
volume occurs under compressive forces is known as the
ec
(L
compressibility of soil.

re
ho
at
R
Because voids ratio is more in fine grained soil than coarse
ep
e
grained soil.
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Coefficient of compressibility of an over consolidated
r
re
tu
clay is less than that of normally consolidated clay
ec
(L
B. Coefficient of compressibility of an over consolidated

re
ho
clay is greater than that of normally consolidated clay
at
R
C. Coefficient of compressibility is constant for any clay
ep
e

ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Compressibility of a soil
M
TE
decreases as the effective stress
,D
increases.
r
re
tu
ec
This can be represented by the
(L

re
slope of the void ratio – effective
ho
stress relation, which is called
at
R
the coefficient of compressibility,
ep
av.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 89) Coefficient of compressibility is
P)
M
TE
A. Constant for any type of soil
,Dr
B. Different for different types of soils and also different for
re
tu
ec
a soil under different states of consolidation
(L

re
C. Different for different types of soil but same for a soil
ho
at
under different states of consolidation
R
ep
D. Independent of type of soil but depends on the stress
e
ad
history of soil
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 90) The ultimate consolidation settlement of structure
M
TE
resting on a soil
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Decreases with the increase in the initial voids ratio
(L

re
B. Decreases with the decrease in plastic limit
ho
at
C. Increases with the increase in the initial voids ratio
R
ep
D. Increases with the decrease in the porosity of the soil
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Objective Questions
r
re
tu
ec
(91 to 105)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Soil Mechanics
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 91) The ultimate consolidation settlement of a soil is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Directly proportional to the voids ratio
ec
(L
b. Directly proportional to the compression index

re
ho
c. Inversely proportional to the compression index
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 92) A normally consolidated clay settled 10 mm when
effective stress was increased from 100 KN/m² to 200
P)
M
KN/m². If the effective stress is further increased from 200
TE
,D
KN/m² to 400 KN/m², then the settlement of the same
r
re
tu
clay is
ec
(L

re
ho
a. 10 mm
at
b. 20 mm R
ep
e
c. 40 mm
ad
Pr

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 93) Coarse grained soils are best compacted by a
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Drum roller
ec
(L
b. Rubber tyred roller

re
ho
c. Sheep’s foot roller
at
d. Vibratory roller R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer D
A. Drum roller – land filling
B. Rubber tyerd or pneumatic roller :- Both fine and coarse
P)
M
C. Sheep foot roller D. Vibratory Roller
TE
,D
(Fine graind soil) (Coarse grained soil)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 94) With the increase in the amount of compaction
TE
,D
energy
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Optimum water content increases but maximum dry density decreases

re
b. Optimum water content decreases but maximum dry density increases
ho
at
c. Both optimum water content and maximum dry density increase
R
d. Both optimum water content and maximum dry density decrease
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Amount of compaction:-
P)
M
Increasing the amount of
TE
,D
compactive effort is to
r
re
increase the maximum dry
tu
ec
Unit Weight and to
(L

re
decrease the optimum
ho
water content.
at
R
ep
e
ad
The zero-air void line or

Pr
100% saturation line are

identical.
Q. 95) The maximum dry density up to which any soil can
P)
M
be compacted depends upon
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Moisture content only
ec
(L
b. Amount of compaction energy only

re
ho
c. Both moisture content and amount of compaction
at
energy R
eep

ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 96) Relationship between dry density (Yd), percentage
air voids(na), water content (w) and specific gravity (G)
P)
of any soil is
M
TE
,Dr
a. Yd = (1+na) GYw/(1+wG)
re
tu
ec
(L

re
b. Yd = (1+na) GYw/(1-wG)
ho
at
R
ep
c. Yd = (1-na) GYw/(1+wG)
e
ad
Pr
d. Yd = (1-na) GYw/(1-wG)
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 97) For better strength and stability, the fine grained
P)
M
soils and coarse grained soils are compacted respectively
TE
,D
as
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Dry of OMC and wet of OMC

re
ho
b. Wet of OMC and dry of OMC
at
R
c. Wet of OMC and wet of OMC
eep
d. Dry of OMC and dry of OMC

ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
a. Effective cohesion of a soil can never have a negative value
r
re
b. Effective angle of internal friction for coarse grained soils is
tu
ec
rarely below 30°
(L

re
c. Effective angle of internal friction for a soil increases a state of
ho
at
compactness increase.
R
ep
D. Effective angle of internal friction is a complicated function of
e
ad
mineralogy and clay size content

Pr
Answer A
P)
Angle of internal friction (friction angle)ф :- A measure of the
M
TE
ability of a unit of rock or soil to bear a shear stress.
,Dr
re
tu
For coarse grained soil, ф ≥ 30°, in cases of loose sand it may be
ec
(L

less than 30°
re
ho
at
R
ф is increase with compactness and size of particles.
eep
ad
Pr
Cohesion is the force that holds together molecules or like

particles within a soil.
Q. 99) For a loose sand sample and a dense sand sample
P)
M
consolidated to the same effective stress
TE
,Dr
re
a. Ultimate strength is same and also peak strength is same
tu
ec
b. Ultimate strength is different but peak strength is same
(L

re
c. Ultimate strength is same but peak strength of dense sand is
ho
at
greater than that of looose sand
R
ep
d. Ultimate strength is same but peak strength of loose sand is
e
ad
greater than that of dense sand

Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 100) The shear strength of a soil
M
TE
,D
a. Is directly proportional to the angle of internal friction of the
r
re
tu
soil
ec
(L
b. Is inversely proportional to the angle of internal friction of the

re
ho
soil
at
R
c. Decrease with increase in normal stress
ep
d. Decrease with decrease in normal stress

e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
Mohr-Coulomb equation
TE
,D
S = C + σ tanф
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Where,

re
ho
S = shear strength
at
C = Cohesion R
ep
e
σ = normal stress
ad
Pr
ф = Angel of internal friction

Q. 101) In a consolidated drained test on a normally
P)
M
consolidated clay, the volume of the soil sample during
TE
,D
shear
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Decrease

re
ho
b. Increase
at
c. Remains unchanged R
eep
d. First increases and then decreases

ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 102) Skempton’s Pore pressure Coefficient B for
M
TE
saturated soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
a. 1
(L

re
b. Zero
ho
at
c. Between 0 and 1
R
ep
d. Greater than 1
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
Δu = B [Δσ3 + A(Δσ1 − Δσ3]
TE
,Dr
re
B and A are Skempton's pore water pressure parameters.
tu
ec
(L

re
Parameter B is a function of the degree of saturation of
ho
at
the soil (= 1 for saturated soils, and = 0 for dry soils).
R
eep
ad
Parameter A is varies with the over-consolidaton ratio of

Pr
the soil
P)
M
Q. 103) Shear strength of a soil is a unique function of
TE
,Dr
re
tu
a. Effective strss only
ec
(L
b. Total stress only

re
ho
c. Both effective stress and total stress
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Shear strength is a magnitude of the shear stress that a soil can
r
re
sustain. The shear resistance of soil is a result of friction and
tu
ec
interlocking of solid particles.
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Effective stress: - Pressure taken by solid particles.
e
ad
Pr
Q. 104) In a deposit of normally consolidated clay
P)
M
a. Effective stress increases with depth but water content
TE
,D
of soil and undrained strength decrease with depth
r
re
tu
b. Effective stress and water content increase with depth
ec
(L
but undrained strength decrease with depth

re
ho
c. Effective stress and undrained strength increase with
at
R
depth but water content decreases with depth
eep
d. Effective stress, water content and undrained strength

ad
Pr
decrease with depth

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 105) Select incorrect statement
P)
M
TE
,D
Effective angle of shearing resistance
r
re
tu
ec
(L
a. Increases as the size of particles increase

re
ho
b. Increases as the soil gradation improves
at
R
c. Is limited to a maximum value of 45°
ep
e
d. Is is rarely more than 30° for fine grained soil

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Objective Questions
r
re
tu
ec
(106 to 120)
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Soil Mechanics
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 106) unconfined compressive strength test is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Undrained test
ec
(L
B. Drained test

re
ho
C. Consolidated undrained test
at
R
D. Consolidated drained test
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
The purpose of this is to determine the unconfined compressive
r
re
strength of a cohesive soil sample.
tu
ec
(L

re
We will measure this with the unconfined compression test,
ho
at
which is an unconsolidated undrained (UU or Q-type) test where
R
ep
the lateral confining pressure is equal to zero (atmospheric
e
ad
pressure).
Pr
Q. 107) A cylindrical specimen of saturated soil failed
under an axial vertical stress of 100 KN/m² when it was
P)
M
laterally unconfined. The failure plane was inclined to the
TE
,D
horizontal plane at an angle of 45°. The values of Cohesion
r
re
tu
and angle of internal friction for the soil are respectively
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 0.5 N/mm² and 30°
at
B. 0.05 N/mm² and 0° R
eep
C. 0.2 N/mm² and 0°

ad
Pr
D. 0.05 N/mm² and 45°

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 108) In an unconfined compression test on a clay specimen of
initial volume V and length L, the area of cross section at Failure
is taken as
P)
M
TE
,D
A. V / (L-ΔL)
r
re
tu
ec
B. (V+ΔV) / (L-ΔL)
(L

re
ho
C. (V-ΔV) / (L-ΔL)
at
R
eep
ad
D. V / (L+ΔL)
Pr
Where ΔL is the change in length and ΔV is change in volume

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
The soil sample height or length decreases during shear and the
r
re
volume of the sample remains constant, the cross sectional area
tu
ec
must increase.
(L

re
ho
at
For a saturated soil that undergoes no volume change
R
ep
during shear in UCC test (no flow of water into or out of the
e
ad
sample)
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 109) The angle that coulomb’s failure envelope makes
M
TE
with the horizontal is called
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Cohesion
(L

re
B. Angle of internal friction
ho
at
C. Angle of repose
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 110) In a triaxial compression test on a soil specimen,
M
TE
the intermediate principal stress is equal to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Major principal stress
(L

re
B. Minor principal stress
ho
at
C. Difference between major and minor principal stress
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 111) If a cohesive soil specimen is subjected to a
P)
M
vertical compressive load, the inclination of the cracks to
TE
,D
the horizontal is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 90°

re
ho
B. 45°
at
C. 22.5° R
ep
e
D. 0°
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
A. In a direct shear box test, the plane of shear failure is
TE
,D
predetermined
r
re
tu
B. Better control is achieved on drainage of the soil in a
ec
(L
triaxial compression test

re
ho
C. Stress distribution on the failure plane in the case of
at
R
triaxial compression test is uniform
ep
e
D. Unconfined compression test can be carried out on the

ad
Pr
all types of soils.

Answer D
A. The test is conducted in a soil specimen in a shear box which is split
P)
into two halves along the horizontal plane at its middle.
M
TE
Triaxial Compression Test
,D
It is used for the determination of shear characteristics of all types of
r
re
soils under different drainage conditions
tu
ec
1. There is complete control over the drainage conditions
(L

re
2. Pore pressure changes and volumetric changes can be measured
ho
directly
at
R
3. The stress distribution in the failure plane is uniform
ep
e
4. The specimen is free to fail on the weakest plane

ad
Pr
D. The unconfined compression test is a special form of triaxial test in

which the confining pressure is zero. The test can be conducted only on
clayey soils which can stand without confinement.
P)
Q. 113) If the shearing stress is zero on two planes, then
M
TE
the angle between the two planes is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 45°
(L

re
B. 90°
ho
at
C. 135°
R
ep
D. 225°
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
A principal plane is defined as a plane on which the stress is fully
P)
M
normal or one which does not carry shearing stress.
TE
,Dr
re
The normal stress acting on this principal planes are known as
tu
ec
principal stresses. There exist three principal planes at any point
(L

re
in a stressed material. These three principal planes are mutually
ho
perpendicular.
at
R
eep
ad
In the order of decreasing magnitude the principal planes are

Pr
designated as major principal plane, minor principal plane and

intermediate principal plane.
Q. 114) In the triaxial compression test, the application of
P)
M
additional axial stress (i.e. deviator stress) on the soil
TE
,D
specimen produces shear stress on
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Horizontal plane only

re
ho
B. Vertical plane only
at
R
C. Both horizontal and vertical planes
ep
e
D. All planes except horizontal and vertical planes

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 116) In a triaxial compression test when drainage is
allowed during the first stage (i.e. application of cell
P)
M
pressure) only and not during the second stage (i.e.
TE
,D
application of deviator stress at constant cell pressure), the
r
re
tu
test is known as
ec
(L

re
ho
A. Consolidated drained test
at
R
B. Consolidated undrained test
eep
C. Unconsolidated drained test

ad
Pr
D. Unconsolidated undrained test

Answer B
P)
M
TE
In the first stage of the test, the specimen is subjected to
,Dr
re
an all round confining pressure. This stage is known as the
tu
ec
consolidation stage.
(L

re
ho
at
In the second stage of the test called shearing stage, an
R
ep
additional axial stress and deviator stress is applied on the
e
ad
top of the specimen.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 118) When a sample of sand is sheared under
P)
M
undrained condition, then
TE
,Dr
re
A. Volume of dense sand increases and that of loose sand
tu
ec
decreases
(L

re
B. Volume of dense sand decreases and that of loose sand
ho
at
increases
R
ep
C. Volume of both dense sand and loose sand decreases
e
ad
D. Volume does not change

Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 119) The ratio of the undisturbed shear strength to the
P)
M
remoulded shear strength in cohesive soils under
TE
,D
undrained conditions is
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Zero

re
ho
B. 1
at
C. Greater than 1 R
eep
D. Between 0 and 1
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Sensitivity is the measure of loss of strength with remoulding.
M
TE
,D
Sensitivity (St) is defined as the ratio of unconfined compressive
r
re
tu
strength of clay in undisturbed state to unconfined compressive
ec
(L

strength of a same clay in remoulded state.
re
ho
at
R
The loss of strength of clay soils from remoulding is caused
ep
primarily by the destruction of the clay particle structure that
e
ad
Pr
was developed during the original process of sedimentation and

also disturbance to water molecules in adsorbed layer.
Q. 120) During the first stage of triaxial test when the cell
P)
pressure is increased from 0.10 N/mm² to 0.26 N/mm²,
M
TE
the pore water pressure increases from 0.07 N/mm² to
,Dr
0.15 N/mm². Skempton’s pore pressure parameter B is
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. 0.5
ho
at
B. -0. 5
R
ep
C. 2.0
e
ad
D. -2. 0
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Objective Questions
TE
,D
(121 to 135)
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Soil ep
e
R
at
ho
ad
Mechanics
Pr
Q. 121) Sensitivity of a soil can be defined as
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Percentage of volume change of soil under saturated
r
re
tu
condition
ec
(L
B. Ratio of compressive strength of unconfined

re
ho
undisturbed soil to that of soil in a remolded state
at
R
C. Ratio of volume of voids to volume of solids
eep

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Sensitivity (St) is defined as the ratio of unconfined compressive
M
TE
strength of clay in undisturbed state to unconfined compressive
,D
strength of a same clay in remoulded state
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Sensitivity is the measure of loss of strength with remoulding.

re
ho
at
R
Cohesive soils upon remoulding, lose a part of shear strength.
ep
1. The destruction of the clay particle structure that was
e
ad
developed during the original process of sedimentation

Pr
2. And also disturbance to water molecules in adsorbed layer.

P)
Q. 122) Rankine’s theory of Earth pressure assumes that
M
TE
the back of the wall is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Plane and smooth
(L

re
B. Plane and rough
ho
at
C. Vertical and smooth
R
ep
D. Vertical and rough
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
Assumptions of the Renkine’s theory
M
TE
,D
1. The backfill is homogeneous.
r
re
2. The backfill is dry and cohesionless.
tu
ec
3. The surface of the backfill is plane which may be horizontal or
(L

re
inclined
ho
at
4. The back of the retaining wall is vertical and smooth so that
R
ep
there is no friction between the wall and the backfill when the
e
ad
wall moves away from the backfill.

Pr
5. The soil element is in a state of of plastic equilibrium (every

point on body is on verge of failure).
P)
Q. 123) The coefficient of active Earth pressure for a loose
M
TE
sand having an angle of internal friction of 30° is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 1/3
(L

re
B. 3
ho
at
C. 1
R
ep
D. 1/2
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 124) The major principal stress in an element of
P)
cohesionless soil within the backfill of a retaining wall is
M
TE
,Dr
A. Vertical if the soil is in an active state of plastic
re
tu
ec
equilibrium
(L

re
B. Vertical if the soil is in an passive state of plastic
ho
at
equilibrium
R
ep
C. Inclind at 45° to the vertical plane
e
ad

Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 126) The effect of cohesion on a soil is to
P)
M
A. Reduce both the active Earth pressure intensity and
TE
,D
passive Earth pressure intensity
r
re
tu
B. Increase both active Earth pressure intensity and
ec
(L
passive Earth pressure intensity

re
ho
C. Reduce the active earth pressure intensity but to
at
R
increase the passive Earth pressure intensity
eep
D. Increase the activity earth pressure intensity but to

ad
Pr
reduce the passive Earth pressure intensity

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 127) A retaining wall 6 metre high supports a back fill
with surcharge angle of 10°. The back fill of the wall is
P)
inclined to the vertical at a positive better angle of 5°. If
M
TE
the angle of wall friction is 7°, then the resultant active
,Dr
earth pressure will act at a distance of 2 metre above the
re
tu
ec
base and inclined to the horizontal at an angle of
(L

re
ho
at
A. 7°
R
ep
B. 10°
e
ad
C. 12°
Pr
D. 17°
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 128) Coefficient of Earth pressure at rest is
P)
M
TE
A. Less than active pressure but greater than passive Earth
,Dr
pressure
re
tu
ec
B. Greater than active pressure but less than passive Earth
(L

re
pressure
ho
at
C. Greater than both the active Earth pressure and passive
R
ep
Earth pressure
e
ad
D. Less than both the active and passive Earth pressures

Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 131) Total lateral Earth pressure is proportional to
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Depth of soil
ec
(L
B. Square of depth of soil

re
ho
C. Angle of internal friction of soil
at
D. None of above R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 132) Cohesive soils are
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Good for backfill because of low lateral pressure
ec
(L
B. Good for backfill because of high shear strength

re
ho
C. Poor for backfill because of large lateral pressure
at
eep
ad
Pr
Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 133) Which of the following Earth pressure theories is
M
TE
directly applicable to bulk heads
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Rankine’s theory
(L

re
B. Coulomb‘s theory
ho
at
C. Both
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Stability Number :-
M
This method represents the
TE
,D
result using a
r
re
theoretical number, which is
tu
ec
called the stability number.
(L

re
ho
at
Stability number method
R
ep
used to evaluate
e
ad
slope stability for

Pr
homogeneous soils having

cohesion.
P)
M
Q. 135) For base failure, the depth factor Df is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Zero
ec
(L
B. 1

re
ho
C. 0 < Df < 1
at
D. Df > 1 R
eep
ad
Pr
•Answer D
P)
M
The ratio of the total depth (D+H) to depth H is called the depth factor Df.
TE
For toe failure, Df = 1
,D
For base failure, Df > 1
r
re
tu
ec
1. Face failure occurs when soil above the toe contains weak stratum. In
(L

this case the failure plane intersects the slope above toe.
re
ho
at
2. Toe failure is the most common failure in which failure plane passes
R
ep
through toe of slope.
e
ad
Pr
3. Base failure occurs when there is a weak soil strata under the toe and failure
plane passes through base of slope.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Soil
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(136 to 150)
at
ho
re
(L
Mechanics
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 136) Base failure of finite slope
P)
M
TE
A. Occurs when soil below the level of toe is strong
,Dr
B. Occurs when there is a relatively weak zone in upper part
re
tu
ec
of the slope
(L

re
C. Occurs when the soil below the toe is relatively soft and
ho
at
weak
R
ep
D. Is a most common failure and occurs in relativity steep
e
ad
slopes
Pr
Answer C
1. Infinite Constant slope of infinite extent.
P)
Example:- The long slope of the face of a mountain.
M
TE
2. Finite slopes are limited in extent.
,D
Examples:- The slopes of embankments and earth dams.
r
re
tu
ec
1.Face failure occurs when soil above the toe contains weak stratum. In
(L

re
this case the failure plane intersects the slope above toe.
ho
at
R
2.Toe failure is the most common failure in which failure plane passes
ep
e
through toe of slope.

ad
Pr
3.Base failure occurs when there is a weak soil strata under the toe and
failure plane passes through base of slope.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 137) Bishop’s method of stability analysis
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Is more conservative
tu
ec
B. Neglects the effect of forces acting on the sides of the
(L

re
slices
ho
at
C. Assume the slip surface as an arc of a circle
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
Methods of stability analysis
,Dr
re
tu
1. The Swedish circle method (slip circle method)
ec
(L

2. The friction circle method
re
ho
3. Bishop’s method
at
R
ep
e
Bishop’s took into consideration the forces acting the sides of the
ad
Pr
slices, which were neglected in the Swedish method.

P)
Q. 138) Allowable bearing pressure for a Foundation
M
TE
depends upon
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Allowable settlement only
(L

re
B. Ultimate bearing capacity of soil only
ho
at
C. Both allowable settlement and ultimate bearing capacity
R
ep
D. None of above
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
Allowable bearing pressure:-
r
re
It is the net loading intensity at which neither the soil fails in
tu
ec
shear nor there is excessive settlement.
(L

re
ho
at
Ultimate bearing capacity:-
R
ep
Is defined as the minimum gross pressure intensity as the base of
e
ad
the foundation at which the soil fails in shear.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 140) According to Terzaghi’s theory, the ultimate
bearing capacity at ground surface for a purely cohesive
P)
M
soil and for a smooth base of strip footing is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 2.57C
ec
(L
B. 5.14C

re
ho
C. 5.7C
at
D. 6.2C R
eep
ad
Pr
Where C = unit cohesion of soil

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 141) The net ultimate bearing capacity of a purely
P)
cohesive soil
M
TE
,Dr
A. Depends on width of footing and is independent of
re
tu
ec
depth of footing
(L

re
B. Depends on depth of footing and is independent of
ho
at
width of footing
R
ep
C. Depends on both depth and width of footing
e
ad
D. Is independent of both depth and width of footing

Pr
Pr Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 142) The rise of water table below the foundation
P)
M
influences the bearing capacity of soil mainly by reducing
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Cohesion and effective angle of shearing resistance
ec
(L
B. Cohesion and effective Unit Weight of soil

re
ho
C. Effective Unit Weight of soil and effective angle of
at
shearing resistance R
eep
D. Effective angle of shearing resistance

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 144) Terzahi’s bearing capacity factors Nc, Nf and Ny are
M
TE
functions of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Cohesion only
(L

re
B. Angle of internal friction only
ho
at
C. Both Cohesion and angle of internal friction
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 145) In the plate loading test for determining the
P)
M
bearing capacity of soil, the size of square bearing plate
TE
,D
should be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Less than 300 mm

re
ho
B. Between 300 mm and 750 mm
at
R
C. Between 750 mm and 1 metre
eep
D. Greater than 1 metre

ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
A. Bearing capacity of a soil depends upon the amount and
,Dr
direction of load
re
tu
ec
B. Bearing capacity of soil depends on the type of soil
(L

re
C. Bearing capacity of a soil depends upon shape and size
ho
at
of footing
R
ep
D. Bearing capacity of soil is independent of the rate of
e
ad
loading
Pr
Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 147) A 600 mm square bearing plate settles by 15 mm
in plate load test on a cohesionless soil under an intensity
P)
M
of loading of 0.2 N/mm². The settlement of a prototype
TE
,D
shallow footing 1 metre square under the same intensity
r
re
tu
of loading is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 15 mm
at
B. R
Between 15 mm and 25 mm
ep
e
C. 25 mm
ad
Pr
D. Greater than 25 mm
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 148) A 300 mm square bearing plate settles by 15 mm
in plate load test on a cohesive when the intensity of
P)
M
loading of 0.2 N/mm². The settlement of a prototype
TE
,D
shallow footing 1 metre square under the same intensity
r
re
tu
of loading is
ec
(L

re
ho
A. 15 mm
at
B. 30 mm R
eep
C. 50 mm
ad
Pr
D. 167 mm
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 149) Rise of water table in cohesionless soils upto
P)
M
ground surface reduces the net ultimate bearing capacity
TE
,D
approximately by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 25%

re
ho
B. 50%
at
C. 75% R
ep
e
D. 90%
ad
Pr
Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 150) Contact pressure beneath rigid footing resting on
M
TE
cohesive soil is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Less at edges compared to middle
(L

re
B. More at edges compared to middle
ho
at
C. Uniform throughout
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
The contact pressure for rigid footing is maximum at the edges
,D
for footing on clay, but for rigid footings on sand, it is minimum at the
r
re
edges.
tu
ec
When a rigid footing rests on cohesionless soil, the soil grains at the
(L

outer edge have no lateral restraint, whereas in centre the soil is
re
ho
relatively confined.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
🙏☺
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Soil
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(151 to 160)
at
ho
re
(L
Mechanics
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 151) According to IS specifications, the minimum
P)
M
depths of foundation in sand and clay should be
TE
,D
respectively
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. 600 mm and 700 mm

re
ho
B. 800 mm and 900 mm
at
C. 1 m and 800 mm R
ep
e
D. 1 m and 1.2 m
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
According to IS specifications, the minimum depths of foundation

re
ho
in sand and clay should be respectively 800 mm and 900 mm.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 152) The maximum differential settlement in isolated
M
TE
footings on clayey soils should be limited to
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 25 mm
(L

re
B. 40 mm
ho
at
C. 65 mm
R
ep
D. 100 mm
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
Differential settlement:- When a building's piers or foundation settles
r
re
unequally.
tu
ec
Differential settlement can result in damage to the structure.
(L

Differential settlement occurs when the soil beneath the structure
re
ho
expands, contracts or shifts away.
at
R
ep
The maximum differential settlement in isolated footings on clayey soils
e
ad
should be limited to 40 mm and on sandy soils should be limited to 25

Pr
mm.
Q. 153) A combined footing is generally used when
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Number of columns is more than two and they are
r
re
tu
spaced far apart
ec
(L
B. Number of columns is two and they are spaced close to

re
ho
each other
at
R
C. Number of columns is two and they are spaced far apart
eep
D. There is only one column

ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
Combined footings are constructed for two or more columns when they
M
TE
are close to each other and their foundations overlap.
,D
The function of a footing or a foundation is to transmit the load form the
r
re
structure to the underlying soil.
tu
ec
(L

re
Combined footings are provided only when:-
ho
1. When two columns are close together, causing overlap of adjacent
at
isolated footings R
eep
2. Where soil bearing capacity is low, causing overlap of adjacent isolated

ad
Pr
footings
3. Proximity of building line or existing building or sewer, adjacent to a
building column.
Q. 154) Negative skin friction on a pile
P)
M
TE
A. Acts downward and increases the load carrying capacity
,Dr
of the pile
re
tu
ec
B. Acts upward and increases the load carrying capacity of
(L

re
the pile
ho
at
C. Acts downward and reduces the load carrying capacity
R
ep
of the pile
e
ad
D. Acts upward and reduces the load carrying capacity of

Pr
the pile
Answer C
P)
M
Negative skin friction occurs
TE
,D
when pile or pile group are
r
re
situated in soft soils,
tu
ec
consolidating soil-mass,
(L

re
etc., resulting in a
ho
at
downward force that
R
ep
increases loading on
e
ad
shaft piles and reduces the

Pr
bearing capacity of
the piles.
Q. 155) A single action steam hammer weighing 22.5 kN
P)
and falling through a height of 1.2 m drives a pile. If the
M
TE
final set is 12.5 mm, then according to Engineering News
,Dr
formula
re
tu
ec
(L

re
A. Allowable load for the pile is 300 kN
ho
at
B. Ultimate bearing capacity of the pile is 300 kN
R
ep
C. Allowable load for the pile is 120 kN
e
ad
D. Ultimate bearing capacity of the pile is 120 kN

Pr
Answer A
P)
Engineering News Formula
M
TE
As per the Engineering News formula the allowable load of driven pile is given by:
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L
Where,

re
Qa = Allowable load in kg
ho
at
W = Weight of hammer
h = Height of fall in cms R
ep
e
s = Final settlement per blow known as set

ad
Pr
c = Empirical constant (c = 2.5 cm for drop hammer and 0.25 cm for single acting
and double acting hammer)
F = Factor of safety (Usually taken as 6)
Q. 156) Generally to bearing capacity of a pile group is
P)
M
TE
A. Equal to the sum of bearing capacities of individual piles
,Dr
in case of friction piles
re
tu
ec
B. Equal to the sum of bearing capacities of individual piles
(L

re
in case of end bearing piles
ho
at
C. Less than the sum of bearing capacities of individual
R
ep
piles in case of end bearing piles
e
ad
D. Greater than the sum of bearing capacities of individual

Pr
piles in case of friction or end bearing piles

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Generally center to center spacing between piles in a group is kept
,D
between 2.5 d and 3.5 d, where d is the diameter of the pile
r
re
tu
ec
If piles are spaced sufficient distance apart, then the capacity of pile
(L

group is the sum of the individual capacities of piles in case of end
re
ho
bearing pile.
at
R
ep
However, if the spacing between piles is too close, the zones of stress
e
ad
around the pile will overlap and the ultimate load of the group is less
Pr
than the sum of the individual pile capacities especially in the case of
friction piles, where the efficiency of pile group is much less.
P)
Q. 157) The settlement of a group of friction piles as
M
TE
compared to that of a single pile is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Same
(L

re
B. Less
ho
at
C. More
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer C
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The settlement of a group of friction piles as compared to that of
re
ho
a single pile is more.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
A. Both negative skin friction and skin frictional resistance are
TE
,D
caused by relative settlement of soil
r
re
B. Both negative skin friction and skin frictional resistance are
tu
ec
caused by relative settlement of pile
(L

re
C. Negative skin friction is caused by relative settlement of soil
ho
and skin frictional resistance is caused by the relative settlement
at
of pile R
ep
e
ad
D. Negative skin friction is caused by relative settlement of pile

Pr
and skin frictional resistance is caused by relative settlement of

soil
Answer C
P)
M
Pile capacity comes from skin friction and end bearing.
TE
Most engineers prefer to construct end-bearing piles, extended to the
,D
bedrock. This is the safest type of pile.
r
re
tu
Skin frictional resistance is caused by the relative settlement of pile.
ec
Skin friction in sandy soils is due to friction between the pile surface and
(L

re
the soil.
ho
Skin friction in clay soils is due to adhesion between the pile material and
at
clay. R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Negative skin friction is usually a downward shear drag acting on

a pile or pile group due to downward sinking of surrounding soil relative
to the piles.
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Static formulae are suitable for friction piles driven through
r
re
cohesive soils
tu
ec
B. Dynamic formulae are most suitable for friction piles driven
(L

re
through cohesive soils
ho
C. Dynamic formulae are suitable for friction piles driven through
at
cohesionless soils R
eep
ad
D. Dynamic formula do not take into account the reduced bearing

Pr
capacity of a pile in a group

Answer B
P)
M
The load carrying capacity of a pile can be determined by the following methods
TE
1. Penetration test
,D
2. Dynamic formulae (Engineers News formula and Hiley’s formula)
r
re
3. Static formulae
tu
ec
4. Plate load test
(L

re
ho
When piles are driven through cohesive soils, the skin friction resistance is
at
reduced and the end-bearing resistance is increased. Thus, dynamic formulae do
R
ep
not represent static load capacity for cohesive soils and, hence, are not suitable
e
for such soils.

ad
Pr
Dynamic formulae are best suited to coarse grained soils for which the shear
strength is independent of rate of loading.
P)
Q. 160) Mechanical stabilization of soil is done with the
M
TE
help of
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Cement
(L

re
B. Lime
ho
at
C. Bitumen
R
ep
D. Proper grading
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Soil Stabilization is the alteration of soils to enhance their physical
r
re
tu
properties.
ec
(L
Stabilization can increase the shear strength of a soil and control

re
ho
the shrink-swell properties of a soil, thus improving the load
at
R
bearing capacity of a sub-grade to support pavements and
ep
foundations.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Soil
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(161 to 170)
at
ho
re
(L
Mechanics
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 161) Lime stabilization is very effective in treating
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Sandy soils
ec
(L
B. Silty soils

re
ho
C. Non-plastic soils
at
D. Plastic clayey soils R
e ep
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
M
-Slaked lime is very effective in treating heavy plastic clayey soils.
TE
,D
-Lime may be used alone or in combination with cement,
r
re
bitumen or fly ash.
tu
ec
-Sandy soils can also be stabilized with these combinations.
(L

re
-Lime has been mainly used for stabilizing the road bases and the
ho
at
subgrade.
R
ep
-Plasticity index of highly plastic soils are reduced by the addition
e
ad
of lime with soil.

Pr
-Normally 2 to 8% of lime may be required for coarse grained

soils and 5 to 8% of lime may be required for plastic soils.
P)
M
162) Undisturbed samples are obtained by
TE
,Dr
re
A. Direct excavations
tu
ec
(L
B. Thin-walled samplers

re
ho
C. Thick-walled samplers
at
D. Augers R
eep
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
-The undisturbed soil sample is taken out for testing the
,D
properties in laboratory, without disturbing its structure, texture,
r
re
tu
density, natural water content and stress condition.
ec
-It is very difficult to obtain an undisturbed sample in sandy soil.
(L

re
-It is impossible to obtain a sample that is completely
ho
at
undisturbed.
R
ep
-These kinds of samples are used compute the compressibility,
e
ad
shear strength, and permeability of the soil.

Pr
-The samplers used to get the undisturbed sample are thin walled
sampler (Stationary piston sampler and rotary sampler)
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Stationary piston sampler and rotary sampler are both thick
r
re
walled samplers
tu
ec
B. Stationary piston sampler and rotary sampler are both thin
(L

re
walled samplers
ho
C. Stationary piston sampler is a thick walled sampler and rotary
at
R
sampler is a thin walled sampler
eep
ad
D. Stationary piston sampler is a thin walled sampler and rotary

Pr
sampler is a thick walled sampler

Answer B
P)
M
Thin walled samplers:- Stationary piston sampler and rotary
TE
,D
sampler, for collecting undisturbed soil samples.
r
re
tu
ec
1. Stationary piston sampler is used for sampling soft-to-stiff
(L

re
cohesive soils.
ho
at
R
ep
2. Rotary sampler can be used for stiff-to-hard clays, silts, and
e
ad
sands with some cementation and also in soft rock.

Pr
The sampler is, however, unsuitable for gravelly soils and loose
cohesionless soils.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 165) Greater skin friction
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Retards the sinking of well
ec
(L
B. Accelerates the sinking of well

re
ho
C. Does not affect the sinking of well
at
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Greater skin friction Retards the sinking of well.

Q. 166) The bearing capacity of a strip footing on a
P)
M
saturated clay is 120 kN/m². The bearing capacity of a
TE
,D
circular footing (diameter = width) will be
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. More than 120 kN/m²

re
ho
B. Equal to 120 kN/m²
at
C. Less than 120 kN/m² R
eep
D. Any of the above

ad
Pr
Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Q. 167) A plate load test is useful to estimate
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Bearing capacity of foundation
ec
(L
B. Settlement of foundation

re
ho
C. Both bearing capacity and settlement of foundation
at
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
Plate load test is a field test to determine the ultimate bearing
ec
(L

capacity of the soil and the probable settlement under a given
re
ho
loading.
at
R
ep
The bearing plate used varies in size from 300 to 750 mm

e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 168) The radius of friction circle or φ - circle in friction
M
TE
circle method is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. r
(L

re
B. r sin φ
ho
at
C. r cos φ
R
ep
D. r tan φ
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
TE
,D
The circle giving minimum factor of safety Fc is considered as a
r
re
critical slip circle.
tu
ec
(L

re
Similar to Culmann’s method, the friction circle method also
ho
at
assumes the failure surface as the arc of circle.
R
eep
ad
The friction circle having radius r sin φ is also called as φ-circle.

Pr
P)
M
Q. 169) The largest value of stability number is
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. 0.261
ec
(L
B. 0.5

re
ho
C. 1.0
at
D. 2.0 R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
Stability number method is used to evaluate slope stability for
M
TE
homogeneous soils having cohesion. This method is proposed by the
,D
Taylor.
r
re
It is based on the principle resistance of soil mass against sliding, because
tu
ec
of cohesion and internal friction acting over the failure plane.
(L

re
ho
If Fc is the factor of safety with respect to cohesion, Sn = c / Fc γ H
at
R
The dimensional quantity c / Fc γ H is called as Taylor’s stability number.
ep
e
ad
For purely frictional soil (c = 0), the stability number is zero.

Pr
The maximum value of stability number is 0.261

P)
Q. 170) A shallow foundation is defined as a foundation
M
TE
which
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Has low bearing capacity
(L

re
B. As a depth of embedment less than its width
ho
at
C. Is resting on the ground surface
R
ep
D. Causes less settlement
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer B
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A shallow foundation is defined as a foundation which As a depth

re
ho
of embedment less than its width.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Soil
Pr
ad
e ep
R
(171 to 180)
at
ho
re
(L
Mechanics
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Q. 171) For an anisotropic soil, permeabilities in x and y
P)
M
directions are Kx and Ky respectively in a two dimensional
TE
,D
flow. The effective permeability Keq for the soil is given by
r
re
tu
ec
(L
A. Kx + Ky

re
ho
B. Kx / Ky
at
C. (Kx² + Ky²)1/2 R
eep
D. (Kx.Ky)1/2
ad
Pr
P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Anisotropic soil:- Anisotropic soil does not have the same
r
re
tu
physical properties when the direction of measurement is
ec
(L
changed. ( Kx ≠ Ky ≠ Kz)

re
ho
at
Effective permeability, R
ep
Keff = (Kx.Ky)1/2 ( Two dimensional flow)
e
ad
Pr
Keff = (Kx.Ky.Kz)1/3 (Three dimensional flow)

P)
Q. 172) For sand of uniform spherical particles, the ratio of
M
TE
void ratios in the loosest and the densest states is
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 2.6
(L

re
B. 3.5
ho
at
C. 4.6
R
ep
D. 3.0
e
ad
Pr
Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Void ratio is defined as the void volume to the solids volume
r
re
existing in the soil. It is denoted by the term e.
tu
ec
(L

re
Void ratio in loosest state is 0.91 and
ho
at
Void ratio in densest state is 0.35
R
eep
ad
Ratio of void ratios in the loosest to densest states is = 0.91/0.35

Pr
= 2.6
Q. 173) The description of ‘sandy silty clay’ signifies that
P)
M
TE
A. The soil contains an unequal proportions of the three
,Dr
constituents, in the order sand > silt > clay
re
tu
ec
B. The soil contains equal proportions of sand, silt and clay
(L

re
C. The soil contains unequal proportions of sand, silt and
ho
at
clay
R
ep
D. The soil contains an unequal proportion of the three
e
ad
constituents such that clay > silt > sand

Pr
P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The description of ‘sandy silty clay’ signifies that The soil contains
re
ho
an unequal proportion of the three constituents such that
at
clay > silt > sand R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Q. 174) Increasing the depth of foundation is saturated clays
P)
results in an increased ultimate bearing capacity for strip footings
M
TE
,D
A. Because the bearing capacity factor Ny decreases
r
re
tu
B. Because the bearing capacity factor Nc, increases as the depth
ec
(L
increases

re
ho
C. The term in the bearing capacity equation qNq, increases with
at
depth ep
R
D. Because the angle of internal friction decreases as the depth
e
ad
of foundation increases
Pr
Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Q. 175) A soil having particles of nearly the same size is
M
TE
known as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Well graded
(L

re
B. Uniformly graded
ho
at
C. Poorly graded
R
ep
D. Gap graded
e
ad
Pr
Answer B
P)
M
A. Well Graded soil has particles of wide range of sizes and are distributed
TE
in well manner over the soil gradation curve.
,D
B. Uniformly graded soil has uniform size of particles throughout.
r
re
tu
C. Gap-graded soil is a soil that has an excess or deficiency of certain particle sizes
ec
or a soil that has at least one particle size missing.
(L

D. Uniformly graded and gap graded soils are classified as poorly graded soils.
re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 176) The Unit weight of a soil at zero air voids depends
M
TE
on
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. Specific gravity
(L

re
B. Water content
ho
at
C. Unit weight of water
R
ep
D. All of the above
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
P)
Zero Air Voids:- It means the soil is fully saturated, with the air is not present in
M
the pores of the soil mass.
TE
It is obtained from the compaction test.
,Dr
The graph is plotted for dry density versus water content. The dry density is to be
re
tu
calculated
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
Here,
e
ad
Gs is specific gravity of soil

Pr
Yw unit weight of water

w is water content.
P)
Q. 177) The soils most susceptible to liquefaction are
M
TE
,Dr
re
A. Saturated dense Sands
tu
ec
B. Saturated fine and medium sands of uniform particle
(L

re
size
ho
at
C. Saturated clays of uniform size
R
ep
D. Saturated gravels and cobbles
e
ad
Pr
P)
Answer B
M
TE
,D
Soil liquefaction:- occurs when a saturated fine and medium
r
re
tu
sands of uniform particle size or partially saturated
ec
(L
soil substantially loses strength and stiffness in response to an

re
ho
applied stress such as shaking during an earthquake or other
at
R
sudden change in stress condition, in which material that is
ep
ordinarily a solid behaves like a liquid.

e
ad
Pr
P)
Q. 178) The value of bearing capacity factor for cohesion
M
TE
Nc, for piles as per Meyerhof is taken as
,Dr
re
tu
ec
A. 6.2
(L

re
B. 9.0
ho
at
C. 5.14
R
ep
D. 5.17
e
ad
Pr
P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
The value of bearing capacity factor for cohesion Nc, as per
ec
(L
Meyerhof is taken as

re
ho
1. For strip footing (Or shallow footing) is 5.14
at
R
2. For pile (Or deep footing) is 9.0
eep
ad
Pr
P)
M
Q. 179) The slope of the e-logp curve for a soil mass gives
TE
,Dr
re
tu
A. Coefficient of permeability, k
ec
(L
B. Coefficient of consolidation, Cv

re
ho
C. Compression index, Cc
at
R
D. Coefficient of volume compressibility, mv
ep
e
ad
Pr
Answer C
A. Coefficient Of Permeability (K):- It is the measure of capacity of the soil with which
the water can easily flow through it. It is also termed as Darcy coefficient of
P)
permeability. (K = v/i)
M
Here, v is discharge velocity of water and i is hydraulic gradient.
TE
,D
B. Coefficient of Consolidation (Cv):- is defined as the parameter used to measure
r
the rate at which the saturated clay or soil undergoes consolidation, when they
re
tu
subjected to an increase in the pressure.
ec
They can be measured only in the laboratory. It is denoted by the symbol Cv.
(L

re
C. Compression index (Cc):- The compression index is equal to the slope of the linear
ho
portion of the void ratio versus log p curve
at
R
Cc = -∆e/log10(p/p0) = -∆e/log10(p0+∆p/p0)
ep
where, p0 = initial effective stress, p = final effective stress,∆e = change in void ratio
e
ad
D. Coefficient of volume compresibility (mv):- is defined as the volumetric strain per

Pr
unit increase in effective stress.

mv = (-∆V/V0)/∆p
where, V0 = initial volume, ∆V = change in volume, ∆p = change in effective stress
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

SSC-JE, RRB-JE, AE(State PSC)
P)
M
(181 to 190)
TE
,Dr
re
Soil
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
Mechanics eep
R
at
ad
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
The rigid block foundation is designed to have six degree of
M
freedom. Thus, it means any displacement or movement can be
TE
,D
resolved into six independent displacements which are as
r
re
follows;
tu
ec
(L

re
1. Translation along X-axis
ho
at
2. Translation along Y-axis
R
ep
3. Translation along Z-axis
e
ad
4. Rotation about X-axis

Pr
5. Rotation about Y-axis and

6. Rotation about Z-axis.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Converse Labarre Equation
,D
For calculating the bearing capacity of pile group, load carrying
r
re
tu
capacity of the individual pile need to be multiplied by number of
ec
(L
piles.

re
It must be reduced by the reduction factor, which is termed as
ho
at
efficiency of pile group.
R
ep
It is given using the below formula.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
As particle size
(L

decreases, the surface
re
ho
area per unit volume
at
(or mass) increases. R
e ep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
(191 to 200)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Soil
ec
(L

re
ho
Mechanics at
R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
Well graded coarse-grained soils attain a much higher density
TE
and lower optimum water content than fine grained soils which
,Dr
require more water for lubrication because the greater specific
re
tu
area.
ec
(L

re
ho
The amount of compaction greatly affects the maximum dry
at
R
density and optimum moisture content of given soil. The effect of
ep
e
increasing the compactive energy results is an increase in the

ad
Pr
maximum dry density and decrease in the optimum water

content.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
(201 to 210)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
Soil
ec
(L

re
ho
Mechanics at
R
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
1. Ultimate Bearing Capacity (qu) :- The gross pressure at the base of the
P)
M
foundation at which the soil fails under shear.
TE
,Dr
2. Net Ultimate Bearing Capacity (qnu) :- It is the net increase in pressure
re
tu
at the base of foundation that causes shear failure of the soil.
ec
(L

qnu = qu – y.Df
re
ho
where, y is unit weight of foundation soil and Df is depth of foundation
at
R
ep
3. Net Safe Bearing Capacity (qns) :- It is the net soil pressure which can be
e
ad
safely applied to the soil without shear failure.

Pr
qns = qnu / F
F = factor of safety, which is usually taken as 3
4. Safe Bearing Capacity:- It is the maximum gross pressure which the soil
can carry safely without shear failure. It is equal to the net safe bearing
P)
capacity plus the original overburden pressure
M
qs = qns + yDf
TE
,Dr
re
5. Safe Settlement Pressure:- It is the net pressure which the soil can carry
tu
ec
without exceeding the allowable settlement.
(L

The maximum allowable settlement generally varies between 25 mm and
re
ho
40 mm for individual footing.
at
The net safe settlement pressure is also known as unit soil pressure or
R
ep
safe bearing pressure.
e
ad
Pr
6. Net Allowable Bearing Pressure:- It is the net bearing pressure which

can be used for the design of foundations.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
If the total load (V) on the footing acts eccentricallly (i.e. Line of action of
TE
V not passing through the centre of gravity of the footing area), the width
,Dr
B and length L (= unity in the case of strip footing) should be reduced as
re
tu
under:
ec
(L
B‘ = B – 2ex

re
L’ = L – 2ey
ho
at
R
ep
A’ = B‘ × L’
e
ad
Pr
The area A’ is now such that it’s centroid coincides with the line of action
of V.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
When a rigid footing rests on cohesionless soil, the soil grains at the outer edge
have no lateral restraint, whereas in centre the soil is relatively confined,
P)
M
resulting in a pressure distribution shown in figure.
TE
For the footing on cohesive soils, the edge stresses may be very large.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
1. Pycnometer is used for determination of the specific gravity of soil
particles of both fine grained and coarse grained soils.
P)
M
TE
2. Permeameter is used to determine the permeability.
,D
A. Constant head permeability:- Granular soils like sands and gravels.
r
re
tu
B. Falling head or variable head:- fine grain soil like clay.
ec
(L

re
3. Vane shear test is used to determine the undrained shear strength or
ho
at
cohesion of soils especially soft clays.
R
e ep
4. Pipette :- for grain size.

ad
Pr
5. Sand pouring cylinder equipment which is used to determination of

field density by sand replacement method.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
1. Flow Line:- A line along which a water particle moves through a
permeable soil medium.
P)
M
TE
2. Flow Channel:- Strip between any two adjacent Flow Lines.
,Dr
re
tu
3. Equipotential Lines:- A line along which the potential head at all points
ec
is equal.
(L

re
ho
4. Phreatic line also known as the seepage line or saturation line:-
at
R
The top flow line of a saturated soil mass below which seepage takes
ep
e
place, is called the Phreatic line.

ad
Pr

pressure exists above the phreatic line.
This line separates a saturated soil mass from an unsaturated soil mass.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Merits of Triaxial Test:-
1. There is complete control over the drainage conditions. Test can be
P)
M
easily conducted for all types of drainage conditions.
TE
2. Pore pressure changes and the volumetric changes can be measured
,D
directly.
r
re
tu
3. The stress distribution on the failure plane is uniform.
ec
(L
4. The specimen is free to fail on the weakest plane.

re
5. The state of stress at all intermediate stages upto failure is known. The
ho
at
Mohr circle can be drawn at any stage of shear.
R
ep
e
Demerits of Triaxial Test:-

ad
Pr
1. The apparatus is elaborate, costly and bulky.

2. The drained test takes a longer period as compared with that in a
direct shear test.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

SSC JE, RRBJE, State SSSC JE
AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(211 to 220)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer A
,Dr
re
tu
ec
Seepage pressure:- The pressure exerted by water on soil through
(L

which it percolates is known as seepage pressure.
re
ho
at
R
Effective stress = Total stress – pore water pressure
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,Dr
re
Stratification of soil:- Stratified soils are those soils which are
tu
ec
formed by layer upon layer of the earth or dust deposited on
(L

each other.
re
ho
If the flow is parallel to the layers of stratification, the
at
R
permeability is maximum while the flow in perpendicular
eep
direction occur with minimum permeability.

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
A bearing capacity failure is defined as a foundation failure that
M
TE
occurs when the shear stresses in the soil exceed the shear
,D
strength of the soil.
r
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
A. Hydrometer method is used to determine the particle size distribution
TE
of fine-grained soils (passing 75 µ sieve).
,Dr
re
tu
B. Shrinkage limit is a test that evaluates the water content of a soil where
ec
(L
further loss of moisture will not result in an additional volume reduction.

re
ho
at
C. Consolidation test is used to determine the rate and magnitude of
R
soil consolidation when the soil is restrained laterally and loaded axially.
ep
e
ad
Pr
D. Specific gravity:- The specific gravity of soil is defined as the unit weight
of the soil mass divided by the unit weight of distilled water at 4°C.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
When a rigid footing rests on cohesionless soil, the soil grains at the outer
edge have no lateral restraint, whereas in centre the soil is relatively
P)
M
confined, resulting in a pressure distribution shown in figure.
TE
For the footing on cohesive soils, the edge stresses may be very large.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(221 to 230)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Compression Index:-
P)
is used to find the settlement in the normally consolidated clay.
M
The total stress applied is larger than the stress in the field, to which the
TE
,D
soil sample has been undergone in the past. This kind of clayey soil is said
r
re
to be normally consolidated clay.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Here, the term H is height of the soil, e0 is initial void ratio, increasing
vertical stress and overburden stress.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Piping:- Internal erosion is the formation of voids within a soil caused by
the removal of material by seepage.
P)
M
TE
Quick sand condition or Sand Boiling:- is a condition of flow, not a type of
,D
soil, in which a vertical upward seepage flow causes floating condition of
r
re
tu
a particle in cohesion less soil such as Sand and fine gravel .
ec
(L

re
Liquefaction:- is a phenomenon in which the strength and stiffness of a
ho
at
soil is reduced by earthquake shaking or other sudden change in stress
R
conditions, causing it to behave like a liquid is called soil liquefaction.
ep
e
ad
Pr
Liquefaction is a special case of quicksand. In this case,sudden

earthquake forces immediately increase the pore pressure of shallow
groundwater.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
The particle size distribution curve also known as a gradation curve,
P)
M
represents the distribution of particles of different sizes in the soil mass.
TE
,D
Coefficient of uniformity, Cu = D60 / D10
r
re
tu
ec
(L
Where,

re
D60 = particle size such that 60% of the soil is finer than this size
ho
at
Cu ≥ 6 well graded sands
Cu ≥ 4 well graded gravels R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Coefficient of curvature, Cc = (D30)² / D60 × D10
Cc lies between 1 and 3 for well graded soil

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Factors affecting permeability:-
P)
M
TE
1. Grain size ↑ (Coarse grains > Fine grains)
,D
2. Void ratio ↑
r
re
tu
3. Particle shape → less for angular particles than rounded particles at
ec
(L
the same void ratio.

re
4. Soil structure → More for soils with a flocculent structure.
ho
at
5. Pore fluid properties → Decreases with the increase in viscosity
R
6. Adsorbed water ↓ (in clay) → Fine-grained soils contain a layer of
ep
e
water strongly attached to the particle surface that is known as adsorbed

ad
Pr
water. Adsorbed water is not free to move under gravity and hence
reduces the effective void space available for fluid flow
7. Impurities and foreign matter↓
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
1. Bulk/Wet/Moist/Total unit weight = (G+eS) Yw/(1+e)
P)
M
2. Saturated unit weight, Ysat = (G+e) Yw/(1+e)
TE
,D
3. Dry unit weight, Yd = GYw/(1+e)
r
re
tu
ec
4. Submerged unit weight, Ysub. = (G-1) Yw/(1+e)
(L

re
ho
Archimedes' Principle - states that a body immersed in a fluid is buoyed
at
R
up by a force equal to the weight of the displaced fluid. Consider now a
ep
e
body which sinks in water. This buoyancy is due to a volume of water

ad
Pr
equal to the volume of the submerged solid.

Ysat > Yb > Yd > Ysub
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
1. Thin-wall samplers are the samplers in which the wall thickness of the
sampling tube is less than 2.5% of the diameter.
P)
M
TE
2. Standard Split-Spoon or Split-Barrel Sampler:- It is the most commonly
,D
used sampler for obtaining undisturbed soil samples (saturated sand and
r
re
tu
other soft and wet soil) .
ec
(L

re
3. Stationary piston sampler:- Consist Sampler cylinder and piston system
ho
The stationary piston sampler is used for sampling soft-to-stiff cohesive
at
R
soils. The quality of samples obtained is excellent and the probability of
eep
obtaining a satisfactory undisturbed sample is high.
ad
Pr
4. Rotary Sampler:- Used for collection of undisturbed samples in stiff-to-

hard clays, silts, and sands with some cementation and also in soft rock.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(231 to 240)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
The settlement of a pile or pile group in clay can be computed
,Dr
from the principles of consolidation.
re
tu
ec
(L

Settlement of a pile group is more than the settlement of a
re
ho
single pile, even when the load is the same. This is because
at
R
the pressure bulb of the pile group is deeper than that of
eep
individual piles, causing the compression of a larger volume of
ad
Pr
soil by the pile group.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
1. Vane shear test is used to determine the undrained shear strength of
P)
M
soils especially soft clays.
TE
,D
2. Standard penetration test is the most common and widely used in
r
re
tu
geotechnical investigations for various projects. It is used to determine
ec
(L
the in situ density and angle of shearing resistance of cohesion-less soils

re
and also the strength of cohesive soils.
ho
at
R
3. The static cone penetration test or cone penetration test
ep
e
Useful for End bearing and skin friction resistance.

ad
Pr
4. Pressure meter test is an in-situ testing method used to achieve a quick

measure of the in-situ stress-strain relationship of the soil.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,Dr
Undisturbed Soil Sample:- The undisturbed soil sample is taken
re
tu
ec
out for testing the properties in laboratory, without disturbing its
(L

structure, texture, density, natural water content and stress
re
ho
condition.
at
R
eep
It is very difficult to obtain an undisturbed sample in sandy soil.

ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
The boring methods are used for exploration at greater depths
TE
,D
where direct methods fail.
r
re
These provide both disturbed as well as undisturbed samples
tu
ec
depending upon the method of boring.
(L

re
ho
at
Exploration is to provide reliable, specific and detailed
R
ep
information about the soil and ground water conditions of the
e
ad
site which may be required for a safe economic design execution

Pr
of the engineering work.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
Activity of soil can be defined as ratio of plasticity index to clay
r
re
fraction as percentage.
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Kaolinite < illite < montmorillonite

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(241 to 250)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(251 to 260)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(261 to 270)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D**
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(271 to 280)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer C
M
TE
,D
Compensated raft foundations:-
r
re
tu
Where soil is compressible, raft foundation may be formed
ec
(L

as a compensated foundation.
re
ho
In this case, the raft slab is provided to a depth that the
at
R
weight of the excavated soil is equal to the raft slab weight
ep
e
ad
plus that of the structure to be supported.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
,D
Damping can be defined as the loss of energy within a
r
re
vibrating or a cyclically loaded system, usually dissipated in
tu
ec
the form of heat.
(L

re
The damping ratio is commonly used in geotechnical
ho
at
engineering as a measure for energy dissipation during
ep
R
dynamic or cyclic loading.
e
ad
Pr
Resonance occurs at a frequency ratio of 1.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(281 to 290)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r ,D
TE
M
P)
Maximum at centre and minimum at top and at bottom.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
TE
,Dr
Soil
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Mechanics
ho
at
R
eep
(291 to 300)
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(301 to 310)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
Pore water pressure is defined as the pressure exerted on the soil
TE
particles by water held in pore spaces in soil.
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The zone of soil that is below water table will be fully saturated.
(L

The pressure in the pore is greater than atmospheric pressure.
re
ho
Hence, it is said to be positive pore pressure.
at
R
eep
Above the water table, soil remains unsaturated and pressure in
ad
Pr
pore is lower than the atmospheric pressure. Hence, it is said to

be negative pore pressure.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer C

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C*
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
We can find out the stresses for the rectangular, circular or
M
TE
strip loading using the boussinesq's equation, but
,D
Newmark's influence charts were prepared to calculate
r
re
tu
the stress below an irregular shaped uniformly loaded
ec
(L

areas.
re
ho
at
R
Influence factor = 1 / (No of concentric circle × No of radial lines)
ep
e
ad
Pr
= 1 / ( 10 × 10)
= 0.01
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
A. Friction pile:- pile are driven up to a such depth that frictional
P)
resistance developed at the sides of the piles equals the load
M
TE
coming on the piles.
,D
B. Batter piles:- used to resist large horizontal or inclined forces.
r
re
C. Tension piles or uplift piles:- anchor down the structure
tu
ec
subjected to uplift due to hydrostatic pressure or due to
(L

re
overturning moment.
ho
at
D. Compaction piles:- are used to compact loose granular soil,
R
ep
thus increasing their bearing capacity. The compaction piles
e
ad
themselves don’t carry load. The pile tube, driven to compact the
Pr
soil, is gradually taken out and sand is filled in its place thus
forming a ‘sand pile’.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(311 to 320)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
Flow net is a graphical representation of flow lines and equupotential
M
lines.
TE
,D
Flow lines represent the path of flow along which the water will seep
r
re
through the soil.
tu
ec
Equipotential lines are formed by connecting the points of equal head.
(L

re
ho
Flow net is useful to determine the following parameters in seepage
at
analysis of soil :
R
ep
1. Rate of Seepage loss
e
ad
2. Seepage Pressure and seepage quantity.

Pr
3. Uplift Pressure
4. Exit Gradient
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(321 to 330)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
Negative skin friction is a downward drag acting on a pile due to
TE
the downward movement of the surrounding compressible soil
,Dr
relative to the pile.
re
tu
ec
(L

This happens when the surrounding compressible soil has been
re
ho
recently filled or formed.
at
R
ep
e
It can also occur due to the lowering of the ground water table
ad
Pr
which increases the effective stress, thus causing consolidation of

the soil with the resultant down drag of piles.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(331 to 340)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(341 to 350)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer D
M
TE
,D
For Raft foundation on sand, maximum permissible
r
re
tu
settlement is 40 to 65 mm. The permissible differential
ec
(L

settlement is 25 mm.
re
ho
at
R
For Raft foundation on clay, limiting maximum settlement
eep
ad
65 to 100 mm. Maximum differential settlement 40 mm.

Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Exploration in general should be carried out to a depth
M
TE
upto which the increase in pressure due to structural
,D
loading is likely to cause perceptible settlement or shear
r
re
tu
failure. Such a depth, known as the significant depth.
ec
(L

re
ho
Significant depth upto a level at which the net increase in
at
R
vertical pressure becomes less than 10% of the initial
ep
e
ad
overburden pressure.
Pr
And sometimes may be assumed 1.5 to 2 times the width

(smaller lateral dimension)
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
1. Glaciers:- glaciers are large masses of ice formed by the
P)
compaction of Snow. As the glacier grow and move, they carry
M
TE
with them soils varying in size from fine grained to huge
,D
boulders. Soils get mixed with the ice and are transported far
r
re
away from their original position. Ex. – Drift soil
tu
ec
2. Wind:- Soils deposited by wind are know as aeolian deposit,
(L

re
loess and sand dunes.
ho
at
3. Water:- 1. Lacustrine Soils – Deposited in still water (Lake).
R
ep
2. Alluvial soil – Transported by running water (River and stream).
e
ad
3. Marine Soils – Deposited in sea/ocean beds.

Pr
4. Gravity:- Deposited in the lower part of the mountains, ex.

Colluvial Soils/Talus
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
M
TE
Aeolian soils are deposited by wind.
,D
It consist of uniformly graded particles.
r
re
tu
The void ratio and permeability of soil are high.
ec
(L

They are non-plastic and can withstand deep vertical cuts
re
ho
due to slight cementation between particles.
at
R
These soils have high compressibility and density is low in
ep
e
ad
natural states.
Pr
Example:- Fine sand in dunes, loess.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(351 to 360)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
eep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer B

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(361 to 370)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

Pore water pressure decreases with consolidation and
re
ho
effective stress is maximum at the end of consolidation.
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C
,Dr
re
tu
ec
In Newmark’s chart each annular area will have same
(L

re
influence value. Therefore both area 1 and 2 will
ho
at
produce same intensity of pressure.
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(371 to 380)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
A. The Plate Bearing Test or Plate Loading Test:-
M
is an in situ load bearing test of soil used for determining the
TE
,D
ultimate bearing capacity of the ground and settlement under a
r
re
given load.
tu
ec
(L

re
D. Dynamic cone penetration test (DCPT) :-
ho
at
The cone is then driven into the soil by allowing a 65 kg hammer
R
ep
to fall freely through a height of 750 mm each time. The number
e
ad
of blows per every 100 mm penetration of the cone is noted. The

Pr
process is repeated for three consecutive 100 mm penetration

and the sum of number of blows is recorded as DCPT value (Ncd).
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
1. Relative density or density index:-
P)
= (emax – e) / (emax-emin)
M
TE
,D
Relative compaction:- The dry density of soil in the field
r
re
expressed as a percentage of the density of the soil after it has
tu
ec
been subjected to a standard amount of compaction.
(L

re
3. Zero Air Voids.
ho
at
It means the soil is fully saturated,
R
ep
with the air is not present in the
e
ad
pores of the soil mass.

Pr
Zero air void line and 100%

saturation line are identical
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Flow net is a graphical representation of flow of water through a
soil mass.
P)
M
Flow lines represent the path of flow along which the water will
TE
seep through the soil.
,Dr
re
Equipotential lines are formed by connecting the points of equal
tu
ec
total head.
(L

re
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr
Properties of flow net are as follows:
1. The angle of intersection between each flow line and an equipotential
line must be 90o which means they should be orthogonal to each other.
P)
M
TE
2. Two flow lines or two equipotential lines can never cross each other.
,Dr
re
tu
3. Equal quantity of seepage occurs in each flow channel.
ec
A flow channel is a space between two flow lines.
(L

re
ho
4. Head loss is the same between two adjacent potential lines.
at
R
ep
e
5. Flow nets are drawn based on the boundary conditions only. They are
ad
Pr
independent of the permeability of soil and the head causing flow.

6. The space formed between two flow lines and two equipotential lines
is called a flow field. It should be in a square form.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(381 to 390)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
The top flow line of a saturated soil mass below which seepage takes
M
place, is called the Phreatic line.
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
pressure exists above the phreatic line.
(L

re
ho
This line separates a saturated soil mass from an unsaturated soil mass.
at
R
ep
Phreatic line is not an equipotential line, but a flow line.
e
ad
Pr
For an earthen dam, the phreatic line approximately assumes

the shape of a parabola.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
1. Active pressure: when retaining wall is moving away from soil.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. Passive pressure: when retaining wall is moving against soil.
ho
at
R
ep
3. At rest pressure: when retaining wall at rest.
e
ad
Pr
Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
Depending on the
M
stiffness of foundation
TE
,D
soil and depth of
r
re
foundation, the following
tu
ec
are the modes of shear
(L

re
failure experienced by
ho
at
the foundation soil.
R
ep
e
ad
a. General shear failure

Pr
b. Local shear failure

c. Punching shear failure
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
Frictional Piles works on the static friction developed between
,Dr
the surface of the pile and soil where it is placed.
re
tu
End-Bearing Piles are driven till hard strata of soil is achieved.
ec
(L

re
ho
The Indian Road Congress specifies a minimum spacing of 3D or a
at
R
distance equal to pile perimeter for the friction piles.
eep
In the case of end bearing piles, the space between the piles that
ad
Pr
are placed adjacent must not be less than least width of the pile.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(391 to 400)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Standard Penetration Test:-
r
re
SPT is a common in situ testing
tu
ec
method used to determine the geotechnical engineering
(L

re
properties of subsurface soils.
ho
at
It is a simple and inexpensive test to estimate the relative
R
ep
density of soils and approximate shear strength
e
ad
Pr
parameters.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Void ratio, e > 0
r
re
tu
ec
B. Porosity, 1 > n > 0
(L

re
ho
at
C. Degree of saturation, 1 ≥ S ≥ 0
ep
R
e
ad
Pr
D. Water content, w ≥ 0
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(401 to 409)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer B
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
1. Initial consolidation or elastic compression due to
M
TE
expulsion of pore air or rapid dissipation of pore water
,D
with application of stress. This is significant in non-
r
re
tu
saturated clays, silts and granular soils.
ec
(L

re
ho
2. Primary consolidation due to slow expulsion of excess
at
R
pore pressure over a period of time.
ep
e
ad
Pr
3. Secondary consolidation due to viscous layer around

particles resulting in rearrangement of particles.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer B
,Dr
re
tu
According to IS code, the ratio of bearing resistance for
ec
(L

double under-reamed pile to that of single under-reamed
re
ho
pile is 1.5 for sandy and clayey soils including black cotton
at
soils. R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(410 to 420)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
,D
A. Expansive soils are soils that expand when water is
r
re
added, and shrink when they dry out.
tu
ec
Black cotton soil exhibits large swelling and shrinkage due
(L

re
to presence of the Montmorillonite mineral.
ho
at
R
ep
B. If the products of rock weathering are still present at the
e
ad
Pr
place of origin, the soil is called Residual soil.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
1. The total vertical stress acting at a point below the ground
M
surface is due to the weight of everything lying above: soil, water,
TE
,D
and surface loading.
r
re
Total stresses are calculated from the unit weight of the soil.
tu
ec
2. The water in the pores of a soil is called porewater. The
(L

re
pressure within this porewater is called pore pressure (u). The
ho
at
magnitude of pore pressure depends on:the depth below the
R
ep
Water table.
e
ad
3. The difference between the total stress and the pore pressure
Pr
is called the effective stress:

effective stress = total stress – pore water pressure
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
P)
M
TE
Assumptions of Boussinesq theory:-
,Dr
1. For soil, the soil mass is elastic, isotropic, homogeneous and
re
tu
ec
semi-infinite.
(L

2. The soil is weightless.
re
ho
3. For load, the load is vertical, concentrated acting on the
at
surface. R
eep
4. Hook’s Low Applied, it is mean that the constant ratio between
ad
Pr
stress and strain.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer B
TE
,Dr
re
Plate load test is a field test, which is performed to determine the
tu
ec
ultimate bearing capacity of soil and the probable settlement
(L

re
under a given load.
ho
at
This test is very popular for selection and design of shallow
R
ep
foundation.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)
Answer A

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
P)
M
TE
A. Terzaghi‘s bearing capacity theory is for general shear failure.
,D
While the load capacity of piles is sum of shaft resistance
r
re
(friction) and end bearing resistance.
tu
ec
(L

re
R. This self adjusting phenomenon is called mobilization of shear
ho
at
stress. The amount of shear stress/resistance developed due to
R
ep
the load in order to resist the deformation for all the loads less
e
ad
than the maximum possible load (failure) is called mobilization

Pr
shear strength.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
The bearing capacity of under-reamed pile is more than driven or
bored pile of the same diameter.
P)
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
ho
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
AE (State PSC)
M
TE
,D
(421 to 430)
r
re
tu
ec
Soil
(L

re
ho
at
R
Mechanics
eep
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
Answer C*
,Dr
re
tu
ec
The pore pressure prevents the compression of the soil.
(L

re
Pore water pressure is known as neutral pressure because
ho
at
it cannot resist shear stress.
R
eep
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer A
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
When the rate of consolidation of filled up soil or weak soil
tu
ec
is more than the rate of settlement of pile, a downward
(L

re
drag force acts on the pile. This is called negative skin
ho
at
friction and reduces load carrying capacity of pile. It should
R
ep
be considered in the design of pile foundation.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
Answer A
M
TE
,D
Constant head permeability test is used for coarse grained
r
re
tu
soil and not for fine-grained soils, because the discharge
ec
(L

through the fine soils will be very small.
re
ho
at
R
For fine-grained soil, variable or falling head permeability
eep
ad
test is used.
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
A. The failure plane in the test is predetermined
tu
ec
(horizontal), which may not be the weakest one.
(L

re
ho
at
R. Normal stress is in vertical direction and shear stress is
R
ep
applied in horizontal direction.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer A
r
re
tu
ec
(L

With the increase of overburden pressure with increasing
re
ho
depth, the N value also increase.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer C
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer C
TE
,Dr
re
The structure of soil changes from flocculated (attraction
tu
ec
force) to dispersed (repulsive force) as the moisture
(L

re
content increases up to optimum moisture content.
ho
at
In this case the permeability decreases and dry density
R
ep
increases due to change of structure.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
TE
,D
Answer D
r
re
tu
ec
(L

The pore water pressure parameter B is equal to one for
re
ho
fully saturated soil.
at
R
ep
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer D
P)
M
TE
,D
Wash boring gives unrepresentative and disturbed soil
r
re
sample which are almost valueless for interpreting the
tu
ec
correct geotechnical properties of soil. Wash boring is
(L

re
commonly used for exploration below ground water table
ho
at
for which auger method is unsuitable. This method can be
R
ep
used in all kinds of soils except those mixed with gravel
e
ad
Pr
and boulders.
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
🙏☺
r,D
TE
M
P)

AE (State PSC)
P)
M
(431 to 438)
TE
Last Part
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
Soil
ho
at
R
ep
Mechanics
e
ad
Pr
-By Pradeep Rathore

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Answer B
P)
1. Initial consolidation or elastic compression due to expulsion of
M
TE
pore air or rapid dissipation of pore water with application of
,D
stress. This is significant in non-saturated clays, silts and granular
r
re
soils.
tu
ec
(L

re
2. Primary consolidation due to slow expulsion of excess pore
ho
at
pressure over a period of time.
R
ep
e
ad
3. Secondary consolidation due to viscous layer around particles

Pr
resulting in rearrangement of particles or some other reasons.

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer C
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer D
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer A
TE
,Dr
re
Soil Stabilization is the alteration of soils to enhance their
tu
ec
physical properties. Stabilization can increase the shear
(L

re
strength of a soil and/or control the shrink-swell properties
ho
at
of a soil, thus improving the load bearing capacity of a sub-
R
ep
grade to support pavements and foundations.
e
ad
Pr
Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
Answer A
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

Pr
ad
e ep
R
at
ho
re
(L
ec
tu
re
r,D
TE
M
P)

P)
M
Answer D
TE
,Dr
re
Quicksand condition Or Sand Boiling is the floatation of
tu
ec
particles of cohesionless soil, like fine gravel and sand, due
(L

re
to vertical upward seepage flow.
ho
at
As sand boiling occurs, the bearing capacity and shear
R
ep
strength of the cohesionless soil decrease.
e
ad
Pr
P)
The End
M
TE
,Dr
re
tu
ec
(L

re
🙏☺
ho
at
R
eep
ad
Pr

Gupta - Gupta Civil Complete Solution

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gupta - Gupta Civil Complete Solution

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SSC-JE, RRB-JE, State SSSC-JE,

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

-By Pradeep Rathore

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

1 Stokes = 0.01 cm²/sec = 0.0001 m²/s

D. Surface tension:- SI unit is Newton/m and CGS unit is dyne/cm .

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Thus viscosity increases with increases in temperature for gases.

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

2. A fluid which obeys Newton’s law of

viscosity is termed as Newtonian fluid.

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

2. In general, surface tension decreases when temperature

increases because cohesive forces decrease with an increase of

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Given, 1 Kilo Pascal = ? = 10³ N/m²

Like, Comment, Share and Subscribe

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

-By Pradeep Rathore

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Due to the pressure of cohesion and adhesion which cause the

liquid to work against gravity.

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Like, Comment, Share and Subscribe

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)

-By Pradeep Rathore

Pradeep Rathore (Lecturer, DTE MP)